Table of Contents
As filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission on March 23, 2012
Registration No. 333-175299

 
UNITED STATES
SECURITIES AND EXCHANGE COMMISSION
Washington, D.C. 20549

AMENDMENT NO. 3
TO
FORM S-1
REGISTRATION STATEMENT
UNDER
THE SECURITIES ACT OF 1933

TILLY’S, INC.
(Exact name of registrant as specified in its charter)

 
 	 	 	 	 	
Delaware	 	5600	 	45-2164791	
(State or other jurisdiction of
incorporation or organization)	 	(Primary Standard Industrial
Classification Code Number)	 	(I.R.S. Employer
Identification Number)	

10 Whatney
Irvine, California 92618
(949) 609-5599
(Address, including zip code, and telephone number, including area code, of registrant’s principal executive offices)

Daniel Griesemer
President and Chief Executive Officer
Tilly’s, Inc.
10 Whatney
Irvine, California 92618
(949) 609-5599
(Name, address, including zip code, and telephone number, including area code, of agent for service)

Copies to:

Cary K. Hyden, Esq.
Michael A. Treska, Esq.
Latham & Watkins LLP
650 Town Center Drive, 20th Floor
Costa Mesa, California 92626	 	Patrick Grosso, Esq.
Vice President, General Counsel & Secretary
Tilly’s, Inc.
10 Whatney
Irvine, California 92618	 	Robert E. Buckholz, Esq.
Patrick S. Brown, Esq.
Sullivan & Cromwell LLP
125 Broad Street
New York, New York 10004	

Approximate date of commencement of proposed sale to the public:
As soon as practicable after the effective date of this registration statement.

If any of the securities being registered on this form are to be offered on a delayed or continuous basis pursuant to Rule 415 under the Securities Act of 1933, check the following box.   ¨
If this form is filed to register additional securities for an offering pursuant to Rule 462(b) under the Securities Act, check the following box and list the Securities Act registration statement number of the earlier effective registration statement for the same offering.   ¨
If this form is a post-effective amendment filed pursuant to Rule 462(c) under the Securities Act, check the following box and list the Securities Act registration statement number of the earlier effective registration statement for the same offering.   ¨
If this form is a post-effective amendment filed pursuant to Rule 462(d) under the Securities Act, check the following box and list the Securities Act registration number of the earlier effective registration statement for the same offering.   ¨
Indicate by check mark whether the registrant is a large accelerated filer, an accelerated filer, a non-accelerated filer, or a smaller reporting company. See the definitions of “large accelerated filer,” “accelerated filer” and “smaller reporting company” in Rule 12b-2 of the Exchange Act. (Check one):

Large accelerated filer	 	  ¨	  	Accelerated filer	 	  ¨	
 	 	 	 	
Non-accelerated filer	 	  þ  (Do not check if a smaller reporting company)	  	Smaller reporting company	 	  ¨	

CALCULATION OF REGISTRATION FEE

 	
Title of each class
of securities to be registered	 	Proposed maximum
aggregate offering price(1)	 	Amount of
registration fee(2)	
Class A Common Stock, $0.001 par value per share	 	$100,000,000	 	$11,610	
 	
(1)	Estimated solely for the purpose of calculating the amount of the registration fee in accordance with Rule 457(o) under the Securities Act of 1933, as amended.	
(2)	Previously paid on June 29, 2011.	

The Registrant hereby amends this Registration Statement on such date or dates as may be necessary to delay its effective date until the Registrant shall file a further amendment which specifically states that this Registration Statement shall thereafter become effective in accordance with Section 8(a) of the Securities Act of 1933, or until the Registration Statement shall become effective on such date as the Securities and Exchange Commission, acting pursuant to said Section 8(a), may determine.

 

Table of Contents
The information in this preliminary prospectus is not complete and may be changed. We may not sell these securities until the registration statement filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission is effective. This preliminary prospectus is not an offer to sell these securities and it is not soliciting an offer to buy these securities in any state where the offer or sale is not permitted.
 
Subject to Completion, dated March 23, 2012
             Shares

Class A Common Stock

This is an initial public offering in which we are selling                      shares of Class A common stock of Tilly’s, Inc.
Following this offering, we will have two classes of authorized common stock, Class A common stock and Class B common stock. The rights of the holders of Class A common stock and Class B common stock are identical, except with respect to voting and conversion. Each share of Class A common stock is entitled to one vote per share. Each share of Class B common stock is entitled to 10 votes per share and is convertible into one share of Class A common stock upon the occurrence of certain events. Upon completion of this offering, holders of our Class B common stock will control common stock representing    % of the total voting power of our common stock.
We expect the public offering price to be between $             and $             per share. Currently, no public market exists for the Class A common stock. After pricing of the offering, we expect that the Class A common stock will trade on the New York Stock Exchange under the symbol “TLYS”.

Investing in our Class A common stock involves risks that are described in the “Risk Factors” section beginning on page 11 of this prospectus.

Neither the Securities and Exchange Commission nor any state securities commission has approved or disapproved of these securities or determined if this prospectus is truthful or complete. Any representation to the contrary is a criminal offense.

 
 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	
 	  	Per Share	 	  	Total	 	
 	 	 	
Initial public offering price	  	$	            	  	  	$	                	  	
Underwriting discount	  	$	 	  	  	$	 	  	
Proceeds, before expenses, to us	  	$	 	  	  	$	 	  	
The underwriters have agreed to reimburse us for a portion of our out-of-pocket expenses in connection with this offering. See “Underwriting”.
To the extent that the underwriters sell more than              shares of Class A common stock, the underwriters have the option to purchase up to an additional              shares of Class A common stock from us at the initial public offering price, less the underwriting discount.

The underwriters expect to deliver the shares of Class A common stock against payment in New York, New York on or about                     , 2012.

Goldman, Sachs & Co.	 	BofA Merrill Lynch	 	 	Piper Jaffray	  	

William Blair & Company	 	Stifel Nicolaus Weisel	

Prospectus dated                     , 2012.

Table of Contents

Table of Contents
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Prospectus

 	  	Page	 	
Prospectus Summary	  	 	1	  	
Risk Factors	  	 	11	  	
Forward-Looking Statements	  	 	28	  	
Use of Proceeds	  	 	30	  	
Dividend Policy	  	 	31	  	
Capitalization	  	 	32	  	
Dilution	  	 	34	  	
Selected Consolidated Financial and Other Data	  	 	35	  	
Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations	  	 	37	  	
Business	  	 	61	  	
Management	  	 	75	  	
Executive Compensation	  	 	83	  	
Related Party Transactions	  	 	102	  	
Principal Stockholders	  	 	107	  	
Description of Capital Stock	  	 	109	  	
Shares Eligible for Future Sale	  	 	115	  	
Material U.S. Federal Income Tax Consequences to Non-U.S. Holders of our Class A Common Stock	  	 	117	  	
Underwriting	  	 	121	  	
Legal Matters	  	 	126	  	
Experts	  	 	126	  	
Where You Can Find Additional Information	  	 	126	  	
Index to Financial Statements	  	 	F-1	  	

Through and including                      (the 25th day after the date of this prospectus), all dealers effecting transactions in these securities, whether or not participating in this offering, may be required to deliver a prospectus. This is in addition to a dealer’s obligation to deliver a prospectus when acting as an underwriter and with respect to an unsold allotment or subscription.

You should rely only on the information contained in this prospectus or any free writing prospectus filed with the U.S. Securities and Exchange Commission, or SEC. We have not, and the underwriters have not, authorized any other person to provide you with different information. We and the underwriters take no responsibility for, and can provide no assurance as to the reliability of, any other information that others may give you. Neither this prospectus nor any free writing prospectus is an offer to sell, nor is it seeking an offer to buy, these securities in any jurisdiction where the offer or sale is not permitted. The information in this prospectus is complete and accurate only as of the date on the front cover, regardless of its time of delivery or of any sale of shares of our common stock. The information may have changed since that date.
Persons who come into possession of this prospectus and any such free writing prospectus in jurisdictions outside the U.S. are required to inform themselves about and to observe any restrictions as to this offering and the distribution of this prospectus and any such free writing prospectus applicable to that jurisdiction.
 
i

Table of Contents
 
Basis of Presentation
We operate on a fiscal calendar which results in a 52- or 53-week fiscal year ending on the Saturday closest to January 31st. The reporting periods contained in our financial statements included in this prospectus contain:
 
 	•	 	52 weeks of operations in fiscal year 2007, which ended on February 2, 2008;	
 
 	•	 	52 weeks of operations in fiscal year 2008, which ended on January 31, 2009;	
 
 	•	 	52 weeks of operations in fiscal year 2009, which ended on January 30, 2010;	
 
 	•	 	52 weeks of operations in fiscal year 2010, which ended on January 29, 2011; and	
 
 	•	 	52 weeks of operations in fiscal year 2011, which ended on January 28, 2012.	
Fiscal years are identified in this prospectus according to the calendar year prior to the calendar year in which they ended. For example, references to “2011”, “fiscal 2011”, “fiscal year 2011” or similar references refer to the fiscal year ended January 28, 2012.
Tilly’s, Inc., the issuer of the Class A common stock to be sold in this offering, is a Delaware corporation that was incorporated in May 2011. Tilly’s, Inc. was formed solely for the purpose of reorganizing the corporate structure of World of Jeans & Tops, a California corporation. Pursuant to a reorganization transaction that we will effect prior to the completion of this offering, referred to as the Reorganization Transaction, World of Jeans & Tops will become a wholly owned subsidiary of Tilly’s, Inc. In connection with the Reorganization Transaction, the shareholders of World of Jeans & Tops will contribute all of their equity interests in that corporation to Tilly’s, Inc. in return for shares of Tilly’s, Inc. Class B common stock on a one-for-one basis. Prior to the completion of the Reorganization Transaction, Tilly’s, Inc. has not conducted any activities other than those incidental to its formation and the preparation of this prospectus. Accordingly, our consolidated financial statements and other financial information included in this prospectus as of dates and for periods prior to the date of the Reorganization Transaction reflect the results of operations and financial position of World of Jeans & Tops. Our consolidated financial information, if any, as of dates and for periods from and after the date of the Reorganization Transaction reflect the results of operations and financial condition of Tilly’s, Inc. and its wholly owned subsidiary, unless otherwise expressly stated.

Market and Industry Data
We obtained the industry, market and competitive position data throughout this prospectus from our own internal estimates and research, as well as from industry and general publications and research, surveys and studies conducted by third parties. Industry publications, studies and surveys generally state that they have been obtained from sources believed to be reliable, although they do not guarantee the accuracy or completeness of such information. While we believe that each of these studies and publications is reliable, we have not independently verified market and industry data from third-party sources. While we believe our internal company research is reliable and the definitions of our market and industry are appropriate, neither this research nor these definitions have been verified by any independent source.

 
ii

Table of Contents
PROSPECTUS SUMMARY
This summary highlights selected information contained in greater detail elsewhere in this prospectus and does not contain all of the information that you should consider before investing in our Class A common stock. You should carefully read the following summary together with the more detailed information regarding us and our Class A common stock being sold in this offering, including “Risk Factors” and our financial statements and the accompanying notes, appearing elsewhere in this prospectus before making an investment decision. As used in this prospectus, except where the context otherwise requires or where otherwise indicated, the terms “company”, “World of Jeans & Tops”, “we”, “our”, “us” and “Tilly’s” refer to Tilly’s, Inc. and its subsidiary after the Reorganization Transaction.
Overview
Tilly’s is a fast-growing destination specialty retailer of West Coast inspired apparel, footwear and accessories. We believe we bring together an unparalleled selection of the most sought-after brands rooted in action sports, music, art and fashion. Our stores are designed to be a seamless extension of our teen and young adult consumers’ lifestyles with a balance of guys’ and juniors’ merchandise in a stimulating environment. We believe our success across a variety of real estate venues and geographies in the United States demonstrates Tilly’s portability. Our motto “If it’s not here…it’s not happening” exemplifies our goal to serve as a destination for the latest, most relevant merchandise and brands important to our customers.
As of January 28, 2012, we operated 140 stores in 14 states, averaging approximately 7,800 square feet. We also sell our products through our e-commerce website, www.tillys.com. Our business is characterized by the following key elements:
 
 	•	 	Extensive assortment of relevant merchandise in a larger store format. Our larger stores allow us to carry a more extensive selection of the most relevant, established and emerging brands and offer a greater assortment of apparel styles, sizes and price points across multiple categories. This broad selection enhances our ability to rapidly identify and respond to trends and consistently offer our customers both proven fashion items and core styles. We strive to keep our merchandising mix current by introducing additional brands and styles in response to the ever-evolving desires of our customers.	
 
 	•	 	The Tilly’s experience. Tilly’s is a customer-driven lifestyle brand. We are energized and inspired by our customers’ individuality and passion for action sports, music, art and fashion. Our stores bring these interests together in a vibrant, stimulating and authentic environment that is an extension of our customers’ high velocity, multitasking lifestyle. We do this by blending the most relevant brands and styles with music videos, product-related visuals and a dedicated team of store associates. We believe the Tilly’s experience drives customer awareness, loyalty and repeat visits while generating a buzz and excitement for our brand.	
 
 	•	 	Flexible real estate strategy across real estate venues and geographies. We currently operate stores in 40 markets in 14 states across a variety of real estate venues including malls, power centers, neighborhood and lifestyle centers, outlet centers and street-front locations. Our geographic portability and real estate flexibility provide us with a wider scope of opportunities and enhance our ability to open new stores.	
Our West Coast heritage dates back to 1982 when our founders, Hezy Shaked and Tilly Levine, opened our first store in Orange County, California. Over the last five years, we have demonstrated an ability to grow rapidly, having more than doubled our store count while entering 29 new markets. During this same period, we invested over $20 million in infrastructure and systems to support our recent and long-term growth. We believe our team’s passion for the West Coast inspired and action sports lifestyle, sense of urgency and pursuit of

1

Table of Contents
excellence enables Tilly’s to consistently deliver a superior customer experience and positions us to successfully execute our long-term growth strategy. In fiscal 2011, we increased net sales to $400.6 million from $332.6 million in fiscal 2010, or 20%, and we increased operating income to $34.9 million from $24.9 million in fiscal 2010, or 40%. Our comparable store sales increased 10.7% in fiscal year 2011 after a 6.7% increase in fiscal year 2010.
Competitive Strengths
We believe that the following competitive strengths contribute to our success and distinguish us from our competitors:
 
 	•	 	Destination retailer with a broad, relevant assortment. We believe the combined depth and breadth of apparel, footwear and accessories offered at our stores exceeds the selection offered at many other specialty retailers. We strive to bring together proven fashion trends, core styles and a vibrant in-store experience that is engaging for our core customers. We believe that our differentiated in-store environment, evolving selection of relevant brands and broader and deeper assortment positions us as a retail destination that appeals to a larger demographic than many other specialty retailers and encourages customers to visit our stores more frequently and spend more on each trip.	
 
 	•	 	Dynamic merchandise model. We believe our extensive selection of third-party and proprietary merchandise allows us to identify and address trends more quickly, offer a greater range of price points and manage our inventories more dynamically. By closely monitoring trends and shipping product to our stores five times per week, we adjust our merchandise mix with a frequency that promotes a current look to our stores and encourages frequent visits.	
 
 	•	 	Flexible real estate strategy across real estate venues and geographies. Our stores have proven to be successful in different real estate venues and geographies. We operate profitable stores in malls, power centers, neighborhood and lifestyle centers, outlet centers and street-front locations across 40 markets in 14 states. We believe our success operating in these different retail venues and geographies demonstrates the portability of Tilly’s and provides us with greater flexibility for future expansion.	
 
 	•	 	Multi-pronged marketing approach. We utilize a multi-pronged marketing strategy to connect with our customers and drive traffic to our stores and website, including our catalog, in-store events and contests, social media and grass roots community programs. These initiatives are complemented by email marketing as well as traditional radio and print advertising to build customer awareness and loyalty, highlight key merchandise offerings, drive traffic to our stores and website and promote the Tilly’s brand.	
 
 	•	 	Sophisticated systems and distribution infrastructure to support growth. Over the last five years we have invested over $20 million in our highly automated distribution center and information systems to support our future growth. We believe our distribution and allocation capabilities are unique within the industry and can support a national retail footprint in excess of 500 stores with minimal incremental capital investment.	
 
 	•	 	Experienced management team. Our senior management team, led by Hezy Shaked and Daniel Griesemer, has extensive experience across a wide range of disciplines in the specialty retail and direct-to-consumer industries, including store operations, merchandising, distribution, real estate and finance.	

2

Table of Contents
Our Growth Strategy
We are pursuing several strategies to continue our profitable growth, including:
 
 	•	 	Expand Our Store Base. We believe there is a significant opportunity to expand our store base over the next 10 years from 140 locations as of January 28, 2012 to more than 500 stores across the United States. We plan to add at least 21 net new stores in fiscal year 2012 and to continue opening new stores at an annual rate of approximately 15% for the next several years thereafter. Our stores generate compelling economics. We expect net sales of approximately $2.2 million and cash flow of $300,000 from an average new store in its first 12 months, with growth to over $400,000 in cash flow in the second 12-month period as the store begins to mature. This produces a cash-on-cash payback period of approximately 18 months based on a target net investment to open new stores of $500,000 to $550,000.	
 
 	•	 	Drive Comparable Store Sales. We seek to maximize our comparable store sales by consistently offering new, on-trend and relevant merchandise across a broad assortment of categories, increasing our brand awareness through our multi-pronged marketing approach, providing an authentic store experience for our core customers and maintaining our high level of customer service. We believe our comparable store sales will benefit as stores opened in the last few years continue to mature and we continue to build brand awareness in new markets.	
 
 	•	 	Grow Our e-Commerce Platform. We believe our e-commerce platform is an extension of our brand and retail stores, providing our customers with a seamless shopping experience. We believe we can grow our e-commerce platform by continuing our successful catalog and online marketing efforts, offering a wider selection of internet-exclusive merchandise and expanding our online selection to ensure a broad and diverse offering of brands and products relative to our competition. We also believe we will see continued growth in our e-commerce sales as we open additional stores and build brand awareness in the communities surrounding those locations. In fiscal 2011, e-commerce sales increased 33% and represented approximately 11% of our total net sales. We believe e-commerce sales will continue to outpace our total sales growth and reach 15% of net sales over time.	
 
 	•	 	Increase Our Operating Margins. We believe we have the opportunity to drive margin expansion through scale efficiencies and continued process improvements focused on lowering our costs per unit and improving operational efficiency throughout our organization as we leverage our occupancy, buying, distribution and support staff costs, as well as systems, distribution facilities and corporate facilities costs over a greater sales base. In addition, we expect to improve margins and support growth by leveraging ongoing investments in infrastructure, including the opening of a dedicated distribution center for our e-commerce store and continuing upgrades to our point-of-sale, merchandise allocation and merchandise planning systems, as well as related work processes.	
Risk Factors
There are a number of risks and uncertainties that may affect our financial and operating performance and our growth prospects. You should carefully consider all of the risks discussed in “Risk Factors”, which begins on page 11, before investing in our Class A common stock. These risks include, but are not limited to, the following:
 
 	•	 	we may not be able to identify and respond to changing customer preferences and fashion-related trends;	
 
 	•	 	we may face intense competition and we may not be able to compete effectively;	
 
 	•	 	we could be negatively impacted by changes in consumer confidence and spending;	
 
 	•	 	we have expanded rapidly in recent years and we may not be able to effectively manage our operations or our future growth;	

3

Table of Contents
 	•	 	we may not be able to execute on our growth strategy if we are unable to locate suitable locations or attract customers to our stores;	
 
 	•	 	we may not be able to successfully expand into new geographic markets in the United States;	
 
 	•	 	we may not be able to maintain and enhance our brand image, particularly in new markets;	
 
 	•	 	our operating results fluctuate on a quarterly basis due to the seasonal nature of our business; and	
 
 	•	 	we rely on key relationships with our suppliers and we may not be able to maintain or add to these relationships or obtain sufficient inventory to support our growth.	
Corporate Information
Tilly’s, Inc. was incorporated in Delaware in May 2011. We are a holding company, and all of our business operations are conducted through World of Jeans & Tops, a California corporation, which, following the Reorganization Transaction, will be our wholly owned subsidiary. Our founders opened their first store in 1982 and formed World of Jeans & Tops in 1984. World of Jeans & Tops operates under the name “Tilly’s”.
Office Location
Our principal executive office is located at 10 Whatney, Irvine, California 92618. Our telephone number is (949) 609-5599 and our fax number is (949) 609-5508. Our website address is www.tillys.com. The information contained on our website does not constitute part of, nor is it incorporated into, this prospectus.
Certain Trademark
This prospectus includes references to trademarks such as, but not limited to, BLUE CROWN®, FULL TILT®, “IF IT’S NOT HERE…IT’S NOT HAPPENING” ® , INFAMOUS ® , RSQ ®  and TILLY’S ® , which are protected under applicable intellectual property laws and are our property and/or the property of our subsidiary. This prospectus also contains trademarks, service marks, copyrights and trade names of other companies, which are the property of their respective owners. We regard our trademarks as valuable and intend to maintain such marks and any related registrations. Solely for convenience, our trademarks and trade names referred to in this prospectus may appear without the  ®  or ™ symbols, but such references are not intended to indicate, in any way, that we will not assert, to the fullest extent under applicable law, our rights to these trademarks and trade names.

4

Table of Contents
THE OFFERING

 	 	
Common stock offered by us	  	         shares of Class A common stock	
 	 	
Underwriters’ option to purchase additional shares	  	

We have granted the underwriters a 30-day option to purchase up to          additional shares of Class A common stock at the initial public offering price less the underwriting discount.	
 	 	
Class A common stock to be outstanding after this offering	  	         shares	
 	 	
Class B common stock to be outstanding after this offering	  	         shares	
 	 	
Use of proceeds	  	We estimate that the net proceeds to us from this offering will be approximately $         million, after deducting the underwriting discount and estimated expenses payable by us, a portion of which will be reimbursed to us by the underwriters.	
 	 	
 	  	We intend to use $ 84.0 million of the net proceeds from this offering to pay in full the principal amount of the undistributed earnings notes held by our existing shareholders in connection with World of Jeans & Tops’ final “S” Corporation distribution. We expect proceeds in excess of the final “S” Corporation distribution to be $         million and we intend to use such proceeds for working capital and general corporate purposes. See “Use of Proceeds” for additional information.	
 	 	
Voting rights	  	After the completion of this offering, our common stock will consist of two classes: Class A common stock and Class B common stock. Purchasers in this offering will acquire Class A common stock. Class A and Class B common stock are identical, except with respect to voting and conversion rights. Holders of Class A common stock are entitled to one vote per share, and holders of Class B common stock are entitled to 10 votes per share, on all matters to be voted on by our common stockholders. Shares of Class A and Class B common stock vote together as a single class on all matters submitted to a vote of stockholders.	
 	 	
 	  	Immediately following completion of this offering, all of the Class B common stock will be beneficially owned by Hezy Shaked, Tilly Levine and their children through related trusts, which we collectively refer to in this prospectus as the Shaked and Levine family entities. The Shaked and Levine family entities will control approximately     % of the total voting	

5

Table of Contents

 	  	power of our outstanding common stock following the completion of this offering. As a result, the Shaked and Levine family entities will be able to control the outcome of all matters submitted to a vote of our stockholders, including, for example, the election of directors, amendments to our certificate of incorporation and mergers or other business combinations. See “Description of Capital Stock”.	
 	 	
Class B common stock conversion rights	  	Shares of Class B common stock may only be held by the Shaked and Levine family entities and non-profit or other corporations, partnerships or trusts controlled by Mr. Shaked, Ms. Levine or their children. Shares of Class B common stock that are transferred to a holder other than a Hezy Shaked Entity (as defined in “Description of Capital Stock”) will automatically convert into a like number of shares of Class A common stock. In addition, all of the Class B common stock will convert into Class A common stock on a one-for-one basis on the date upon which the number of shares of Class A common stock and Class B common stock beneficially owned by Hezy Shaked and any Hezy Shaked Entity, in the aggregate, represents less than 15.0% of the total number of shares of Class A and Class B common stock then outstanding. See “Description of Capital Stock”.	
 	 	
Dividend policy	  	We do not anticipate paying dividends on our common stock after completion of this offering. We intend to retain all available funds and any future earnings for use in the operation and expansion of our business.	
 	 	
Proposed New York Stock Exchange symbol	  	TLYS	
 	 	
Risk factors	  	See “Risk Factors” and other information included in this prospectus for a discussion of factors you should carefully consider before deciding to invest in shares of our Class A common stock.	
The number of shares of Class A common stock that will be outstanding after completion of this offering excludes:
 
 	•	 	             shares of Class A common stock issuable upon exercise of outstanding stock options, of which              were vested as of             ; and	
 
 	•	 	             additional shares of Class A common stock that we expect to reserve for future issuance under our 2012 Equity and Incentive Award Plan upon consummation of this offering, of which approximately 695,000 shares are expected to be granted in the form of stock options and restricted stock to our employees and directors immediately following the pricing of this offering with an exercise price equal to the initial public offering price.	

6

Table of Contents
Except as otherwise noted, all information in this prospectus:
 
 	•	 	assumes that our shares of Class A common stock will be sold at $         per share, which is the mid-point of the price range set forth on the cover page of this prospectus;	
 
 	•	 	assumes that the underwriters do not exercise their option to purchase additional shares; and	
 
 	•	 	gives effect to the completion of the Reorganization Transaction which will occur prior to consummation of this offering.	

7

Table of Contents
SUMMARY CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL AND OTHER DATA
The following tables present summary consolidated financial and other data and pro forma information to reflect our conversion from an “S” Corporation to a “C” Corporation for income tax purposes. The summary consolidated statement of operations data for the fiscal years ended January 29, 2011 and January 28, 2012, and the summary consolidated balance sheet data as of January 28, 2012, are derived from our financial statements audited by Deloitte & Touche LLP, our independent registered public accounting firm, included elsewhere in this prospectus. The historical results presented below are not necessarily indicative of the results to be expected for any future period. You should read the following information together with the more detailed information contained in “Selected Consolidated Financial and Other Data”, “Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations” and our financial statements and the accompanying notes appearing elsewhere in this prospectus.

 	  	Fiscal Year Ended	 	
 	  	January 29,
2011	 	  	January 28,
2012	 	
 	  	(in thousands, except per
share data)	 	
Consolidated Statements of Operations Data:	  	 	 	 	  	 	 	 	
Net sales	  	$	332,604	  	  	$	400,624	  	
Cost of goods sold(1)	  	 	229,989	  	  	 	271,482	  	
 	  	 	 	 	  	 	 	 	
Gross profit	  	 	102,615	  	  	 	129,142	  	
Selling, general and administrative expenses	  	 	77,668	  	  	 	94,217	  	
 	  	 	 	 	  	 	 	 	
Operating income	  	 	24,947	  	  	 	34,925	  	
Interest expense, net	  	 	249	  	  	 	196	  	
 	  	 	 	 	  	 	 	 	
Income before provision for income taxes	  	 	24,698	  	  	 	34,729	  	
Provision for income taxes	  	 	282	  	  	 	389	  	
 	  	 	 	 	  	 	 	 	
Net income	  	$	24,416	  	  	$	34,340	  	
 	  	 	 	 	  	 	 	 	
Net income per common share:	  	 	 	 	  	 	 	 	
Basic	  	$	1.22	  	  	$	1.72	  	
Diluted	  	$	1.21	  	  	$	1.68	  	
Weighted average shares outstanding:	  	 	 	 	  	 	 	 	
Basic	  	 	20,000	  	  	 	20,000	  	
Diluted	  	 	20,098	  	  	 	20,500	  	
 	 	 	
Pro Forma Income Information (unaudited)(2):	  	 	 	 	  	 	 	 	
Historical income before provision for income taxes	  	$	24,698	  	  	$	34,729	  	
Pro forma provision for income taxes	  	 	9,879	  	  	 	13,892	  	
 	  	 	 	 	  	 	 	 	
Pro forma net income	  	$	14,819	  	  	$	20,837	  	
 	  	 	 	 	  	 	 	 	
Pro forma basic income per common share(3)	  	 	 	 	  	 	 	 	
Pro forma diluted income per common share(3)	  	 	 	 	  	 	 	 	

8

Table of Contents
 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	
 	  	Fiscal Year Ended	 	
 	  	January 29,
2011	 	 	January 28,
2012	 	
Operating Data (unaudited):	  	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	
Stores operating at beginning of period	  	 	111	  	 	 	125	  	
Stores opened during the period	  	 	16	  	 	 	16	  	
Stores closed during the period	  	 	2	  	 	 	1	  	
 	  	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	
Stores operating at end of period	  	 	125	  	 	 	140	  	
 	 	 	
Comparable store sales change(4)	  	 	6.7	% 	 	 	10.7	% 	
Total square feet at end of period	  	 	967,011	  	 	 	1,094,419	  	
Average square footage per store at end of period	  	 	7,736	  	 	 	7,817	  	
Average net sales per store (in thousands)(5)	  	$	2,528	  	 	$	2,718	  	
Average net stores sales per square foot(5)	  	$	326	  	 	$	350	  	
Capital expenditures (in thousands)	  	$	15,674	  	 	$	20,223	  	

 	  	Actual
January  28,
2012	 	 	Pro Forma
January 28,
2012(7)	 	  	Pro Forma
as adjusted
January 28,
2012(8)	
 	  	 	 	 	(unaudited)	 	  	(unaudited)	
 	  	(in thousands)	
Consolidated Balance Sheet Data:	  	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	  	 	
Cash and cash equivalents	  	$	25,091	  	 	$	25,091	  	  	 	
Working capital	  	 	27,673	  	 	 	(51,328	) 	  	 	
Total assets	  	 	140,819	  	 	 	145,682	  	  	 	
Long-term debt, including current portion	  	 	4,638	(6) 	 	 	88,638	  	  	 	
Stockholders’ equity	  	 	60,424	  	 	 	(19,650	) 	  	 	
 
(1)	Includes buying, distribution and occupancy costs.	
(2)	The unaudited pro forma income information for all periods presented gives effect to an adjustment for income tax expense as if we had been a “C” Corporation at an assumed combined federal, state and local effective income tax rate, which approximates our statutory income tax rate, of 40%.	
(3)	Reflects the increase in the number of shares which would be sufficient to replace the capital in excess of current year earnings being withdrawn pursuant to the Reorganization Transaction and the related distribution of notes and cash (see footnote 8 below). The pro forma adjustment to basic and diluted weighted average shares outstanding for the fiscal year ended January 28, 2012 is             and             , respectively.	
(4)	Comparable store sales are net sales from stores that have been open at least 12 full fiscal months as of the end of the applicable reporting period. A remodeled or relocated store is included in comparable store sales, both during and after construction, if the square footage of the store was not changed by more than 20% and the store was not closed for more than five days in any fiscal month. Comparable store sales include sales through our e-commerce store but exclude gift card breakage income and e-commerce shipping and handling fee revenue. E-commerce sales contributed 3.3% and 2.3% to the comparable store sales change for fiscal years 2010 and 2011, respectively.	
(5)	The number of stores and the amount of square footage reflect the number of days during the period that new stores were open. E-commerce sales, e-commerce shipping revenue and gift card breakage income are excluded from our sales in deriving net sales per store and net sales per square foot.	
(6)	Comprised solely of a capital lease for our corporate headquarters and distribution center.	
(7)	This column gives effect to the Reorganization Transaction as described under “Description of Capital Stock—Reorganization Transaction”, including (i) the issuance by World of Jeans & Tops of the	

9

Table of Contents
 	undistributed taxable earnings notes to its existing shareholders in the aggregate principal amount representing 100% of World of Jeans & Tops’ undistributed taxable income from the date of its formation up to the date of termination of its “S” Corporation status, as a final distribution prior to the termination of its “S” Corporation status, equal to $84.0 million, and (ii) an increase in net deferred tax assets of approximately $3.9 million (consisting of an increase in current deferred tax assets of $5.0 million and an increase in non-current deferred tax liabilities of $1.1 million) assuming its “S” Corporation status terminated on January 28, 2012.	
(8)	This column gives effect to (i) the sale by us of             shares of our Class A common stock in this offering assuming an initial public offering price of $         per share, the mid-point of the filing range set forth on the cover page of this prospectus, after deducting the underwriting discount and estimated offering expenses payable by us, a portion of which will be reimbursed to us by the underwriters, (ii) the application of the estimated proceeds from this offering as described under “Use of Proceeds” and (iii) the recognition of cumulative to date stock-based compensation expense for nonqualified stock options, which increases additional paid-in capital by $         million.	

10

Table of Contents
RISK FACTORS
An investment in our Class A common stock involves a high degree of risk. You should carefully consider the risks described below, together with the financial statements and other information contained in this prospectus, before making a decision to buy our Class A common stock. If any of the following risks actually occurs, our business, financial condition and results of operations could suffer. As a result, the trading price and value of our Class A common stock could decline and you could lose all or part of your investment in our Class A common stock.
Risks Related to Our Business
Our business depends upon identifying and responding to changing customer fashion preferences and fashion-related trends. If we cannot identify trends in advance or we select the wrong fashion trends, our sales could be adversely affected.
Fashion trends in the West Coast inspired and action sports related apparel, footwear and accessories market can change rapidly. We need to anticipate, identify and respond quickly to changing trends and consumer demands in order to provide the merchandise our customers seek and maintain our brand image. If we cannot identify changing trends in advance, fail to react to changing trends or misjudge the market for a trend, our sales could be adversely affected and we may be faced with a substantial amount of unsold inventory or missed opportunities. As a result, we may be forced to mark down our merchandise in order to dispose of slow moving inventory which may result in lower profit margins, negatively impacting our financial condition and results of operations.
We face intense competition in our industry and we may not be able to compete effectively.
The retail industry is highly competitive. We currently compete with other retailers such as Abercrombie & Fitch Co., Aeropostale, Inc., American Eagle Outfitters, Inc., The Buckle, Inc., Forever 21, Inc., Hot Topic, Inc., Pacific Sunwear of California, Inc., The Wet Seal, Inc., Urban Outfitters, Inc. and Zumiez, Inc. In addition, we compete with independent specialty shops, department stores and direct marketers that sell similar lines of merchandise and target customers through catalogs and e-commerce. Competition with some or all of these retailers noted above could require us to lower our prices or risk losing customers. In addition, significant or unusual promotional activities by our competitors may cause us to respond in-kind and adversely impact our operating cash flow. Because of these factors, current and future competition could have a material adverse effect on our financial condition and results of operations.
Furthermore, many of our competitors have greater financial, marketing and other resources than we currently do, and therefore may be able to devote greater resources to the marketing and sale of their products, generate national brand recognition or adopt more aggressive pricing policies than we can, which would put us at a competitive disadvantage. Moreover, we do not possess exclusive rights to many of the elements that comprise our in-store experience and product offerings. Our competitors may seek to emulate facets of our business strategy and in-store experience, which could result in a reduction of any competitive advantage or special appeal that we might possess. In addition, most of our products are sold to us on a non-exclusive basis. As a result, our current and future competitors may be able to duplicate or improve on some or all of our in-store experience or product offerings that we believe are important in differentiating our stores and our customers’ shopping experience. If our competitors were to duplicate or improve on some or all of our in-store experience or product offerings, our competitive position and our business could suffer.
Our sales could be severely impacted by declines in consumer confidence and decreases in consumer spending.
We depend upon consumers feeling confident to spend discretionary income on our product offering to drive our sales. Consumer spending may be adversely impacted by economic conditions such as consumer
 
11

Table of Contents
confidence in future economic conditions, interest and tax rates, employment levels, salary and wage levels, general business conditions, the availability of consumer credit and the level of housing, energy and food costs. These risks may be exacerbated for retailers like us who focus on specialty apparel and accessories. Our financial performance is particularly susceptible to economic and other conditions in regions or states where we have a significant number of stores, such as the southwestern U.S. and Florida. If periods of decreased consumer spending persist, our sales could decrease and our financial condition and results of operations could be adversely affected.
We have expanded rapidly in recent years and have limited operating experience at our current size.
We have significantly expanded our operations in the last seven and a half years, increasing from 32 stores in June 2004 in the state of California to operating 140 stores in 14 states as of January 28, 2012. If our operations continue to grow, we will be required to expand our sales and distribution functions, marketing, support services, management information systems and administrative personnel. This expansion could increase the strain on our existing resources, causing operational difficulties such as difficulties in hiring, obtaining adequate levels of merchandise, delayed shipments and decreased customer service levels. These difficulties could cause our brand image to deteriorate and lead to a decrease in revenues, income and the price of our common stock.
Our continued growth depends upon our ability to successfully open a significant number of new stores.
We have grown our store count rapidly in recent years and that has contributed to our growth in profits. However, we must continue to open and operate new stores to help maintain this revenue and profit growth. We opened 16 stores in 2011 and 16 stores in 2010. We plan to open at least 21 net new stores in 2012. However, there can be no assurance that we will open the planned number of new stores in fiscal year 2012 or thereafter. Our ability to successfully open and operate new stores is subject to a variety of risks and uncertainties, such as:
 
 	•	 	identifying suitable store locations, the availability of which is beyond our control;	
 
 	•	 	obtaining acceptable lease terms;	
 
 	•	 	sourcing sufficient levels of inventory;	
 
 	•	 	selecting the appropriate merchandise that appeals to our customers;	
 
 	•	 	hiring and retaining store employees;	
 
 	•	 	assimilating new store employees into our corporate culture;	
 
 	•	 	effectively marketing the new stores’ locations;	
 
 	•	 	avoiding construction delays and cost overruns in connection with the build-out of new stores;	
 
 	•	 	managing and expanding our infrastructure to accommodate growth; and	
 
 	•	 	integrating the new stores with our existing buying, distribution and other support operations.	
Our failure to successfully address these challenges could have a material adverse effect on our financial condition and results of operations, causing the market price of our Class A common stock to decline.
Expanding into new geographic markets may present challenges that are different from those we currently encounter. Failure to effectively adapt to these new challenges could adversely affect our ability to profitably operate those stores and maintain our brand image.
We operate stores in a variety of different geographic markets in the U.S. and do not significantly differentiate between our stores by visual display or by the product offering. We also currently do not
 
12

Table of Contents
significantly differentiate our general store business plan from store to store. As we expand store locations, we may face challenges that are different from those we currently encounter. Our expansion into new geographic markets could result in competitive, merchandising, distribution and other challenges. In addition, as the number of our stores increases, we may face risks associated with market saturation of our product offerings and locations. Our vendors may also restrict their sales to us in new markets to the extent they are already saturating that market with their products through other retailers or their own stores. There can be no assurance that any newly opened stores will be received as well as, or achieve net sales or profitability levels comparable to those of, our existing stores in the time periods estimated by us, or at all. If our stores fail to achieve, or are unable to sustain, acceptable net sales and profitability levels, our business may be materially harmed and we may incur significant costs associated with closing those stores and our brand image may be negatively impacted.
Our business largely depends on a strong brand image, and if we are not able to maintain and enhance our brand, particularly in new markets where we have limited brand recognition, we may be unable to increase or maintain our level of sales.
We believe that our brand image and brand awareness has contributed significantly to the success of our business. We also believe that maintaining and enhancing our brand image, particularly in new markets where we have limited brand recognition, is important to maintaining and expanding our customer base. As we execute our growth strategy, our ability to successfully integrate new stores into their surrounding communities, to expand into new markets or to maintain the strength and distinctiveness of our brand image in our existing markets will be adversely impacted if we fail to connect with our target customer. Maintaining and enhancing our brand image may require us to make substantial investments in areas such as merchandising, marketing, store operations, community relations, store graphics, catalog distribution and employee training, which could adversely affect our cash flow and which may not ultimately be successful. Failure to successfully market our brand in new and existing markets could harm our business, results of operations and financial condition.
Our sales can significantly fluctuate based upon shopping seasons, which may cause our operating results to fluctuate disproportionately on a quarterly basis.
Because of a traditionally higher level of sales during the back-to-school and winter holiday shopping seasons, our sales are typically higher in the third and fourth fiscal quarters than they are in the first and second fiscal quarters. Accordingly, the results of a single fiscal quarter, particularly the third and fourth fiscal quarters, should not be relied on as an indication of our annual results or future performance. In addition, any factors that harm our third and fourth fiscal quarter operating results could have a disproportionate effect on our results of operations for the entire fiscal year.
We depend on cash generated from our existing store operations to support our growth which could strain our cash flow.
We primarily rely on cash flow generated from existing stores to fund our current operations and our growth plans. It takes several months and a significant amount of cash to open a new store. If we continue to open a large number of stores relatively close in time, the cost of these store openings and the cost of continuing operations could reduce our cash position. An increase in our net cash outflow for new stores could adversely affect our operations by reducing the amount of cash available to address other aspects of our business.
In addition, as we expand our business, we will need significant amounts of cash from operations to pay our existing and future lease obligations, build out new store space, purchase inventory, pay personnel, pay for the increased costs associated with operating as a public company, and, if necessary, further invest in our infrastructure and facilities. If our business does not generate sufficient cash flow from operations to fund these activities, and sufficient funds are not otherwise available from the net proceeds we receive from this offering or our existing revolving credit facility or future credit facilities, we may need additional equity or debt financing. If such financing is not available to us on satisfactory terms, our ability to operate and expand our business or to
 
13

Table of Contents
respond to competitive pressures would be limited and we could be required to delay, curtail or eliminate planned store openings. Moreover, if we raise additional capital by issuing equity securities or securities convertible into equity securities, your ownership may be diluted. Any debt financing we may incur may impose on us covenants that restrict our operations, and will require interest payments that would create additional cash demands and financial risk for us.
Our ability to attract customers to our stores depends significantly on the success of the retail centers where the stores are located.
We depend on the location of our stores to generate a large amount of our customer traffic. We try to select well-known and popular malls, power centers, neighborhood and lifestyle centers, outlet centers and street-front locations, usually near prominent retailers, to generate customer traffic for our stores. Customer traffic at these retail centers, and consequently our stores, could be adversely affected by economic downturns nationally or regionally, competition from Internet retailers, changes in consumer demographics, the closing or decrease in popularity of other retailers in the retail centers in which our stores are located, our inability to obtain or maintain prominent store locations within retail centers or the selection by prominent retailers and businesses of other locations. A reduction in customer traffic would likely lead to a decrease in our sales, and, if similar reductions in traffic occur at a number of our stores, this could have a material adverse effect on our financial condition and results of operations.
Some of our new stores may open in locations close enough to our existing stores that sales at those existing stores may be negatively impacted.
As we continue to open additional locations within existing markets, some of our new stores may open close enough to our existing stores that a segment of customers will stop shopping at our existing locations and prefer to shop at the new locations, and therefore sales and profitability at those existing stores may decline. If this were to occur with a number of our stores, this could have a material adverse effect on our results of operations.
We purchase merchandise in advance of the season in which it will be sold and if we purchase too much inventory we may need to reduce prices in order to sell it, which may adversely affect our overall profitability.
We must actively manage our purchase of inventory. Generally, we order merchandise months in advance of it being received and offered for sale. If there is a significant decrease in demand for our products or if we fail to accurately predict fashion trends or consumer demands, we may be forced to rely on markdowns or promotional sales to dispose of excess inventory. This could have an adverse effect on our margins and operating income.
We buy and stock merchandise based upon seasonal weather patterns and therefore unseasonable weather could negatively impact our sales.
We buy select merchandise for sale based upon expected weather patterns during the seasons of winter, spring, summer and fall. If we encounter untimely aberrations in weather conditions, such as warmer winters or cooler summers than would be considered typical, these weather variations could cause some of our merchandise to be inconsistent with what consumers wish to purchase, causing our sales to decline. Furthermore, extended unseasonable weather conditions in the southwestern U.S., particularly in California and Arizona, will likely have a greater impact on our sales because of our store concentration in that region.
If we fail to maintain good relationships with our suppliers or if our suppliers are unable or unwilling to provide us with sufficient quantities of merchandise at acceptable prices, our business and operations may be adversely affected.
Our business is largely dependent on continued good relations with our suppliers, including vendors for our third-party branded products and manufacturers for our proprietary branded products. We operate on a purchase order basis for our proprietary branded and third-party branded merchandise and do not have long-term
 
14

Table of Contents
contractual relationships with our suppliers. Accordingly, our suppliers can refuse to sell us merchandise, limit the type or quantity of merchandise they sell us or raise prices at any time, which can have an adverse impact on our business. Deterioration in our relationships with our suppliers could have a material adverse impact on our business, and there can be no assurance that we will be able to acquire desired merchandise in sufficient quantities on terms acceptable to us in the future. Also, some of our vendors are vertically integrated, selling products directly from their own retail stores, and therefore are in direct competition with us. These vendors may decide at some point in the future to discontinue supplying their merchandise to us, supply us less desirable merchandise or raise prices on the products they do sell us. If we lose key vendors or are unable to find alternative vendors to supply us with substitute merchandise for lost products, our business may be adversely affected.
A rise in the cost of raw materials, such as cotton, and the cost of labor and transportation could increase our cost of sales and cause our results of operations and margins to decline.
Fluctuations in the price, availability and quality of fabrics or other raw materials used to manufacture our products, as well as the price for labor and transportation, could have adverse impacts on our cost of sales and our ability to meet our customers’ demands. In particular, because a key component of our clothing is cotton, any increases in the cost of cotton may significantly affect the cost of our products and could have an adverse impact on our cost of sales. We may not be able to pass all or a portion of these higher costs on to our customers, which could have a material adverse effect on our profitability.
Any inability to balance merchandise bearing our proprietary brands with the third-party branded merchandise we sell may have an adverse effect on our sales and gross margin.
Our proprietary branded merchandise represented approximately 31% of our net sales for the fiscal year ended January 28, 2012. Our proprietary branded merchandise generally has a higher gross margin than the third-party branded merchandise we offer. As a result, we may determine that it is best for us to continue to hold or increase the penetration of our proprietary brands in the future. However, carrying our proprietary brands limits the amount of third-party branded merchandise we can carry and, therefore, there is a risk that the customers’ perception that we offer many major brands will decline. By maintaining or increasing the amount of our proprietary branded merchandise, we are also exposed to greater fashion risk, as we may fail to anticipate fashion trends correctly. These risks, if they occur, could have a material adverse effect on sales and profitability.
Most of our merchandise is produced in foreign countries, making the price and availability of our merchandise susceptible to international trade and other international conditions.
Although we purchase our merchandise from domestic suppliers, these suppliers have a majority of their merchandise made in foreign countries. Some foreign countries can be, and have been, affected by political and economic instability and natural disasters, negatively impacting trade. The countries in which our merchandise currently is manufactured or may be manufactured in the future could become subject to new trade restrictions imposed by the U.S. or other foreign governments. Trade restrictions, including increased tariffs or quotas, embargoes and customs restrictions, against apparel items, as well as U.S. or foreign labor strikes, work stoppages or boycotts, could increase the cost or reduce the supply of apparel available to us and have a material adverse effect on our business, financial condition and results of operations. In addition, our merchandise supply could be impacted if our suppliers’ imports become subject to existing or future duties and quotas, or if our suppliers face increased competition from other companies for production facilities, import quota capacity and shipping capacity. Any increase in the cost of our merchandise or limitation on the amount of merchandise we are able to purchase could have a material adverse effect on our financial condition and results of operations.
If our vendors and manufacturing sources fail to use acceptable labor or other practices our reputation may be harmed, which could negatively impact our business.
We purchase merchandise from independent third-party vendors and manufacturers. If any of these suppliers have practices that are not legal or accepted in the U.S., consumers may develop a negative view of us,
 
15

Table of Contents
our brand image could be damaged and we could become the subject of boycotts by our customers and/or interest groups. Further, if the suppliers violate labor or other laws of their own country, these violations could cause disruptions or delays in their shipments of merchandise. For example, much of our merchandise is manufactured in China and Mexico, which have different labor practices than the U.S. We do not independently investigate whether our suppliers are operating in compliance with all applicable laws and therefore we rely upon the suppliers’ representations set forth in our purchase orders and vendor agreements concerning the suppliers’ compliance with such laws. If our goods are manufactured using illegal or unacceptable labor practices in these countries, or other countries from which our suppliers source the product we purchase, our ability to supply merchandise for our stores without interruption, our brand image and, consequently, our sales may be adversely affected.
If we lose key management personnel our operations could be negatively impacted.
Our business and growth depends upon the leadership and experience of our key executive management team, including our co-founder, Hezy Shaked, who currently serves as our Chief Strategy Officer and Chairman of our board of directors, and Daniel Griesemer, our President and Chief Executive Officer, and we may be unable to retain their services. We also may be unable to retain other existing management personnel that are critical to our success, which could result in harm to our vendor and employee relationships, loss of key information, expertise or know-how and unanticipated recruitment and training costs. The loss of services of any of our key personnel could have a material adverse effect on our business and prospects, and could be viewed in a negative light by investors and analysts, which could cause our Class A common stock price to decline. None of our employees, except for Mr. Griesemer, have employment agreements and we do not intend to purchase key person life insurance covering any employee. If we lose the services of any of our key personnel or we are not able to attract additional qualified personnel, we may not be able to successfully manage our business.
If we cannot retain or find qualified employees to meet our staffing needs in our stores, our distribution center, or our corporate offices, our business could be adversely affected.
Our success depends upon the quality of the employees we hire. We seek employees who are motivated, represent our corporate culture and brand image and, for many positions, have knowledge of our merchandise and the skill necessary to excel in a customer service environment. The turnover rate in the retail industry is high and finding qualified candidates to fill positions may be difficult. If we cannot attract and retain corporate employees, district managers, store managers and store associates with the qualifications we deem necessary, our ability to effectively operate and expand may be adversely affected. In addition, we rely on temporary personnel to staff our distribution center, as well as seasonal part-time employees to provide incremental staffing to our stores in busy selling seasons such as the back-to-school and winter holiday seasons. We cannot guarantee that we will be able to find adequate temporary or seasonal personnel to staff our operations when needed, which may strain our existing personnel and negatively impact our operations.
Our corporate headquarters, distribution center and management information systems are in a single location in southern California, and if their operations are disrupted, we may not be able to operate our store support functions or ship merchandise to our stores, which would adversely affect our business.
Our corporate headquarters, distribution center and management information systems are in a single location in Irvine, California. If we encounter any disruptions to our operations at this building or if it were to shut down for any reason, including by fire or other natural disaster, then we may be prevented from effectively operating our stores, shipping and processing our merchandise and operating our e-commerce business. Furthermore, the risk of disruption or shut down at this building is greater than it might be if it were located in another region, as southern California is prone to natural disasters such as earthquakes and wildfires. Any disruption or shut down at this location could significantly impact our operations and have a material adverse effect on our financial condition and results of operations.
 
16

Table of Contents
Our stores are mostly located in the southwestern U.S. and Florida, with a significant number of stores located in California, putting us at risk to region-specific disruptions.
Out of a total of 140 stores as of January 28, 2012, we operated 78 stores in California, 18 stores in Arizona, six stores in Nevada and 16 stores in Florida. Sales in these states could be more susceptible than the country generally to disruptions, such as from economic and weather conditions, demographic and population changes and changes in fashion tastes, and consequently, we may be more susceptible to these factors than more geographically diversified competitors. For example, because of the negative economic impact caused by the downturn in the housing market, sales in these states may have slowed more than sales would have in other regions or the country as a whole. Compared to the country as a whole, stores in California are exposed to a relatively high risk of damage from a major earthquake or wildfires, while stores in Florida are also exposed to a relatively high risk from hurricane damage. Any negative impact upon or disruption to the operations of stores in these states could have a material adverse effect on our financial condition and results of operations.
We are required to make significant lease payments for our store leases and corporate offices and distribution center, which may strain our cash flow.
We lease all of our retail store locations as well as our corporate headquarters and distribution center. We do not own any real estate. Leases for our stores are typically for terms of ten years and many can be extended in five-year increments. Many of our leases have early cancelation clauses which permit us to terminate the lease if certain sales thresholds are not met in certain periods of time. Our costs under these leases are a significant amount of our expenses and are growing rapidly as we expand the number of locations and existing locations experience expense increases. In fiscal year 2011, our total operating lease rent expense was $30.7 million and our common area maintenance expense was $11.3 million. This increased from $26.3 million and $9.5 million, respectively, in fiscal year 2010 and can be expected to continue to increase as we open more stores. We are required to pay additional rent under many of our lease agreements based upon achieving certain sales plateaus for each store location. In addition, we must make significant payments for common area maintenance and real estate taxes. Many of our lease agreements also contain provisions which increase the rent payments on a set time schedule, causing the cash rent paid for a location to escalate over the term of the lease. In addition, rent costs could escalate when multi-year leases are renewed at the expiration of their lease term. These costs are significant, recurring and increasing, which places a consistent strain on our cash flow.
We depend on cash flows from operations to pay our lease expenses and to fulfill our other cash needs. If our business does not generate sufficient cash flows from operating activities, and sufficient funds are not otherwise available to us from borrowings under our available revolving credit facility or from other sources, we may not be able to service our operating lease expenses, grow our business, respond to competitive challenges or to fund our other liquidity and capital needs, which would harm our business.
Additional sites that we lease are likely to be subject to similar long-term leases. If an existing or future store is not profitable, and we decide to close it, we may nonetheless be committed to perform our obligations under the applicable lease including, among other things, paying the base rent for the balance of the lease term. In addition, as our leases expire, we may fail to negotiate renewals, either on commercially acceptable terms or at all, which could cause us to close stores in desirable locations. If we are unable to enter into new leases or renew existing leases on terms acceptable to us or be released from our obligations under leases for stores that we close, our business, profitability and results of operations may be harmed.
We rely on Integrity Retail Distribution and Federal Express to deliver merchandise to our stores located outside of southern California and therefore our business could be negatively impacted by disruptions in the operations of these third-party providers.
We rely on Integrity Retail Distribution to ship our merchandise from our distribution center in Irvine, California to our stores located in northern and central California, Arizona and Nevada, and we rely on Federal Express to ship our merchandise to stores in all other states. We also rely on Federal Express and the U.S. Postal
 
17

Table of Contents
Service to ship all e-commerce sales packages to our customers. Relying on these third-party delivery services puts us at risk from disruptions in their operations, such as employee strikes, inclement weather and their ability to meet our shipping demands. If we are forced to use other delivery services, our costs could increase and we may not be able to meet shipment deadlines. Moreover, we may not be able to obtain terms as favorable as those received from the transportation providers we currently use, which would further increase our costs. These circumstances may negatively impact our financial condition and results of operations.
We may not be able to maintain comparable store sales or sales per square foot, which may cause our results of operations to decline and the price of our Class A common stock to be volatile.
The investing public may use comparable store sales or net store sales per square foot projections or results, over a certain period of time, such as on a quarterly or yearly basis, as an indicator of our profitability growth. Our comparable store sales can vary significantly from period to period for a variety of reasons, such as the age of stores, changing economic factors, unseasonable weather, changing fashion trends, pricing, the timing of the release of new merchandise and promotional events and increased competition. These factors could cause comparable store sales or net store sales per square foot to decline period to period or fail to grow at expected rates, which could adversely affect our results of operations and cause the price of our Class A common stock to be volatile during such periods.
If our management information systems fail to operate or are unable to support our growth, our operations could be disrupted.
We rely upon our management information systems in almost every aspect of our daily business operations. For example, our management information systems serve an integral part in enabling us to order merchandise, process merchandise at our distribution center and retail stores, perform and track sales transactions, manage personnel, pay vendors and employees, operate our e-commerce business and report financial and accounting information to management. In addition, we rely on our management information systems to enable us to leverage our costs as we grow. If our management information systems fail to operate or are unable to support our growth, our store operations and e-commerce business could be severely disrupted, and we could be required to make significant additional expenditures to remediate any such failure.
Our internal operations or management information systems could be disrupted by system security failures. These disruptions could negatively impact our sales, increase our expenses, and harm our reputation and the price of our Class A common stock.
Hackers, computer programmers and internal users may be able to penetrate our network security and create system disruptions, cause shutdowns and misappropriate our confidential information or that of third parties, including our customers. Therefore, we could incur significant expenses addressing problems created by security breaches to our network. This risk is heightened because we collect and store customer information for marketing purposes, as well as credit card information. We must, and do, take precautions to secure customer information and prevent unauthorized access to our database of confidential information. However, if unauthorized parties, including external hackers or computer programmers, gain access to our database, they may be able to steal this confidential information. Our failure to secure this information could result in costly litigation, adverse publicity or regulatory action that could have a material adverse effect on our financial condition and results of operations. In addition, sophisticated hardware and operating system software and applications that we procure from third parties may contain defects in design or manufacture that could unexpectedly interfere with our operations. The cost to alleviate security risks, defects in software and hardware and address any problems that occur could negatively impact our sales, distribution and other critical functions, as well as our financial results.
If we are unable to protect our intellectual property rights, our financial results may be negatively impacted.
Our success depends in large part on our brand image. Our company’s name, logo, domain name and our proprietary brands and our registered and unregistered trademarks and copyrights are valuable assets that serve to
 
18

Table of Contents
differentiate us from our competitors. We currently rely on a combination of copyright, trademark, trade dress and unfair competition laws to establish and protect our intellectual property rights. We cannot assure you that the steps taken by us to protect our proprietary rights will be adequate to prevent infringement of our trademarks and proprietary rights by others, including imitation and misappropriation of our brand. We cannot assure you that obstacles will not arise as we expand our product lines and geographic scope. The unauthorized use or misappropriation of our intellectual property could damage our brand identity and the goodwill we created for our company, which could cause our sales to decline. Moreover, litigation may be necessary to protect or enforce these intellectual property rights, which could result in substantial costs and diversion of our resources, causing a material adverse effect on our business, financial condition, results of operations or cash flows. If we cannot protect our intellectual property rights, our brand identity and the goodwill we created for our company may diminish, causing our sales to decline.
We have not registered any of our intellectual property outside of the U.S. and cannot prohibit other companies from using our trademarks in foreign countries. Use of our trademarks in foreign countries could negatively impact our identity in the U.S. and cause our sales to decline.
We may be subject to liability if we, or our vendors, infringe upon the intellectual property rights of third parties.
We may be subject to liability if we infringe upon the intellectual property rights of third parties. If we were to be found liable for any such infringement, we could be required to pay substantial damages and could be subject to injunctions preventing further infringement. Such infringement claims could harm our brand image. In addition, any payments we are required to make and any injunction we are required to comply with as a result of such infringement actions could adversely affect our financial results.
We purchase merchandise from vendors that may be subject to design copyrights, design patents, or otherwise may incorporate protected intellectual property. We are not involved in the manufacture of any of the merchandise we purchase from our vendors for sale to our customers, and we do not independently investigate whether these vendors legally hold intellectual property rights to merchandise that they are manufacturing or distributing. As a result, we rely upon vendors’ representations set forth in our purchase orders and vendor agreements concerning their right to sell us the products that we purchase from them. If a third party claims to have licensing rights with respect to merchandise we purchased from a vendor, or we acquire unlicensed merchandise, we could be obligated to remove such merchandise from our stores, incur costs associated with destruction of such merchandise if the distributor or vendor is unwilling or unable to reimburse us and be subject to liability under various civil and criminal causes of action, including actions to recover unpaid royalties and other damages and injunctions. Although our purchase orders and vendor agreement with each vendor require the vendor to indemnify us against such claims, a vendor may not have the financial resources to defend itself or us against such claims, in which case we may have to pay the costs and expenses associated with defending such claim. Any of these results could harm our brand image and have a material adverse effect on our business and growth.
Our founders control a majority of the voting power of our common stock, which may prevent other stockholders from influencing corporate decisions and may result in conflicts of interest that cause the price of our Class A common stock to decline.
Upon consummation of this offering, our common stock will consist of two classes: Class A and Class B. Holders of Class A common stock are entitled to one vote per share, and holders of Class B common stock are entitled to 10 votes per share, on all matters to be voted on by our common stockholders. Immediately following completion of this offering, all of the shares of Class B common stock will be beneficially owned by the Shaked and Levine family entities. As a result, the Shaked and Levine family entities will control approximately     % of the total voting power of our outstanding common stock, assuming no exercise by the underwriters of their option to purchase additional shares of Class A common stock in this offering. In addition, Mr. Shaked serves as
 
19

Table of Contents
Chairman of the Board of Directors, and is the voting trustee, pursuant to a voting trust agreement, covering the shares owned by Ms. Levine. As a result, Mr. Shaked is in a position to dictate the outcome of any corporate actions requiring stockholder approval, including the election of directors and mergers, acquisitions and other significant corporate transactions. Mr. Shaked may delay or prevent a change of control from occurring, even if the change of control could appear to benefit the stockholders. Mr. Shaked may also have interests that differ from yours and may vote in a way with which you disagree and which may be adverse to your interests. This ownership concentration may adversely impact the trading of our Class A common stock because of a perceived conflict of interest that may exist, thereby depressing the value of our Class A common stock.
We will enter into tax indemnification agreements with our existing shareholders and could become obligated to make payments to them for any additional federal, state or local income taxes assessed against them for fiscal periods prior to the completion of this offering.
World of Jeans & Tops has historically been treated as an “S” Corporation for U.S. federal income tax purposes. Effective upon completion of the Reorganization Transaction, World of Jeans & Tops’ “S” Corporation status will terminate and it will thereafter be subject to federal income taxes and increased state income taxes. In the event of an adjustment to World of Jeans & Tops’ reported taxable income for a period or periods prior to termination of its “S” Corporation status, its shareholders during those periods could be liable for additional income taxes for those prior periods. Therefore, we will enter into tax indemnification agreements with the former shareholders of World of Jeans & Tops prior to consummation of this offering. Pursuant to the tax indemnification agreements, we will agree to indemnify, defend and hold harmless each such shareholder on an after-tax basis against additional income taxes, plus interest and penalties resulting from adjustments made, as a result of a final determination made by a competent tax authority, to the taxable income World of Jeans & Tops reported as an “S” Corporation. Such indemnification will also include any losses, costs or expenses, including reasonable attorneys’ fees, arising out of a claim for such tax liability.
War, terrorism or civil unrest could negatively affect our business.
All of our stores are located in public areas where large numbers of people typically gather. Terrorist attacks, threats of terrorists attacks or civil unrest involving public areas could cause people not to visit areas where our stores are located. Further, armed conflicts or acts of war throughout the world may create uncertainty, causing consumers to spend less on discretionary purchases, including on apparel and accessories, and disrupting our ability to obtain merchandise for our stores. Such decreases in consumer spending or disruptions in our ability to obtain merchandise would likely decrease our sales and materially adversely affect our financial condition and results of operations.
Litigation costs and the outcome of litigation could have a material adverse effect on our business.
From time to time we may be subject to litigation claims through the ordinary course of our business operations regarding, but not limited to, employment matters, compliance with the Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990, apparel, footwear and accessory safety standards, security of customer and employee personal information, contractual relations with vendors, marketing and infringement of trademarks and other intellectual property rights. Litigation to defend ourselves against claims by third parties, or to enforce any rights that we may have against third parties, may be necessary, which could result in substantial costs and diversion of our resources, causing a material adverse effect on our business, financial condition, results of operations or cash flows.
Management does not believe the nature of any pending legal proceeding will have a material adverse effect on our financial condition and results of operations. However, management’s assessment may change at any time based upon the discovery of facts or circumstances that are presently not known to us. Therefore, there can be no assurance that any pending or future litigation will not have a material adverse effect on our financial condition and results of operations.
 
20

Table of Contents
We may be subject to unionization, work stoppages, slowdowns or increased labor costs.
Currently, none of our employees are represented by a union. However, our employees have the right under the National Labor Relations Act to form or affiliate with a union. If some or all of our workforce were to become unionized and the terms of the collective bargaining agreement were significantly different from our current compensation arrangements, it could increase our costs and adversely impact our profitability. Moreover, participation in labor unions could put us at increased risk of labor strikes and disruption of our operations.
Violations of and/or changes in laws, including employment laws and laws related to our merchandise, could make conducting our business more expensive or change the way we do business.
We are subject to numerous regulations, including labor and employment, customs, truth-in-advertising, consumer protection and zoning and occupancy laws and ordinances that regulate retailers generally and/or govern the importation, promotion and sale of merchandise and the operation of stores and warehouse facilities. If these regulations were violated by our management, employees or vendors, the costs of certain goods could increase, or we could experience delays in shipments of our goods, be subject to fines or penalties or suffer reputational harm, which could reduce demand for our merchandise and hurt our business and results of operations.
Similarly, changes in laws could make operating our business more expensive or require us to change the way we do business. For example, changes in laws related to employee healthcare, hours, wages, job classification and benefits could significantly increase operating costs. In addition, changes in product safety or other consumer protection laws could lead to increased costs for certain merchandise, or additional labor costs associated with readying merchandise for sale. It may be difficult for us to foresee regulatory changes impacting our business and our actions needed to respond to changes in the law could be costly and may negatively impact our operations.
We will incur significant expenses as a result of being a publicly traded company, which could negatively impact our earnings.
As a result of becoming a public company, and of being a public company, we expect to incur significant incremental legal, accounting, insurance and other expenses. Compliance with the Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002 and the rules implemented by the SEC and New York Stock Exchange, or NYSE, require changes to corporate governance practices of public companies that did not apply to us prior to becoming a public company. In addition, the reporting requirements of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as amended, will require, among other things, that we file annual, quarterly and current reports with respect to our business and financial condition. Our compliance with these laws, rules and regulations have increased, and will continue to increase, our expenses, including legal and accounting costs, and make some of our operations more costly and time consuming. In addition, it may also be more difficult for us to find and retain qualified persons to serve on our board of directors or as executive officers. Further, any additional expenses in legal, accounting, insurance and other related expenses could reduce our earnings and have a material adverse effect on our financial condition and results of operations.
Our failure to maintain adequate internal controls over our financial and management systems may cause errors in our financial reporting. These errors may cause a loss of investor confidence and result in a decline in the price of our Class A common stock.
Our public company reporting obligations and our anticipated growth will likely strain our financial and management systems, internal controls and our employees. In addition, pursuant to Section 404 of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002, or Section 404, we are required to finish documenting and testing our internal controls so our management can certify the effectiveness of our internal controls over financial reporting and our independent registered public accounting firm can render an opinion on our internal controls over financial reporting by the time our annual report for fiscal year 2013 is due and annually thereafter.
 
21

Table of Contents
We are currently taking the necessary steps to comply with Section 404. However, this process is time consuming and costly. If during this process we identify one or more material weaknesses in our internal controls, it is possible that our management may not be able to certify that our internal controls are effective by the certification deadline. We cannot be certain we will be able to successfully complete the implementation, certification and attestation requirements of Section 404 within the time period allowed.
Moreover, if we identify any material weaknesses or significant deficiencies in our internal controls, we will have to implement appropriate changes to these controls, which may require specific compliance training for our directors, officers and employees, require the hiring of additional finance, accounting, legal and other personnel, entail substantial costs to modify our existing accounting systems and take a significant period of time to complete. Such changes may not, however, be effective in maintaining the adequacy of our internal controls, and any failure to maintain that adequacy, or consequent inability to produce accurate financial statements on a timely basis, could increase our operating costs and could materially impair our ability to operate our business. Effective internal controls are necessary for us to produce reliable financial reports and are important to prevent fraud. As a result, our failure to satisfy the requirements of Section 404 on a timely basis could result in us being subject to regulatory action and a loss of investor confidence in the reliability of our financial statements, both of which in turn could cause the market value of our Class A common stock to decline.
Prior to this offering, World of Jeans & Tops was treated as an “S” Corporation under Subchapter S of the Internal Revenue Code, and claims of taxing authorities related to its prior status as an “S” Corporation could harm us.
Concurrent with and as a result of the Reorganization Transaction, World of Jeans & Tops’ “S” Corporation status will terminate and World of Jeans & Tops will be treated as a “C” Corporation for federal and applicable state income tax purposes. As a “C” Corporation, World of Jeans & Tops will become subject to federal and increased state income taxes. In addition, if the unaudited, open tax years in which World of Jeans & Tops was an “S” Corporation are audited by the Internal Revenue Service, and World of Jeans & Tops is determined not to have qualified for, or to have violated, its “S” Corporation status, World of Jeans & Tops will be obligated to pay back taxes, interest and penalties, and the company will not have the right to reclaim tax distributions it made to its shareholders during those periods. These amounts could include taxes on all of World of Jeans & Tops’ taxable income while it was an “S” Corporation. Any such claims could result in additional costs to us and could have a material adverse effect on our results of operations and financial condition.
We will need to amend our existing credit facility upon completion of our initial public offering and there is no guarantee that we will be able to do so. The terms of this amended facility may impose operating and financial restrictions on us that may impair our ability to respond quickly to changing business and economic conditions. If we need to draw on this facility, the impairment could have a significant adverse impact on our business.
Our existing credit facility with Wells Fargo Bank does not permit for our corporate reorganization and initial public offering. Therefore, immediately before the completion of our initial public offering, we expect to amend our credit facility. In addition, the amended facility is expected to provide a $25 million revolving line of credit, which we may use to finance working capital or other needs, including the purchase of inventory and equipment, capital expenditures and funding for other general corporate purposes. There is no guarantee that we will be able to amend the facility and, should we ever need to use the facility, our inability to successfully secure an amended facility could have a significant adverse impact on our business, including our plans for continued growth. We expect the amended revolving credit facility will contain requirements for certain levels of tangible net worth, liquidity and profitability, such as: (i) a minimum current asset to current liability ratio of 1.25 to 1.00, (ii) a net profit before tax of at least $1, excluding a non-cash expense of up to a maximum of $2 million for the write-off of impaired fixed assets for the cumulative rolling four-quarter period measured, determined as of the end of each fiscal quarter on a cumulative rolling four-quarter basis and (iii) a maximum ratio of 4.00 to 1.00 for “funded debt” to “EBITDAR”, where “funded debt” includes credit facility borrowings, capital lease debt and eight times annual operating lease rent expense, and “EBITDAR” includes net income before interest, income taxes, depreciation, amortization and rent expense. Obligations under the revolving credit facility will likely be
 
22

Table of Contents
secured by substantially all of our assets. Our ability to comply with these restrictions and covenants may be affected by events beyond our control. A breach of any of these restrictions and covenants could result in a default under the revolving credit facility. If a default occurs, the lender may elect to terminate the availability of undrawn amounts, increase the interest rate on all borrowings outstanding and declare all borrowings outstanding, together with accrued interest and other fees, to be immediately due and payable. If we are unable to repay outstanding borrowings when due, whether at their maturity or if declared due and payable by the lender following a default, the lender will have the right to proceed against the collateral granted to it to secure the indebtedness. As a result, any breach of these restrictions and covenants could have a material adverse effect on us.
We may engage in strategic transactions that could negatively impact our liquidity, increase our expenses and present significant distractions to our management.
We may consider strategic transactions and business arrangements, including, but not limited to, acquisitions, asset purchases, partnerships, joint ventures, restructurings, divestitures and investments. Any such transaction may require us to incur non-recurring or other charges, may increase our near and long-term expenditures and may pose significant integration challenges or disrupt our management or business, which could harm our operations and financial results.
Our e-commerce business subjects us to numerous risks that could have an adverse effect on our results of operations.
For fiscal year 2011, sales from our e-commerce business increased 33% over the previous year and represented approximately 11% of our total net sales. Our e-commerce business and its continued growth subject us to certain risks that could have an adverse effect on our results of operations, including:
 
 	•	 	diversion of traffic from our stores;	
 
 	•	 	liability for online content;	
 
 	•	 	government regulation of the Internet; and	
 
 	•	 	risks related to the computer systems that operate our website and related support systems, including computer viruses, electronic break-ins and similar disruptions.	
We may incur substantial expenses related to our issuance of stock-based compensation, which may have a negative impact on our operating results for future periods.
We follow the provisions of the Financial Accounting Standards Board, or FASB, Accounting Standards Codification, or ASC, 718, Compensation-Stock Compensation , for stock-based compensation. Our stock-based compensation expenses may be significant in future periods, which could have an adverse impact on our operating and net income. FASB ASC 718 requires the use of subjective assumptions, including the options’ expected lives and the price volatility of our Class A common stock. Changes in the subjective input assumptions can materially affect the amount of our stock-based compensation expense. In addition, an increase in the competitiveness of the market for qualified employees could result in an increased use of stock-based compensation awards, which in turn would result in increased stock-based compensation expense in future periods.
Our stock-based awards contain a performance condition whereby the company’s common stock must be publicly traded in order to exercise vested options. Unrecognized cumulative stock-based compensation expense through January 28, 2012, before any related tax benefit, was $7.1 million. We will recognize this non-cash deferred compensation expense upon the consummation of our initial public offering.
 
23

Table of Contents
Risks Related to this Offering and Ownership of Our Class A Common Stock
We will be a controlled company within the meaning of the NYSE rules, and, as a result, we may rely on exemptions from certain corporate governance requirements that provide protection to stockholders of other companies.
Upon completion of this offering, Mr. Shaked will control more than 50% of the total voting power of our common stock and we will be considered a controlled company under the NYSE corporate governance listing standards. As a controlled company, certain exemptions under the NYSE listing standards will exempt us from the obligation to comply with certain NYSE corporate governance requirements, including the requirements:
 
 	•	 	that a majority of our board of directors consist of independent directors, as defined under the rules of the NYSE;	
 
 	•	 	that we have a corporate governance and nominating committee that is composed entirely of independent directors with a written charter addressing the committee’s purpose and responsibilities; and	
 
 	•	 	that we have a compensation committee that is composed entirely of independent directors with a written charter addressing the committee’s purpose and responsibilities.	
Although we intend to comply with these listing requirements even though we will be a controlled company, there is no guarantee that we will not take advantage of these exemptions in the future. Accordingly, so long as we are a controlled company, holders of our Class A common stock may not have the same protections afforded to stockholders of companies that are subject to all of the NYSE corporate governance requirements.
There has been no public market for our Class A common stock and an active trading market for our Class A common stock may never develop following the offering.
Prior to this offering, there has been no public market for our Class A common stock and we cannot guarantee that an active trading market will develop or be sustained after the offering. If an active market does not develop or is not sustained, it may be difficult for you to sell your Class A common stock at a favorable price or at all. We cannot predict the future value of our Class A common stock. The initial public offering price will be based upon negotiations between us and the underwriters and may not bear any relationship to the market price our Class A common stock may trade at after the offering. As a result, the value of our Class A common stock may decline below the initial public offering price, based upon the market for our Class A common stock or changes in our financial condition and results of operations, and you may not be able to resell your shares of our Class A common stock at or above the initial public offering price.
If securities or industry analysts do not publish research or publish inaccurate or unfavorable research about our business, the price and trading volume of our Class A common stock could decline.
The trading market for our Class A common stock will depend in part on the research and reports that securities or industry analysts publish about us or our business. We do not currently have and may never obtain research coverage by securities and industry analysts. If no securities or industry analysts commence coverage of us, the trading price for our Class A common stock would be negatively impacted. If we obtain securities or industry analyst coverage and if one or more of the analysts who covers us downgrades our Class A common stock or publishes inaccurate or unfavorable research about our business, the price of our Class A common stock would likely decline. If one or more of these analysts ceases coverage of us or fails to publish reports on us regularly, demand for our Class A common stock could decrease, which could cause the price of our Class A common stock and trading volume to decline.
 
24

Table of Contents
The price of our Class A common stock may be volatile and decline in value.
The market for retail apparel stocks can be highly volatile. As a result, the market price of our Class A common stock is likely to be volatile and investors may experience a decrease in the value of the Class A common stock, unrelated to our operations. The price of our Class A common stock could fluctuate significantly in response to a number of factors, as discussed in this “Risk Factors” section and such as those listed below:
 
 	•	 	variations in our operating performance and the performance of our competitors;	
 
 	•	 	publication of research reports or recommendation by securities analysts about us, our competitors or our industry, or a lack of such securities analyst coverage;	
 
 	•	 	our failure or our competitors’ failure to meet analysts’ projections or guidance;	
 
 	•	 	our levels of comparable store sales;	
 
 	•	 	changes to our management team;	
 
 	•	 	regulatory developments negatively affecting our industry;	
 
 	•	 	changes in stock market valuations of our competitors;	
 
 	•	 	the development and sustainability of an active trading market for our Class A common stock;	
 
 	•	 	the public’s response to press releases or other public announcements by us or third parties, including our filings with the SEC;	
 
 	•	 	the performance and successful integration of any new stores that we open;	
 
 	•	 	actions by competitors or other mall and non-mall tenants;	
 
 	•	 	announcements by us or our competitors of new product offerings or significant acquisitions;	
 
 	•	 	ratings downgrades by any securities analysts who follow our common stock;	
 
 	•	 	fluctuations in the stock markets generally;	
 
 	•	 	changes in general market and economic conditions; and	
 
 	•	 	changes in fashion trends that we did not anticipate.	
Further, securities class action litigation has often been initiated against companies following periods of volatility in their stock price. This type of litigation could result in substantial costs and divert our management’s attention and resources, and could also require us to make substantial payments to satisfy judgments or to settle litigation. The threat or filing of class action litigation lawsuits could cause the price of our Class A common stock to decline.
Future sales of our common stock by existing stockholders could cause the price of our Class A common stock to decline.
Any sales of a substantial number of shares of our common stock in the public market after this offering, or the perception that such sales might occur, may cause the market price for our Class A common stock to decline. Upon completion of this offering, we will have          shares of Class A common stock and          shares of Class B common stock outstanding, excluding any shares of Class A common stock that may be issued pursuant to the underwriters’ option to purchase additional shares, and          shares of Class A common stock issuable upon the exercise of outstanding stock options. All of these shares, other than the          shares of Class B common stock held by the Shaked and Levine family entities and the          shares of Class A common stock held by our directors and officers and other “affiliates”, as defined in Rule 144 of the Securities Act of 1933, as amended, or Rule 144, will be freely tradable without restriction under the Securities Act of 1933, as amended, or Securities Act. The shares held by the Shaked and Levine family entities and our directors, officers and other affiliates are restricted securities under the Securities Act, and may not be sold in the public market unless the sale is registered under the Securities Act or an exemption from registration is available.
 
25

Table of Contents
Each of our executive officers, directors and certain of our stockholders have agreed, subject to certain exceptions, to be bound by a lock-up agreement that prevents us and them from selling or transferring shares of our common stock during the 180-day period following this offering. However, these shares will be freely tradable, subject to the limitations of Rule 144, in the public markets after the expiration of the lock-up period, which could depress the value of our Class A common stock. Moreover, Goldman, Sachs & Co. and Merrill Lynch, Pierce, Fenner & Smith Incorporated may, in their sole discretion, release any of the shares held by our executive officers, directors and other current stockholders from the restrictions of the lock-up agreement at any time without notice, which would allow the immediate sale of these shares in the market, subject to the limitations of Rule 144. See “Underwriting”.
Our corporate organizational documents and Delaware law have anti-takeover provisions that may inhibit or prohibit a takeover of us and the replacement or removal of our management.
In addition to the effect that the concentration of ownership and voting power in the Shaked and Levine family entities, the anti-takeover provisions under Delaware law, as well as the provisions contained in our corporate organizational documents, may make an acquisition of us more difficult.
For example:
 
 	•	 	our certificate of incorporation includes a provision authorizing our board of directors to issue blank check preferred stock without stockholder approval, which, if issued, would increase the number of outstanding shares of our capital stock and make it more difficult for a stockholder to acquire us;	
 
 	•	 	our certificate of incorporation provides that if all shares of our Class B common stock are converted into Class A common stock or otherwise cease to be outstanding, our board of directors will be divided into three classes in the manner provided by our certificate of incorporation. After the directors in each class serve for the initial terms provided in our certificate of incorporation, each class will serve for a staggered three-year term;	
 
 	•	 	our certificate of incorporation permits removal of a director only for cause by the affirmative vote of the holders of a majority of the voting power of the company once the board of directors is divided into three classes and provides that director vacancies can only be filled by an affirmative vote of a majority of directors then in office;	
 
 	•	 	our bylaws require advance notice of stockholder proposals and director nominations; and	
 
 	•	 	Section 203 of the Delaware General Corporation Law may prevent large stockholders from completing a merger or acquisition of us.	
These provisions may prevent a merger or acquisition of us which could limit the price investors would pay for our common stock in the future.
We do not intend to pay cash dividends on our common stock, which may make our Class A common stock less desirable to investors and decrease its value.
We intend to retain all of our earnings to finance our operations and growth and do not anticipate paying any cash dividends on our common stock for the foreseeable future. Therefore, you may only receive a return on your investment in our Class A common stock if the market price increases above the price at which you purchased it, which may never occur.
You will experience immediate and substantial dilution.
Purchasers of Class A common stock in this offering will pay a price per share that is substantially higher than the pro forma net tangible book value per share of our outstanding Class A common stock immediately after
 
26

Table of Contents
this offering. As a result, purchasers of our Class A common stock in this offering will suffer immediate and substantial dilution. Based on an assumed initial public offering price of $         per share, the mid-point of the price range set forth on the cover page of this prospectus, and our pro forma net tangible book value as of             , the dilution will be $         per share of Class A common stock to new investors in this offering. If the underwriters sell additional shares of Class A common stock following the exercise of their option to purchase additional shares or if option holders exercise outstanding options to purchase shares of Class A common stock, further dilution could occur.
 
27

Table of Contents
FORWARD-LOOKING STATEMENTS
This prospectus contains forward-looking statements that are subject to risks and uncertainties. All statements other than statements of historical or current fact included in this prospectus are forward-looking statements. Forward-looking statements refer to our current expectations and projections relating to our financial condition, results of operations, plans, objectives, strategies, future performance and business. You can identify forward-looking statements by the fact that they do not relate strictly to historical or current facts. These statements may include words such as “anticipate”, “estimate”, “expect”, “project”, “plan”, “intend”, “believe”, “may”, “might”, “will”, “should”, “can have”, “likely” and other words and terms of similar meaning in connection with any discussion of the timing or nature of future operating or financial performance or other events. For example, all statements we make relating to our estimated and projected earnings, revenues, costs, expenditures, cash flows, growth rates and financial results, our plans and objectives for future operations, growth or initiatives, strategies or the expected outcome or impact of pending or threatened litigation are forward-looking statements. All forward-looking statements are subject to risks and uncertainties that may cause actual results to differ materially from those that we expected, including:
 
 	•	 	our ability to successfully open a significant number of new stores;	
 
 	•	 	effectively adapting to new challenges associated with our expansion into new geographic markets;	
 
 	•	 	our ability to maintain and enhance a strong brand image;	
 
 	•	 	generating adequate cash from our existing stores to support our growth;	
 
 	•	 	identifying and responding to new and changing customer fashion preferences and fashion-related trends;	
 
 	•	 	competing effectively in an environment of intense competition;	
 
 	•	 	containing the increase in the cost of mailing catalogs, paper and printing;	
 
 	•	 	the success of the malls, power centers, neighborhood and lifestyle centers, outlet centers and street-front locations in which our stores are located;	
 
 	•	 	our ability to attract customers in the various retail venues and geographies in which our stores are located;	
 
 	•	 	adapting to declines in consumer confidence and decreases in consumer spending;	
 
 	•	 	our ability to adapt to significant changes in sales due to the seasonality of our business;	
 
 	•	 	price reductions or inventory shortages resulting from failure to purchase the appropriate amount of inventory in advance of the season in which it will be sold;	
 
 	•	 	natural disasters, unusually adverse weather conditions, boycotts and unanticipated events;	
 
 	•	 	changes in the competitive environment in our industry and the markets we serve, including increased competition from other retailers;	
 
 	•	 	our dependence on third-party vendors to provide us with sufficient quantities of merchandise at acceptable prices;	
 
 	•	 	increases in costs of fuel or other energy, transportation or utility costs and in the costs of labor and employment;	
 
 	•	 	our ability to balance proprietary branded merchandise with the third-party branded merchandise we sell;	
 
 	•	 	most of our merchandise is made in foreign countries, making price and availability of our merchandise susceptible to international trade conditions;	
 
 	•	 	failure of our vendors and their manufacturing sources to use acceptable labor or other practices;	
 
28

Table of Contents
 	•	 	our dependence upon key executive management or our inability to hire or retain the talent required for our business;	
 
 	•	 	our ability to effectively adapt to our rapid expansion in recent years and our planned expansion;	
 
 	•	 	failure of our information technology systems to support our current and growing business, before and after our planned upgrades;	
 
 	•	 	disruptions in our supply chain and distribution center;	
 
 	•	 	our indebtedness and lease obligations, including restrictions on our operations contained therein;	
 
 	•	 	our reliance upon independent third-party transportation providers for certain of our product shipments;	
 
 	•	 	our ability to maintain comparable store sales or sales per square foot, which may cause our operations and stock price to be volatile;	
 
 	•	 	disruptions to our information systems in the ordinary course or as a result of systems upgrades;	
 
 	•	 	our inability to protect our trademarks or other intellectual property rights;	
 
 	•	 	acts of war, terrorism or civil unrest;	
 
 	•	 	the impact of governmental laws and regulations and the outcomes of legal proceedings;	
 
 	•	 	our ability to secure the personal financial information of our customers and comply with the security standards for the credit card industry;	
 
 	•	 	our failure to maintain adequate internal controls over our financial and management systems; and	
 
 	•	 	increased costs as a result of being a public company.	
We derive many of our forward-looking statements from our operating budgets and forecasts, which are based upon detailed assumptions. While we believe that our assumptions are reasonable, we caution that it is very difficult to predict the impact of known factors, and it is impossible for us to anticipate all factors that could affect our actual results.
See “Risk Factors” for a more complete discussion of the risks and uncertainties mentioned above and for discussion of other risks and uncertainties. All forward-looking statements attributable to us are expressly qualified in their entirety by these cautionary statements as well as others made in this prospectus and hereafter in our other SEC filings and public communications. You should evaluate all forward-looking statements made by us in the context of these risks and uncertainties.
We caution you that the risks and uncertainties identified by us may not be all of the factors that are important to you. Furthermore, the forward-looking statements included in this prospectus are made only as of the date hereof. We undertake no obligation to publicly update or revise any forward-looking statement as a result of new information, future events or otherwise, except as otherwise required by law.
 
29

Table of Contents
USE OF PROCEEDS
We estimate that the net proceeds from our sale of          shares of our Class A common stock in this offering will be approximately $         million, assuming an offering price of $         per share (the mid-point of the price range set forth on the cover page of this prospectus) and after deducting the underwriting discount and estimated offering expenses payable by us, a portion of which will be reimbursed to us by the underwriters. A $1.00 increase (decrease) in the assumed initial public offering price of $         per share would increase (decrease) the net proceeds to us of this offering by $         million, assuming the sale by us of          shares of our Class A common stock and after deducting the underwriting discount and estimated expenses. A 1.0 million increase (decrease) in the number of shares offered by us, assuming an initial public offering price of $         per share, which is the mid-point of the price range set forth on the cover page of this prospectus, would increase (decrease) the net proceeds to us by $         million, after deducting the underwriting discount and estimated expenses.
The principal purposes of this offering are to obtain capital to pay all undistributed cumulative earnings to date to the current shareholders of World of Jeans & Tops, obtain additional capital, create a public market for our common stock and facilitate our future access to the public equity markets. Prior to completion of this offering, World of Jeans & Tops will issue notes to its then-existing “S” Corporation shareholders, which will reflect the amount of undistributed cumulative earnings remaining in World of Jeans & Tops from the date of its formation up to the date of termination of its “S” Corporation status. The notes have a term of 15 days and their interest rate will be the one-month LIBOR rate as of the date of their execution. We expect to use $84.0 million of the net proceeds from this offering to pay in full the principal amount of the notes, as well as any accrued interest. Therefore, our stockholders immediately following this offering, who were also the shareholders of World of Jeans & Tops prior to termination of its “S” Corporation status, will receive most of the net proceeds from the sale of shares offered by us.
We expect proceeds in excess of the final “S” Corporation distribution to be approximately $         million. We intend to use such excess proceeds for working capital and other general corporate purposes, which may include funding new store openings and funding other operating costs such as merchandise inventories, payroll, store rent, marketing and infrastructure expenditures. The amounts and timing of any expenditures will vary depending on the amount of cash generated by our operations, competitive and technological developments and the rate of growth of our business. Therefore, we do not currently have a specific plan for the excess proceeds from this offering and our management will have significant flexibility in applying the net proceeds. Pending their use, we intend to invest the excess proceeds from this offering in short term, investment-grade, interest-bearing instruments.
 
30

Table of Contents
DIVIDEND POLICY
We do not anticipate paying dividends on our common stock after the completion of this offering. We intend to retain all available funds and any future earnings for use in the operation and expansion of our business. Any determination in the future to pay dividends will depend upon our financial condition, capital requirements, operating results and other factors deemed relevant by our board of directors, including any contractual or statutory restrictions on our ability to pay dividends.
As an “S” Corporation, World of Jeans & Tops distributed to its shareholders every year an amount sufficient to cover their tax liability due to the income that was reported by the shareholders on their individual tax returns. Additional amounts were distributed to its shareholders at the discretion of the board of directors of World of Jeans & Tops. For fiscal years 2010 and 2011, World of Jeans & Tops paid distributions to its shareholders of $22.2 million and $36.0 million, respectively. In connection with the Reorganization Transaction, World of Jeans & Tops will issue to its existing shareholders notes in an aggregate principal amount equal to $84.0 million. This represents all of World of Jeans & Tops’ undistributed taxable income from the date of its formation up to the date of termination of its “S” Corporation status. Upon completion of this offering, we will use a majority of the net proceeds from this offering to pay in full the principal amount of these undistributed earnings notes as described under “Use of Proceeds”. We do not anticipate paying any additional distributions to our “S” Corporation shareholders subsequent to the consummation of this offering.
 
31

Table of Contents
CAPITALIZATION
The following table sets forth our cash and cash equivalents and capitalization as of January 28, 2012:
 
 	•	 	on an actual basis, reflecting the capitalization of World of Jeans & Tops prior to the Reorganization Transaction;	
 
 	•	 	on a pro forma basis to give effect to the Reorganization Transaction as described under “Description of Capital Stock—Reorganization Transaction”, including (i) the issuance by World of Jeans & Tops of the undistributed taxable earnings notes to its then shareholders in the aggregate principal amount representing 100% of its undistributed taxable income from the date of its formation through the date of termination of its “S” Corporation status, as a final distribution prior to the termination of its “S” Corporation status, equal to $84.0 million and (ii) an increase in net deferred tax assets of approximately $3.9 million (consisting of an increase in current deferred tax assets of $5.0 million and an increase in non-current deferred tax liabilities of $1.1 million) assuming World of Jeans & Tops’ “S” Corporation status terminated on January 28, 2012; and	
 
 	•	 	on a pro forma basis as adjusted to give effect to: (i) the sale of         shares of our Class A common stock in this offering at an assumed initial public offering price of $     per share, which is the mid-point of the price range set forth on the cover page of this prospectus, after deducting the underwriting discount and estimated offering expenses payable by us, a portion of which will be reimbursed to us by the underwriters, (ii) the application of the estimated proceeds from this offering as described under “Use of Proceeds” and (iii) the recognition of cumulative to date stock-based compensation expense for nonqualified stock options, which increases additional paid-in capital by $     million.	
You should read this table in conjunction with “Use of Proceeds”, “Selected Consolidated Financial and Other Data”, “Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations” and our consolidated financial statements and related notes included elsewhere in this prospectus.

 	  	As of January 28, 2012	 	
 	  	Actual	 	  	Pro Forma	 	  	Pro Forma
as adjusted(2)	 	
 	  	(unaudited)	 	  	(unaudited)	 	  	(unaudited)	 	
 	  	(In thousands, except per share amounts)	 	
Cash and cash equivalents	  	$	25,091	  	  	$	25,091	  	  	 	 	 	
 	  	 	 	 	  	 	 	 	  	 	 	 	
Debt:	  	 	 	 	  	 	 	 	  	 	 	 	
Existing line of credit (1)	  	 	—  	  	  	 	 	 	  	 	 	 	
Other debt (capital lease liability)	  	 	4,638	  	  	 	 	 	  	 	 	 	
 	  	 	 	 	  	 	 	 	  	 	 	 	
Total debt	  	 	4,638	  	  	 	—  	  	  	 	—  	  	
Stockholders’ equity:	  	 	 	 	  	 	 	 	  	 	 	 	
Common stock, $0.001 par value; 21,600 shares authorized, 20,000 shares issued and outstanding	  	 	20	  	  	 	 	 	  	 	 	 	
Common stock (Class A), $0.001 par value; 100,000 shares authorized,             shares issued and outstanding	  	 	—  	  	  	 	 	 	  	 	 	 	
Common stock (Class B), $0.001 par value; 35,000 shares authorized,             shares issued and outstanding	  	 	—  	  	  	 	 	 	  	 	 	 	
Preferred stock, $0.001 par value; 10,000 shares authorized, no shares issued or outstanding	  	 	—  	  	  	 	 	 	  	 	 	 	
Additional paid-in capital	  	 	150	  	  	 	 	 	  	 	 	 	
Retained earnings	  	 	60,254	  	  	 	 	 	  	 	 	 	
 	  	 	 	 	  	 	 	 	  	 	 	 	
Total stockholders’ equity	  	 	60,424	  	  	 	—  	  	  	 	—  	  	
 	  	 	 	 	  	 	 	 	  	 	 	 	
Total capitalization	  	$	65,062	  	  	$	—  	  	  	$	—  	  	

(1)	The existing line of credit with Wells Fargo Bank, NA provides for borrowings of up to $15.0 million, of which $15.0 million was available to borrow as of January 28, 2012. Upon consummation of the initial public	
 
32

Table of Contents
 	offering, our existing line of credit with Wells Fargo Bank, NA will be amended. We expect the amended line of credit to contain substantially the same terms as the previous line of credit, but provide for borrowings of up to $25.0 million.	
(2)	A $1.00 increase (decrease) in the assumed initial public offering price of $         per share, which is the mid-point of the range set forth on the cover page of this prospectus, would increase (decrease) each of additional paid-in capital, total stockholders’ equity and total capitalization by approximately $         million, assuming the number of shares offered by us, as set forth on the cover page of this prospectus, remains the same and after deducting the underwriting discount and estimated offering expenses payable by us, a portion of which will be reimbursed to us by the underwriters. Similarly, each increase (decrease) of 1.0 million shares in the number of shares offered by us, would increase (decrease) additional paid-in capital, total stockholders’ equity and total capitalization by approximately $         million. The pro forma as adjusted information discussed above is illustrative only and will be adjusted based on the actual public offering price and terms of this offering determined at pricing.	
 
33

Table of Contents
DILUTION
If you invest in our Class A common stock, your investment will be diluted immediately to the extent of the difference between the public offering price per share of our Class A common stock and the pro forma net tangible book value per share of our Class A common stock after this offering.
Our pro forma net tangible book value as of          was approximately $         million, or $         per share of common stock. Pro forma net tangible book value per share represents the amount of our total tangible assets reduced by the amount of our total liabilities, divided by the number of shares of our common stock outstanding, on a pro forma basis after giving effect to the Reorganization Transaction as described under “Description of Capital Stock—Reorganization Transaction”, including (i) the issuance by World of Jeans & Tops of 100% of its undistributed taxable earnings to its then shareholders resulting from the termination of its “S” Corporation status, equal to $84.0 million, (ii) an increase in net deferred tax assets of $3.9 million (consisting of an increase in current deferred tax assets of $5.0 million and an increase in non-current deferred tax liabilities of $1.1 million) assuming the “S” Corporation status of World of Jeans & Tops terminated on January 28, 2012 and (iii) compensation expense of $         million resulting from prior stock options issued under our 2007 Stock Option Plan becoming exercisable upon completion of this offering.
After giving effect to (i) the sale of the          shares of Class A common stock offered by us assuming an initial public offering price of $         per share, which is the mid-point of the price range set forth on the cover page of this prospectus, less the underwriting discount and estimated offering expenses payable by us, a portion of which will be reimbursed to us by the underwriters and (ii) the application of the estimated proceeds from this offering as described in “Use of Proceeds”, our pro forma as adjusted net tangible book value as of          would have been approximately $         million, or $         per share. This represents an immediate increase in pro forma net tangible book value of $         per share to existing stockholders and an immediate dilution of $         per share to new investors. The following table illustrates this dilution.

Assumed initial public offering price per share	  	 	 	 	  	$	 	  	
 	  	 	 	 	  	 	 	 	
Pro forma net tangible book value per share as of                     	  	$	 	  	  	 	 	 	
 	  	 	 	 	  	 	 	 	
Increase in pro forma net tangible book value per share attributable to this offering	  	 	 	 	  	 	 	 	
 	  	 	 	 	  	 	 	 	
Pro forma net tangible book value per share as of                     , as adjusted for this offering	  	 	 	 	  	 	 	 	
 	  	 	 	 	  	 	 	 	
Dilution per share to new investors	  	 	 	 	  	$	 	  	
 	  	 	 	 	  	 	 	 	
After this offering and assuming the exercise in full of all options outstanding and exercisable as of         , pro forma net tangible book value per share as of         , as adjusted for this offering, would have been approximately $         million, representing an immediate increase in pro forma net tangible book value of $         per share to existing stockholders and an immediate dilution of $         per share to new investors.
A $1.00 increase (decrease) in the assumed initial public offering price of $         per share, which is the mid-point of the price range set forth on the cover page of this prospectus, would increase (decrease) our pro forma as adjusted net tangible book value by approximately $         million, or $         per share, and the dilution per share to investors in this offering by approximately $         per share, assuming no change to the number of shares offered by us as set forth on the cover page of this prospectus, and after deducting the underwriting discount and estimated offering expenses payable by us, a portion of which will be reimbursed to us by the underwriters. We may also increase or decrease the number of shares we are offering. A 1.0 million increase (decrease) in the number of shares offered by us would increase (decrease) our pro forma as adjusted net tangible book value by approximately $         million, or $         per share, assuming an initial public offering price of $         per share, which is the mid-point of the price range set forth on the cover page of this prospectus, and the dilution per share to investors in this offering by approximately $         per share after deducting the underwriting discount and estimated offering expenses payable by us, a portion of which will be reimbursed to us by the underwriters. The pro forma as adjusted information discussed above is illustrative only.
If the underwriters exercise their option to purchase up to          additional shares of Class A common stock in this offering from us, our pro forma as adjusted net tangible book value as of          and dilution per share to new investors will not change.
 
34

Table of Contents
SELECTED CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL AND OTHER DATA
The following tables present selected consolidated financial and other data as of and for the periods indicated, and certain unaudited pro forma information to reflect our conversion from an “S” Corporation to a “C” Corporation for income tax purposes. The selected consolidated statement of operations data for the fiscal years ended January 30, 2010, January 29, 2011 and January 28, 2012 and selected consolidated balance sheet data as of January 29, 2011 and January 28, 2012 are derived from our consolidated financial statements audited by Deloitte & Touche LLP, our independent registered public accounting firm, included elsewhere in this prospectus. The selected consolidated statement of operations data for the fiscal years ended February 2, 2008 and January 31, 2009 and the selected consolidated balance sheet data as of February 2, 2008, January 31, 2009 and January 30, 2010 are derived from our audited consolidated financial statements that have not been included in this prospectus. The historical results presented below are not necessarily indicative of the results to be expected for any future period. You should read this selected consolidated financial data in conjunction with the consolidated financial statements and accompanying notes and the information under “Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations” appearing elsewhere in this prospectus.

 	  	Fiscal Year Ended(1)	 	
 	  	February 2,
2008	 	  	January 31,
2009	 	  	January 30,
2010	 	 	January 29,
2011	 	 	January 28,
2012	 	
 	  	(in thousands, except per share data)	 	
Consolidated Statements of Operations Data:	  	 	 	 	  	 	 	 	  	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	
Net sales	  	$	245,913	  	  	$	254,983	  	  	$	282,764	  	 	$	332,604	  	 	$	400,624	  	
Cost of goods sold(2)	  	 	154,357	  	  	 	172,107	  	  	 	195,430	  	 	 	229,989	  	 	 	271,482	  	
 	  	 	 	 	  	 	 	 	  	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	
Gross profit	  	 	91,556	  	  	 	82,876	  	  	 	87,334	  	 	 	102,615	  	 	 	129,142	  	
Selling, general and administrative expenses	  	 	51,840	  	  	 	59,043	  	  	 	65,912	  	 	 	77,668	  	 	 	94,217	  	
 	  	 	 	 	  	 	 	 	  	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	
Operating income	  	 	39,716	  	  	 	23,833	  	  	 	21,422	  	 	 	24,947	  	 	 	34,925	  	
Interest income (expense), net	  	 	607	  	  	 	35	  	  	 	(284	) 	 	 	(249	) 	 	 	(196	) 	
 	  	 	 	 	  	 	 	 	  	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	
Income before provision for income taxes	  	 	40,323	  	  	 	23,868	  	  	 	21,138	  	 	 	24,698	  	 	 	34,729	  	
Provision for income taxes	  	 	416	  	  	 	262	  	  	 	275	  	 	 	282	  	 	 	389	  	
 	  	 	 	 	  	 	 	 	  	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	
Net income	  	$	39,907	  	  	$	23,606	  	  	$	20,863	  	 	$	24,416	  	 	$	34,340	  	
 	  	 	 	 	  	 	 	 	  	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	
Net income per common share:	  	 	 	 	  	 	 	 	  	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	
Basic	  	$	2.00	  	  	$	1.18	  	  	$	1.04	  	 	$	1.22	  	 	$	1.72	  	
Diluted	  	$	2.00	  	  	$	1.18	  	  	$	1.04	  	 	$	1.21	  	 	$	1.68	  	
Weighted average shares outstanding:	  	 	 	 	  	 	 	 	  	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	
Basic	  	 	20,000	  	  	 	20,000	  	  	 	20,000	  	 	 	20,000	  	 	 	20,000	  	
Diluted	  	 	20,000	  	  	 	20,000	  	  	 	20,014	  	 	 	20,098	  	 	 	20,500	  	
Pro Forma Income Information(3):	  	 	 	 	  	 	 	 	  	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	
Pro forma provision for income taxes	  	$	16,129	  	  	$	9,547	  	  	$	8,455	  	 	$	9,879	  	 	$	13,892	  	
Pro forma net income	  	$	24,194	  	  	$	14,321	  	  	$	12,683	  	 	$	14,819	  	 	$	20,837	  	
Pro forma basic net income per common
share(4)	  	 	 	 	  	 	 	 	  	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	
Pro forma diluted net income per common share(4)	  	 	 	 	  	 	 	 	  	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	
 
35

Table of Contents
 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	
 	  	Fiscal Year Ended	 	
 	  	February 2,
2008	 	 	January 31,
2009	 	 	January 30,
2010	 	 	January 29,
2011	 	 	January 28,
2012	 	
Operating Data (unaudited):	  	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	
Stores operating at beginning of period	  	 	61	  	 	 	73	  	 	 	99	  	 	 	111	  	 	 	125	  	
Stores opened during the period	  	 	13	  	 	 	26	  	 	 	13	  	 	 	16	  	 	 	16	  	
Stores closed during the period	  	 	1	  	 	 	—  	  	 	 	1	  	 	 	2	  	 	 	1	  	
 	  	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	
Stores operating at end of period	  	 	73	  	 	 	99	  	 	 	111	  	 	 	125	  	 	 	140	  	
Comparable store sales change(5)	  	 	8.7	% 	 	 	-12.5	% 	 	 	-3.1	% 	 	 	6.7	% 	 	 	10.7	% 	
Total square feet at end of period	  	 	576,156	  	 	 	775,832	  	 	 	862,971	  	 	 	967,011	  	 	 	1,094,419	  	
Average square footage per store at end of period	  	 	7,893	  	 	 	7,837	  	 	 	7,775	  	 	 	7,736	  	 	 	7,817	  	
Average net sales per store (in thousands)(6)	  	$	3,452	  	 	$	2,750	  	 	$	2,479	  	 	$	2,528	  	 	$	2,718	  	
Average net store sales per square foot(6)	  	$	439	  	 	$	349	  	 	$	318	  	 	$	326	  	 	$	350	  	
Capital expenditures (in thousands)	  	$	14,817	  	 	$	23,406	  	 	$	17,514	  	 	$	15,674	  	 	$	20,223	  	

  	  	As of	 	
 	  	February 2,
2008	 	  	January 31,
2009	 	  	January 30,
2010	 	  	January 29,
2011	 	  	January 28,
2012	 	
 	  	(in thousands)	 	
Consolidated Balance Sheet Data:	  	 	 	 	  	 	 	 	  	 	 	 	  	 	 	 	  	 	 	 	
Cash and cash equivalents	  	$	25,359	  	  	$	24,535	  	  	$	25,705	  	  	$	29,338	  	  	$	25,091	  	
Working capital	  	 	24,354	  	  	 	22,779	  	  	 	29,639	  	  	 	33,907	  	  	 	27,673	  	
Total assets	  	 	93,449	  	  	 	110,142	  	  	 	115,454	  	  	 	130,974	  	  	 	140,819	  	
Long-term debt, including current portion(7)	  	 	6,933	  	  	 	6,412	  	  	 	5,857	  	  	 	5,266	  	  	 	4,638	  	
Shareholders’ equity	  	 	46,637	  	  	 	55,053	  	  	 	59,896	  	  	 	62,092	  	  	 	60,424	  	
 
(1)	All fiscal years presented include 52 weeks.	
(2)	Includes buying, distribution and occupancy costs.	
(3)	The unaudited pro forma income statement for all years presented gives effect to an adjustment for income tax expense as if we had been a “C” Corporation at an assumed combined federal, state and local effective income tax rate, which approximates our statutory income tax rate, of 40%	
(4)	Reflects the increase in the number of shares which would be sufficient to replace the capital in excess of current year earnings being withdrawn pursuant the Reorganization Transaction. The pro forma adjustment to basic and diluted weighted average shares outstanding for the fiscal year ended January 28, 2012 is         and         , respectively.	
(5)	Comparable store sales are net sales from stores that have been open at least 12 full fiscal months as of the end of the current reporting period. A remodeled or relocated store is included in comparable store sales, both during and after construction, if the square footage of the store was not changed by more than 20% and the store was not closed for more than five days in any fiscal month. Comparable store sales include sales through our e-commerce store but exclude gift card breakage income and e-commerce shipping and handling fee revenue. E-commerce sales contributed 3.4%, 1.9%, 2.9%, 3.3% and 2.3% to the comparable store sales change for fiscal years 2007, 2008, 2009, 2010 and 2011, respectively.	
(6)	The number of stores and the amount of square footage reflect the number of days during the period that new stores were open. E-commerce sales, e-commerce shipping revenue, and gift card breakage income are excluded from our sales in deriving net sales per store.	
(7)	Comprised solely of a capital lease for our corporate headquarters and distribution center.	
 
36

Table of Contents
MANAGEMENT’S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS OF FINANCIAL CONDITION
AND RESULTS OF OPERATIONS
You should read the following discussion in conjunction with the consolidated historical financial statements and the accompanying notes included elsewhere in this prospectus, as well as the information presented under “Selected Consolidated Financial and Other Data”. The statements in the following discussion and analysis regarding expectations about our future performance, liquidity and capital resources and any other non-historical statements in this discussion and analysis, are forward-looking statements. These forward-looking statements are subject to numerous risks and uncertainties, including, but not limited to, those described under “Risk Factors”, “Forward-Looking Statements” and other matters included elsewhere in this prospectus. Our actual results could differ materially from those contained in or implied by any forward-looking statements.
We operate on a fiscal calendar widely used by the retail industry that results in a given fiscal year consisting of a 52- or 53-week period ending on the Saturday closest to January 31 of the following year. References to “fiscal year 2011” or “fiscal 2011” refer to the fiscal year ended January 28, 2012, references to “fiscal year 2010” or “fiscal 2010” refer to the fiscal year ended January 29, 2011 and references to “fiscal year 2009” or “fiscal 2009” refer to the fiscal year ended January 30, 2010. Each of fiscal years 2011, 2010 and 2009 consisted of a 52-week period.
Overview
Tilly’s is a fast-growing destination specialty retailer of West Coast inspired apparel, footwear and accessories. We believe we bring together an unparalleled selection of the most sought-after brands rooted in action sports, music, art and fashion. Our West Coast heritage dates back to 1982 when Hezy Shaked and Tilly Levine opened our first store in Orange County, California. As of January 28, 2012, we operated 140 stores in 14 states, averaging approximately 7,800 square feet. We also sell our products through our e-commerce website, www.tillys.com.
Our strong growth and operating results reflect initiatives taken by our management team as well as our customers’ increasing awareness of our brand and merchandise assortment as we have expanded our presence in both existing and new markets. We increased net sales 20%, from $332.6 million in fiscal year 2010 to $400.6 million in fiscal year 2011. We increased operating income 40%, from $24.9 million in fiscal year 2010 to $34.9 million in fiscal year 2011. Our comparable store sales increased 10.7% in fiscal year 2011 after a 6.7% increase in fiscal year 2010. Since the beginning of fiscal 2007, we have more than doubled our store count from 61 stores to 140 stores at the end of fiscal year 2011.
We expect to continue our strong growth in the future. We believe there is a significant opportunity to expand our store base to more than 500 stores over the next 10 years. We plan to add a total of at least 21 net new stores in fiscal year 2012 and to continue opening new stores at an annual rate of approximately 15% for the next several years thereafter. We expect to fund this store expansion through our cash on hand, which may include a portion of the proceeds from this offering, and cash flows from operations. We believe our success operating in different retail venues and geographies demonstrates the portability of Tilly’s and provides us with flexibility for future expansion. We also expect to continue to support our comparable store sales by consistently offering new, on-trend and relevant merchandise, increasing our brand awareness, providing an engaging store experience for our core customers and maintaining our high level of customer service.
Our unit growth is supported by our new store economics, which we believe to be compelling. Our new store model assumes a target store size averaging 7,500 to 8,000 square feet. In the first 12 months after opening, our new store model targets net sales of approximately $2.2 million and cash flows of $300,000, with cash flows rising to over $400,000 in the second 12 months as the store begins to mature. The target net investment to open our stores is between $500,000 and $550,000, reflecting a mild inflationary increase to the range of historical
 
37

Table of Contents
average costs incurred to open stores since the beginning of 2005. This results in an average pre-tax cash-on-cash payback period on our investment of about 18 months.
The sales and cash flow targets as well as the range of net investment targets are based on historical results, including store openings in fiscal 2011. The average store net investment range reflects the initial store build-out costs net of landlord allowances, preopening expenses and the investment in initial inventories, net of payables. The expected net investment range relies in part on a continuation of the historical levels of landlord allowances. Based on past real estate industry practices and our experience leasing and opening new locations in a variety of real estate environments and markets, we expect the average net investment, including the amount of landlord allowances, to be generally consistent over the next several years. However, if the amount of landlord allowances drop significantly, the amount of net investment to open new stores could rise, as could the expected cash-on-cash payback period. Furthermore, the Company’s anticipated net investment may increase over time depending on a number of factors beyond our control, such as the cost of construction materials, competition for new retail locations and changes in the commercial real estate environment. In addition, the Company’s anticipated yearly cash flows may be impacted by several factors, such as the level of competition and the specific store location at a particular venue and the concentration of our stores within a limited geographic area.
Over the last five years, we have invested over $20 million in infrastructure and systems to support our recent and long-term growth. We believe our distribution and allocation capabilities are unique within the industry and allow us to quickly sort and process merchandise and deliver it to our stores in a floor-ready format for immediate display. We believe our distribution infrastructure can support a national retail footprint in excess of 500 stores with minimal incremental capital investment. In addition, we anticipate spending approximately $7 million to equip our new e-commerce distribution center, which we expect to open in the first half of fiscal year 2013. We plan to fund the tenant improvements for this leased facility from cash on hand and cash flows from operations.
We believe our business strategy will continue to offer significant opportunity, but it also presents risks and challenges. These risks and challenges include, but are not limited to, that we may not be able to effectively identify and respond to changing fashion trends and customer preferences, that we may not be able to find desirable locations for new stores and that we may not be able to effectively manage our future growth. In addition, our financial results can be expected to be directly impacted by trends in the general economy. A decline in consumer spending or a substantial increase in product costs due to commodity cost increases or general inflation could lead to a reduction in our sales as well as greater margin pressure as costs may not be able to be passed on to consumers and the competitive environment could become more highly promotional. See “Risk Factors” for other important factors that could adversely impact us and our results of operations. We strive to ensure that addressing these risks does not divert our attention from continuing to build on the strengths that we believe have driven the growth of our business.
How We Assess the Performance of Our Business
In assessing the performance of our business, we consider a variety of performance and financial measures. The key indicators of the financial condition and operating performance of our business are net sales, comparable store sales, gross profit, selling, general and administrative expenses and operating income.
Net Sales
Net sales reflect revenue from the sale of our merchandise at store locations as well as sales of merchandise through our e-commerce store, which is reflected in sales when the merchandise is received by the customer. Net sales also include shipping and handling fees for e-commerce shipments that have been delivered to the customer. Net sales are net of returns on sales during the period as well as an estimate of returns expected in the future stemming from current period sales. Revenue from the sale of gift cards is deferred and not included in net
 
38

Table of Contents
sales until the gift cards are used to purchase merchandise. However, over time, the redemption of some gift cards becomes remote (referred to as gift card breakage). Revenue from estimated gift card breakage is also included in net sales.
Our business is seasonal and as a result our revenues fluctuate from quarter to quarter. In addition, our revenues in any given quarter can be affected by a number of factors including the timing of holidays and weather patterns. The third and fourth quarters of the fiscal year, which include the back-to-school and holiday sales seasons, have historically produced stronger sales and disproportionately stronger operating results than have the first two quarters of the fiscal year.
Comparable Store Sales
Comparable store sales are net sales from stores that have been open at least 12 full fiscal months as of the end of the current reporting period. A remodeled or relocated store is included in comparable store sales, both during and after construction, if the square footage of the store was not changed by more than 20% and the store was not closed for more than five days in any fiscal month. Comparable store sales include sales through our e-commerce store, but exclude gift card breakage income and e-commerce shipping and handling fee revenue. Some of our competitors and other retailers may calculate comparable or “same store” sales differently than we do. As a result, data in this prospectus regarding our comparable store sales may not be comparable to similar data made available by other retailers.
Measuring the change in year-over-year comparable store sales allows us to evaluate how our store base is performing. Numerous factors affect our comparable store sales, including:
 
 	•	 	overall economic trends;	
 
 	•	 	our ability to identify and respond effectively to consumer preferences and fashion trends;	
 
 	•	 	competition;	
 
 	•	 	the timing of our releases of new and seasonal styles;	
 
 	•	 	changes in our product mix;	
 
 	•	 	pricing;	
 
 	•	 	the level of customer service that we provide in stores;	
 
 	•	 	our ability to source and distribute products efficiently;	
 
 	•	 	calendar shifts of holiday or seasonal periods;	
 
 	•	 	the number and timing of store openings and the relative proportion of new stores to mature stores; and	
 
 	•	 	the timing and success of promotional and advertising efforts.	
Opening new stores is an important part of our growth strategy and we expect a significant percentage of our net sales during this growth period to come from non-comparable store sales. Accordingly, comparable store sales are only one element we use to assess the success of our business.
Gross Profit
Gross profit is equal to our net sales less our cost of goods sold. Cost of goods sold reflects the direct cost of purchased merchandise as well as buying, distribution and occupancy costs. Buying costs include compensation expense for our internal buying organization. Distribution costs include inbound freight costs as well as costs for receiving, processing, warehousing and shipping of merchandise to or from our distribution center, to our e-commerce customers and between store locations. Occupancy costs include the rent, common area
 
39

Table of Contents
maintenance, utilities, property taxes, security, and depreciation costs of all store locations. These costs are significant and can be expected to continue to increase as our company grows. The components of our reported cost of goods sold may not be comparable to those of other retail companies.
We regularly analyze the components of gross profit as well as gross profit as a percentage of net sales. Specifically we look at the initial markup on purchases, markdowns and reserves, shrinkage, buying costs, distribution costs and occupancy costs. Any inability to obtain acceptable levels of initial markups, a significant increase in our use of markdowns or a significant increase in inventory shrinkage or inability to generate sufficient sales leverage on the buying, distribution and occupancy components of cost of goods sold could have an adverse impact on our gross profit and results of operations.
Gross profit is also impacted by shifts in the proportion of sales of proprietary branded products compared to third-party branded products, as well as by sales mix shifts within and between brands and between major product categories such as guys’ and juniors’ apparel, footwear or accessories. A substantial shift in the mix of products could have a material impact on our results of operations. In addition, gross profit and gross profit as a percent of sales have historically been higher in the third and fourth quarters of the fiscal year, as these periods include the back-to-school and winter holiday selling seasons. This reflects that various costs, including occupancy costs, generally do not increase in proportion to the seasonal sales increase.
Selling, General and Administrative Expenses
Our selling, general and administrative, or SG&A, expenses are composed of store selling expenses and corporate-level general and administrative expenses. Store selling expenses include store and regional support costs, including personnel, advertising and debit and credit card processing costs, e-commerce processing costs and store supplies costs. General and administrative expenses include the payroll and support costs of corporate functions such as executive management, legal, accounting, information systems, human resources and other centralized services. Store selling expenses generally vary proportionately with net sales and store growth. In contrast, general and administrative expenses are generally not directly proportional to net sales and store growth, but will be expected to increase over time to support the needs of our growing company. SG&A expenses as a percentage of net sales are usually higher in lower volume periods and lower in higher volume periods.
The components of our SG&A expenses may not be comparable to those of other retailers. We expect that our SG&A expenses will increase in future periods due to our continuing store growth and in part due to additional legal, accounting, insurance and other expenses we expect to incur as a result of being a public company. Among other things, we expect that compliance with the Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002 and related rules and regulations could result in significant incremental legal, accounting and other overhead costs.
Our stock-based awards contain a performance condition whereby the company’s common stock must be publicly traded in order to exercise vested options. Unrecognized cumulative stock-based compensation expense through January 28, 2012, before any related tax benefit, was $7.1 million. We will recognize this non-cash deferred compensation as an SG&A expense upon the consummation of our initial public offering.
Operating Income
Operating income equals gross profit less SG&A expenses. Operating income excludes interest income, interest expense and income taxes. Operating income percentage measures operating income as a percentage of our net sales.
Income Taxes
Historically, World of Jeans & Tops has elected to be taxed under the provisions of Subchapter “S” of the Internal Revenue Code of 1986, as amended, or the Code, for federal tax purposes. As a result, its income has not
 
40

Table of Contents
been subject to U.S. federal income taxes or state income taxes in those states where the “S” Corporation status is recognized. In general, the corporate income or loss of an “S” Corporation is allocated to its stockholders for inclusion in their personal federal income tax returns and personal state income tax returns in those states where the “S” Corporation status is recognized. No provision or liability for federal or state income tax has been provided in our financial statements except for those states where the “S” Corporation status is not recognized and for the 1.5% California franchise tax to which we are also subject as a California “S” Corporation. The provision for income tax in the current period consists of these taxes. World of Jeans & Tops has distributed funds to its shareholders in an amount necessary to satisfy the shareholders’ estimated personal “S” Corporation income tax liabilities.
As a result of the Reorganization Transaction, World of Jeans & Tops’ “S” Corporation status will terminate and World of Jeans & Tops will be treated as a “C” Corporation under Subchapter C of the Code. The revocation of World of Jeans & Tops’ “S” Corporation election will have a material impact on our results of operations, financial condition and cash flows. Our effective income tax rate will increase and our net income will decrease since we will be subject to both federal and state taxes on our earnings.
Deferred tax assets and liabilities are recognized for the future tax consequences attributable to differences between the financial statement carrying amounts of existing assets and liabilities and their respective tax bases. Deferred tax assets and liabilities are measured using tax rates expected to apply to taxable income in the years in which those temporary differences are expected to be recovered or settled. The effect on deferred tax assets and liabilities of the change in tax rates resulting from our being a “C” Corporation will be recognized in income in the quarter such change takes place. This difference between the financial statement carrying amounts of assets and liabilities and their respective tax basis would have been recorded as a net deferred tax asset of $4.2 million if it had been recorded at the balance sheet date of January 28, 2012.
All pro forma provisions for income taxes and pro forma net income data reflect estimated adjustments for federal and state income taxes as if we had been taxed as a “C” Corporation, rather than an “S” Corporation, at an estimated 40% effective tax rate in all years presented.
 
41

Table of Contents
Results of Operations
The following tables summarize key components of our results of operations for the periods indicated, both in dollars and as a percentage of our net sales.

 	  	Fiscal Year Ended	 	
 	  	January 30,
2010	 	 	January 29,
2011	 	 	January 28,
2012	 	
 	  	(in thousands)	 	
Statements of Income Data:	  	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	
Net sales	  	$	282,764	  	 	$	332,604	  	 	$	400,624	  	
Cost of goods sold	  	 	195,430	  	 	 	229,989	  	 	 	271,482	  	
 	  	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	
Gross profit	  	 	87,334	  	 	 	102,615	  	 	 	129,142	  	
Selling, general and administrative expenses	  	 	65,912	  	 	 	77,668	  	 	 	94,217	  	
 	  	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	
Operating income	  	 	21,422	  	 	 	24,947	  	 	 	34,925	  	
Interest expense, net	  	 	284	  	 	 	249	  	 	 	196	  	
 	  	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	
Income before provision for income taxes	  	 	21,138	  	 	 	24,698	  	 	 	34,729	  	
Provision for income taxes	  	 	275	  	 	 	282	  	 	 	389	  	
 	  	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	
Net income	  	$	20,863	  	 	$	24,416	  	 	$	34,340	  	
 	  	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	
Percentage of Net Sales:	  	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	
Net sales	  	 	100.0	% 	 	 	100.0	% 	 	 	100.0	% 	
Cost of goods sold	  	 	69.1	% 	 	 	69.1	% 	 	 	67.8	% 	
 	  	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	
Gross profit	  	 	30.9	% 	 	 	30.9	% 	 	 	32.2	% 	
Selling, general and administrative expenses	  	 	23.3	% 	 	 	23.4	% 	 	 	23.5	% 	
 	  	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	
Operating income	  	 	7.6	% 	 	 	7.5	% 	 	 	8.7	% 	
Interest expense, net	  	 	0.1	% 	 	 	0.1	% 	 	 	0.0	% 	
 	  	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	
Income before provision for income taxes	  	 	7.5	% 	 	 	7.4	% 	 	 	8.7	% 	
Provision for income taxes	  	 	0.1	% 	 	 	0.1	% 	 	 	0.1	% 	
 	  	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	
Net income	  	 	7.4	% 	 	 	7.3	% 	 	 	8.6	% 	
 	  	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	
Pro Forma Data (unaudited)(1):	  	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	
Income before provision for income taxes	  	$	21,138	  	 	$	24,698	  	 	$	34,729	  	
Pro forma provision for income taxes	  	 	8,455	  	 	 	9,879	  	 	 	13,892	  	
 	  	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	
Pro forma net income	  	$	12,683	  	 	$	14,819	  	 	$	20,837	  	

(1)	The unaudited pro forma income statement for all periods presented gives effect to an adjustment for income tax expense as if we had been a “C” Corporation at an assumed combined federal, state and local effective income tax rate, which approximates our statutory income tax rate, of 40%.	
The following table presents store operating data for the periods indicated.

 	  	Fiscal Year Ended	 	
 	  	January 30,
2010	 	 	January 29,
2011	 	 	January 28,
2012	 	
Store Operating Data:	  	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	
Stores operating at end of period	  	 	111	  	 	 	125	  	 	 	140	  	
Comparable store sales change(1)	  	 	-3.1	% 	 	 	6.7	% 	 	 	10.7	% 	
Total square feet at end of period	  	 	862,971	  	 	 	967,011	  	 	 	1,094,419	  	
Average net sales per store (in thousands)(2)	  	$	2,479	  	 	$	2,528	  	 	$	2,718	  	
Average net sales per square foot(2)	  	$	318	  	 	$	326	  	 	$	350	  	
E-commerce revenues (in thousands)(3)	  	$	22,511	  	 	$	32,804	  	 	$	43,587	  	
 
(1)	Comparable store sales are net sales from stores that have been open at least 12 full fiscal months as of the end of the current reporting period. A remodeled or relocated store is included in comparable store sales,	
 
42

Table of Contents
 	both during and after construction, if the square footage of the store was not changed by more than 20% and the store was not closed for more than five days in any fiscal month. Comparable store sales include sales through our e-commerce store but exclude gift card breakage income and e-commerce shipping and handling fee revenue. E-commerce sales contributed 2.9%, 3.3% and 2.3% to the comparable store sales change for fiscal years 2009, 2010 and 2011, respectively.	
(2)	E-commerce sales, e-commerce shipping fee revenue and gift card breakage are excluded from net sales in deriving average net sales per store and average net sales per square foot.	
(3)	E-commerce revenues include e-commerce sales and e-commerce shipping fee revenue.	
Fiscal Year 2011 Compared to Fiscal Year 2010
Net Sales
Net sales increased from $332.6 million in fiscal year 2010 to $400.6 million in fiscal year 2011, an increase of $68.0 million, or 20%. New stores opened in fiscal year 2011 accounted for $18.8 million of the increase in net sales. Also, $15.2 million of the increase in net sales resulted from the additional portion of the year that stores opened during fiscal year 2010 were operating in fiscal year 2011, as well as fees charged to customers for shipping merchandise sold through our e-commerce store. Net sales also increased due to a comparable store net sales increase of 10.7%, or $34.0 million. The comparable store net sales increase stemmed from higher net sales of guys’, juniors’ and girls’ apparel, footwear and accessories, which was partially offset by slightly lower net sales of boys’ apparel. There were 121 comparable stores and 19 non-comparable stores open at January 28, 2012.
Net sales, including shipping and handling fees, from our e-commerce store increased from $32.8 million in fiscal year 2010 to $43.6 million in fiscal year 2011, an increase of $10.8 million, or 33%. This increase reflects higher sales in all major product categories (guys’ and juniors’ apparel, footwear and accessories), which was attributable at least partially to the greater marketing efforts that directly supported the e-commerce business. E-commerce sales, excluding shipping and handling fees, are included in our calculation of comparable store sales, as comparable store sales is intended to reflect revenue from the sale of merchandise only.
Gross Profit
Gross profit increased from $102.6 million in fiscal year 2010 to $129.1 million in fiscal year 2011, an increase of $26.5 million, or 26%. As a percentage of net sales, gross profit was 30.9% and 32.2% during fiscal years 2010 and 2011, respectively. Of the 1.3% increase, 0.7% related to buying, distribution and occupancy costs increasing at a slower rate than the increase in net sales. The remaining 0.6% of the increase in gross profit as a percentage of net sales was mostly due to lower promotional markdowns.
Selling, General and Administrative Expenses
SG&A expenses increased from $77.7 million in fiscal year 2010 to $94.2 million in fiscal year 2011, an increase of $16.5 million, or 21%. As a percentage of net sales, SG&A expenses were 23.4% and 23.5% during fiscal years 2010 and 2011, respectively.
Store selling expenses increased from $53.7 million in fiscal year 2010 to $63.8 million in fiscal year 2011, an increase of $10.1 million, or 19%. As a percentage of net sales, store selling expenses were 16.1% and 15.9% during fiscal years 2010 and 2011, respectively.
The following contributed to the decrease in store selling expenses as a percentage of net sales:
 
 	•	 	marketing costs increased $3.0 million, or 0.3% as a percentage of net sales, reflecting growth in the size and number of marketing campaigns, including the frequency and distribution of catalog mailings as well as marketing costs incurred to support and drive the growth of our e-commerce business;	
 
43

Table of Contents
 	•	 	store and regional payroll, payroll benefits and related personnel costs increased $6.2 million, but decreased 0.4% as a percentage of net sales, reflecting cost leverage as these costs increased more slowly than net sales; and	
 
 	•	 	supplies and other support costs increased $0.9 million, but decreased 0.1% as a percentage of net sales.	
General and administrative expenses increased from $24.0 million in fiscal year 2010 to $30.4 million in fiscal year 2011, an increase of $6.4 million, or 27%. As a percentage of net sales, general and administrative expenses were 7.2% and 7.6% during fiscal years 2010 and 2011, respectively.
The following contributed to the increase in general and administrative expenses as a percentage of net sales:
 
 	•	 	payroll, payroll benefits and related costs for corporate office personnel increased $6.6 million, or 0.8% as a percentage of net sales. This increase reflects the addition of staff to support company growth and pay increases, and an increase in incentive pay reflecting individual and company-wide performance;	
 
 	•	 	depreciation, legal and other office expenses did not change significantly in absolute terms between fiscal years 2010 and 2011, but decreased 0.3% as a percentage of net sales; and	
 
 	•	 	a charge for the impairment of the fixed assets at one store location of $0.8 million in fiscal year 2010 and one store location of $0.6 million in fiscal year 2011, which represented 0.2% and 0.1% as a percentage of net sales in each year, respectively.	
Operating Income
Operating income increased from $24.9 million in fiscal year 2010 to $34.9 million in fiscal year 2011, an increase of $10.0 million, or 40%. As a percentage of net sales, operating income was 7.5% and 8.7% during fiscal years 2010 and 2011, respectively. Of the 1.2% increase in operating income as a percentage of net sales, 0.6% was due to lower product costs as a percentage of net sales resulting from lower promotional markdowns, and the remaining 0.6% was due to other costs and expenses increasing at a slower rate than net sales.
Interest Income (Expense), Net
Net interest expense was $0.2 million in fiscal year 2010 and fiscal year 2011. Net interest expense reflects interest paid on a capitalized lease of our corporate office and distribution center as well as costs related to maintaining our unused line of credit bank facility, net of interest income earned on cash balances and on tenant construction allowances due from landlords.
Provision for Income Taxes
Income taxes were $0.3 million and $0.4 million in fiscal years 2010 and 2011, respectively. This reflected a slight drop in the effective tax rate, from 1.14% of income before provision for income taxes in fiscal year 2010 to 1.12% of income before provision for income taxes in fiscal year 2011.
Historically, World of Jeans & Tops has recognized income taxes as an “S” Corporation for federal and state income tax purposes and therefore, with the exception of a limited number of state and local jurisdictions, it has not been subject to income taxes. The shareholders of World of Jeans & Tops, and not World of Jeans & Tops itself, have been subject to income tax on their distributive share of its earnings. In connection with the Reorganization Transaction, World of Jeans & Tops will convert to a “C” Corporation. On a pro forma basis, if World of Jeans & Tops had been taxed as a “C” Corporation at an estimated 40% effective tax rate, income taxes would have increased from $9.9 million in fiscal year 2010 to $13.9 million in fiscal year 2011, an increase proportional to the increase in income before provision for income taxes.
 
44

Table of Contents
Net Income
Net income increased from $24.4 million in fiscal year 2010 to $34.3 million in fiscal year 2011, an increase of $9.9 million, or 41%, due to the factors discussed above. Applying a pro forma 40% “C” Corporation effective tax rate to both years, rather than the “S” Corporation tax rate that actually applied to us, pro forma net income increased from $14.8 million in fiscal year 2010 to $20.8 million in fiscal year 2011, an increase of $6.0 million, or 41%.

Fiscal Year 2010 Compared to Fiscal Year 2009
Net Sales
Net sales increased from $282.8 million in fiscal year 2009 to $332.6 million in fiscal year 2010, an increase of $49.8 million, or 18%. Much of this increase was due to net sales of $20.0 million from new stores opened in fiscal year 2010. Also, $11.4 million of the increase in net sales resulted from the additional portion of the year that stores opened during fiscal year 2009 were operating in fiscal year 2010, as well as fees charged to customers for shipping merchandise sold through our e-commerce store. Net sales also increased due to a comparable store net sales increase of 6.7%, or $18.4 million. The comparable store net sales increase stemmed from higher net sales of accessories and guys’ apparel, which was partially offset by lower net sales of footwear and girls’ apparel. There were 109 comparable stores and 16 non-comparable stores open at January 29, 2011.
Net sales, including shipping and handling fees, from our e-commerce store increased from $22.5 million in fiscal year 2009 to $32.8 million in fiscal year 2010, an increase of $10.3 million, or 46%. This increase reflects higher sales in all major product categories (guys’ and juniors’ apparel, footwear and accessories), which was attributable at least partially to the greater marketing efforts that directly supported the e-commerce business. E-commerce sales, excluding shipping and handling fees, are included in our calculation of comparable store sales, as comparable store sales is intended to reflect revenue from the sale of merchandise only.
Gross Profit
Gross profit increased from $87.3 million in fiscal year 2009 to $102.6 million in fiscal year 2010, an increase of $15.3 million, or 18%. As a percentage of net sales, gross profit was 30.9% in both years. A small decrease in both initial product costs and in promotional markdowns as a percentage of net sales was offset by a small increase in distribution costs as a percentage of net sales as we invested in distribution center infrastructure to support future store base expansion. Buying and occupancy costs were similar in both years as a percentage of net sales.
Selling, General and Administrative Expenses
SG&A expenses increased from $65.9 million in fiscal year 2009 to $77.7 million in fiscal year 2010, an increase of $11.8 million, or 18%. As a percentage of net sales, SG&A expenses were 23.3% and 23.4% during fiscal years 2009 and 2010, respectively.
Store selling expenses increased from $43.8 million in fiscal year 2009 to $53.7 million in fiscal year 2010, an increase of $9.9 million, or 23%. As a percentage of net sales, store selling expenses were 15.5% and 16.1% during fiscal years 2009 and 2010, respectively.
The following contributed to the increase in store selling expenses as a percentage of net sales:
 
 	•	 	marketing costs increased $2.9 million, or 0.6% as a percentage of net sales, reflecting growth in the size and number of marketing campaigns, including the frequency and distribution of catalog mailings as well as marketing costs incurred to support and drive the growth of our e-commerce business;	
 
45

Table of Contents
 	•	 	credit and debit card processing fees increased $0.9 million, or 0.1% as a percentage of net sales, and supplies and other support costs increased $0.8 million remaining constant as a percentage of net sales; and	
 
 	•	 	store and regional payroll, payroll benefits and related personnel costs increased $5.3 million, which represents a decrease of 0.1% as a percentage of net sales, reflecting slight cost leverage as these costs increased more slowly than sales.	
General and administrative expenses increased from $22.1 million in fiscal year 2009 to $24.0 million in fiscal year 2010, an increase of $1.9 million, or 9%. As a percentage of net sales, general and administrative expenses were 7.8% and 7.2% during fiscal years 2009 and 2010, respectively.
The following contributed to the decrease in general and administrative expenses as a percentage of net sales:
 
 	•	 	depreciation, legal and other office expenses decreased $1.1 million, a 0.7% decrease as a percentage of net sales;	
 
 	•	 	payroll, payroll benefits and related costs for corporate office personnel decreased 0.1% as a percentage of net sales. This decrease as a percentage of net sales reflects slight cost leverage as these costs increased more slowly than sales. In absolute amounts, payroll, payroll benefits and related corporate office personnel costs increased $2.2 million with the addition of staff to support company growth and to fund pay increases and an increase in incentive pay reflecting individual and company-wide performance; and	
 
 	•	 	a charge for the impairment of the fixed assets at one store location in fiscal year 2010 of $0.8 million, an increase of 0.2% of net sales, which partially offset the above decreases as a percentage of sales. There was no impairment charge in fiscal year 2009.	
Operating Income
Operating income increased from $21.4 million in fiscal year 2009 to $24.9 million in fiscal year 2010, an increase of $3.5 million, or 16%. As a percentage of net sales, operating income was 7.6% and 7.5% during fiscal years 2009 and 2010, respectively. This decrease in operating income as a percentage of net sales was mostly due to the increase in marketing costs as discussed above.
Interest Income (Expense), Net
Net interest expense decreased slightly from $0.3 million in fiscal year 2009 to $0.2 million in fiscal year 2010, a decrease of $0.1 million. Net interest expense reflects interest paid on a capitalized lease of our corporate office and distribution center as well as costs related to maintaining our unused line of credit bank facility, net of interest income earned on cash balances and on tenant construction allowances due from landlords.
Provision for Income Taxes
Income taxes were $0.3 million in both fiscal years 2009 and 2010. This reflected a higher pre-tax income in fiscal year 2010, offset by a slight drop in the effective tax rate, from 1.30% of income before provision for income taxes in fiscal year 2009 to 1.14% of income before provision for income taxes in fiscal year 2010.
Historically, World of Jeans & Tops has recognized income taxes as an “S” Corporation for federal and state income tax purposes and therefore, with the exception of a limited number of state and local jurisdictions, it has not been subject to income taxes. The shareholders of World of Jeans & Tops, and not World of Jeans & Tops itself, have been subject to income tax on their distributive share of its earnings. In connection with the Reorganization Transaction, World of Jeans & Tops will convert to a “C” Corporation. On a pro forma basis, if World of Jeans & Tops had been taxed as a “C” Corporation at an estimated 40% effective tax rate, income taxes would have increased from $8.5 million in fiscal year 2009 to $9.9 million in fiscal year 2010, an increase proportional to the increase in income before provision for income taxes.
 
46

Table of Contents
Net Income
Net income increased from $20.9 million in fiscal year 2009 to $24.4 million in fiscal year 2010, an increase of $3.5 million, or 17%, due to the factors discussed above. Applying a pro forma 40% “C” Corporation effective tax rate to both years, rather than the “S” Corporation tax rate that actually applied to us, pro forma net income increased from $12.7 million in fiscal year 2009 to $14.8 million in fiscal year 2010, an increase of $2.1 million, or 17%.
Quarterly Operating Results and Seasonality
We have historically experienced and expect to continue experiencing seasonal and quarterly fluctuations in our net sales and operating results. Our net sales and operating income are typically lower in the first and second quarters of our fiscal year, while the third and fourth quarters contain the back-to-school and winter holiday periods that historically have accounted for a larger proportion of our annual net sales and a larger than proportionate share of annual operating income. Our full year net sales have generally split 40% to 45% in the first half and 55% to 60% in the second half of the fiscal year. Quarterly sales and operating income may also fluctuate significantly as a result of a variety of factors, including but not limited to the timing of store openings and the relative proportion of our new stores to mature stores, fashion trends and changes in consumer preferences, calendar shifts of holiday or seasonal periods, changes in merchandise mix, timing of promotional events, general economic conditions, competition and weather conditions.
The following table sets forth selected unaudited quarterly statements of operations data for the two most recent fiscal years and the current fiscal year. The unaudited quarterly information has been prepared on a basis consistent with the audited financial statements included elsewhere herein. This information should be read in conjunction with our audited consolidated financial statements and the accompanying notes included elsewhere in this prospectus. The operating results for any fiscal quarter are not indicative of the operating results for a full fiscal year or for any future period and there can be no assurance that any trend reflected in such results will continue in the future.

 	 	Fiscal Year 2010	 	 	Fiscal Year 2011	 	
 	 	First
Quarter	 	 	Second
Quarter	 	 	Third
Quarter	 	 	Fourth
Quarter	 	 	First
Quarter	 	 	Second
Quarter	 	 	Third
Quarter	 	 	Fourth
Quarter	 	
 	 	($ in thousands)	 	
Net sales	 	$	64,344	  	 	$	70,053	  	 	$	91,498	  	 	$	106,709	  	 	$	83,131	  	 	$	87,260	  	 	$	107,304	  	 	$	122,929	  	
Gross profit	 	 	18,626	  	 	 	18,762	  	 	 	30,379	  	 	 	34,848	  	 	 	26,209	  	 	 	25,718	  	 	 	35,858	  	 	 	41,357	  	
Operating income	 	 	1,759	  	 	 	665	  	 	 	10,823	  	 	 	11,700	  	 	 	4,965	  	 	 	3,561	  	 	 	12,344	  	 	 	14,055	  	
Net income	 	 	1,659	  	 	 	597	  	 	 	10,625	  	 	 	11,535	  	 	 	4,860	  	 	 	3,469	  	 	 	12,155	  	 	 	13,856	  	
 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	
Percentage of Annual Results:	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	
Net sales	 	 	19.3	% 	 	 	21.1	% 	 	 	27.5	% 	 	 	32.1	% 	 	 	20.8	% 	 	 	21.8	% 	 	 	26.8	% 	 	 	30.7	% 	
Gross profit	 	 	18.2	% 	 	 	18.3	% 	 	 	29.6	% 	 	 	34.0	% 	 	 	20.3	% 	 	 	19.9	% 	 	 	27.8	% 	 	 	32.0	% 	
Operating income	 	 	7.1	% 	 	 	2.7	% 	 	 	43.4	% 	 	 	46.9	% 	 	 	14.2	% 	 	 	10.2	% 	 	 	35.3	% 	 	 	40.2	% 	
Net income	 	 	6.8	% 	 	 	2.4	% 	 	 	43.5	% 	 	 	47.2	% 	 	 	14.2	% 	 	 	10.1	% 	 	 	35.4	% 	 	 	40.3	% 	
 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	
Percentage of Net Sales:	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	
Gross profit	 	 	28.9	% 	 	 	26.8	% 	 	 	33.2	% 	 	 	32.7	% 	 	 	31.5	% 	 	 	29.5	% 	 	 	33.4	% 	 	 	33.6	% 	
Operating income	 	 	2.7	% 	 	 	0.9	% 	 	 	11.8	% 	 	 	11.0	% 	 	 	6.0	% 	 	 	4.1	% 	 	 	11.5	% 	 	 	11.4	% 	
Net income	 	 	2.6	% 	 	 	0.9	% 	 	 	11.6	% 	 	 	10.8	% 	 	 	5.8	% 	 	 	4.0	% 	 	 	11.3	% 	 	 	11.3	% 	
 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	
Store Data:	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	
Total stores open at end of quarter	 	 	112	  	 	 	120	  	 	 	121	  	 	 	125	  	 	 	126	  	 	 	131	  	 	 	134	  	 	 	140	  	
Comparable store sales change(1)	 	 	2.2	% 	 	 	-3.6	% 	 	 	10.3	% 	 	 	14.6	% 	 	 	18.2	% 	 	 	15.2	% 	 	 	8.5	% 	 	 	4.9	% 	
 
(1)	Comparable store sales are net sales from stores that have been open at least 12 full fiscal months as of the end of the current reporting period. A remodeled or relocated store is included in comparable store sales, both during and after	
 
47

Table of Contents
 	construction, if the square footage of the store was not changed by more than 20% and the store was not closed for more than five days in any fiscal month. Comparable store sales include sales through our e-commerce store but exclude gift card breakage income and e-commerce shipping and handling fee revenue. E-commerce sales contributed 3.1%, 2.7%, 2.2% and 4.4% to the comparable store sales change for the first, second, third and fourth fiscal quarters of 2010, respectively. E-commerce sales contributed 2.3%, 1.8%, 2.3% and 2.8% to the comparable store sales change for the first, second, third and fourth fiscal quarters of 2011, respectively.	
Liquidity and Capital Resources
General
Our business relies on cash flows from operating activities as well as cash on hand as our primary sources of liquidity. In addition, we have had access to additional liquidity through a $15.0 million revolving credit facility with Wells Fargo Bank, NA. We have never drawn funds from or issued letters of credit financing from the revolving credit facility. The existing revolving credit facility will terminate at the time of the initial public offering. However, upon consummation of our initial public offering, we plan to amend our existing facility with Wells Fargo Bank, NA to a $25.0 million revolving credit facility. Historically, we have not drawn upon the existing credit facility and we do not expect to draw from the revolving credit facility over the next 12 months. We expect to finance company operations and store growth with existing cash on hand, which may include a portion of the proceeds from this offering, and cash flows from operations. Therefore, for the reasons stated above, we do not believe an inability to amend the credit facility would have a material adverse impact on our operations, liquidity or growth plans. There can be no assurance that we will be able to amend the revolving credit facility agreement consistent with management’s expectations.
Historically our primary cash needs have been for merchandise inventories, payroll, store rent, capital expenditures associated with opening new stores, improvements to our distribution facilities, marketing and information technology expenditures and shareholder distributions. In addition to cash and cash equivalents, the most significant components of our working capital are merchandise inventories, accounts payable and other current liabilities. We believe that cash flows from operating activities, the availability of cash under our anticipated revolving credit facility and net proceeds from this offering will be sufficient to cover working capital requirements and anticipated capital expenditures for the next 12 months. If cash flows from operations, borrowings under our existing or anticipated revolving credit facility and net proceeds from this offering are not sufficient or available to meet our capital requirements, then we will be required to obtain additional equity or debt financing in the future. There can be no assurance that equity or debt financing will be available to us when we need it or, if available, that the terms will be satisfactory to us and not dilutive to our then-current stockholders.
 
48

Table of Contents
A summary of operating, investing and financing activities is shown in the following table.

 	  	Fiscal Year Ended	 	
 	  	January 30,
2010	 	 	January 29,
2011	 	 	January 28,
2012	 	
 	  	(in thousands)	 	
Cash Flows from Operating Activities:	  	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	
Net income	  	$	20,863	  	 	$	24,416	  	 	$	34,340	  	
Adjustments to reconcile net income to net cash provided by operating activities:	  	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	
Depreciation and amortization	  	 	13,915	  	 	 	14,292	  	 	 	15,129	  	
Loss on disposal of assets	  	 	784	  	 	 	224	  	 	 	232	  	
Impairment of assets	  	 	—	  	 	 	1,985	  	 	 	554	  	
Changes in assets and liabilities	  	 	(306	) 	 	 	785	  	 	 	2,329	  	
 	  	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	
Net cash provided by operating activities	  	$	35,256	  	 	$	41,702	  	 	$	52,584	  	
 	  	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	
Cash Flows from Investing Activities:	  	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	
Purchase of property and equipment	  	$	(17,514	) 	 	$	(15,674	) 	 	$	(20,223	) 	
Insurance proceeds from casualty loss	  	 	—	  	 	 	375	  	 	 	—	  	
Proceeds from disposal of property and equipment	  	 	3	  	 	 	41	  	 	 	28	  	
 	  	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	
Net cash used in investing activities	  	$	(17,511	) 	 	$	(15,258	) 	 	$	(20,195	) 	
 	  	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	
Cash Flows from Financing Activities:	  	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	
Payment of capital lease obligation	  	$	(555	) 	 	$	(591	) 	 	$	(628	) 	
Distributions	  	 	(16,020	) 	 	 	(22,220	) 	 	 	(36,008	) 	
 	  	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	
Net cash used in financing activities	  	$	(16,575	) 	 	$	(22,811	) 	 	$	(36,636	) 	
 	  	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	
Change in cash and cash equivalents	  	$	1,170	  	 	$	3,633	  	 	$	(4,247	) 	
Cash and cash equivalents at beginning of period	  	$	24,535	  	 	$	25,705	  	 	$	29,338	  	
 	  	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	
Cash and cash equivalents at end of period	  	$	25,705	  	 	$	29,338	  	 	$	25,091	  	
 	  	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	
Net Cash Provided by Operating Activities
Operating activities consist primarily of net income adjusted for non-cash items that include depreciation and asset impairment write-downs, plus the effect on cash of changes during the year in our assets and liabilities.
We generated $52.6 million of net cash from operating activities in fiscal year 2011. The significant components of cash flows from operating activities were net income of $34.3 million and the add-back of non-cash depreciation and amortization expense of $15.1 million. In addition, accounts payable and accrued expenses increased by $2.3 million due to the timing of payments and growth in inventory. Accrued compensation and benefits increased by $3.4 million due to the addition of staff to support company growth and pay increases, and an increase in incentive pay reflecting individual and company-wide performance. Deferred rent increased by $4.2 million due to the opening of new stores. The above was offset by an increase in merchandise inventories of $3.0 million due to the opening of new stores and the growth in sales, an increase in receivables of $2.3 million due to the growth of the business and an increase in prepaid expenses and other assets of $2.9 million due to the growth in the number of stores and the timing of payments.
We generated $41.7 million of net cash from operating activities in fiscal year 2010. The significant components for cash flows from operating activities were net income of $24.4 million and the add-back of non-cash depreciation and amortization expense of $14.3 million and non-cash impairment of assets of $2.0 million. In addition, accounts payable and accrued expenses increased by $9.4 million due to the timing of payments and growth in inventory and deferred rent increased by $3.1 million due to the opening of new stores. The above was offset by an increase in merchandise inventories of $9.6 million due to the opening of new stores and growth in
 
49

Table of Contents
sales, an increase in receivables of $2.2 million due to the growth of the business and a receivable on a casualty insurance claim and an increase in prepaid expenses and other current assets of $1.4 million due to the growth in the number of stores and the timing of payments.
We generated $35.3 million of net cash from operating activities in fiscal year 2009. The significant components for cash flows from operating activities were net income of $20.9 million and the add-back of non-cash depreciation and amortization expense of $13.9 million. In addition, deferred rent increased by $3.0 million due to the opening of new stores during the year. The above was offset by an increase in merchandise inventories of $3.9 million due to the opening of new stores and growth in sales.
Net Cash Used in Investing Activities
Investing activities consist primarily of capital expenditures for growth related to new store openings as well as for remodels and changes in fixtures and equipment at existing stores, investments in information technology, distribution center enhancements, investments in assets at our corporate headquarters and the addition or replacement of company vehicles.
Capital expenditures for the opening of 13, 16 and 16 new stores and the remodeling and other improvements of existing stores were $11.1 million, $13.3 million and $16.1 million in fiscal years 2009, 2010 and 2011, respectively. The remaining capital expenditures in each period were primarily for our investment in information technology systems and distribution and corporate facility enhancements.
Capital expenditures during fiscal year 2012 are expected to be between $35 million and $40 million. We expect to spend approximately $23 million for new stores and remodels of existing stores, approximately $8 million for enhancements to our distribution centers and corporate offices and the remainder for information technology systems and other store projects. These expenditures are expected to be funded from cash provided by operations.
Net Cash Used in Financing Activities
Financing activities consist of distributions to our shareholders and payments on our capital lease obligation.
Net cash used in financing activities was $16.6 million, $22.8 million and $36.6 million in fiscal years 2009, 2010 and 2011, respectively. This included $16.0 million, $22.2 million and $36.0 million, respectively, in distributions to our shareholders primarily for them to pay their “S” Corporation taxes, and $0.6 million in each of the fiscal years 2009, 2010 and 2011 for payments on our capital lease obligation.
In addition, immediately before the termination of its “S” Corporation status, World of Jeans & Tops will establish notes payable, bearing a market rate of interest, due to its “S” Corporation shareholders which will reflect the amount of undistributed cumulative earnings remaining in the company from the date of its formation up to the date of termination of its “S” Corporation status. We will use a significant portion of the proceeds from this offering to pay such notes, representing the final distribution to the shareholders of World of Jeans & Tops, who are also our existing stockholders. We expect this distribution to be $84.0 million.
Line of Credit
We have been operating with a $15.0 million revolving credit facility with Wells Fargo Bank, NA that expires on the earlier of August 1, 2012 or the consummation of our initial public offering. Upon consummation of our initial public offering, we plan to amend our existing facility with Wells Fargo Bank, NA to a $25.0 million revolving credit facility. We anticipate that the interest charged on borrowings will either be at the London Interbank Offered Rate, or LIBOR, plus 1.75% or at the bank’s prime rate. We expect to have the ability to select between the prime or LIBOR-based rate at the time of a cash advance. Similar to the existing credit facility, we expect that advances will be secured by substantially all of our assets, and that as a sub-feature under
 
50

Table of Contents
the line of credit the bank may issue stand-by and commercial letters of credit up to $15.0 million. We would be required to maintain certain financial and nonfinancial covenants in accordance with the amended revolving credit facility. The financial covenants are expected to contain requirements for certain levels of tangible net worth, liquidity and profitability, such as: (i) a minimum current asset to current liability ratio of 1.25 to 1.00, (ii) a net profit before tax of at least $1, excluding a non-cash expense of up to a maximum of $2 million for the write-off of impaired fixed assets for the cumulative rolling four-quarter period measured, determined as of the end of each fiscal quarter on a cumulative rolling four-quarter basis and (iii) a maximum ratio of 4.00 to 1.00 for “funded debt” to “EBITDAR”, where “funded debt” includes credit facility borrowings, capital lease debt and eight times annual operating lease rent expense, and “EBITDAR” includes net income before interest, income taxes, depreciation, amortization and rent expense. There can be no assurance that Tilly’s will be able to amend the revolving credit facility agreement consistent with management’s expectations.
Contractual Obligations
We enter into long-term contractual obligations and commitments in the normal course of business, primarily noncancellable capital and operating leases.
We lease approximately 172,000 square feet for our corporate headquarters and distribution center from a company that is owned by the co-founders of Tilly’s. These buildings are located at 10 and 12 Whatney, Irvine, California. The lease expires on December 31, 2012, with three five-year renewal option periods. The land component of this lease is accounted for as an operating lease and the building component is accounted for as a capital lease. Because the company initially guaranteed the related-party lessor’s debt obligation with respect to this leased property through December 31, 2017, the depreciation of the long-lived leasehold assets and the amortization of the capital lease liability were determined to be 15 years to correspond to the timing of the company’s guaranty. As of March 9, 2011, the financial institution holding the mortgage guaranty cancelled the guaranty. The initial obligation at inception under the capital lease was $9.2 million, with an outstanding balance of $4.6 million as of January 28, 2012. The value of the capital lease assets was $7.8 million as of January 28, 2012. The accumulated depreciation of the building under the capital lease was $4.7 million as of January 28, 2012. Prior to signing the lease, we received an independent market analysis regarding this property and therefore believe that the terms of this lease are reasonable and are not materially different than terms we would have obtained from an unaffiliated third party.
We lease approximately 24,000 square feet of office and warehouse space from a company that is owned by one of the co-founders of Tilly’s. This building is located at 15 Chrysler, Irvine California. The lease expires on October 31, 2014. The lease is accounted for as an operating lease. We sublease approximately 17,000 square feet of the building to an unrelated third party. The sublease began December 1, 2010 and terminates on May 31, 2014. The rental income paid to us with respect to the sublease, per square foot, is slightly above the rental expense paid by us with respect to the master lease. Prior to signing the lease, we received an independent market analysis regarding this property and therefore believe that the terms of this lease are reasonable and are not materially different than terms we would have obtained from an unaffiliated third party.
On September 2, 2011, we entered into a lease agreement for approximately 26,000 square feet of office and warehouse space with a company that is owned by one of the co-founders of Tilly’s. This building is located at 11 Whatney, Irvine, California and is currently being constructed by the landlord. Construction is expected to be completed during the first half of fiscal year 2012. The lease terminates ten years from the earlier of (i) the date the building is substantially completed or (ii) the date we can access the building and begin tenant improvements. We are not required to make lease payments until access to the building has been granted to begin tenant improvements. The lease will be accounted for as an operating lease. Prior to signing the lease, we received an independent market analysis regarding this property and therefore believe that the terms of this lease are reasonable and are not materially different than terms we would have obtained from an unaffiliated third party.
 
51

Table of Contents
On November 1, 2011, we entered into a lease agreement for approximately 81,000 square feet of office and warehouse space with a company that is owned by one of the co-founders of Tilly’s. This building is located at 17 Pasteur, Irvine, California. The lease terminates on October 31, 2021. The lease is accounted for as an operating lease. We intend to use this property as our e-commerce distribution center beginning in the first half of fiscal year 2013. Prior to signing the lease, we received an independent market analysis regarding this property and therefore believe that the terms of this lease are reasonable and are not materially different than terms we would have obtained from an unaffiliated third party.
With the exception of the corporate headquarters and distribution center and warehouse leases discussed above, our leases are generally noncancellable operating leases expiring at various dates through 2022. Certain leases provide for additional rent based on a percentage of sales and annual rent increases based upon the Consumer Price Index. In addition, many of our store leases contain certain co-tenancy provisions that permit us to pay rent based on a pre-determined percentage of sales when the occupancy of the retail center falls below minimums established in such lease.
As of January 28, 2012, our contractual cash obligations over the next several periods are set forth below (in thousands).

 	  	Payments Due by Period	 	
 	  	Total	 	  	Less Than 1
Year	 	  	1 - 2
Years	 	  	3 - 5
Years	 	  	More Than
5 Years	 	
Capital Lease Obligations (1)(3)	  	$	5,560	  	  	$	1,020	  	  	$	1,800	  	  	$	1,880	  	  	$	860	  	
Operating Lease Obligations (2)(3)	  	 	264,909	  	  	 	39,030	  	  	 	68,533	  	  	 	63,248	  	  	 	94,098	  	
Purchase Obligations (4)	  	 	91,536	  	  	 	91,536	  	  	 	—  	  	  	 	—  	  	  	 	—  	  	
 	  	 	 	 	  	 	 	 	  	 	 	 	  	 	 	 	  	 	 	 	
Total	  	$	362,005	  	  	$	131,586	  	  	$	70,333	  	  	$	65,128	  	  	$	94,958	  	

(1)	The capital lease is for the building portion of our corporate headquarters and distribution center, including interest.	
(2)	Our store leases generally have initial lease terms of 10 years and include renewal options on substantially the same terms and conditions as the original lease. Also included in operating leases is the land portion of the corporate headquarters and distribution center lease, as well as the warehouse leases described above.	
(3)	Amounts represent commitments for minimum lease payments under noncancellable leases.	
(4)	Purchase obligations consist primarily of inventory purchase orders for goods not yet received.	
Off-Balance Sheet Arrangements
We are not a party to any off-balance sheet arrangements, except for the operating leases, purchase obligations and revolving credit facility as discussed above.
Critical Accounting Policies and Estimates
The preparation of financial statements in conformity with accounting principles generally accepted in the U.S. requires the appropriate application of certain accounting policies, some of which require us to make estimates and assumptions about future events and their impact on amounts reported in our consolidated financial statements. Since future events and their impact cannot be determined with absolute certainty, the actual results will inevitably differ from our estimates.
We believe the application of our accounting policies, and the estimates inherently required therein, are reasonable. Our accounting policies and estimates are reevaluated on an ongoing basis and adjustments are made when facts and circumstances dictate a change.
 
52

Table of Contents
The policies and estimates discussed below involve the selection or application of alternative accounting policies that are material to our consolidated financial statements. With respect to critical accounting policies, even a relatively minor variance between actual and expected experience can potentially have a materially favorable or unfavorable impact on subsequent results of operations. However, our historical results for the periods presented in the consolidated financial statements have not been materially impacted by such variances. Our accounting policies are more fully described in Note 2 of the notes to the audited financial statements, “Summary of Significant Accounting Policies”. Management has discussed the development and selection of these critical accounting policies and estimates with our board of directors.
We have certain accounting policies that require more significant management judgment and estimates than others. These include our accounting policies with respect to revenue recognition, merchandise inventories, long-lived assets, stock-based compensation and accounting for income taxes, which are more fully described below.
Revenue Recognition
Sales are recognized at the time of purchase by customers at our retail store locations. Sales are recorded net of taxes collected from customers. For online sales, revenue is recognized at the estimated time goods are received by customers. On average, customers receive goods within three days of being shipped. The estimate of the transit times for these shipments is based on shipping terms and historical delivery times. Shipping and handling fees billed to customers for online sales are included in net sales and the related shipping and handling costs are classified as cost of goods sold in the Consolidated Statements of Operations. For fiscal years 2009, 2010 and 2011, shipping and handling fee revenue included in net sales was $1.9 million, $2.6 million and $3.8 million, respectively.
We reserve for projected merchandise returns based upon historical experience and various other assumptions that we believe to be reasonable. Customers can return merchandise within 30 days of the original purchase date. Merchandise returns are often resalable merchandise and are refunded by issuing the same tender as in the original purchase. Merchandise exchanges of the same product and price are not considered merchandise returns and, therefore, are not included in the population when calculating the sales returns reserve. The total reserve for returns was $0.5 million and $0.6 million at January 29, 2011 and January 28, 2012, respectively. Should the returns rate as a percentage of net sales significantly change in future periods, it could have a material impact on our results of operations.
We recognize the sales from gift cards as they are redeemed for merchandise. Prior to redemption, we maintain an unearned revenue liability for unredeemed gift card balances. Our gift cards do not have expiration dates; however, over time, the redemption of some gift cards is remote and there is no obligation to remit the unredeemed gift cards to relevant jurisdictions (gift card breakage). An assessment of the ultimate non-redemption rate of gift cards is performed when enough time has passed since the activation of the cards to enable a determination of the ultimate breakage rate based upon our historical redemption experience. This date of assessment has historically been two full fiscal years after the fiscal year in which the cards were activated. At the time of assessment a breakage estimate is calculated and recorded in net sales. Breakage revenue for gift cards was $0.5 million, $0.4 million and $0.5 million in fiscal years 2009, 2010 and 2011, respectively. If the gift card breakage experience were to change significantly in future periods, it could have a material impact on our results of operations.
Merchandise Inventories
Merchandise inventories are stated at the lower of cost or market. Market is determined based on the estimated net realizable value, which generally is the merchandise selling price. Cost is calculated using the retail inventory method. Under the retail inventory method, inventory is stated at its current retail selling value and then is converted to a cost basis by applying a cost-to-retail ratio based on beginning inventory and the fiscal year purchase activity. The retail inventory method inherently requires management judgments and estimates, such as the amount and timing of markdowns needed in order to sell through slow-moving inventories.
 
53

Table of Contents
Markdowns are recorded when the sales value of the inventory has diminished. Factors considered in the determination of markdowns include current and anticipated demand, customer preferences, age of the merchandise and fashion trends. When a decision is made to mark down merchandise, the resulting gross margin reduction is recognized in the period in which the markdown is recorded. During each accounting period, we record adjustments to our inventories, which are reflected in cost of goods sold, if the cost of specific inventory items on hand exceeds the amount we expect to realize from the ultimate sale or disposal of the inventory. This adjustment calculation requires us to make assumptions and estimates, which are based on factors such as merchandise seasonality, historical trends and estimated inventory levels, including sell-through of remaining units.
Total markdowns, including permanent and promotional markdowns, on a cost basis were $20.8 million, $22.8 million and $23.2 million and represented 7.4%, 6.9% and 5.8% of net sales in fiscal years 2009, 2010 and 2011, respectively. We accrued $0.3 million for planned but unexecuted markdowns, including markdowns related to slow-moving merchandise, as of both January 29, 2011 and January 28, 2012.
To the extent that management’s estimates differ from actual results, additional markdowns may be required that could reduce our gross margin, operating income and the carrying value of inventories. Our success is largely dependent upon our ability to anticipate the changing fashion tastes of our customers and to respond to those changing tastes in a timely manner. If we fail to anticipate, identify or react appropriately to changing styles, trends or brand preferences of our customers, we may experience lower sales, excessive inventories and more frequent and extensive markdowns, which would adversely affect our operating results.
We also record an inventory shrinkage reserve calculated as a percentage of net sales for estimated merchandise losses for the period between the last physical inventory count and the balance sheet date. These estimates are based on historical percentages and can be affected by changes in merchandise mix and changes in shrinkage trends. We perform physical inventory counts twice a year for the entire chain of stores and our distribution center and adjust the inventory shrinkage reserve accordingly. If actual physical inventory losses differ significantly from the estimate, our results of operations could be adversely impacted. The inventory shrinkage reserve reduces the value of total inventory and is a component of inventories on the Consolidated Balance Sheets. The inventory shrinkage reserve at January 29, 2011 and January 28, 2012 was not material.
Long-Lived Assets
We evaluate the carrying value of our long-lived assets, consisting largely of leasehold improvements, furniture and fixtures and equipment at store, distribution center and corporate office locations, for impairment whenever events or changes in circumstances indicate that the carrying value of such assets may not be recoverable. Factors that are considered important that could result in the necessity to perform an impairment review include a current-period operating or cash flow loss combined with a history of operating or cash flow losses and a projection or forecast that indicates continuing losses or insufficient income associated with the realization of a long-lived asset or asset group. Other factors include a significant change in the manner of the use of the asset or a significant negative industry or economic trend. This evaluation is performed based on estimated undiscounted future cash flows from operating activities compared with the carrying value of the related assets. If the undiscounted future cash flows are less than the carrying value, an impairment loss is recognized, measured by the difference between the carrying value and the estimated fair value of the assets, based on discounted cash flows using our weighted-average cost of capital, with such estimated fair values determined using the best information available. Quarterly, we assess whether events or changes in circumstances have occurred that potentially indicate the carrying value of long-lived assets may not be recoverable.
During fiscal year 2010 the net book value of fixed assets at one store was impaired with a charge of $0.8 million. Similarly, in fiscal year 2011 the net book value of fixed assets at another store was impaired with a charge of $0.6 million. These charges were recorded as the assets were not projected to generate sufficient cash flows to recover the carrying values. In addition, we recorded an impairment charge of $1.2 million in fiscal year
 
54

Table of Contents
2010 due to smoke damage to assets resulting from a fire in the mall where one of our stores is located. We have an insurance policy covering the assets that were destroyed. There were no impairment charges during fiscal year 2009.
The estimation of future cash flows from operating activities requires significant estimates of factors that include future sales and gross margin performance. Factors used in the valuation of long-lived assets with finite lives include, but are not limited to, discount rates, management’s plans for future operations, recent operating results and projected future cash flows. If our net sales or gross profit performance or other estimated operating results are not achieved at or above our forecasted level, or inflation exceeds our forecast and we are unable to recover such costs through price increases, the carrying value of certain of our retail stores may prove to be unrecoverable and we may incur additional impairment charges in the future.
Stock-Based Compensation
In June 2007 our board of directors adopted the 2007 Stock Option Plan, or 2007 Plan, which authorized the issuance of options to purchase up to 1.6 million shares of common stock for employees, consultants and directors. These share-based awards are granted at an exercise price equal to the fair market value of our common stock at the date of grant. These awards vest in equal installments over a four year period (service period) and generally expire at the earlier of 30 days after employment or services are terminated or ten years from the date of grant. The awards also include a performance condition that prevents the awards from becoming exercisable until the consummation of an initial public offering by us. As the awards contain both a service requirement and a performance condition, compensation expense is not recognized in the financial statements until the later of the consummation of an initial public offering by us or completion of the requisite service period.
We account for stock-based compensation in accordance with the provisions of ASC Topic 718, Compensation-Stock Compensation (“ASC 718”), which establishes accounting for equity instruments exchanged for employee services. Under the provisions of this statement, stock-based compensation expense is measured at the grant date, based on the calculated fair value of the award, and is recognized as an expense on a straight-line basis over the employee’s requisite service period (generally the vesting period of the equity grant). As required under this guidance, we estimate forfeitures for options granted which are not expected to vest. Changes in these inputs and assumptions can materially affect the measurement of the estimated fair value of our stock-based compensation expense.
Determining the fair value of stock-based awards at the grant date requires judgment. We use the Black-Scholes option-pricing model to determine the fair value of stock options. The determination of the grant date fair value of options using an option-pricing model is affected by a number of assumptions, such as our estimated common stock fair value, our expected stock price volatility over the expected term of the options, stock option exercise and cancellation behaviors, risk-free interest rates, and expected dividends, which we estimate as follows:
 
 	•	 	Fair Value of Our Common Stock. Because our common stock is not publicly traded, we must estimate the fair value of our common stock, as discussed in “Determination of the Fair Value of Common Stock on Grant Date” below.	
 
 	•	 	Expected Term. We have limited historical information regarding expected option term. Accordingly, we determined the expected stock option term of the awards using the latest historical data available from comparable public companies and our expectation of exercise behavior.	
 
 	•	 	Volatility. As we do not have a trading history for our common stock, the expected stock price volatility for each grant is measured using the average of historical daily price changes of comparable public companies’ common stock over the most recent period equal to the expected term of our stock option awards. We intend to consistently apply this process using the same or similar public companies until a sufficient amount of historical information regarding the volatility of our own common stock share price becomes available. However, if the circumstances change so the identified companies are	
 
55

Table of Contents
 	no longer similar to us, we will select companies we believe are more suitable and use their publicly available share prices in the calculation.	
 
 	•	 	Risk-Free Rate. The risk-free interest rate is based on the yields of U.S. Treasury securities with maturities similar to the expected term of the stock options for each stock option group.	
 
 	•	 	Dividend Yield. We have never declared or paid any cash dividends and do not plan to pay cash dividends in the foreseeable future. Consequently, we used an expected dividend yield of zero.	
If any of the assumptions used in the Black-Scholes model change significantly, stock-based compensation for future awards may differ materially compared with the awards granted previously.
The following table presents the weighted-average assumptions we used to estimate the fair value of stock options granted during the periods presented:

 	  	Fiscal Year Ended	 	
 	  	January 30,
2010	 	 	January 29,
2011	 	 	January 28,
2012	 	
Expected option term	  	 	5.0 years	  	 	 	5.0 years	  	 	 	5.0 years	  	
Expected volatility factor	  	 	45.5	% 	 	 	61.0	% 	 	 	59.7	% 	
Risk-free interest rate	  	 	1.8	% 	 	 	1.0	% 	 	 	2.2	% 	
Expected annual dividend yield	  	 	0.0	% 	 	 	0.0	% 	 	 	0.0	% 	
Our estimate of pre-vesting forfeitures, or forfeiture rate, was based on our internal analysis, which included the award recipients’ positions within the company and the vesting period of the awards. The result of the Black-Scholes calculation was compensation expense, cumulative through January 28, 2012, for all options granted under the 2007 Plan and before any related tax benefit, of $7.1 million. This compensation expense has not been recognized in our financial statements as the stock options contain both a service requirement and a performance condition. Therefore, we will recognize this deferred compensation expense upon the consummation of the initial public offering.
Determination of the Fair Value of Common Stock on Grant Date
We have been a private company with no active public market for our common stock. The fair value of the common stock underlying our stock options was determined by our board of directors, which intended all stock options granted to be exercisable at a price per share not less than the per share fair value of our common stock underlying those stock options on the date of grant. We have determined the estimated per share fair value of our common stock using a contemporaneous valuation consistent with the American Institute of Certified Public Accountants Practice Aid, “Valuation of Privately-Held Company Equity Securities Issued as Compensation”, or the Practice Aid. In conducting this valuation, we considered all objective and subjective factors that we believed to be relevant, including our best estimate of our business condition, prospects and operating performance at the valuation date. Within this contemporaneous valuation performed by management, with the assistance of third-party valuation specialists hired by us, a range of factors, assumptions and methodologies were used. The significant factors included:
 
 	•	 	the fact that we are a private retail company with illiquid securities;	
 
 	•	 	our historical operating results;	
 
 	•	 	our discounted future cash flows, based on our projected operating results;	
 
 	•	 	the hiring of key personnel;	
 
 	•	 	the likelihood of achieving a liquidity event for the shares of common stock underlying these stock options, such as an initial public offering or sale of our company, given prevailing market conditions;	
 
56

Table of Contents
 	•	 	any adjustment necessary to recognize a lack of marketability for our common stock;	
 
 	•	 	valuation of comparable public companies at the time of grant;	
 
 	•	 	the U.S. and global capital market conditions; and	
 
 	•	 	outlook for our industry at the time of grant.	
After review of the fair value analysis, our board of directors authorized the use of that fair value as the exercise price for options granted on the date of that valuation report.
Common Stock Valuation Methodologies
For the contemporaneous valuation of our common stock, management estimated, as of January 28, 2012, the latest valuation date, our enterprise value on a continuing operations basis primarily using the income and market approaches which are both acceptable valuation methods in accordance with the Practice Aid. The income approach utilized a discounted cash flow methodology based on our financial forecasts and projections, as detailed below. The market approach utilized both the guideline public company and the guideline merged and acquired methodologies based on data obtained on comparable public companies, as detailed below. Management considered both objective and subjective factors, including information provided by a third-party valuation firm, to determine its best estimate of the fair market value of our common stock.
For the discounted cash flow methodology, we prepared detailed annual forecasts of cash flows for future years, which we refer to as the “discrete forecast period”. The value of the cash flows beyond the discrete forecast period was derived by applying a capitalized earnings approach, in which such cash flows are assumed to grow at a constant annual long-term growth rate and in which the terminal-year cash flow is capitalized at a rate equal to the estimated discount rate less the estimated constant annual long-term growth rate. Our forecasts of future cash flows were based on our estimated net debt-free cash flows and were discounted to the valuation date at an estimate of our weighted average cost of capital. We weighted the discounted cash flow method 50% in determining the total fair value of our equity as this approach was determined to represent the best indication of value because this method relied on a detailed financial forecast for the next five fiscal years as well as growth and profitability assumptions for subsequent years that are specific to Tilly’s business model.
The guideline public company method of the market approach is based on the market prices of stock for comparable companies. Indications of value were estimated by deriving multiples of equity or invested capital to various measures of revenue, earnings or cash flow for the selected guideline companies and then applying such multiples to the metrics of our business. When selecting comparable companies, consideration was given to industry similarity, their specific products offered, financial data availability and capital structure. We weighted the guideline public company method 40%. In selecting the revenue and EBITDA multiples from other companies to apply to Tilly’s, we considered differences between Tilly’s and eleven comparable companies in terms of size, profitability and growth, among other factors. Given the timely nature of the public company data and the quantity of the public companies in the group that were in the same or similar retail sector as Tilly’s, the guideline public company method was given a weighting of 40%. We weighted the guideline public company method less than the discounted cash flow method due to the fact that the stock price and earnings estimates for the comparable public companies were relatively volatile as of the valuation date.
The guideline merged and acquired method of the market approach follows the same basic methodology as the guideline public company method. However, instead of deriving multiples based on stock prices of guideline companies, indications of value are estimated by deriving multiples of equity or invested capital from sales of entire companies. We weighted the guideline merged and acquired method only 10% as most of the observed industry transactions occurred in a different economic environment (none since December 2009) and we had higher EBITDA margins than many of the target companies.
We believe that the procedures employed in the discounted cash flow, guideline public company and guideline merged and acquired methodologies are reasonable and consistent with the Practice Aid.
 
57

Table of Contents
We granted stock options with the following exercise prices between May 2, 2010 and the date of this prospectus:

Option Grant Date	  	Number of
Shares
Underlying
Options	 	  	Exercise
Price Per
Share	 	  	Common Stock
Fair Value Per
Share at
Grant Date	 	  	Fair Value of
Stock  Options
Granted	 	
October 2010(1)	  	 	762,500	  	  	$	8.98	  	  	$	8.98	  	  	 	$4.57 - $7.01	  	
March 2011	  	 	578,000	  	  	 	16.26	  	  	 	16.26	  	  	 	8.52	  	

(1)	Includes 739,500 stock options that were re-priced on a one-for-one basis to $8.98 per share. See the section below titled “Stock Option Re-Pricing”.	
Based upon the assumed initial public offering price of $         per share, which is the mid-point of the price range set forth on the cover page of this prospectus, the aggregate intrinsic value of stock options outstanding as of          was approximately $         million, of which approximately $         million related to vested stock options and approximately $         million related to unvested stock options.
Significant factors considered by our board of directors in determining the fair value of our common stock at these grant dates included:
October 2010
We performed a valuation of our common stock as of fiscal month ended August 28, 2010 which included the back-to-school shopping season that peaks in August. Although the U.S. economy had been recovering from recession in 2010, the recovery was weaker than in many past recovery periods. The financial results of many of our comparable companies reflected weak performance driven generally by either negative or only modestly positive year-to-date comparable store sales through August. Our comparable store sales trends for this same period were consistent with our comparable companies, with close to zero comparable store sales growth, lower income than the same year-to-date period in the prior year and sales and income running well below the forecast for fiscal 2010 that was incorporated in the prior valuation of our common stock. As a result of these factors, we lowered our financial forecast and expectations for growth in fiscal 2010 and, because they were building upon 2010 expected results, the forecasted sales and income in fiscal 2011 and beyond. The marketability discount was 15%, based upon expectations that an initial public offering would not occur until at least early in 2012. This valuation determined the value of our common stock to be $8.98 per share. Our board of directors granted stock options with exercise prices at $8.98 per share on October 8, 2010, the date the valuation was finalized, after determining that the fair value of our common stock would not have materially changed between the valuation date and the date of the grant. In addition, stock options previously granted with exercise prices greater than $8.98 per share were re-priced to $8.98 per share as of October 8, 2010 by our board of directors. See “Stock Option Re-Pricing” section below.
March 2011
We performed a valuation of our common stock as of the fiscal year end date of January 29, 2011. Over the previous quarter the national economy grew more quickly than earlier in fiscal 2010 and our comparable companies’ results generally improved substantially in the fourth quarter of fiscal 2010. Our results, similarly, improved substantially, with a double-digit comparable store sales increase in the fourth quarter of fiscal 2010 compared to the fourth quarter of fiscal 2009 and profitability for the quarter well above the prior year’s fourth quarter. Therefore, profitability for fiscal 2010 ended up being well above the revised forecast used in the August 2010 valuation. This greatly improved sales and profit trend continued into February and March of fiscal 2011. As a result, we increased the financial forecast and expectations for growth in fiscal 2011 and beyond. Concurrently, our comparable companies’ financial results led to, in many cases, increased market prices for their common stock. The marketability discount was 10%, based upon expectations that an initial public offering would not occur until mid 2011 at the earliest. This
 
58

Table of Contents
valuation determined the value of our common stock to be $16.26 per share. Our board of directors granted stock options with exercise prices at $16.26 per share on March 31, 2011, the date the valuation was finalized, after determining that the fair value of our common stock would not have materially changed between the valuation date and the date of the grant.
Stock Option Re-Pricing
In October 2010, our board of directors approved a common stock option re-pricing whereby previously granted stock options held by current employees with exercise prices above $8.98 per share were re-priced on a one-for-one basis to $8.98 per share with no modification to any other terms of the previously issued stock options. As a result, 739,500 stock options originally granted to purchase common stock at prices ranging from $9.64 to $14.47 were re-priced in order to continue maintaining an equity incentive for our employees and reflect a significantly different economic environment. We treated the re-pricing as a modification for accounting purposes of the original awards and calculated additional compensation costs for the difference between the fair value of the re-priced award and the fair value of the original award on the re-pricing date. The re-pricing affected 48 optionees and resulted in incremental unrecognized stock-based compensation expense of $0.6 million. Expense related to vested stock options will be recognized upon the consummation of our initial public offering, and expense related to unvested stock options will be amortized over the remaining vesting period of the stock options. Our assumptions used to estimate the fair value of the original awards immediately before the re-pricing and the fair value of the re-priced awards required significant judgment.
Accounting for Income Taxes
Historically, World of Jeans & Tops has recognized income taxes as an “S” Corporation for federal and state income tax purposes. As such, with the exception of a limited number of state and local jurisdictions, it has not been subject to income taxes. The shareholders of World of Jeans & Tops, and not World of Jeans & Tops itself, are subject to income tax on their distributive share of its earnings. World of Jeans & Tops paid distributions to the shareholders to fund their tax obligations attributable to taxable income of World of Jeans & Tops, in addition to any discretionary distributions paid to its shareholders. As a result of the Reorganization Transaction, World of Jeans & Tops’ “S” Corporation status will terminate and World of Jeans & Tops will be treated as a “C” Corporation for federal and applicable state income tax purposes.
Recently Issued Accounting Pronouncements
In May 2011, the FASB issued Accounting Standards Update (“ASU”) No. 2011-04, “Amendments to Achieve Common Fair Value Measurement and Disclosure Requirements in U.S. GAAP and IFRSs ”. ASU 2011-04 provides additional guidance on fair value measurements that clarifies the application of existing guidance and disclosure requirements, changes certain fair value measurement principles and requires additional disclosures about fair value measurements. The updated guidance became effective on a prospective basis for the company on January 29, 2012. Based on the company’s evaluation of this ASU, the adoption of this standard is not expected to have a material impact on the company’s financial position or results of operations.
The FASB issues ASUs to amend the authoritative literature in the Accounting Standards Codification. There have been a number of ASUs to date that amend the original text of the Accounting Standards Codification. Except for the ASU listed above, those issued to date either (i) provide supplemental guidance, (ii) are technical corrections, (iii) are not applicable to the Company or (iv) are not expected to have a significant impact on the Company.
 
59

Table of Contents
Quantitative and Qualitative Disclosure of Market Risks
Interest Rate Risk
We are subject to interest rate risk in connection with borrowings, if any, under our line of credit, which bears interest at variable rates. As of January 29, 2011 and January 28, 2012, we had no outstanding borrowings under our line of credit.
Impact of Inflation
Our results of operations and financial condition are presented based on historical cost. While it is difficult to accurately measure the impact of inflation due to the imprecise nature of the estimates required, we believe the effects of inflation, if any, on our results of operations and financial condition have been immaterial.
Foreign Exchange Rate Risk
We currently source all merchandise through domestic vendors and all purchases are denominated in U.S. dollars. We do not hedge using any derivative instruments and historically have not been impacted by changes in exchange rates.
 
60

Table of Contents
BUSINESS
Overview
Tilly’s is a fast-growing destination specialty retailer of West Coast inspired apparel, footwear and accessories. We believe we bring together an unparalleled selection of the most sought-after brands rooted in action sports, music, art and fashion. Our stores are designed to be a seamless extension of our teen and young adult consumers’ lifestyles, with a balance of guys’ and juniors’ merchandise, in a stimulating environment. As we have grown, we believe our success across a variety of real estate venues and geographies in the United States has demonstrated Tilly’s portability. We believe our distinctive store experience combined with our extensive selection of merchandise positions us to exceed our customers’ expectations. Tilly’s is a passionate lifestyle brand and our motto, “If it’s not here…it’s not happening” exemplifies our goal to serve as a destination for the latest, most relevant merchandise and brands important to our customers.
As of January 28, 2012, we operated 140 stores in 14 states, averaging approximately 7,800 square feet. We also sell our products through our e-commerce website, www.tillys.com. Our business is characterized by the following key elements:
 
 	•	 	Extensive assortment of relevant merchandise in a larger store format. Our larger stores allow us to carry a more extensive selection of brands and products. Our stores feature third-party brands, including Billabong, Element, Hurley, Levi’s, LRG, Neff, RVCA, Uggs, and Volcom, to name just a few, complemented by our proprietary brands, such as RSQ, Full Tilt, Blue Crown, and Infamous. Our larger stores also allow us to offer a greater assortment of apparel styles, sizes and price points across multiple categories as well as a strong assortment of footwear, backpacks, hats and other accessories. This broad selection focused on guys and juniors enhances our ability to rapidly identify and respond to trends and positions us as a destination for both proven fashion items and core styles. We strive to keep our merchandising mix current by introducing additional brands and styles in response to the ever-evolving desires of our customers.	
 
 	•	 	The Tilly’s experience. Tilly’s is a customer-driven lifestyle brand. We derive our energy and inspiration from our customers’ individuality and passion for action sports, music, art, and fashion. Our stores bring these interests together in a vibrant, stimulating and authentic environment that is an extension of our customers’ high velocity, multitasking lifestyle. We do this by blending the most relevant brands and styles with music videos, product-related visuals and a dedicated team of store associates. Our associates share the same passion as our customers for action sports, music, art and fashion, enabling them to easily engage with our customers and make shopping at Tilly’s a fun, social experience. Outside of our stores, we connect with our consumers using the same authentic approach, including social media, community outreach and sponsorship of contests, demos and other events. We believe the Tilly’s experience drives customer awareness, loyalty and repeat visits while generating a buzz and excitement for our brand.	
 
 	•	 	Flexible real estate strategy across real estate venues and geographies. As of January 28, 2012 we operated stores in 40 markets in 14 states across a variety of real estate venues including malls, power centers, neighborhood and lifestyle centers, outlet centers and street-front locations. Our geographic portability and real estate flexibility provide us with a wider scope of opportunities and enhance our ability to open new stores. As we continue our national store expansion, we focus on identifying the most attractive locations within relevant trade areas to ensure our stores are located where our customers want to shop.	
Our West Coast heritage dates back to 1982 when Hezy Shaked and Tilly Levine opened our first store in Orange County, California, the center of the surf and skate lifestyle. Over the last 30 years, we have built and nurtured strong relationships with our customers, brand partners and vendors while expanding our business. We have also demonstrated an ability to grow rapidly, having more than doubled our store count while entering 29 new markets in the last five years. During this same period, we invested over $20 million in infrastructure and
 
61

Table of Contents
systems to support our recent and long-term growth, and enhanced our senior management team while protecting the entrepreneurial culture that we believe makes Tilly’s unique. We believe our corporate culture facilitates our ability to attract and retain high quality employees and is a critical driver of our performance. We believe our team’s passion for the West Coast inspired and action sports lifestyle, sense of urgency and pursuit of excellence enables Tilly’s to consistently deliver a superior customer experience and positions us to successfully execute our long-term growth strategy.
We increased net sales 20%, from $332.6 million in fiscal year 2010 to $400.6 million in fiscal year 2011. We increased operating income 40%, from $24.9 million in fiscal year 2010 to $34.9 million in fiscal year 2011. Our comparable store sales increased 10.7% in fiscal year 2011 after a 6.7% increase in fiscal year 2010.
Competitive Strengths
We believe that the following competitive strengths contribute to our success and distinguish us from our competitors:
 
 	•	 	Destination retailer with a broad, relevant assortment. We believe the combined depth and breadth of apparel, footwear and accessories offered at our stores exceeds the selection offered at many other specialty retailers. We offer an extensive selection of third-party, West Coast inspired and action sports brands complemented by our proprietary brands. Our merchandise includes a wide assortment of brands, styles, colors, sizes and price points to ensure we have what our customers want every time they visit our stores. We offer a balanced mix of merchandise across the guys and juniors categories, with additional merchandise in the boys, girls, footwear and accessories categories. We believe that by combining proven fashion trends and core style products with a vibrant blend of carefully selected music and visuals, we provide an in-store experience that is authentic, fun, and engaging for our core customers. We believe that our differentiated in-store environment, evolving selection of relevant brands and broader and deeper assortment positions us as a retail destination that appeals to a larger demographic than many other specialty retailers and encourages customers to visit our stores more frequently and spend more on each trip.	
 
 	•	 	Dynamic merchandise model. We believe our extensive selection of third-party and proprietary merchandise allows us to identify and address trends more quickly, offer a greater range of price points and manage our inventories more dynamically. By closely monitoring trends and shipping product to our stores five times per week, we are able to adjust our merchandise mix based on store size and location. We also keep our merchandise mix relevant by introducing emerging brands not available at many other retailers. Our merchandising capabilities enable us to adjust our merchandise mix with a frequency that promotes a current look to our stores and encourages frequent visits.	
 
 	•	 	Flexible real estate strategy across real estate venues and geographies. Our stores have proven to be successful in different real estate venues and geographies. As of January 28, 2012, we operated profitable stores in malls, power centers, neighborhood and lifestyle centers, outlet centers and street-front locations across 40 markets in 14 states. We believe our success operating in these different retail venues and geographies demonstrates the portability of Tilly’s and provides us with greater flexibility for future expansion.	
 
 	•	 	Multi-pronged marketing approach. We utilize a multi-pronged marketing strategy to connect with our customers and drive traffic to our stores and website. First, we distribute catalogs to potential and existing customers from our proprietary database to familiarize them with the Tilly’s brand and our products and to drive sales to our stores and our website. Second, we partner and collaborate with our vendors on exclusive events and contests to build credibility with our target customers, actively involve them in our brands, and enhance the connection between Tilly’s and the West Coast lifestyle. Third, we use social media to communicate directly with our customers while also encouraging customers to interact with one another and provide feedback on our events and products. Fourth, through our “We	
 
62

Table of Contents
 	Care Program”, we support and participate in various academic, art, and athletic programs at local schools and other organizations in communities surrounding our stores. All of these programs are complemented by email marketing as well as traditional radio and print advertising to build customer awareness and loyalty, highlight key merchandise offerings, drive traffic to our stores and website and promote the Tilly’s brand.	
 
 	•	 	Sophisticated systems and distribution infrastructure to support growth. Over the last five years, we have invested over $20 million in our highly automated distribution center and information systems to support our future growth. We believe our distribution and allocation capabilities are unique within the industry and allow us to operate at a higher level of efficiency than many of our competitors. Our distribution center allows us to quickly sort and process merchandise and deliver it to our stores in a floor-ready format for immediate display. Our systems enable us to respond to changing fashion trends, manage inventory in real time and provide a customized selection of merchandise at each location. We believe our distribution infrastructure can support a national retail footprint in excess of 500 stores with minimal incremental capital investment.	
 
 	•	 	Experienced management team. Our senior management team, led by Hezy Shaked and Daniel Griesemer, has extensive experience across a wide range of disciplines in the specialty retail and direct-to-consumer industries, including store operations, merchandising, distribution, real estate, and finance. Mr. Shaked, our Co-Founder, Chairman of the Board of Directors, and Chief Strategy Officer, plays an important role in developing our long-term growth initiatives and cultivating our unique culture. Mr. Griesemer, our President and Chief Executive Officer, joined Tilly’s in February 2011 with 28 years of retail experience. He served in various roles with Coldwater Creek, Inc. from 2001 to 2009 including most recently as Chief Executive Officer. During his tenure, Coldwater Creek increased the store base from 13 to approximately 400 and increased revenues from approximately $340 million to approximately $1.1 billion. Mr. Griesemer also served in leadership positions at Gap, Inc. and Macy’s, Inc.	
Our Growth Strategy
We are pursuing several strategies to continue our profitable growth, including:
 
 	•	 	Expand Our Store Base. We believe there is a significant opportunity to expand our store base from 140 locations as of January 28, 2012 to more than 500 stores across the United States over the next 10 years. We have a proven ability to expand the number of stores we operate, as we have more than doubled our store count over the last five years from 61 stores at the beginning of fiscal 2007 to 140 stores at January 28, 2012. We plan to add at least 21 net new stores in fiscal year 2012 and to continue opening new stores at an annual rate of approximately 15% for the next several years thereafter. Our plan includes new store openings in both existing and new markets, and in both mall and off-mall locations.	
 
63

Table of Contents
As of January 28, 2012, we operated stores in 14 states. Over the past five years we have grown our presence in existing markets and successfully expanded into 29 new markets. We have entered new markets by opening stores in high traffic malls relevant to our core customer in order to establish the Tilly’s brand, as well as in off-mall locations that effectively cover trade areas where our customers want to shop. The opportunity exists to continue to significantly broaden our national footprint by entering new markets through both mall and non-mall locations. The following shows our store locations as of January 28, 2012, as well as our scheduled openings of new stores for the first half of fiscal year 2012:

Our new store model targets a store size averaging 7,500 to 8,000 square feet and a cash-on-cash payback period of about 18 months based on a target net investment to open new stores of $500,000 to $550,000. In the first 12 months after opening, we target net sales of approximately $2.2 million and cash flow of $300,000, growing to over $400,000 in cash flow in the second 12-month period as the store begins to mature.
 
 	•	 	Drive Comparable Store Sales. We seek to maximize our comparable store sales by consistently offering new, on-trend and relevant merchandise across a broad assortment of categories, increasing our brand awareness through our multi-pronged marketing approach, providing an authentic store experience for our core customers and maintaining our high level of customer service. We believe our comparable store sales will benefit as stores opened in the last few years continue to mature and we continue to build brand awareness in new markets.	
 
 	•	 	Grow Our e-Commerce Platform. We believe our e-commerce platform is an extension of our brand and retail stores, providing our customers a seamless shopping experience. Our e-commerce platform allows us to provide an expanded product offering relative to our stores, reach new customers and build our brand in markets where we currently do not have stores. In fiscal 2011, our e-commerce net sales increased 33% relative to fiscal 2010 and represented approximately 11% of our net sales, up from 5% of net sales in fiscal 2007. We believe that our target customer regularly shops online and we see continued opportunity to grow our e-commerce business to approximately 15% of total net sales over time. Key factors driving growth include continuing our successful catalog and online marketing efforts, offering a wider selection of Internet-exclusive merchandise and expanding our online selection to ensure a broad and diverse offering of brands and products relative to our competition. We also believe we will see continued growth in our e-commerce sales as we open additional stores and build brand awareness in the communities surrounding those locations. To support this growth, we plan to open a new e-commerce distribution center in the first half of fiscal year 2013.	
 
64

Table of Contents
 	•	 	Increase Our Operating Margins. We believe we have the opportunity to drive margin expansion through scale efficiencies and continued process improvements. We believe comparable store sales increases combined with our planned store growth will permit us to take advantage of largely fixed occupancy costs, favorable buying costs from larger volume purchases, leverage of our costs for store management and corporate overhead as well as the fixed portion of shipping and handling costs over higher sales volumes. In addition, we expect to improve margins and support growth by leveraging ongoing investments in infrastructure, including the opening of a dedicated distribution center for our e-commerce store and continuing upgrades to our point-of-sale, merchandise allocation and merchandise planning systems, as well as related work processes. We also will continue to use established business processes to identify and execute initiatives focused on lowering our unit costs and improving operational efficiency throughout our organization.	
About Tilly’s
The Tilly’s concept began in 1982 when our co-founders, Hezy Shaked and Tilly Levine, opened their first store in Orange County, California. Since 1984 the business has been conducted through World of Jeans & Tops, a California corporation formed by our co-founders, which operates under the name “Tilly’s”. In May 2011, Tilly’s, Inc., a Delaware corporation, was formed solely for the purpose of reorganizing the corporate structure of World of Jeans & Tops and effecting this initial public offering. Pursuant to the Reorganization Transaction which we will effect prior to the completion of this offering, the shareholders of World of Jeans & Tops will contribute all of their equity interests in that corporation to Tilly’s, Inc. in return for shares of Tilly’s, Inc. Class B common stock on a one-for-one basis, which capitalization shall be adjusted prior to the offering. Following the Reorganization Transaction, World of Jeans & Tops will become the sole subsidiary of Tilly’s, Inc. All of the business operations will continue to be conducted through World of Jeans & Tops, operating under the name “Tilly’s”, and Tilly’s, Inc. will serve as a holding company. Prior to the completion of this Reorganization Transaction, Tilly’s, Inc. has not conducted any activities other than those incidental to its formation and the preparation of this prospectus.
Our Market
Our core consumers include teens and young adults that participate in action sports, as well as those that identify with the West Coast and action sports lifestyle. We believe interest in and awareness of the action sports and West Coast lifestyle continues to grow and influence a broader consumer base that shop at our stores.
According to Euromonitor International’s “Consumer and Countries 2011” report, U.S. retail sales of apparel, footwear and accessories totaled $334.2 billion in 2010, which represents an increase of 5.5% from $316.9 billion in 2009. According to Board-Trac’s “2010 Size of Market Trend Report” on skateboarding and surfing, U.S. retail sales of skateboard and surf apparel, footwear and accessories alone were estimated to be approximately $7.1 billion in 2010. Our core customer demographic is 14 to 24 year old teens and young adults. According to the U.S. Census Bureau’s National Population Projections released in 2008, this segment of the population was expected to grow approximately 10% from 2000 to 2010.
Merchandising, Purchasing, and Planning and Allocation
Merchandising
We seek to be viewed by our customers as the destination for West Coast inspired and action sports related apparel, footwear and accessories. We believe we offer an unparalleled selection of relevant brands, styles, colors, sizes and price points to ensure we have what our customers want every time they visit our stores. Our extensive selection of third-party and proprietary merchandise allows us to identify and address trends more quickly, offer a greater range of price points and manage our inventories more dynamically. We offer a balanced
 
65

Table of Contents
mix of merchandise across the guys and juniors categories, with additional merchandise in the boys, girls, footwear and accessories categories. We believe this category mix contributes to our broad demographic appeal. Our apparel merchandise includes branded, fashion and core styles for tops, outerwear, bottoms, and dresses. Accessories merchandise includes backpacks, hats, sunglasses, headphones, handbags, watches, jewelry and more. We focus on our merchandise presentation and vary the visual displays in our stores and windows multiple times per month, presenting new looks and fashion combinations to our customers.
Our ability to maintain an image consistent with the West Coast inspired and action sports lifestyle is important to our branded vendors and provides us better access to a wide assortment of products and styles. Our third-party branded merchandise features established and emerging brands. We strive to keep our merchandise mix current by continuously introducing emerging brands and styles not available at many other specialty retailers in order to identify and respond to the evolving desires of our customers. Within our diversified portfolio of hundreds of third-party brands, which represented a little less than 70% of our net sales in 2011, our largest brand accounted for approximately 5% of our net sales in each of the last two fiscal years.
Selected third-party brands include, in alphabetical order:

•   Billabong
•   DC Shoes
•   Element
•   Etnies
•   Famous Stars & Straps
•   Fox
•   Hurley	  	•   Levi’s
•   LRG
•   Metal Mulisha
•   Neff
•   Nike
•   O’Neill
•   Quiksilver	  	•   Roxy
•   RVCA
•   Skullcandy
•   UGG
•   Vans
•   Volcom
…and many more	
We supplement our third-party merchandise assortment with our own proprietary brands across many of our apparel and accessory product categories. We utilize our own branded merchandise to expand our price point range, identify and respond to changing fashion trends quickly, fill merchandise gaps and provide a deeper selection of styles and colors for proven fashion items. Our own brands represented approximately 29% and 31% of our net sales for fiscal years 2010 and 2011, respectively.
Our proprietary branded merchandise includes:

Brand	  	Category	
 	  	Guys’, boys’ and juniors’ denim apparel and cologne	
 	 	
 	  	Juniors’ and girls’ apparel, footwear and accessories	
 	 	
 	  	Guys’ and boys’ apparel	
 	 	
 	  	Guys’, boys’ and juniors’ apparel and cologne	
We believe that our extensive selection of merchandise, from both established and emerging brands as well as our proprietary brands, caters to a wide demographic of core customers and enhances our store image as a destination that carries the most sought-after apparel, footwear and accessories.
 
66

Table of Contents
Merchandise Purchasing
Our merchandise purchasing staff is organized by category and product type and consists of a Vice President/General Merchandise Manager, divisional merchandise managers, buyers, associate buyers and assistant buyers. We believe a key element of our success is our team’s ability to identify and source the latest proven fashion trends and core styles that are most relevant to our customers.
Our purchasing approach focuses on product relevance, availability, cost and speed of production in order to provide timely frequent delivery of merchandise to our stores. Our purchasing group and planning and allocation team are highly coordinated and maintain a disciplined buying strategy.
To ensure a relevant assortment, our teams:
 
 	•	 	perform comprehensive analysis of sales trends from our stores and e-commerce site;	
 
 	•	 	gather feedback from our customers and our staff;	
 
 	•	 	maintain regular dialogue with our existing vendor network and potential new vendors;	
 
 	•	 	utilize trend and color forecasting services;	
 
 	•	 	participate in trade shows and action sport related events;	
 
 	•	 	review trade publications; and	
 
 	•	 	evaluate merchandise assortments offered by other retail and online merchants.	
We have developed and maintain strong, and in many cases long-standing, relationships with our third-party vendors and we have a history of identifying and growing with emerging brands. We believe the Tilly’s brand, shopping experience and core customer lifestyle is highly consistent with the image and philosophy of our key vendors. This, in addition to our customer connectivity, facilitates a partnership culture with our key vendors and provides us access to an extensive variety of products and styles, as well as certain merchandise that is exclusive to our stores and website. Our merchandise purchasing group also works closely with independent third parties who design and procure merchandise for our proprietary brands. Our proprietary brand capabilities enhance our ability to rapidly identify and respond to trends and consistently offer our customers proven fashion items. We work with more than 100 vendors based in the United States to supply us with our proprietary branded product. These vendors source from both domestic and international markets and either have their own factories or contract with owners of factories to source finished product. By sourcing merchandise for our proprietary brands both domestically and internationally, we have the flexibility to benefit from shorter lead times associated with domestic manufacturing and lower costs associated with international manufacturing.
Planning and Allocation
Our merchandise planning and allocation team consists of a Vice President, directors, managers, planners and analysts. We have developed an inventory planning and allocation process to support our merchandise strategy. Working closely with our merchandise purchasing team, the planning and allocation team utilizes a disciplined approach to buying, forecasting, inventory control and allocation processes. Our planning and analysis team continually analyzes information from our management information system, including inventory levels and sell-through data, to regularly adjust the assortment at each store and the inventory levels for our company as a whole. Our broad third-party vendor base allows us to shift merchandise purchases to react quickly to changing consumer preferences and market conditions. Furthermore, the vendor base for our proprietary products provides us flexibility to develop our own branded products to quickly address emerging fashion trends and provide a deeper selection of styles, colors, and price points for proven fashion items. We modify our merchandising mix based upon store size, the season, and consumer preferences in different parts of the country. We are also able to react quickly to changing customer needs due to our shipment of merchandise to our stores
 
67

Table of Contents
five times per week. Finally, we coordinate closely with our visual merchandise managers and marketing group in order to manage inventory levels in connection with our promotions and seasonality.
Stores
As of January 28, 2012, we operated 140 stores throughout the United States. Our stores are located in mall and off-mall locations. Our stores averaged approximately 7,800 square feet and generated average net sales per store of $2.7 million and net sales per square foot of $350 for fiscal year 2011.
The table below indicates certain historical information regarding our stores by type of retail center as of fiscal year end for each of the years indicated below:

 	  	2007	  	2008	  	2009	  	2010	  	2011	
Regional Mall	  	28	  	42	  	55	  	62	  	71	
Off-Mall(1)	  	45	  	57	  	56	  	63	  	69	
 	  	 	  	 	  	 	  	 	  	 	
 	  	73	  	99	  	111	  	125	  	140	

(1)	Includes power centers, neighborhood and lifestyle centers, outlet centers and street-front locations.	
The following table shows the number of stores in each of the 14 states we operated in as of January 28, 2012:

State	  	Number of
Stores	 	
Arizona	  	 	18	  	
California	  	 	78	  	
Colorado	  	 	3	  	
Delaware	  	 	1	  	
Florida	  	 	16	  	
Maryland	  	 	2	  	
Nevada	  	 	6	  	
New Jersey	  	 	7	  	
New York	  	 	2	  	
Pennsylvania	  	 	1	  	
Utah	  	 	1	  	
Virginia	  	 	3	  	
Washington	  	 	1	  	
Wisconsin	  	 	1	  	
 	  	 	 	 	
 	  	 	140	  	
 	  	 	 	 	
Distinctive Store Experience
Tilly’s is a customer-driven lifestyle brand. We are energized and inspired by our customers’ individuality and passion for action sports, music, art, and fashion. Our stores bring these interests together in a vibrant, stimulating and authentic environment that is an extension of our customers’ high velocity, multitasking lifestyle. We do this by blending the most relevant brands and styles with music videos, product-related visuals and a dedicated team of store associates. Our associates share the same passion as our customers for action sports, music, art and fashion, enabling them to easily engage with our customers and make shopping at Tilly’s a fun, social experience. Outside of our stores, we connect with our consumers using the same authentic approach, including social media, community outreach and sponsorship of contests, demos, and other events. We believe
 
68

Table of Contents
the Tilly’s experience drives customer awareness, loyalty and repeat visits while generating a buzz and excitement for our brand.
Expansion Opportunities and Site Selection
As of January 28, 2012, the end date of our most recently completed fiscal year, approximately 60% of our stores had been opened within the previous five years. The following table shows the number of stores opened and closed in each of our last five fiscal years:

Fiscal Year	  	Stores
Opened	 	  	Stores
Closed	  	Total Number
of Stores at
End of Period	 	
2007	  	 	13	  	  	1	  	 	73	  	
2008	  	 	26	  	  	—	  	 	99	  	
2009	  	 	13	  	  	1	  	 	111	  	
2010	  	 	16	  	  	2	  	 	125	  	
2011	  	 	16	  	  	1	  	 	140	  	
 	  	 	 	 	  	 	  	 	 	 	
 	  	 	84	  	  	5	  	 	 	 	
 	  	 	 	 	  	 	  	 	 	 	
We plan to open at least 21 net new stores in fiscal year 2012 and to continue to open stores at an annual rate of approximately 15% for the next several years thereafter. Our new store openings are planned in both existing and new markets, for both mall and off-mall locations. We focus on locations that have above average incomes and an ability to draw from a sufficient population with attractive demographics. We have entered new markets by opening stores in high traffic malls relevant to our core customer in order to establish the Tilly’s brand, as well as opening stores in off-mall locations that effectively cover trade areas where our customers want to shop.
In selecting a location for a new mall store, we typically target high productivity malls that dominate their respective trade areas. In most cases, these malls are located in suburban areas. We use landlord provided information to assess our sales potential, while also considering the number of other teen-oriented retailers located in the mall. We prefer to position our stores in areas with the highest visibility and mall traffic.
In selecting a location for a new off-mall store, we typically target power and neighborhood centers consisting of nationally recognized large box apparel and non-apparel retailers. In most instances, the centers are located in suburban or high growth areas. We prefer to position our stores in-line among the mid-size to large-size boxes. We also consider proximity to other destinations such as restaurants, movie theaters or other attractions for our core customer. We will also target street-front locations in prominent well-known cities, outlet centers and lifestyle centers provided there is a strong teen-oriented component.
Our unit growth is supported by our new store economics, which we believe to be compelling. Our store model assumes a target store size averaging 7,500 to 8,000 square feet. In the first 12 months after opening, our new store model targets net sales of approximately $2.2 million and cash flow of $300,000, with cash flows rising to over $400,000 in the second 12 months as the store begins to mature. The target net investment to open our stores is between $500,000 and $550,000, reflecting a mild inflationary increase to the range of historical average costs incurred to open stores since the beginning of 2005. This results in an average pre-tax cash-on-cash payback period on our investment of about 18 months.
The sales and cash flow targets as well as the range of net investment targets are based on historical results, including store openings in fiscal 2011. The average store net investment range reflects the initial store build-out costs net of landlord allowances, preopening expenses and the investment in initial inventories, net of payables. The expected net investment range relies in part on a continuation of the historical levels of landlord allowances. Based on past real estate industry practices and our experience leasing and opening new locations in a variety of
 
69

Table of Contents
real estate environments and markets, we expect the average net investment, including the amount of landlord allowances, to be generally consistent over the next several years. However, if the amount of landlord allowances drop significantly, the amount of net investment to open new stores could rise, as could the expected cash-on-cash payback period. Furthermore, the Company’s anticipated net investment may increase over time depending on a number of factors beyond our control, such as the cost of construction materials, competition for new retail locations and changes in the commercial real estate environment. In addition, the Company’s anticipated yearly cash flows may be impacted by several factors, such as the level of competition and the specific store location at a particular venue and the concentration of our stores within a limited geographic area.
e-Commerce
Our e-commerce platform was established in 2004 and has grown significantly in every year of operation. In fiscal 2011, our e-commerce net sales increased 33% relative to fiscal 2010 while traffic at www.tillys.com increased 29%. We grew our e-commerce business to approximately 11% of our total net sales in fiscal 2011 from 5% of net sales in fiscal 2007. We believe that our target customer regularly shops online and we see continued opportunity to grow our e-commerce business to approximately 15% of total net sales over time. In fiscal 2011 we sold merchandise to customers in all 50 states and approximately 30% of our e-commerce net sales were to customers in states without brick-and-mortar stores. Our website serves both as a sales channel and a marketing tool to our extended customer base, including those customers in markets where we do not currently have stores. We also believe our website reinforces the Tilly’s brand image and serves as an effective advertising vehicle for our retail stores. Our website provides an expanded product offering relative to our stores and includes web exclusive merchandise. Similar to the merchandising approach in our stores, we frequently change the look of our website to highlight new brands and products and to encourage frequent visits. We utilize multiple channels to drive traffic to our website, including our catalog, marketing materials in our retail stores, search engine marketing, internet ad placement, shopping site partnerships, third-party affiliations, email marketing, mobile marketing and direct mail. In addition, we utilize the website to offer current information on our upcoming events, promotions and store locations.
Our current e-commerce fulfillment is operated out of our distribution center in Irvine, California. To accommodate our growth, in the first half of fiscal year 2013 we plan to transition to a new e-commerce distribution center also located in Irvine, California.
Store Management, Culture and Training
We believe that a key to our success is our ability to attract, train, retain and motivate qualified employees at all levels of our organization. Each of our stores typically operates with a three to five member store management team. In addition, each store has 10 or more full time equivalent store associates who represent the West Coast lifestyle and promote the Tilly’s brand not only inside the store, but also in their schools and communities. The number of store associates we employ generally increases during peak selling seasons, particularly the back-to-school and the winter holiday seasons, and will increase to the extent that we open new stores.
We have developed a corporate culture that we believe empowers the individual store managers to make store-level business decisions and we reward them when they exceed sales targets. We are committed to improving the skills and careers of our workforce and providing advancement opportunities for employees. We evaluate our store associates weekly on measures such as sales per hour, units per transaction and dollars per transaction to ensure productivity, to recognize top performers and to identify potential training opportunities. We endeavor to design incentive programs for store associates that promote a competitive, yet fun, culture that is consistent with our image.
We provide our managers with the knowledge and tools to succeed through comprehensive training programs, focusing on both operational expertise and supervisory skills. Our training programs and workshops are offered at the store, district and regional levels, allowing managers from multiple locations to interact with
 
70

Table of Contents
each other and exchange ideas to better operate stores. Store associates receive training from their managers to improve their product expertise and selling skills.
Marketing and Advertising
Our marketing approach is designed to create an authentic connection with our customers by consistently generating a buzz and excitement for our brand while staying true to our West Coast inspired, action sports heritage. We utilize a multi-pronged marketing strategy to connect with our customers and drive traffic to our stores and website, comprised of the following:
 
 	•	 	Catalog. We view our catalog primarily as a sales and marketing tool to drive online and store traffic from both existing and new customers. We also believe our catalog reinforces the Tilly’s brand and showcases our comprehensive selection of products in settings designed to reflect our brand’s lifestyle image. In fiscal 2011, we mailed approximately 6.7 million catalogs to addresses included in our growing proprietary database, which currently includes key information on over 1.9 million customers. We send these catalogs, which include coupons that can be redeemed at stores or online, to the customers in our database several times a year, primarily around key shopping periods such as spring break, back-to-school, and the winter holidays.	
 
 	•	 	Brand Partnerships. We partner and collaborate with our vendors for exclusive events such as autograph signings, in-store performances, contests, demos, giveaways, shopping sprees and VIP trips. In fiscal year 2011, we organized over 85 events, many involving musicians, celebrities and athletes in the entertainment, music and action sports industries. For example, we partnered with Universal Music Group, Travis Barker and Famous Stars & Straps to host a nationwide autograph signing tour that included live music performances at seven stores from coast to coast. Through these partnerships, we are able to connect with and engage our customers in an exciting, authentic experience.	
 
 	•	 	Social Media. We believe our core customers rely heavily on the opinions of their peers, often expressed through social media. Therefore we use our website blog as well as Facebook and Twitter posts as a viral marketing platform to communicate directly with our customers while also allowing customers to interact with one another and provide feedback on our events and products.	
 
 	•	 	Community Outreach. Through our “We Care Program” and in partnership with our vendors, we support and participate in various academic, art, and athletic programs at local schools and other organizations in communities surrounding our stores.	
 
 	•	 	Radio, Print and Email Marketing. We utilize traditional radio and print advertising as well as email marketing to build awareness, drive traffic to our stores and website and to promote local in-store promotions and events. We periodically send emails to the customers in our proprietary database to introduce new brands and products, offer promotions on select merchandise, highlight key events and announce new store openings. We believe there is an opportunity to use national print advertising to drive new traffic among potential customers.	
Distribution
We centrally distribute all of our merchandise through a 126,000 square foot distribution facility co-located with our headquarters in Irvine, California. Our lease expires in December 2012 and we have three five-year renewal option periods. We moved to our current location in January 2003 and have invested over $30 million in our highly automated distribution center and information systems. We designed this state-of-the-art facility to allow us to manage our distribution operations in an efficient, cost-effective manner and to provide support for our growth initiatives. Extensive investments have been made to the distribution-center infrastructure, focused around systems automation, material-handling equipment, RF technologies, and automated sortation in order to further enhance our processing speed and long term scalability. We believe the automation systems we utilize in our facility allow us to operate at a higher level of efficiency and accuracy than many of our competitors.
 
71

Table of Contents
We typically ship merchandise to our stores five times per week, providing them with a steady flow of both new and replenishment products. Merchandise is shipped in a floor-ready format (carrying price tickets, sensor tags and with hangers where appropriate) which allows store employees to spend less time processing the merchandise and more time with our customers. We use our own fleet of trucks to ship merchandise to our local (Southern California) stores and third-party distributors to ship merchandise to stores outside our local area.
We believe our distribution infrastructure can support a national retail footprint in excess of 500 stores with minimal incremental capital investment. In addition, we anticipate spending approximately $7 million to equip our new e-commerce distribution center, which we expect to open in the first half of fiscal year 2013.
Management Information Systems
Our management information systems provide a full range of business process support and information to our store, merchandising, financial, real estate and other business teams. We selected, customized and integrated our information systems to enable and support our dynamic merchandise model. We believe our systems provide us with improved operational efficiencies, scalability, management control and timely reporting that allow us to identify and quickly respond to trends in our business. We believe that our information systems are scalable, flexible and have the capacity to accommodate our current growth plans.
We have made significant investments in our management information systems over the last several years and believe we are utilizing “best of breed” technology. We use software licensed from JDA Software Group, Inc. for merchandise planning and allocation, SKU classification, inventory tracking, purchase order management and sales audit functions. We utilize MicroStrategy Incorporated for business intelligence. We utilize Manhattan Associates Inc.’s warehouse management systems to handle merchandise distribution. We utilize technology from Strategic Distribution, Inc. in our distribution center enabling us to automate our merchandise sortation process, allowing us greater flexibility in scaling our operations for new store expansions and peak season operations. Our financial systems are licensed from Lawson and our payroll system uses a third-party platform provided by Automatic Data Processing, Inc.
We update our sales daily in our merchandising reporting systems by collecting sales information from each store’s point-of-sale, or POS, terminals utilizing software from Micros Systems, Inc. Our POS system consists of registers providing processing of retail transactions, price look-up, time and attendance and e-mail. Sales information, inventory tracking and payroll hours are uploaded to our central host system. The host system downloads price changes, performs system maintenance and provides software updates to the stores through automated nightly two-way electronic communication with each store. We evaluate information obtained through nightly polling to implement merchandising decisions, including product purchasing/reorders, markdowns and allocation of merchandise on a daily basis.
Competition
The teenage and young adult retail apparel, accessories and footwear industry is highly competitive. We compete with other retailers for customers, store locations, store associates and management personnel. We currently compete with other teenage-focused retailers such as, but not limited to, Abercrombie & Fitch Co., Aeropostale, Inc., American Eagle Outfitters, Inc., The Buckle, Inc., Forever 21, Inc., Hot Topic, Inc., Pacific Sunwear of California, Inc., The Wet Seal, Inc., Urban Outfitters, Inc. and Zumiez, Inc. In addition, we compete with independent specialty shops, department stores and direct marketers that sell similar lines of merchandise and target customers through catalogs and e-commerce. Further, we may face new competitors and increased competition from existing competitors as we expand into new markets and increase our presence in existing markets. Given the extensive number and types of retailers with which Tilly’s competes for customers, we believe that our target market is highly fragmented and we do not believe we have a significant share of this market.
 
72

Table of Contents
Competition in our sector is based, among other things, upon merchandise offerings, store location, price and the ability to identify with the customer. We believe that we compete favorably with many of our competitors based on our differentiated merchandising strategy, store environment, flexible real estate strategy and company culture. However, many of our competitors are larger, have significantly more stores, and have substantially greater financial, marketing and other resources than we do. Moreover, we recognize that we do not possess exclusive rights to many of the elements that comprise our in-store experience and product offerings. Our competitors can emulate facets of our business strategy and in-store experience, which could result in a reduction of any competitive advantage or special appeal that we might possess. See “Risk Factors—We face intense competition in our industry and we may not be able to compete effectively”.
Properties
We lease approximately 172,000 square feet for our corporate headquarters and retail support and distribution center located at 10 Whatney and 12 Whatney, Irvine, California. Our lease began January 1, 2003 and terminates December 31, 2012, with three five-year renewal option periods.
We lease approximately 24,000 square feet of office and warehouse space located at 15 Chrysler, Irvine, California. Our lease began November 1, 2010 and terminates October 31, 2014. Approximately 17,000 square feet of this building is subleased to a third party and we use the remaining space.
On September 2, 2011, we entered into a lease for approximately 26,000 square feet of office and warehouse space located at 11 Whatney, Irvine, California. The building is currently being constructed by the landlord, and construction is expected to be completed during the first half of fiscal year 2012. Our lease terminates ten years from the earlier of (i) the date the building is substantially completed or (ii) the date we can access the building and begin tenant improvements.
On November 1, 2011, we entered into a lease for approximately 81,000 square feet of office and warehouse space located at 17 Pasteur, Irvine, California. This building is currently being expanded and this construction is expected to be completed during the first half of fiscal year 2013. We intend to use this property as our e-commerce distribution center. Our lease terminates October 31, 2021.
All of our stores, encompassing approximately 1,094,000 total square feet as of January 28, 2012, are occupied under operating leases. The store leases generally have a base lease term of 10 years and many have renewal option periods, and we are generally responsible for payment of property taxes and utilities, common area maintenance and mall marketing fees.
Trademarks
“Ambitious”, “Blue Crown”, “Division 7”, “Eldon”, “Full Tilt”, “If it’s not here…it’s not happening”, “Infamous”, “RSQ”, “Tilly’s”, “Vindicated”, and logos related to some of these names, are among our trademarks registered with the U.S. Patent and Trademark Office. We regard our trademarks as valuable and intend to maintain such marks and any related registrations. We are not aware of any claims of infringement or other challenges to our right to use our marks in the U.S. We vigorously protect our trademarks.
Employees
As of January 28, 2012, we employed approximately 1,000 full-time and approximately 2,600 part-time employees, of which approximately 400 were employed at our corporate office and distribution facility and approximately 3,200 were employed at our store locations. However, the number of employees, especially part-time employees, fluctuates depending upon our seasonal needs and, in fiscal year 2011, varied between approximately 3,000 and 5,500 employees. None of our employees are represented by a labor union and we consider our relationship with our employees to be good.
 
73

Table of Contents
Legal Proceedings
In October 2011, a putative class action, Deborah Lyddy v. World of Jeans & Tops and Tilly’s, Inc., (37-2011-00098812-CU-BT-CTL) was filed against us in the Superior Court of the State of California for the County of San Diego, alleging various causes of action based on our California gift card redemption policies. The complaint states that the plaintiff believes the total amount of the controversy is less than $5 million, but reserves the right to amend.
From time to time, we become involved in lawsuits and other claims arising from our ordinary course of business. Because of the uncertainties related to the incurrence, amount and range of loss on any pending litigation or claim, management is currently unable to predict the ultimate outcome of any litigation or claim, determine whether a liability has been incurred or make an estimate of the reasonably possible liability that could result from an unfavorable outcome. Management believes, after considering a number of factors and the nature of any outstanding litigation or claims, that the outcome will not have a material effect upon our results of operations, financial condition or cash flows. However, because of the unpredictable nature of these matters, we cannot provide any assurances regarding the outcome of any litigation or claim to which we are a party or the impact on us of an adverse ruling in such matters. Therefore, see “Risk Factors—Litigation costs and the outcome of litigation could have a material adverse effect on our business”.
 
74

Table of Contents
MANAGEMENT
Executive Officers and Directors
The following table sets forth certain information about the executive officers, directors and other key employees as of February 29, 2012. Each of the directors and officers of Tilly’s, Inc. were appointed on August 8, 2011, except for Mr. Collier, who was appointed as director on September 16, 2011. Prior to that time, and with the exception of Mr. Collier, they were the directors and officers of our operating subsidiary, World of Jeans & Tops. Accordingly, the references to “us” with respect to service as a director and officer include services to World of Jeans & Tops.

Name	 	Age	  	Position	
Hezy Shaked	 	57	  	Co-Founder, Chief Strategy Officer and Chairman of the Board of Directors	
Daniel Griesemer	 	52	  	President, Chief Executive Officer and Director	
Bill Langsdorf	 	55	  	Senior Vice President and Chief Financial Officer	
 	 	 	
Listed in alphabetical order:	 	 	  	 	
Debbie Anker-Morris	 	53	  	Vice President and General Merchandising Manager	
John Burgess	 	58	  	Vice President of Real Estate	
Craig DeMerit	 	41	  	Vice President, Chief Information Officer and Chief Operating Officer	
Patrick Grosso	 	39	  	Vice President, General Counsel and Secretary	
Shelly Johnson	 	41	  	Vice President of Stores	
Tilly Levine	 	56	  	Vice President of Vendor Relations	
Carolyn McNamara	 	47	  	Vice President of Merchandise Planning and Allocation	
Rochelle Myers	 	45	  	Vice President of Finance and Controller	
Cheryl Rudich	 	51	  	Vice President of Marketing	
 	 	 	
Non-employee directors:	 	 	  	 	
Doug Collier(1)(2)(3)	 	49	  	Director	
Seth Johnson(1)(3)	 	58	  	Director	
Janet Kerr(2)(3)	 	57	  	Director	
Bernard Zeichner(1)(2)	 	68	  	Director	
 
(1)	Member of the Tilly’s, Inc. Audit Committee	
(2)	Member of the Tilly’s, Inc. Compensation Committee	
(3)	Member of the Tilly’s, Inc. Nominating and Corporate Governance Committee	
Hezy Shaked co-founded the Tilly’s concept in 1982 and formed our company in 1984. He has served as Chairman of the Board of Directors since our inception and has served as our Chief Strategy Officer since February 2011. Mr. Shaked will continue to serve as Chairman of our Board of Directors following completion of this offering. From September 2008 to February 2011, Mr. Shaked served as our President and Chief Executive Officer. From September 2006 to September 2008, Mr. Shaked served as our Co-Chief Executive Officer. From our inception to September 2006, Mr. Shaked served as our President and Chief Executive Officer. As our Co-Founder and former President and Chief Executive Officer, Mr. Shaked has an in-depth knowledge and understanding of all facets of our business and has developed extensive professional relationships during his 30 years of experience in the retail industry. Through his experience and knowledge of our operations and the industry in which we compete, Mr. Shaked is well-suited to serve as Chairman of our board of directors.
Daniel Griesemer has served as our President and Chief Executive Officer since February 2011, and has served on our board of directors since April 2011. Mr. Griesemer previously served as President, Chief Executive Officer and Director at Coldwater Creek, Inc., a publicly traded national specialty retailer, from October 2007 through September 2009. Prior to that, Mr. Griesemer served as Coldwater Creek, Inc.’s President and Chief Operating Officer from March 2007 through October 2007, its Executive Vice President of Sales and Marketing
 
75

Table of Contents
from January 2005 through March 2007, its Executive Vice President of Retail from April 2004 through January 2005 and its Senior Vice President of Retail from October 2001 through April 2004. From 1989 through 2000, Mr. Griesemer held a number of progressively more responsible positions with Gap, Inc., and ultimately served as Divisional Merchandise Manager for Gap, Inc. From 1983 to 1989, Mr. Griesemer worked in a variety of positions at Macy’s, Inc. Mr. Griesemer holds a Bachelor of Science degree in Business Administration from the University of Dayton. Mr. Griesemer brings to the board of directors extensive experience and demonstrated leadership capabilities, including leadership of a public company in the retail industry. Serving as a director and our President and Chief Executive Officer will allow Mr. Griesemer to act as a bridge between management and the board of directors to help ensure that both groups act with a common purpose.
Bill Langsdorf has served as our Senior Vice President and Chief Financial Officer since February 2007. From 2004 to February 2007, Mr. Langsdorf served as the Senior Vice President and Chief Financial Officer of Anchor Blue Retail Group, Inc., or Anchor Blue, a specialty retailer. From 2002 to 2004 Mr. Langsdorf served as the Senior Vice President and Chief Financial Officer of The Wet Seal, Inc., or The Wet Seal, a specialty retailer. From 1986 to 2002, Mr. Langsdorf served in various management positions at House2Home, Inc. (formerly Home Base, Inc.), with the last positions held of Chairman of the Board, Executive Vice President and Chief Financial Officer. Prior to joining Home Base in 1986, Mr. Langsdorf was a Manager in the consulting practice of Ernst & Young LLP (formerly Arthur Young & Co.). Mr. Langsdorf holds a Bachelor of Arts in Business Administration from California State University, Fullerton and a Masters of Management from the Kellogg Graduate School of Management at Northwestern University. Mr. Langsdorf is a Certified Public Accountant (inactive).
Debbie Anker-Morris has served as our Vice President and General Merchandising Manager since May 2004. Prior to that, she held various senior management positions with Anchor Blue (1998-2004), Petrie Stores (1992-1997) and Charming Shoppes (1988-1991). Ms. Anker-Morris graduated from the Fashion Institute of Technology with a degree in Fashion Buying and Merchandising and has over 30 years of experience in the retail industry.
John Burgess has served as our Vice President of Real Estate since May 2007. From June 2004 to March 2007, Mr. Burgess served as Vice President of Real Estate at Pacific Sunwear of California, Inc., or Pacific Sunwear, a specialty retailer. Prior to that, Mr. Burgess worked in various positions over 29 years at Anchor Blue, with the last position held of Senior Vice President of Real Estate and Construction from 1996 to 2003. Mr. Burgess has a Bachelor of Science in Architecture from the University of Southern California.
Craig DeMerit has served as our Vice President of Information Systems since April 2004, our Chief Information Officer since 2008, and our Chief Information Officer and Chief Operating Officer since February 2011. From 1998 to 2004, Mr. DeMerit held various senior executive positions for Guess?, Inc., or Guess, an apparel company, the most recent of which was Vice President and Chief Information Officer. Prior to 1998, Mr. DeMerit was employed by Ticketmaster where he managed corporate technology. Mr. DeMerit has over 20 years of experience in the management of information systems, including 15 years of retail experience encompassing supply chain, technology and e-commerce.
Patrick Grosso has served as our Vice President and General Counsel since March 2008 and as Secretary since April 2010. From 2007 to 2008, Mr. Grosso served as General Counsel to ECC Capital Corporation, a mortgage real estate investment trust. From 2005 to 2007, Mr. Grosso served as General Counsel to a former mortgage lending company. From 2001 to 2005, Mr. Grosso served in various positions with Aames Investment Corporation, a mortgage real estate investment trust, with the last position held of Vice President and Senior Counsel. Prior to that, Mr. Grosso was an associate with the international law firm of Latham & Watkins LLP and an attorney with the U.S. Securities and Exchange Commission, Division of Corporation Finance. Mr. Grosso holds a Juris Doctorate from Pepperdine University and a Bachelor of Science in Economics from California State Polytechnic University, Pomona. Mr. Grosso is licensed to practice law in California, Texas and Washington, D.C. and is a Certified Public Accountant (inactive).
 
76

Table of Contents
Shelly Johnson has served as our Vice President of Stores since November 2006. Prior to that, Ms. Johnson served as our Director of Stores since April 2006 and our Director of Training and Development since January 2004. Prior to that, Ms. Johnson served in multiple management capacities at The Wet Seal from 1989 to 2003, with the last position held of Director of Training and Development.
Tilly Levine co-founded the Tilly’s concept in 1982 and formed our company in 1984. She has served as a Vice President and Director of World of Jeans & Tops since its inception. Ms. Levine will no longer serve as a Director upon completion of this offering. Ms. Levine currently serves as our Vice President of Vendor Relations and has served in that capacity since 2007. From 2004 to 2007, Ms. Levine was responsible for the buying of guys’ and boys’ apparel. Ms. Levine has over 30 years of experience in the retail industry.
Carolyn S. McNamara has served as our Vice President of Merchandise Planning and Allocation since September 2006. From September 2005 to September 2006, Ms. McNamara was with Pacific Sunwear as the Senior Manager overseeing the company’s Merchandise Planning team. From September 1996 to August 2005, Ms. McNamara held various management roles at Limited Brands Inc. in Merchandise Planning and Allocation, Project Management, Change Management and Training Design. Ms. McNamara holds a Bachelor of Science from California State Polytechnic University, Pomona.
Rochelle Myers has served as our Vice President of Finance and Controller since October 2006. From February 2002 to October 2006, Ms. Myers served as our Controller. From 1994 to 2002, Ms. Myers was with The Wet Seal in various capacities including Assistant Controller, Director of Special Projects and Director of Financial Reporting. From 1991 to 1994, Ms. Myers was an Internal Auditor for Canon USA, and from 1989 to 1991 she was a Staff Auditor with Ernst & Young LLP. Ms. Myers holds a Bachelor of Arts in Economics and Finance from the University of California, Los Angeles and is a Certified Public Accountant (inactive).
Cheryl Rudich has served as our Vice President of Marketing since October 2006. From 1994 to 2003, Ms. Rudich served in various management positions at The Wet Seal, with the last position held of Vice President of Marketing. From 1985 to 1994, Ms. Rudich was a Co-Creative Director at The Mednick Group, a design and advertising firm in Los Angeles. Ms. Rudich holds a Bachelor of Arts in Design from the University of California, Los Angeles, and a Bachelor of Fine Arts from the Art Center College of Design. Ms. Rudich has over 25 years experience in branding, creative direction and retail marketing.
Doug Collier has served on our board of directors since September 2011. He previously served as the Executive Vice President, Chief Financial Officer and Secretary of Volcom, Inc., or Volcom, a designer, marketer and distributor of premium quality young men’s and young women’s clothing, footwear, accessories and related products. Mr. Collier served as Volcom’s Chief Financial Officer since 1994, which included leading its initial public offering in 2005, until Volcom’s acquisition by PPR S.A. in June 2011. From 1991 to 1994, Mr. Collier served as the Controller at Mary Tyler Moore Studios. He was a senior analyst tax specialist at KPMG LLP from 1987 to 1990. Mr. Collier is currently a member of the Board of Directors and Chairperson of the Audit Committee of Skullcandy, Inc., a publicly traded maker of audio branded merchandise. He is a certified public accountant (inactive). With over 20 years of financial and apparel experience, including significant executive experience, Mr. Collier will provide our board of directors with operational, financial and strategic planning insights.
Seth Johnson has served on our board of directors since April 2011 and as Chairperson of our Audit Committee since August 2011. Prior to that, Mr. Johnson served as a member of the advisory committee to our board of directors from July 2008 through 2011. From 2007 to 2009, Mr. Johnson was an instructor in business strategy at Chapman University’s Argyros School of Business and Economics. From 2005 to 2006, Mr. Johnson served as the Chief Executive Officer of Pacific Sunwear of California, Inc. From 1999 to 2004, Mr. Johnson was the Chief Operating Officer of Abercrombie & Fitch Co., or Abercrombie & Fitch, a specialty retailer, and was its Chief Financial Officer from 1992 to 1998. During that time period, Mr. Johnson led Abercrombie & Fitch’s initial public offering and participated in business growth from sales of $85 million to over $2 billion. Mr. Johnson is currently a member of the board of directors and serves as the Lead Director of True Religion
 
77

Table of Contents
Apparel, Inc., a publicly traded company. With over 30 years of apparel retail experience, including significant executive experience, Mr. Johnson will provide our board of directors with operational, financial and strategic planning insights.
Janet E. Kerr has served on our board of directors and as Chairperson of our Nominating and Corporate Governance Committee since April 2011. Prior to that, Ms. Kerr served as a member of the advisory committee to our board of directors from July 2008 through 2011. She is the founder and currently a professor of law and the Executive Director of the Geoffrey H. Palmer Center for Entrepreneurship and the Law at Pepperdine University School of Law in Malibu, California. Ms. Kerr has served as a consultant to various companies regarding Sarbanes-Oxley Act compliance and corporate governance. She has founded several technology companies and is a well-known author in the areas of securities, corporate law and corporate governance, having published several articles and a book on the subjects. Ms. Kerr was a co-founder of X-Labs, a technology company co-founded with HRL Laboratories. Ms. Kerr is currently a member of the board of directors and Chairperson of the Nominating and Corporate Governance Committee of La-Z-Boy, Inc., a publicly traded furniture retailer and manufacturer. Additionally, she is a member of the board of directors of TCW Funds and TCW Strategic Income Fund, Inc., a NYSE listed closed-end registered investment company. From 2004 to 2010, Ms. Kerr served as a member of the board of directors and Chairperson of the Nominating and Corporate Governance Committee for CKE Restaurants, Inc., a quick service restaurant company that was previously public and listed on the NYSE. Ms. Kerr is licensed to practice law in California and New York and occupies the Laure Sudreau-Rippe Endowed Chair at Pepperdine University School of Law. With over 30 years of corporate governance experience, Ms. Kerr contributes to our board significant expertise in the regulatory, governance and legal matters of public companies.
Bernard Zeichner has served on our board of directors since April 2011 and as Chairperson of our Compensation Committee since August 2011. Mr. Zeichner served as Chairman of the Board of Directors of Charlotte Russe Holdings, Inc., or Charlotte Russe, a specialty retailer, from 1996 until May 2008, and was its President from May 1996 to June 2001 and its Chief Executive Officer from September 1996 to July 2003. Prior to joining Charlotte Russe, Mr. Zeichner was President of the retail division of Guess from 1993 to 1995. Prior to that, Mr. Zeichner was employed by Contempo Casuals, serving as President from 1982 to 1993 and as Chief Executive Officer from 1989 to 1993. From 1977 to 1982, Mr. Zeichner was Executive Vice President of Joske’s of Texas, a department store chain. With over 30 years of apparel retail experience, including significant executive and board experience, Mr. Zeichner provides our board of directors with operational, financial and strategic planning insights.
Composition of the Board of Directors of Tilly’s, Inc.
Our bylaws provide that our board of directors shall consist of at least one member, with the exact number of directors to be determined by resolution of our board of directors. Our board of directors consists of six members. Based upon information requested from and provided by each director concerning his or her background, employment and affiliations, including family relationships, with us, our senior management and our independent registered public accounting firm, our board of directors has determined that all but two of our directors, Messrs. Shaked and Griesemer, are independent directors under the applicable listing standards of the NYSE and the rules of the SEC. We expect that our independent directors will hold at least two executive sessions per year.
Until the date all shares of our Class B common stock are converted to Class A common stock or otherwise cease to be outstanding, referred to as the Full Conversion Date, the members of our board of directors will be elected at annual meetings of the stockholders and hold office until the next annual meeting of the stockholders. Our certificate of incorporation provides that on the Full Conversion Date, our board of directors will be divided into three classes to be comprised of the directors in office, with each class serving for a staggered three-year term. From the Full Conversion Date, Class I directors will serve an initial one-year term expiring at the first
 
78

Table of Contents
annual meeting of stockholders following the Full Conversion Date. Class II directors will serve an initial two-year term expiring at the second annual meeting of stockholders following the Full Conversion Date. Class III directors will serve an initial three-year term expiring at the third annual meeting of stockholders following the Full Conversion Date. Upon the expiration of the initial term of each class of directors, the directors in that class will be eligible to be elected for a new three-year term. Our directors will hold office until their successors have been elected and qualified or until their earlier death, resignation, disqualification or removal. Executive officers are appointed by and serve at the direction of our board of directors.
Committees of the Board of Directors
We currently have three standing committees: an audit committee, a compensation committee and a nominating and corporate governance committee. We intend to make the charters of all three of our standing board committees available on our website, www.tillys.com, under the Investor Relations section, upon the effective date of this offering. The inclusion of our website address in this prospectus does not include or incorporate by reference the information on our website into this prospectus.
Audit Committee
Our audit committee consists of Messrs. Johnson (Chairperson), Collier and Zeichner. Our board of directors has determined that each of these directors is independent as defined by the applicable rules of the NYSE and the SEC, and that each member of the audit committee meets the financial literacy and experience requirements of the applicable SEC and NYSE rules. In addition, our board of directors has determined that Messrs. Collier and Johnson both qualify as an “audit committee financial expert” under the rules and regulations of the SEC. Our independent auditors and our internal finance personnel regularly meet privately with, and have unrestricted access to, our audit committee. We will adopt an audit committee charter intended to satisfy applicable SEC and NYSE rules, to be effective upon the consummation of this offering.
Our audit committee charter requires that the audit committee oversee our corporate accounting and financial reporting processes. The primary duties of our audit committee are to, among other things:
 
 	•	 	evaluate our independent registered accounting firm’s qualifications, independence and performance;	
 
 	•	 	determine the engagement and compensation of our independent registered accounting firm;	
 
 	•	 	approve the retention of our independent registered accounting firm to perform any proposed, permissible non-audit services;	
 
 	•	 	monitor the rotation of partners and managers of the independent registered accounting firm on our engagement team as required;	
 
 	•	 	review our consolidated financial statements;	
 
 	•	 	review our critical accounting policies and estimates;	
 
 	•	 	meet periodically with our management and internal audit team to consider the adequacy of our internal controls and the objectivity of our financial reporting;	
 
 	•	 	establish procedures for the receipt, retention and treatment of complaints regarding internal accounting controls or auditing matters and the confidential, anonymous submission by employees of concerns regarding questionable accounting or auditing matters;	
 
 	•	 	review on an ongoing basis and approve related party transactions, as defined in SEC and NYSE rules;	
 
 	•	 	prepare the reports required by the rules of the SEC to be included in our annual proxy statement; and	
 
 	•	 	discuss with our management and our independent registered accounting firm the results of our annual audit and the review of our quarterly consolidated financial statements.	
 
79

Table of Contents
Compensation Committee
Our compensation committee consists of Messrs. Zeichner (Chairperson) and Collier, and Ms. Kerr. Our board of directors has determined that each of these directors is independent under NYSE rules and qualifies as a non-employee director and an outsider director for purposes of Rule 16b-3 under the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as amended, or the Exchange Act, and Section 162(m) of the Code, respectively. We will adopt a compensation committee charter intended to satisfy applicable SEC and NYSE rules, to be effective upon the consummation of this offering. The primary duties of the compensation committee are to, among other things:
 
 	•	 	establish overall employee compensation policies and recommend to our board of directors major compensation programs;	
 
 	•	 	review and approve the compensation of our corporate officers and directors, including salary and bonus awards;	
 
 	•	 	administer our various employee benefit, pension and equity incentive programs;	
 
 	•	 	manage and review any employee loans; and	
 
 	•	 	prepare an annual report on executive compensation for inclusion in our proxy statement.	
Nominating and Corporate Governance Committee
Our nominating and corporate governance committee consists of Ms. Kerr (Chairperson), and Messrs. Collier and Johnson. Our board of directors has determined that each of these directors is independent under NYSE rules. We will adopt a nominating and corporate governance committee charter to be effective upon the consummation of this offering. The primary duties of the nominating and corporate governance committee are to, among other things:
 
 	•	 	establish standards for service on our board of directors and nominating guidelines and principles;	
 
 	•	 	identify individuals qualified to become members of our board of directors and recommend director candidates for election to our board of directors;	
 
 	•	 	consider and make recommendations to our board of directors regarding its size and composition, committee composition and structure and procedures affecting directors;	
 
 	•	 	establish policies regarding the consideration of any director candidates recommended by our stockholders, and the procedures to be followed by the stockholders in submitting such recommendations;	
 
 	•	 	evaluate and review the performance of existing directors;	
 
 	•	 	review executive officer and director indemnification and insurance matters;	
 
 	•	 	evaluate and review the company’s enterprise risk management policy and risk exposure; and	
 
 	•	 	monitor our corporate governance principles and practices and make recommendations to our board of directors regarding governance matters, including our certificate of incorporation, bylaws and charters of our committees.	
Other Committees
Our board of directors may establish other committees as it deems necessary or appropriate from time to time.
 
80

Table of Contents
Risk Considerations in our Compensation Program
Prior to the completion of this offering, we intend to analyze our compensation programs and policies to determine whether those programs and policies are reasonably likely to have a material adverse effect on us.
Code of Ethics and Business Conduct
Our board of directors will adopt a code of ethics and business conduct, to be effective upon consummation of this offering, which will apply to all of our employees, executive officers and directors. Upon consummation of this offering, the full text of our code of ethics and business conduct will be posted on our website, www.tillys.com, under the Investor Relations section. We intend to disclose future amendments to certain provisions of our code of ethics and business conduct, or waivers of such provisions, applicable to our directors and executive officers, at the same location on our website identified above. The inclusion of our website address in this prospectus does not include or incorporate by reference the information on our website into this prospectus.
Compensation Committee Interlocks and Insider Participation
Prior to April 2011, we did not have a formal compensation committee or other board committee performing equivalent functions. During our 2011 fiscal year, management compensation was determined by our Co-Founder and former President and Chief Executive Officer, Hezy Shaked. None of the members of our compensation committee has at any time been one of our executive officers or employees or an executive officer or employee of our subsidiary. None of our executive officers has ever served as a member of the board of directors or compensation committee of any other entity that has or had one or more executive officers serving on our board of directors or our compensation committee.
Director Compensation
In April 2011, we adopted a director compensation program in which only non-employee directors will receive compensation for their service on the board of directors. They will receive the following annual retainers:

 	  	Annual Retainer
to be Paid	 	
Service on board of directors	  	$	40,000	  	
Chairperson of standing committee:	  	 	 	 	
Audit Committee	  	$	15,000	  	
Compensation Committee	  	$	12,000	  	
Nominating and Governance Committee	  	$	12,000	  	
Members of standing committee:	  	 	 	 	
Audit Committee	  	$	8,000	  	
Compensation Committee	  	$	5,000	  	
Nominating and Governance Committee	  	$	5,000	  	
Annual service for retainer purposes relates to the approximate 12-month period between annual meetings of our stockholders and all retainers are paid in quarterly installments. A prorated annual retainer will be paid to any person who becomes a member of our board of directors, a committee chair or a member of any committee on a date other than the date of the annual meeting of our stockholders. Additionally, we will reimburse directors for reasonable expenses incurred in connection with their duties.
 
81

Table of Contents
In addition, each non-employee director will receive an annual restricted stock award grant under our 2012 Equity and Incentive Award Plan having a fair value at the time of grant equal to $80,000, which will vest in two equal installments on each of the succeeding two anniversaries of the grant date. The first grant will be made upon consummation of this offering, and the number of shares will be based on the initial public offering price. We anticipate annual grants will be made at each annual stockholders’ meeting.
The following table summarizes the cash compensation paid to our non-employee directors for fiscal year 2011:

Non-employee Director	  	Fees Earned in
Fiscal 2011	 	
Doug Collier(1)	  	$	21,460	  	
Seth Johnson(2)	  	$	57,817	  	
Janet Kerr(3)	  	$	54,207	  	
Bernard Zeichner(4)	  	$	52,483	  	
 
(1)	Payments were prorated as Mr. Collier joined the board of directors in September 2011.	
(2)	Payments were prorated as Mr. Johnson joined the board of directors in April 2011 and became Chairperson of our Audit Committee in August 2011.	
(3)	Payments were prorated as Ms. Kerr joined the board of directors and became Chairperson of our Nominating and Corporate Governance Committee in April 2011.	
(4)	Payments were prorated as Mr. Zeichner joined the board of directors in April 2011 and became Chairperson of our Compensation Committee in August 2011.	

82

Table of Contents
EXECUTIVE COMPENSATION
Compensation Discussion and Analysis
This Compensation Discussion and Analysis section discusses the material elements of the compensation programs and policies in place for our named executive officers, or NEOs, during 2011. For fiscal year 2011, we had five NEOs, as follows:
 
 	•	 	Hezy Shaked, our Co-Founder, Chairman of the Board of Directors, Chief Strategy Officer and former President and Chief Executive Officer(1);	
 
 	•	 	Daniel Griesemer, our President and Chief Executive Officer(1);	
 
 	•	 	Bill Langsdorf, our Senior Vice President and Chief Financial Officer;	
 
 	•	 	Debbie Anker-Morris, our Vice President and General Merchandising Manager; and	
 
 	•	 	Craig DeMerit, our Vice President, Chief Information Officer and Chief Operating Officer(2).	

 	(1)	Mr. Shaked served as our President and Chief Executive Officer until our hiring of Daniel Griesemer as our President and Chief Executive Officer effective February 21, 2011. Mr. Shaked was appointed as Chief Strategy Officer, a newly created position, effective on February 21, 2011, and he continues to serve as Chairman of our board of directors. The terms of Mr. Griesemer’s employment are set forth in an offer letter dated January 15, 2011 as described further below at “— Employment Agreements and Severance Benefits—Offer Letter with Daniel Griesemer ”.	
 	(2)	On February 21, 2011, Mr. DeMerit was appointed as our Chief Operating Officer.	
Specifically, this section provides an overview of our executive compensation philosophy, the overall objectives of our executive compensation program and each compensation component that we provide. Each of the key elements of our executive compensation program is discussed in more detail below. Our compensation programs are designed to be flexible and complementary and to collectively serve the principles and objectives of our executive compensation and benefits program.
Historical Compensation Decisions and Changes Going Forward
Historical Compensation Decisions as a Private Company
Our historical compensation approach has reflected our stage of development. Prior to this offering, we were a privately held company and our controlling shareholders and, until April 2011, our entire board of directors consisted of our two co-founders, Hezy Shaked and Tilly Levine. As a result, we have not been subject to any listing exchange or SEC rules requiring a majority of our board of directors to be independent or relating to the formation and functioning of board committees, such as the compensation committee. Accordingly, our board of directors historically has not maintained a compensation committee, and most, if not all, of our executive compensation policies and determinations, including those made for fiscal year 2011, have been discretionary decisions made by our Co-Founder and former President and Chief Executive Officer, Mr. Shaked, as approved by our board of directors.
Such historical compensation decisions have been based on Mr. Shaked’s informal review process considering factors such as our financial condition and available resources, our need for a particular position to be filled, the compensation levels of our other executive officers, and Mr. Shaked’s general knowledge regarding compensation paid to certain executive officers of other companies in our industry. Thus, historically, we have not formally benchmarked executive compensation against a particular set of comparable companies or used a formula to set the compensation for our executives in relation to survey data.
 
83

Table of Contents
Role of our Compensation Committee and President and Chief Executive Officer in Compensation Decisions Going Forward
In June 2011, we established our compensation committee to review and approve the future compensation of our NEOs and oversee and administer our executive compensation programs and policies. As we gain experience as a public company, we expect that the specific direction, emphasis and components of our executive compensation program will continue to evolve. Accordingly, the compensation paid to our NEOs for fiscal year 2011 is not necessarily indicative of how we will compensate our NEOs following this offering.
The compensation committee will review annually and meet outside the presence of all of our executive officers, including our NEOs, to consider appropriate compensation for our President and Chief Executive Officer. Our President and Chief Executive Officer will review annually each other NEO’s performance with the compensation committee and recommend appropriate compensation levels, which the compensation committee will take into account as one factor in its determinations regarding executive compensation. In addition, we anticipate that Mr. Shaked, given his tenure with the company and his role in shaping compensation historically, will have a purely advisory role in discussions with the compensation committee with respect to NEO compensation. In the context of such annual reviews and further periodic reviews as deemed necessary, in addition to a review of other factors discussed below, the compensation committee will assess the proper mix of base salary, cash incentive awards and grants of long-term equity incentive awards, levels of compensation and appropriate individual and corporate performance metrics in furtherance of the objectives and principles described below.
We anticipate that our compensation committee will consider additional factors in determining executive compensation, including, potentially, more formally benchmarking executive compensation against a peer group of comparable companies. In furtherance of this objective, we have engaged J. Richard & Co., an independent executive compensation and consulting firm, to advise management in its efforts to construct, from publicly available data, a peer group of companies to be used for compensation purposes in preparation for an initial public offering and to provide market compensation data on such peer group companies, supplemented by survey data, as appropriate, and general market trends and developments. Management intends to use the information provided by J. Richard & Co. and other resources and tools to develop recommendations to be presented and approved by our compensation committee.
Compensation Philosophy and Objectives
Going forward, our compensation committee will strive to create an executive compensation program that balances short-term versus long-term payments and awards, cash payments versus equity awards and fixed versus contingent payments and awards in ways that we believe are most appropriate to motivate our executive officers. Our philosophy is that executive compensation should be competitive in the marketplace in which we compete for executive talent, and structured to emphasize incentive-based compensation as determined by the achievement of both company and individual performance objectives. The retail industry is extremely competitive and in order to continue to succeed we believe we need a highly talented and seasoned team of sales, marketing, buying, financial and other business professionals. We recognize that our ability to attract and retain these professionals, as well as to grow our organization, largely depends on how we compensate and reward our employees.
The goals of our executive compensation program will be to:
 
 	•	 	attract and retain talented and experienced executives in our industry;	
 
 	•	 	motivate and reward executives whose knowledge, skills and performance are critical to our success;	
 
 	•	 	align compensation incentives with our business and financial objectives and the long-term interests of our stockholders;	
 
84

Table of Contents
 	•	 	foster a shared commitment among executives by aligning their individual goals with the goals of the executive management team and our company; and	
 
 	•	 	ensure that our total compensation is fair, reasonable and competitive.	
Elements of 2011 Compensation
During fiscal year 2011, our NEOs’ total direct compensation, which was determined by Mr. Shaked and approved by the board of directors, included both fixed components (base salary, other executive benefits and perquisites) and variable components (annual incentive cash bonuses and stock option grants). The following describes each component of compensation, the rationale for that component and how the compensation amounts were determined.
Base Salary
Base salaries historically have been the most heavily weighted component of compensation for our executive officers as a percentage of total compensation, and this remained true in fiscal year 2011. Base salary levels are designed to be competitive in order to induce talented executives to join our company. In addition, base salaries support our retention objective by providing our executive officers with steady cash flow during the course of the fiscal year that is not contingent on short-term variations in our corporate performance.
The base salary established for each of our NEOs is intended to reflect each individual’s professional responsibilities, the skills and experience required for the job, their individual performance, the performance of our business, labor market conditions and competitive market salary levels. In past years, including fiscal year 2011, Mr. Shaked conducted an annual review of executive compensation to set the base salary level for each executive officer, including himself, for that fiscal year, which levels were approved by the board of directors. This annual review process typically occurred near the beginning of the fiscal year. Base salaries were also occasionally established or reviewed at other times during the year in the case of new hires, promotions, extraordinary events or other significant changes in responsibilities. In each case, Mr. Shaked made a determination of the competitive market level for base salaries based on his experience in the retail apparel industry and knowledge of base salaries of similarly situated executives in other companies of similar size and stage of development operating in our industry. This determination was informal and based primarily on the general knowledge of Mr. Shaked. Upon completion of this offering, and as described above, the compensation committee will determine the base salaries of our executive officers.
Base salary levels for our NEOs in fiscal year 2011 were determined by Mr. Shaked as part of his annual review process, and were set as follows:
 
 	•	 	Mr. Shaked: $640,000, which was the same base salary he received in fiscal year 2010;	
 
 	•	 	Mr. Griesemer: $700,000, which was the base salary set forth in his offer letter;	
 
 	•	 	Mr. Langsdorf: $357,000, which was the same base salary he received in fiscal year 2010;	
 
 	•	 	Ms. Anker-Morris: $295,000, which was approximately 3.7% higher than the base salary she received in fiscal year 2010; and	
 
 	•	 	Mr. DeMerit: $270,000, which was approximately 3.8% higher than the base salary he received in fiscal year 2010.	
 
The base salary increases for Ms. Anker-Morris and Mr. DeMerit were, in part, designed to reward these executives for their management activities during the 2010 fiscal year and to maintain their level of income with respect to cost of living increases.
 
85

Table of Contents
Annual Discretionary Cash Bonus
Historically, we have not had a formal written bonus plan, and the overall bonus pool and amounts to be awarded to our NEOs and other employees have been determined at the discretion of Mr. Shaked based upon his subjective consideration of individual and company performance and other factors. In fiscal year 2011, Mr. Langsdorf, Ms. Anker-Morris and Mr. DeMerit were awarded a discretionary annual bonus of $300,000, $15,000 and $100,000, respectively, for performance in fiscal year 2010, which was determined by means of a subjective analysis by Mr. Shaked. Mr. Shaked determined that the bonus awarded to Mr. Langsdorf was merited in part due to Mr. Langsdorf’s management of our company’s finances during a growth period, that the bonus awarded to Ms. Anker-Morris was merited in part due to the performance of the company’s buying department and that the bonus awarded to Mr. DeMerit was merited in part due to the growth of our e-commerce business.
Annual Incentive Cash Bonus
For 2011, Mr. Griesemer was eligible to receive an annual incentive cash bonus for 2011 based upon the company’s achievement of a certain level of operating income pursuant to the terms of his offer letter. The target and maximum bonus amounts, expressed as a percentage of base salary for Mr. Griesemer were 100% and 200% based on attainment of target and maximum 2011 operating income thresholds of $29.9 million and $38.9 million, respectively. Mr. Griesemer would receive no payout if the company’s 2011 operating income was less than the minimum threshold of $24.0 million. The actual 2011 operating income was $34.9 million. The amount of bonus payout was calculated based on actual 2011 operating income using linear interpolation between the applicable performance thresholds of operating income. Mr. Griesemer’s bonus was prorated from his hire date of February 21, 2011 through January 28, 2012.
In June 2011, our newly formed compensation committee participated in the development of a new incentive cash bonus plan for NEOs other than Mr. Griesemer. The committee believed the incentive cash bonus should provide for increased payouts because target operating income and the target comparable store sales increase would generate significant shareholder returns. No payouts would be made until audited financial results are received, reviewed and approved by the audit committee after our fiscal year ended.
For each of the performance measures of operating income and comparable store sales increase, the company established minimum performance, target performance and maximum target thresholds for the NEOs. The minimum performance threshold related to a minimum acceptable level of financial performance. Each succeeding threshold was designed to reward the NEOs, other than Mr. Griesemer, based upon the improved financial performance of the business. The target threshold was the company’s goal. The maximum threshold would pay out a higher percentage of base salary, which was designed as a stretch challenge. The company believed these goals would not be easily achieved. The following table shows the performance thresholds for each measure for fiscal 2011:

 	  	Performance Threshold	 	
 	  	Minimum	 	 	Target	 	 	Maximum	 	
Comparable store sales growth	  	 	7.6	% 	 	 	11.7	% 	 	 	17.8	% 	
Operating income (in millions)	  	$	25.5	  	 	$	29.9	  	 	$	38.9	  	
The following table represents the percentage of the respective NEOs base salary that will be earned upon achievement of the performance thresholds. The incentive cash bonus amount increases in a linear manner between the minimum threshold and the target threshold and between the target threshold and the maximum threshold.

 	  	Chairman
& CSO	 	 	SVP
&
CFO	 	 	VP &
GMM	 	 	VP,
CIO
&
COO	 	
Minimum threshold	  	 	0	% 	 	 	0	% 	 	 	0	% 	 	 	0	% 	
Target threshold	  	 	100	% 	 	 	50	% 	 	 	40	% 	 	 	40	% 	
Maximum threshold	  	 	200	% 	 	 	100	% 	 	 	80	% 	 	 	80	% 	
 
86

Table of Contents
The company weighted operating income 75% and same store sales increase 25% in the structure of the cash incentive bonus. Therefore, for each performance threshold achieved, the calculation of the incentive cash bonus earned is as follows:
Base Salary ($) x Threshold Percentage x Weighted Percentage
The company exceeded its target operating income by $5.0 million, or 17%, but failed to achieve its comparable store sales growth target by 1%, as actual comparable store sales were 10.7% compared to the target of 11.7%. The cash incentive bonuses for meeting these achievements were paid to the NEOs for fiscal year 2011 in March 2012. The incentive cash bonus targets and compensation paid to the NEOs for fiscal year 2011 are as follows:

 	  	Incentive
Cash Bonus
Compensation
Target	 	  	Incentive
Cash Bonus
Compensation
Paid	 	
Hezy Shaked, Chairman of the Board and Chief Strategy Officer	  	$	640,000	  	  	$	867,137	  	
Daniel Griesemer, President and Chief Executive Officer	  	$	659,615	  	  	$	1,025,374	  	
Bill Langsdorf, Senior Vice President and Chief Financial Officer	  	$	178,500	  	  	$	241,850	  	
Debbie Anker-Morris, Vice President and General Merchandising Manager	  	$	118,000	  	  	$	159,878	  	
Craig DeMerit, Vice President, Chief Information Officer and Chief Operating Officer	  	$	108,000	  	  	$	146,329	  	
Long-Term Equity-Based Compensation
We believe that long-term equity-based compensation is an important component of our executive compensation program. In addition, providing a portion of our NEOs’ total compensation package in long-term equity-based compensation aligns the incentives of our executives with the interests of our stockholders and with our long-term corporate success. To that end, we have awarded long-term equity-based compensation in the form of options to purchase shares of our common stock under the Tilly’s 2007 Stock Option Plan, or the 2007 Plan. The grants awarded under the 2007 Plan have had no public market and no certain opportunity for liquidity, making them inherently long-term compensation. The awards have been used to motivate executives and employees to individually and collectively build long-term stockholder value that might in the future create a liquid market opportunity.
Historically, Mr. Shaked recommended the amount of all stock option grants with respect to our executive officers, and such recommendations were approved by our board of directors. Stock option grants under the 2007 Plan historically have been timed to coincide with the completion of third-party valuation reports, which the board has considered in setting the exercise price for such options. In deciding the amount of options to be awarded, Mr. Shaked engaged in an informal review process and considered the executive officer’s position with our company, the size of his or her total compensation package and the amount of existing vested and unvested stock options, if any, then held by the executive officer.
We made only one grant of stock options to an NEO in fiscal year 2011, which was a grant of nonqualified stock options on March 31, 2011 to Mr. Griesemer to purchase 400,000 shares of our common stock at an exercise price of $16.26 per share. The stock options were granted in accordance with our 2007 Plan pursuant to Mr. Griesemer’s offer letter. This grant will vest annually in four equal installments with the first installment vesting on February 21, 2012, the first anniversary of his employment with the company. Like all options granted to our NEOs under the 2007 Plan, these grants vest over the course of four years, with shares vesting in equal annual installments, subject to continued employment with us. We believe that the four-year vesting schedule aligns our executive officers with our stockholders in achieving our long-term objectives and facilitating executive retention. In addition, options granted under our 2007 Plan are not exercisable until we complete our initial public offering.
 
87

Table of Contents
In connection with this offering, the board of directors adopted the Tilly’s 2012 Equity and Incentive Award Plan, or the 2012 Plan. For further information regarding our 2012 Plan, see the discussion below under the heading “ Equity Incentive Plans—2012 Equity and Incentive Award Plan ”.
Upon completion of this offering, we expect to make grants of stock options and restricted stock covering an aggregate of approximately 695,000 shares of our common stock. The exercise price of these stock options is expected to be equal to the offering price per share of our common stock, and the options will vest in equal annual installments over four years from the date of grant.
Other Executive Benefits and Perquisites
In fiscal 2011, we provided Mr. Shaked with a company vehicle, a car allowance and tax preparation services, and Mr. Griesemer with reimbursement of his relocation expenses. We also provide a car allowance to Mr. Griesemer. We provide the following benefits to our executive officers on the same basis as other eligible employees:
 
 	•	 	health insurance;	
 
 	•	 	holidays and sick days; and	
 
 	•	 	a 401(k) plan with matching contributions.	
The vacation benefit for executive officers is determined on an individual basis. We believe these benefits are generally consistent with those offered by other companies in our industry.
Retirement Savings
We have established a 401(k) retirement savings plan for our employees, including the NEOs, who satisfy certain eligibility requirements. Under the 401(k) plan, eligible employees may elect to contribute pre-tax amounts, up to a statutorily prescribed limit, to the 401(k) plan. For 2011, the prescribed annual limit was $16,500. In addition, the company matches a portion of pre-tax contributions on behalf of eligible employees, up to a certain percentage of the individual’s contribution. We believe that providing a vehicle for tax-preferred retirement savings through our 401(k) plan adds to the overall desirability of our executive compensation package and further incents our employees, including our NEOs, in accordance with our compensation policies.
Employment Agreements and Severance Benefits
The employment of our NEOs historically has been at will, and we did not have any employment agreements or other severance arrangements with our NEOs for fiscal year 2011, other than the offer letter agreement with Mr. Griesemer as discussed below. Mr. Langsdorf and Ms. Anker-Morris are parties to a Stock Option Grant Agreement in connection with stock option grants under our 2007 Plan that provides for certain severance benefits in the form of accelerated vesting of outstanding stock options, as described in further detail under the heading “ —Potential Payments Upon Termination or Change in Control ”.
 
88

Table of Contents
Offer Letter With Daniel Griesemer
In January 2011, we entered into an offer letter with Daniel Griesemer related to our hiring of him as our President and Chief Executive Officer effective February 21, 2011, which includes certain provisions related to his compensation including severance benefits and change-in-control provisions. The compensation amounts and other terms of Mr. Griesemer’s offer letter were highly individualized and resulted from arm’s length negotiations and consideration of numerous factors as well as input from an independent third-party compensation consultant. Under the offer letter, Mr. Griesemer’s annual base salary was set at $700,000. The offer letter further provides that Mr. Griesemer is eligible to receive an annual cash bonus for 2011 based upon our achievement of certain levels of operating income, as more fully discussed under “ —Elements of 2011 Compensation—Annual Incentive Cash Bonus ”. Pursuant to the offer letter, Mr. Griesemer was granted stock options covering an aggregate of 400,000 shares of Class A common stock, as more fully discussed under “ —Elements of 2011 Compensation—Long-Term Equity-Based Compensation ”. The offer letter also provides for participation in our existing employee benefit programs, plus an annual automobile allowance of $18,000, a temporary housing allowance and the reimbursement of certain of his and his family’s reasonable travel and moving expenses to relocate to the Orange County, California area during 2011. Pursuant to the offer letter, Mr. Griesemer may not solicit any of our employees during the term of his employment and for one year following his date of termination.
In addition, under the terms of his offer letter, Mr. Griesemer is entitled to the following severance and change-in-control benefits:
 
 	•	 	Severance if his employment is terminated by us without “Cause” or by him for “Good Reason”, equal to:	
 
 	•	 	accrued but unpaid base salary, including accrued but unused vacation time;	
 
 	•	 	12 months of his base salary in effect at termination;	
 
 	•	 	his annual incentive bonus for the most recently completed fiscal year, or if that year’s bonus has already been paid, then the current year’s annual incentive bonus based on the company’s performance, pro-rated for the number of days employed during the year of termination;	
 
 	•	 	one-year acceleration of vesting of any outstanding unvested stock option or other equity awards;	
 
 	•	 	to the extent permitted, continuation of employee benefits for the earlier of 12 months following termination or until re-employed, or at the option of the company, one lump sum payment; and	
 
 	•	 	90 days to exercise any unexercised and exercisable stock options, but in no event later than the expiration date of the stock options.	
 
 	•	 	Severance, if his employment is terminated because of death or disability, equal to:	
 
 	•	 	accrued but unpaid base salary, including accrued but unused vacation time;	
 
 	•	 	12 months of his base salary in effect at termination;	
 
 	•	 	his annual incentive bonus for the most recently completed fiscal year, or if that year’s bonus has already been paid, then the current year’s annual incentive bonus based on the company’s performance, pro-rated for the number of days employed during the year of termination; and	
 
 	•	 	to the extent permitted, continuation of employee benefits for 12 months following termination, to the extent permitted, or at the option of the company, one lump sum payment.	
 
 	•	 	Severance, if his employment is terminated by us without “Cause” or by him for “Good Reason” upon a “Change in Control”, equal to:	
 
 	•	 	accrued but unpaid base salary, including accrued but unused vacation time;	
 
 	•	 	18 months of his base salary in effect at termination;	
 
 	•	 	one and a half times his annual incentive bonus for the most recently completed fiscal year, or if that year’s bonus has already been paid, then one and a half times the annual incentive bonus for the current year at the target rate;	
 
89

Table of Contents
 	•	 	full acceleration of vesting of any stock option or other equity grants; and	
 
 	•	 	to the extent permitted, continuation of employee benefits for the earlier of 12 months following termination or until re-employed, or at the option of the company, one lump sum payment.	
For purposes of the offer letter, “Cause” is defined as having:
 
 	•	 	been determined by a court of law to have committed any felony;	
 
 	•	 	been convicted, or entered a plea of no contest, for violation of any criminal statute constituting a felony, provided that our board of directors reasonably determines that the continuation of his employment after such event would have an adverse impact on the operation or reputation of the company or its affiliates;	
 
 	•	 	engaged in an act of fraud, theft, embezzlement, or misappropriation against the company;	
 
 	•	 	committed one or more acts of gross negligence or willful misconduct, either within or outside the scope of his employment that has the effect of materially impairing the goodwill or business of the company or causing material damage to its property, goodwill or business, or would, if known, subject the company to public ridicule;	
 
 	•	 	failed to materially perform the duties commonly associated with the position of President and Chief Executive Officer (continuing without cure for 10 days after receipt of written notice by him from our board of directors of the need to cure);	
 
 	•	 	allowed the company’s performance to be materially weaker than its competitors and the retail industry generally (as determined by our board of directors);	
 
 	•	 	materially breached the company’s Code of Ethics and Business Conduct or other written company policies;	
 
 	•	 	breached the terms of his employment agreement, after we have provided him notice and given him a reasonable opportunity to cure; or	
 
 	•	 	failed to use reasonable efforts to relocate himself and his family to the Orange County, California area by September 15, 2011.	
For purposes of the offer letter, “Good Reason” is defined as:
 
 	•	 	a material diminution in his duties, responsibilities or authority as President and Chief Executive Officer of the company; or	
 
 	•	 	the company failed to pay him material compensation or benefits that are required to be provided under his employment agreement.	
For purposes of the offer letter, “Change in Control” is defined as an event or series of related events where a person or group of persons acting in concert acquire direct or indirect beneficial ownership of more than 50% of the total combined voting power of the outstanding voting stock of the company or the corporation or corporations to which the assets of the company were transferred, as the case may be.
Tax and Accounting Considerations
Section 162(m) of the Internal Revenue Code
Generally, Section 162(m) of the Internal Revenue Code of 1986, as amended, or the Code, disallows a tax deduction to any publicly held corporation for any individual remuneration in excess of $1.0 million paid in any taxable year to its chief executive officer and each of its other named executive officers, other than its chief
 
90

Table of Contents
financial officer. However, remuneration in excess of $1.0 million may be deducted if, among other things, it qualifies as “performance-based compensation” within the meaning of the Code.
As we are not currently publicly traded, we have not previously taken the deductibility limit imposed by Section 162(m) of the Code into consideration in setting compensation. Following this offering, and at such time as Section 162(m) applies to us, we expect that, where reasonably practicable, the compensation committee may seek to qualify the compensation paid to our NEOs for the “performance-based compensation” exemption under Section 162(m) of the Code. As such, in approving the amount and form of compensation for our NEOs in the future, the compensation committee will consider all elements of the cost to us of providing such compensation, including the potential impact of Section 162(m) of the Code. The compensation committee may, in its judgment, authorize compensation payments that do not comply with the exemption from the deductibility limit in Section 162(m) of the Code when it believes that such payments are appropriate to attract and retain executive talent.
Furthermore, we do not expect Section 162(m) of the Code to apply to awards under our 2012 Plan until the earliest to occur of our annual stockholders’ meeting in 2016, a material modification of the 2012 Incentive Award Plan or exhaustion of the share supply under the 2012 Plan. However, qualified performance-based compensation performance criteria may be used with respect to performance awards that are not intended to constitute qualified performance-based compensation under Section 162(m) of the Code.
Section 280G of the Internal Revenue Code
Section 280G of the Code disallows a tax deduction with respect to excess parachute payments to certain executives of companies which undergo a change in control. In addition, Section 4999 of the Code imposes a 20% excise tax on the individual with respect to the excess parachute payment. Parachute payments are compensation linked to or triggered by a change in control and may include, but are not limited to, bonus payments, severance payments, certain fringe benefits, and payments and acceleration of vesting from long-term incentive plans including stock options and other equity-based compensation. Excess parachute payments are parachute payments that exceed a threshold determined under Section 280G of the Code based on the executive’s prior compensation. In approving the compensation arrangements for our NEOs in the future, our compensation committee will consider all elements of the cost to us of providing such compensation, including the potential impact of Section 280G of the Code. However, our compensation committee may, in its judgment, authorize compensation arrangements that could give rise to loss of deductibility under Section 280G of the Code and the imposition of excise taxes under Section 4999 of the Code when it believes that such arrangements are appropriate to attract and retain executive talent.
ASC Topic 718
Accounting Standards Codification Topic 718, Compensation—Stock Compensation (“ASC Topic 718”) requires us to recognize an expense for the fair value of equity-based compensation awards. Grants of stock-based compensation are accounted for under ASC Topic 718. The compensation committee regularly considers the accounting implications of significant compensation decisions, especially in connection with decisions that relate to equity compensation awards. As accounting standards change, we may revise certain programs to appropriately align the cost of our equity awards with our overall executive compensation philosophy and objectives.
Section 409A of the Internal Revenue Code
Section 409A of the Code requires that “nonqualified deferred compensation” be deferred and paid under plans or arrangements that satisfy the requirements of the statute with respect to the timing of deferral elections, timing of payments and certain other matters. Failure to satisfy these requirements can expose employees and other service providers to accelerated income tax liabilities, penalty taxes and interest on their vested compensation under such plans. Accordingly, as a general matter, it is our intention to design and administer our compensation and benefits plans and arrangements for all of our employees and other service providers, including our named executive officers, so that they are either exempt from, or satisfy the requirements of, Section 409A.
 
91

Table of Contents
Summary Compensation Table
The following table sets forth certain information with respect to compensation for the fiscal years ended January 28, 2012 and January 29, 2011 earned by, awarded to or paid to our NEOs.

Name and Principal Position	 	Year	 	 	Salary
($)	 	 	Bonus
($)(1)	 	 	Stock
Awards
($)	 	 	Stock
Option
Awards
($)(2)	 	 	Non-Equity
Incentive Plan
Compensation
($)(3)	 	 	All
Other
Compensation
($)(4)	 	 	Total
($)	 	
Hezy Shaked	 	 	2011	  	 	 	640,000	  	 	 	—  	  	 	 	—  	  	 	 	—  	  	 	 	867,137	  	 	 	145,282	  	 	 	1,652,419	  	
Chairman of the Board and
Chief Strategy Officer(5)	 	 	2010	  	 	 	640,000	  	 	 	—  	  	 	 	—  	  	 	 	—  	  	 	 	—  	  	 	 	25,141	  	 	 	665,141	  	
 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	
Daniel Griesemer	 	 	2011	  	 	 	659,615	  	 	 	—  	  	 	 	—  	  	 	 	3,407,240	  	 	 	1,025,374	  	 	 	57,676	  	 	 	5,149,905	  	
President and Chief
Executive Officer	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	
 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	
Bill Langsdorf	 	 	2011	  	 	 	357,000	  	 	 	—  	  	 	 	—  	  	 	 	—  	  	 	 	241,850	  	 	 	7,350	  	 	 	606,200	  	
Senior Vice President and
Chief Financial Officer	 	 	2010	  	 	 	357,000	  	 	 	300,000	  	 	 	—  	  	 	 	153,600	  	 	 	—  	  	 	 	4,900	  	 	 	815,500	  	
 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	
Debbie Anker-Morris	 	 	2011	  	 	 	295,000	  	 	 	—  	  	 	 	—  	  	 	 	—  	  	 	 	159,878	  	 	 	7,350	  	 	 	462,228	  	
Vice President and	 	 	2010	  	 	 	284,500	  	 	 	15,000	  	 	 	—  	  	 	 	96,000	  	 	 	—  	  	 	 	4,900	  	 	 	400,400	  	
General Merchandising	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	
Manager	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	
 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	
Craig DeMerit	 	 	2011	  	 	 	270,000	  	 	 	—  	  	 	 	—  	  	 	 	—  	  	 	 	146,329	  	 	 	5,307	  	 	 	421,636	  	
Vice President, Chief	 	 	2010	  	 	 	260,000	  	 	 	100,000	  	 	 	—  	  	 	 	289,125	  	 	 	—  	  	 	 	4,900	  	 	 	654,025	  	
Operating Officer and Chief
Information Officer(6)	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	
(1)	Amounts represent discretionary bonus payments subjectively determined by Mr. Shaked based on factors such as individual and company performance related to the 2010 fiscal year, but paid in 2011.	
(2)	Amounts in 2010 represent full grant-date fair value and repricing-date incremental fair value of stock option awards granted or repriced during fiscal year 2010. All fair value calculations in 2010 and 2011 were in accordance with ASC 718. During 2011, Mr. Griesemer was granted 400,000 stock options with a fair value of $8.52 per share. During 2010, Mr. DeMerit was granted 50,000 stock options with a fair value of $5.04 per share. During 2010 the Company also repriced 160,000 stock options held by Mr. Langsdorf, 100,000 stock options held by Ms. Anker-Morris and 80,000 stock options held by Mr. DeMerit. The incremental fair value of the stock options repriced for Mr. Langsdorf and Ms. Anker-Morris was $0.96 per share. The incremental fair values of the stock options repriced for Mr. DeMerit were $0.96 per share for 30,000 stock options granted prior to 2010 and $0.16 per share for the 50,000 stock options granted earlier in 2010. For a discussion of valuation assumptions, see Note 11 to our audited financial statements included elsewhere in this prospectus.	
(3)	Amounts represent cash-based incentives earned for the 2011 fiscal year, which were paid in March 2012.	
(4)	With respect to Mr. Shaked, other compensation in 2011 included $117,875 for the receipt of a company vehicle, $18,175 for tax preparation services, $7,350 for the company’s 401(k) match, and $1,882 for automobile related expenses. In 2010, Mr. Shaked received $12,481 for automobile related expenses, $7,760 for tax preparation services and $4,900 for the company’s 401(k) match. With respect to Mr. Griesemer, other compensation in 2011 included $33,711 for relocation, travel and lodging related expenses, $16,615 for his automobile allowance and $7,350 for the company’s 401(k) match. Remaining amounts represent the company’s 401(k) employee match contributions paid with respect to Mr. Langsdorf, Ms. Anker-Morris and Mr. DeMerit.	
(5)	Mr. Shaked served as our President and Chief Executive Officer until he was succeeded in such role upon our hiring of Mr. Griesemer effective February 21, 2011. Mr. Shaked was appointed as Chief Strategy Officer effective on February 21, 2011, and he continues to serve as Chairman of our board of directors.	
(6)	Mr. DeMerit serves as our Vice President and Chief Information Officer and was promoted to our Chief Operating Officer on February 21, 2011.	
 
92

Table of Contents
Grants of Plan-Based Awards
The following table sets forth certain information with respect to grants of plan-based awards during fiscal year 2011 to our NEOs, as applicable.

 	  	 	 	 	Estimated Future Payouts Under
Non-Equity Incentive Plan Awards	 	  	All Other
Option Awards:
Number of
Securities
Underlying
Options(#)	 	  	Exercise  or
Base
Price of
Option
Awards
($/Sh)	 	  	Grant Date
Fair Value
of Option
Awards($)	 	 	
Name	  	Grant
Date	 	 	Threshold
($)	 	  	Target
($)	 	  	Maximum
($)	 	  	 	 	  	 	 	  	 	 	 	 	
Hezy Shaked	  	 	6/2/2011	(1) 	 	 	—  	  	  	 	640,000	  	  	 	1,280,000	  	  	 	—  	  	  	 	—  	  	  	 	—  	  	 	 	
Daniel Griesemer	  	 	1/15/2011	(2) 	 	 	—  	  	  	 
	700,000
	  
	  	 	1,400,000	  	  	 	—  	  	  	 	—  	  	  	 	—  	  	 	 	
 	  	 	3/31/2011	(3) 	 	 	—  	  	  	 	—  	  	  	 	—  	  	  	 	400,000	  	  	$	16.26	  	  	$	3,407,240	(4) 	 	 	
Bill Langsdorf	  	 	6/2/2011	(1) 	 	 	—  	  	  	 	178,500	  	  	 	357,000	  	  	 	—  	  	  	 	—  	  	  	 	—  	  	 	 	
Debbie Anker-Morris	  	 	6/2/2011	(1) 	 	 	—  	  	  	 
	118,000
	  
	  	 	236,000	  	  	 	—  	  	  	 	—  	  	  	 	—  	  	 	 	
Craig DeMerit	  	 	6/2/2011	(1) 	 	 	—  	  	  	 
	108,000
	  
	  	 	216,000	  	  	 	—  	  	  	 	—  	  	  	 	—  	  	 	 	
 
(1)	Non-equity incentive plan awards consist of annual bonuses payable under our 2011 incentive cash bonus plan. Please see “—Elements of 2011 Compensation—Annual Incentive Cash Bonus” above.	
(2)	Mr. Griesemer’s non-equity incentive plan award consists of an annual bonus payable pursuant to his offer letter agreement. Please see “—Elements of 2011 Compensation—Annual Incentive Cash Bonus” above.	
(3)	This stock option grant was made pursuant to Mr. Griesemer’s offer letter and is scheduled to vest annually in four equal installments on each of February 21, 2012, 2013, 2014 and 2015, subject to Mr. Griesemer’s continued employment with us.	
(4)	Represents the full grant-date fair value of stock options, calculated in accordance with ASC Topic 718. The valuation assumptions used in determining such amounts are described in Note 11 to our audited financial statements included in this prospectus.	
Outstanding Equity Awards at Fiscal Year-End
The following table sets forth information with respect to outstanding equity awards held by our NEOs as January 28, 2012.

 	  	Stock Option Awards(1)	 	
Name	  	Number of
Securities
Underlying
Unexercised
Stock Options
Exercisable	 	  	Number of
Securities
Underlying
Unexercised
Stock
Options
Unexercisable
(2)	 	  	Equity
Incentive
Plan Awards:
Number of
Securities
Underlying
Unexercised
Unearned
Options
(#)	 	  	Option
Exercise
Price
($)	 	 	Option
Expiration
Date	 	
Daniel Griesemer	  	 	—  	  	  	 	400,000	  	  	 	—  	  	  	$	16.26	  	 	 	3/31/2021	  	
 	 	 	 	 	 	
Bill Langsdorf	  	 	—  	  	  	 	160,000	  	  	 	—  	  	  	$	8.98	(3) 	 	 	8/27/2017	  	
 	  	 	—  	  	  	 	50,000	  	  	 	—  	  	  	$	6.45	  	 	 	4/20/2019	  	
Debbie Anker-Morris	  	 	—  	  	  	 	100,000	  	  	 	—  	  	  	$	8.98	(3) 	 	 	8/27/2017	  	
 	  	 	 	 	  	 	5,000	  	  	 	—  	  	  	$	6.45	  	 	 	4/20/2019	  	
 	 	 	 	 	 	
Craig DeMerit	  	 	—  	  	  	 	30,000	  	  	 	—  	  	  	$	8.98	(3) 	 	 	8/27/2017	  	
 	  	 	—  	  	  	 	10,000	  	  	 	—  	  	  	$	6.45	  	 	 	4/20/2019	  	
 	  	 	—  	  	  	 	50,000	  	  	 	—  	  	  	$	8.98	(4) 	 	 	4/13/2020	  	
 
(1)	These stock option awards vest over the course of four years with shares vesting in equal annual installments, subject to continued employment with us. The table below shows on a grant-by-grant basis the vesting schedules relating to the option awards which are represented in the above table in the aggregate.	
 
93

Table of Contents
 	 	 	 	 	 	 	
 	  	Option Awards Vesting Schedule	
Name	  	Grant
Date	 	  	Vesting Schedule	
Daniel Griesemer	  	 	3/31/2011	  	  	100,000 shares vested on 2/21/2012	
 	  	 	 	 	  	100,000 shares vest on 2/21/2013	
 	  	 	 	 	  	100,000 shares vest on 2/21/2014	
 	  	 	 	 	  	100,000 shares vest on 2/21/2015	
 	 	 	
Bill Langsdorf	  	 	4/20/2009	  	  	12,500 shares vested on 4/20/2010	
 	  	 	 	 	  	12,500 shares vested on 4/20/2011	
 	  	 	 	 	  	12,500 shares vest on 4/20/2012	
 	  	 	 	 	  	12,500 shares vest on 4/20/2013	
 	  	 	8/27/2007	  	  	40,000 shares vested on 8/1/2008	
 	  	 	 	 	  	40,000 shares vested on 8/1/2009	
 	  	 	 	 	  	40,000 shares vested on 8/1/2010	
 	  	 	 	 	  	40,000 shares vested on 8/1/2011	
 	 	 	
Debbie Anker-Morris	  	 	4/20/2009	  	  	1,250 shares vested on 4/20/2010	
 	  	 	 	 	  	1,250 shares vested on 4/20/2011	
 	  	 	 	 	  	1,250 shares vest on 4/20/2012	
 	  	 	 	 	  	1,250 shares vest on 4/20/2013	
 	  	 	8/27/2007	  	  	25,000 shares vested on 8/1/2008	
 	  	 	 	 	  	25,000 shares vested on 8/1/2009	
 	  	 	 	 	  	25,000 shares vested on 8/1/2010	
 	  	 	 	 	  	25,000 shares vested on 8/1/2011	
 	 	 	
Craig DeMerit	  	 	4/13/2010	  	  	12,500 shares vested on 4/13/2011	
 	  	 	 	 	  	12,500 shares vest on 4/13/2012	
 	  	 	 	 	  	12,500 shares vest on 4/13/2013	
 	  	 	 	 	  	12,500 shares vest on 4/13/2014	
 	  	 	4/20/2009	  	  	2,500 shares vested on 4/20/2010	
 	  	 	 	 	  	2,500 shares vested on 4/20/2011	
 	  	 	 	 	  	2,500 shares vest on 4/20/2012	
 	  	 	 	 	  	2,500 shares vest on 4/20/2013	
 	  	 	8/27/2007	  	  	7,500 shares vested on 8/1/2008	
 	  	 	 	 	  	7,500 shares vested on 8/1/2009	
 	  	 	 	 	  	7,500 shares vested on 8/1/2010	
 	  	 	 	 	  	7,500 shares vested on 8/1/2011	
 
(2)	The vested stock options included in this column will not become exercisable until we consummate our initial public offering.	
 
(3)	These stock options were repriced from $12.73 to $8.98 during fiscal year 2010. For further information regarding the stock option repricing, see Note 11 to our audited financial statements included in this prospectus.	
 
(4)	These stock options were repriced from $9.64 to $8.98 during fiscal year 2010. For further information regarding the stock option repricing, see Note 11 to our audited financial statements included in this prospectus.	
Options Exercised and Stock Vested
None of the stock options granted by the company were exercised during fiscal year 2011 or at any time prior to such fiscal year. Pursuant to option agreements entered into by our NEOs under the 2007 Plan, the stock options are not exercisable until the company completes its initial public offering.
 
94

Table of Contents
Pension Benefits
Our NEOs did not participate in or have account balances in qualified or nonqualified defined benefit plans sponsored by us during fiscal year 2011. Our board of directors or compensation committee may elect to adopt qualified or nonqualified benefit plans in the future if it determines that doing so is in our best interest.
Nonqualified Deferred Compensation
Our NEOs did not participate in or have account balances in nonqualified defined contribution plans or other nonqualified deferred compensation plans maintained by us during fiscal year 2011. Our board of directors or compensation committee may elect to provide our executive officers and other employees with nonqualified defined contribution or other nonqualified deferred compensation benefits in the future if it determines that doing so is in our best interest.
Potential Payments Upon Termination or Change in Control
The following table summarizes the potential payments to certain of our named executive officers in four scenarios: (1) upon termination by us without cause or the executive’s resignation for good reason apart from a change in control; (2) upon termination by us following the executive’s permanent disability or as a result of the executive’s death; (3) upon termination by us without cause or the executive’s resignation for good reason upon a change in control; or (4) in the event of a change in control without a termination of employment. The amounts shown assume that such change in control and/or termination was effective as of January 27, 2012, the last business day of fiscal year 2011, and are only estimates of the amounts that would be paid to such executives. The actual amounts to be paid can be determined only at the time of such change in control or termination of employment.

Name	  	Benefit	 	Without Cause
or for
Good Reason 	 	 	Death or
Disability 	 	 	Without Cause
or for
Good Reason Upon a
Change in Control 	 	 	Change in
Control 	 	
Daniel Griesemer	  	Severance
Payment	 	$	1,725,374 	(1) 	 	$	1,725,374 	(1) 	 	$	2,100,000 	(2) 	 	$	 —  	 	
 	 	 	 	 	 	
 	  	Accelerated
Equity Award
Vesting(3)	 	 	 	 	 	 	—  	  	 	 	 	 	 	 	—  	  	
 	 	 	 	 	 	
 	  	Continued
Benefits(4)	 	 	13,732	  	 	 	13,732	  	 	 	13,732	  	 	 	—  	  	
 	  	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	
Total Value:	  	 	 	 	 	 	 	$	1,739,106	  	 	 	 	 	 	 	—  	  	
 	  	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	
Bill Langsdorf	  	Accelerated
Equity Award
Vesting(5)	 	$	—  	  	 	$	—  	  	 	$	—  	  	 	 	 	 	
 	  	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	
Total Value:	  	 	 	$	—  	  	 	$	—  	  	 	$	—  	  	 	 	 	 	
 	  	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	
Debbie Anker-Morris	  	Accelerated
Equity Award
Vesting(6)	 	$	—  	  	 	$	—  	  	 	$	—  	  	 	 	 	 	
 	  	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	
Total Value:	  	 	 	$	—  	  	 	$	—  	  	 	$	—  	  	 	 	 	 	

(1)	The severance payment represents an amount equal to the sum of (a) Mr. Griesemer’s then-current annual base salary for 12 months, paid as salary continuation during such period, and (b) Mr. Griesemer’s incentive cash bonus for fiscal year 2011, prorated for the number of days he was employed during the fiscal year and paid in a lump sum.	
(2)	The severance payment represents an amount equal to the sum of (a) Mr. Griesemer’s then-current annual base salary for 18 months, paid as salary continuation during such period, and (b) Mr. Griesemer’s target incentive cash bonus for fiscal year 2011 multiplied by 1½, paid in a lump sum.	
 
95

Table of Contents
(3)	Represents the value of those stock options that would immediately vest as a result of Mr. Griesemer’s termination. The value attributable to stock options that would vest in such event is the difference between $16.26, the exercise price of the options, and $            , the midpoint of the price range set forth on the cover of this prospectus. In the event of a termination of employment not in connection with a change in control, Mr. Griesemer is entitled to accelerated vesting of 100,000 unvested stock options that otherwise would have vested during the one year following such termination. In the event of a termination of employment in connection with a change in control, Mr. Griesemer is entitled to fully accelerated vesting of 400,000 unvested stock options.	
(4)	This figure represents the amount due for Mr. Griesemer’s health and other insurance benefits for twelve months following his termination of employment.	
(5)	Represents the value of 12,500 stock options held by Mr. Langsdorf that would vest immediately as a result of a change in control. Mr. Langsdorf’s stock option agreement provides that the right to exercise 50% of the unvested portion of the options granted thereunder will accelerate automatically and vest in full effective as of immediately prior to the consummation of a change in control. The value attributable to such stock options that would vest is the difference between $6.45, the exercise price of the options, and $            , the midpoint of the price range set forth on the cover of this prospectus.	
(6)	Represents the value of 1,250 stock options held by Ms. Anker-Morris that would vest immediately as a result of a change in control. Ms. Anker-Morris stock option agreement provides that the right to exercise 50% of the unvested portion of the options granted thereunder will accelerate automatically and vest in full effective as of immediately prior to the consummation of a change in control. The value attributable to such stock options that would vest is the difference between $6.45, the exercise price of the options, and $            , the midpoint of the price range set forth on the cover of this prospectus.	
Equity Incentive Plans
2007 Stock Option Plan
Our board of directors adopted our 2007 Plan effective June 20, 2007, which had an aggregate 1,600,000 shares available under the plan. No shares of common stock have been issued upon exercise of any options granted under the 2007 Plan because the options do not become exercisable until after our initial public offering. In connection with the holding company formation described elsewhere in this prospectus, all stock options granted under the 2007 Plan will be converted into options to purchase shares of our Class A common stock and such options will continue to be governed by the terms of the 2007 Plan. Upon consummation of this offering, no further grants will be made under our 2007 Plan.
Administration
The 2007 Plan is administered by our compensation committee. Our compensation committee has the authority to determine the exercise price of the awards, the recipients of awards granted under the 2007 Plan and the terms, conditions and restrictions applicable to all awards granted under the 2007 Plan. Our compensation committee approved the form of award agreement and has authority to accelerate, continue, extend or defer the exercisability of any award issued under the 2007 Plan.
Eligibility
The 2007 Plan permits us to grant awards to our officers, employees, non-employee directors and consultants or advisors.
Awards
The 2007 Plan provides for the grant of incentive stock options and nonqualified stock options or a combination of the foregoing, but only nonqualified stock options have been issued under the 2007 Plan as of January 28, 2012.
 
96

Table of Contents
Stock Options and Option Agreements
Nonqualified stock options have been granted pursuant to nonqualified stock option agreements adopted and approved by our board of directors. Our board of directors determines the exercise price for a stock option, within the terms and conditions of the 2007 Plan, which for each grant has been equal to 100% of the fair value of our common stock on the date of such grant as determined by our board of directors based on objective and subjective factors including valuation reports prepared by a third-party valuation firm setting forth its best estimate of the fair market value of our common stock as of each valuation date. Options granted under the 2007 Plan vest over the course of four years with shares vesting in equal annual installments.
The term of stock options granted under the 2007 Plan is ten years, except in cases of termination. Unless the terms of an option holder’s stock option agreement provided otherwise, if an option holder’s relationship with us ceases for any reason other than for cause, disability or death, the option holder may exercise any vested options for a period of 30 days following the cessation of service, provided we have completed our initial public offering. With respect to Mr. Griesemer, his offer letter provides that such rights to exercise any vested options will last for a period of 90 days following cessation of his employment with us, provided we have completed our initial public offering. If an option holder’s service relationship with us is terminated for cause, then the option terminates immediately. Unless the terms of an option holder’s stock option agreement provided otherwise, if an option holder’s service relationship ceases due to disability or death the option holder or a beneficiary of such option holder may exercise any vested options for a period of 12 months following the date of such termination due to disability or death.
No option may be assigned or transferred by the option holder except, in the event of the death of such option holder, by will or the laws of descent and distribution. In addition, our board of directors may amend, modify, extend, cancel, renew, reprice or otherwise adjust the exercise price of, or grant a new option in substitution for, any outstanding option or may waive any restrictions or conditions applicable to any outstanding option. Each option is evidenced by a written agreement, which contains the terms and conditions of such option.
Effect on Awards of Certain Corporate Transactions
The 2007 Plan provides the board of directors with discretion to enter into agreements providing terms and conditions related to the vesting of options in the event of a “change in control.” Under the 2007 Plan a change in control is defined as the occurrence of one of the following events:
 
 	•	 	the direct or indirect sale or exchange in a single or series of related transactions by the stockholders of the company of more than 50% of the voting stock of the company;	
 
 	•	 	a merger or consolidation in which the company is a party (excluding a merger for purposes of reincorporating the company’s jurisdiction of incorporation);	
 
 	•	 	the sale, exchange or transfer of all or substantially all of the assets of the company; or	
 
 	•	 	a liquidation or dissolution of the company.	
Pursuant to stock option agreements entered into with Mr. Langsdorf and Ms. Anker-Morris and the offer letter entered into with Mr. Griesemer, if we experience a change in control, 100% of the unvested options outstanding for Mr. Griesemer and 50% of the unvested options outstanding for Mr. Langsdorf and Ms. Anker-Morris will immediately vest or become exercisable. For Mr. Langsdorf and Ms. Anker-Morris, the acquiring or surviving corporation may either assume or continue outstanding awards, or substitute equivalent awards for such awards. Alternatively, the acquiring or surviving corporation may instead terminate and cancel outstanding awards in exchange for a payment equal to the excess of the value of the shares that the recipient would have received upon the exercise of the awards over the exercise price or amount otherwise payable.
 
97

Table of Contents
2012 Equity and Incentive Award Plan
The principal purpose of the 2012 Plan is to attract, retain and motivate selected employees, consultants and directors through the granting of stock-based compensation awards and cash-based performance bonus awards. The 2012 Plan is also designed to permit us to make cash-based awards and equity-based awards intended to qualify as “performance-based compensation” under Section 162(m) of the Code.
Share Reserve
Under the 2012 Plan,          shares of our Class A common stock, which represents 10% of the fully diluted shares of our capital stock outstanding immediately following this offering, will be initially reserved for issuance pursuant to a variety of stock-based compensation awards, including stock options, stock appreciation rights, or SARs, restricted stock awards, restricted stock unit awards, deferred stock awards, deferred stock unit awards, dividend equivalent awards, stock payment awards and performance awards and other stock-based awards.
The following counting provisions will be in effect for the share reserve under the 2012 Plan:
 
 	•	 	to the extent that an award terminates, expires or lapses for any reason or an award is settled in cash without the delivery of shares, any shares subject to the award at such time will be available for future grants under the 2012 Plan;	
 
 	•	 	to the extent shares are tendered or withheld to satisfy the grant, exercise price or tax withholding obligation with respect to any award under the 2012 Plan, such tendered or withheld shares will be available for future grants under the 2012 Plan;	
 
 	•	 	to the extent that shares of our Class A common stock are repurchased by us prior to vesting so that shares are returned to us, such shares will be available for future grants under the 2012 Plan;	
 
 	•	 	the payment of dividend equivalents in cash in conjunction with any outstanding awards will not be counted against the shares available for issuance under the 2012 Plan; and	
 
 	•	 	to the extent permitted by applicable law or any exchange rule, shares issued in assumption of, or in substitution for, any outstanding awards of any entity acquired in any form of combination by us or any of our subsidiaries will not be counted against the shares available for issuance under the 2012 Plan.	
Administration
The compensation committee of our board of directors will administer the 2012 Plan unless our board of directors assumes authority for administration. The compensation committee must consist of at least two members of our board of directors, each of whom is intended to qualify as an “outside director” within the meaning of Section 162(m) of the Code, a “non-employee director” for purposes of Rule 16b-3 under the Exchange Act and an “independent director” within the meaning of the rules of the NYSE, or other principal securities market on which shares of our common stock are traded. The 2012 Plan provides that the compensation committee may delegate its authority to grant awards to employees other than executive officers and certain senior executives of the company to a committee consisting of one or more members of our board of directors or one or more of our officers.
Subject to the terms and conditions of the 2012 Plan, the administrator has the authority to select the persons to whom awards are to be made, to determine the number of shares to be subject to awards and the terms and conditions of awards, and to make all other determinations and to take all other actions necessary or advisable for the administration of the 2012 Plan. The administrator is also authorized to adopt, amend or rescind rules relating to administration of the 2012 Plan. Our board of directors may at any time remove the compensation committee as the administrator and reinstate in itself the authority to administer the 2012 Plan. Our full board of directors will administer the 2012 Plan with respect to awards to non-employee directors.
 
98

Table of Contents
Eligibility
Options, SARs, restricted stock and all other stock-based and cash-based awards under the 2012 Plan may be granted to individuals who are then our officers, employees or consultants or are the officers, employees or consultants of certain of our subsidiaries. Such awards also may be granted to our directors. Only employees of our company or certain of our subsidiaries may be granted incentive stock options, or ISOs.
Awards
The 2012 Plan provides that the administrator may grant or issue stock options, SARs, restricted stock, restricted stock units, or RSUs, deferred stock, deferred stock units, dividend equivalents, performance awards, stock payments and other stock-based and cash-based awards, or any combination thereof. Each award will be set forth in a separate agreement with the person receiving the award and will indicate the type, terms and conditions of the award.
 
 	•	 	Nonqualified Stock Options, or NQSOs, will provide for the right to purchase shares of our Class A common stock at a specified price which may not be less than fair market value on the date of grant, and usually will become exercisable (at the discretion of the administrator) in one or more installments after the grant date, subject to the participant’s continued employment or service with us and/or subject to the satisfaction of corporate performance targets and individual performance targets established by the administrator. NQSOs may be granted for any term specified by the administrator that does not exceed ten years.	
 
 	•	 	Incentive Stock Options will be designed in a manner intended to comply with the provisions of Section 422 of the Code and will be subject to specified restrictions contained in the Code. Among such restrictions, ISOs must have an exercise price of not less than the fair market value of a share of Class A common stock on the date of grant, may only be granted to employees, and must not be exercisable after a period of ten years measured from the date of grant. In the case of an ISO granted to an individual who owns (or is deemed to own) at least 10% of the total combined voting power of all classes of our capital stock, the 2012 Plan provides that the exercise price must be at least 110% of the fair market value of a share of Class A common stock on the date of grant and the ISO must not be exercisable after a period of five years measured from the date of grant.	
 
 	•	 	Restricted Stock, which shall be Class A common stock, may be granted to any eligible individual and made subject to such restrictions as may be determined by the administrator. Restricted stock, typically, may be forfeited for no consideration or repurchased by us at the original purchase price if the conditions or restrictions on vesting are not met. In general, restricted stock may not be sold or otherwise transferred until restrictions are removed or expire. Recipients of restricted stock, unlike recipients of options, generally will have voting rights and will have the right to receive dividends, if any, prior to the time when the restrictions lapse; however, extraordinary dividends will generally be placed in escrow, and will not be released until restrictions are removed or expire.	
 
 	•	 	Restricted Stock Units may be awarded to any eligible individual, typically without payment of consideration, but subject to vesting conditions based on continued employment or service or on performance criteria established by the administrator. Like restricted stock, RSUs may not be sold, or otherwise transferred or hypothecated, until vesting conditions are removed or expire. Unlike restricted stock, stock underlying RSUs will not be issued until the RSUs have vested, and recipients of RSUs generally will have no voting or dividend rights prior to the time when vesting conditions are satisfied.	
 
 	•	 	Deferred Stock Awards and Deferred Stock Unit Awards represent the right to receive shares of our Class A common stock on a future date. Deferred stock may not be sold or otherwise hypothecated or transferred until issued. Deferred stock will not be issued until the deferred stock award has vested, and recipients of deferred stock generally will have no voting or dividend rights prior to the time when the vesting conditions are satisfied and the shares are issued. Deferred stock awards generally will be forfeited, and the underlying shares of deferred stock will not be issued, if the applicable vesting conditions and other restrictions are not met.	
 
99

Table of Contents
 	•	 	Stock Appreciation Rights may be granted in connection with stock options or other awards, or separately. SARs granted in connection with stock options or other awards typically will provide for payments to the holder based upon increases in the price of our Class A common stock over a set exercise price. The exercise price of any SAR granted under the 2012 Plan must be at least 100% of the fair market value of a share of our Class A common stock on the date of grant. Except as required by Section 162(m) of the Code with respect to a SAR intended to qualify as performance-based compensation as described in Section 162(m) of the Code, there are no restrictions specified in the 2012 Plan on the exercise of SARs or the amount of gain realizable therefrom, although restrictions may be imposed by the administrator in individual SAR agreements. SARs under the 2012 Plan will be settled in cash or shares of our common stock, or in a combination of both, at the election of the administrator.	
 
 	•	 	Dividend Equivalents represent the value of the dividends, if any, per share paid by us, calculated with reference to the number of shares covered by the award. Dividend equivalents may be settled in cash or shares and at such times as determined by the compensation committee or board of directors, as applicable.	
 
 	•	 	Performance Awards may be granted by the administrator on an individual or group basis. Generally, these awards will be based upon specific performance targets and may be paid in cash or in Class A common stock or in a combination of both. Performance awards may also include bonuses that may be granted by the administrator on an individual or group basis and which may be payable in cash or in common stock or in a combination of both.	
 
 	•	 	Stock Payments may be authorized by the administrator in the form of Class A common stock or an option or other right to purchase Class A common stock as part of a deferred compensation or other arrangement in lieu of all or any part of compensation, including bonuses, that would otherwise be payable in cash to the employee, consultant or non-employee director.	
Change in Control
In the event of a change in control where the acquirer does not assume or replace awards granted under the 2012 Plan, awards issued under the 2012 Plan will be subject to accelerated vesting such that 100% of such awards will become vested and exercisable or payable, as applicable, prior to the consummation of such transaction. If not exercised or paid the awards will terminate upon consummation of the transaction. In addition, the administrator will also have complete discretion to structure one or more awards under the 2012 Plan to provide that such awards will become vested and exercisable or payable on an accelerated basis in the event such awards are assumed or replaced with equivalent awards but the individual’s service with us or the acquiring entity is subsequently terminated within a designated period following the event resulting in a change in control. The administrator may also make appropriate adjustments to awards under the 2012 Plan and is authorized to provide for the acceleration, cash-out, termination, assumption, substitution or conversion of such awards in the event of a change in control or certain other unusual or nonrecurring events or transactions. Under the 2012 Plan, a change in control is generally defined as:
 
 	•	 	the transfer or exchange in a single or series of related transactions by our stockholders of more than 50% of our voting stock to a person or group;	
 
 	•	 	a change in the composition of our board of directors over a 12 month period such that 50% or more of the members of the board of directors were elected through one or more contested elections;	
 
 	•	 	a merger, consolidation, reorganization or business combination in which we are involved, directly or indirectly, other than a merger, consolidation, reorganization or business combination which results in our outstanding voting securities immediately before the transaction continuing to represent a majority of the voting power of the acquiring company’s outstanding voting securities and after which no person or group beneficially owns 50% or more of the outstanding voting securities of the surviving entity immediately after the transaction;	

100

Table of Contents
 	•	 	the sale, exchange, or transfer of all or substantially all of our assets; or	
 
 	•	 	stockholder approval of our liquidation or dissolution.	
Adjustments of Awards
In the event of any stock dividend, stock split, combination or exchange of shares, merger, consolidation, spin-off, recapitalization, distribution of our assets to stockholders (other than normal cash dividends) or any other corporate event affecting the number of outstanding shares of our common stock or the share price of our common stock that would require adjustments to the 2012 Plan or any awards under the 2012 Plan in order to prevent the dilution or enlargement of the potential benefits intended to be made available thereunder, the administrator shall make appropriate, proportionate adjustments to:
 
 	•	 	the aggregate number and type of shares subject to the 2012 Plan;	
 
 	•	 	the number and kind of shares subject to outstanding awards;	
 
 	•	 	the terms and conditions of outstanding awards (including, without limitation, any applicable performance targets or criteria with respect to such awards); and/or	
 
 	•	 	the grant or exercise price per share of any outstanding awards under the 2012 Plan.	
Amendment and Termination
Our board of directors or the committee (with board of directors approval) may terminate, amend or modify the 2012 Plan at any time and from time to time. However, we must generally obtain stockholder approval:
 
 	•	 	to increase the number of shares available under the 2012 Plan (other than in connection with certain corporate events, as described above);	
 
 	•	 	to reduce the price per share of any outstanding option or SAR granted under the 2012 Plan;	
 
 	•	 	to cancel any option or SAR in exchange for cash or another award when the option or SAR price per share exceeds the fair market value of the underlying shares; or	
 
 	•	 	to the extent required by applicable law, rule or regulation (including any applicable stock exchange rule).	
Expiration Date
No option or other award may be granted pursuant to the 2012 Plan after the tenth anniversary of the effective date of the 2012 Plan. Any award that is outstanding on the expiration date of the 2012 Plan will remain in force according to the terms of the 2012 Plan and the applicable award agreement.
Effective Date
The 2012 Plan will become effective prior to the completion of this offering.
 
101

Table of Contents
RELATED PARTY TRANSACTIONS
We describe below transactions and series of similar transactions that have occurred this year or during our last three fiscal years to which we were a party or will be a party in which:
 
 	•	 	the amounts involved exceeded or will exceed $120,000; and	
 
 	•	 	a director, executive officer, holder of more than 5% of our common stock or any member of their immediate family had or will have a direct or indirect material interest.	
The following persons and entities that participated in the transactions listed in this section were related persons at the time of the transaction:
Hezy Shaked, Tilly Levine, Shaked Holdings, LLC and Amnet Holdings, LLC. Mr. Shaked is our Co-Founder, Chairman of the Board of Directors, one of our executive officers and a holder of more than 5% of our common stock. Ms. Levine is our Co-Founder and a holder of more than 5% of our common stock. Mr. Shaked, through the Hezy Shaked Living Trust established May 18, 1999, or the Hezy Shaked Trust, owns 63.0% of Shaked Holdings. Ms. Levine, through the Tilly Levine Separate Property Trust established March 31, 2004, or the Tilly Levine Trust, owns 37.0% of Shaked Holdings. Mr. Shaked, through the Hezy Shaked Trust, is the sole member and owner of Amnet Holdings, LLC, or Amnet Holdings.
Amy Shaked, Netta Schroer-Shaked, GRAT Trust #1 and GRAT Trust #2. Amy Shaked and Netta Schroer-Shaked are the daughters of Mr. Shaked and Ms. Levine. Ms. Shaked and Ms. Schroer-Shaked are also co-trustees of each of the HS Annuity Trust Established August 6, 2010, or the GRAT Trust #1, and the TL Annuity Trust Established August 6, 2010, or the GRAT Trust #2. Each of the GRAT Trust #1 and the GRAT Trust #2 hold more than 5% of our common stock.
Daniel Griesemer. Mr. Griesemer is our President and Chief Executive Officer and a member of our board of directors.
Seth Johnson and Janet Kerr. Mr. Johnson and Ms. Kerr are members of our board of directors.
“S” Corporation Distribution
Prior to the completion of this offering, World of Jeans & Tops, our wholly owned operating subsidiary upon completion of this offering, will terminate its “S” Corporation status and it will become a “C” Corporation for U.S. federal and state income tax purposes. Prior to the termination of the “S” Corporation status of World of Jeans & Tops, it will distribute to its existing shareholders, in proportion to their ownership of shares, notes in an aggregate principal amount equal to $84.0 million, or 100% of World of Jeans & Tops’ undistributed taxable income from the date of its formation up to the date of termination of its “S” Corporation status. Upon the completion of this offering, we will use $84.0 million from the net proceeds from this offering to pay in full the principal amount of these undistributed earnings notes as described under “Use of Proceeds”. The shareholders and the amounts payable to each shareholder and their respective related trusts are as follows (in millions):

Shareholder	  	Distribution	 	
Hezy Shaked Trust	  	$	42.0	  	
Tilly Levine Trust	  	$	25.2	  	
GRAT Trust #1	  	$	8.4	  	
GRAT Trust #2	  	$	8.4	  	
Tax Indemnification Agreements
Prior to or upon the completion of this offering, we will enter into certain tax indemnification agreements with each of our existing stockholders who were also the shareholders of World of Jeans & Tops prior to
 
102

Table of Contents
termination of its “S” Corporation status: the Hezy Shaked Living Trust, the Tilly Levine Separate Property Trust, the GRAT Trust #1 and the GRAT Trust #2. Pursuant to such tax indemnification agreements, we will agree to indemnify, defend and hold harmless each such shareholder on an after-tax basis against additional income taxes, plus interest and penalties resulting from adjustments made, as a result of a final determination made by a competent tax authority, to the taxable income World of Jeans & Tops reported as an “S” Corporation. Such agreement will also provide that we defend and hold harmless such shareholders against any losses, costs or expenses, including reasonable attorneys’ fees, arising out of a claim for such tax liability.
Certain Employees of the Company
We employ Ms. Levine as our Vice President of Vendor Relations. In fiscal year 2011, Ms. Levine received base compensation of $220,000, and other compensation in the amount of $108,985, which included $89,500 for receipt of a company vehicle, $13,800 for tax preparation services, $4,786 for 401(k) matching contributions and $899 for automobile related expenses. Ms. Levine also participated in our health and wellness program available to all other eligible employees.
We employ Amy Shaked as our Fashion Coordinator in the Merchandising Department. In fiscal year 2011, Ms. Shaked received base compensation of $140,940, a one-time cash bonus of $150,000 and other compensation in the amount of $59,242, which included $54,000 for the receipt of a company vehicle and $5,242 for 401(k) matching contributions, automobile and other miscellaneous expenses. Ms. Shaked also participated in our health and wellness program available to all other eligible employees.
We employ Netta Schroer-Shaked as an e-Commerce Assistant. In fiscal year 2011, Ms. Schroer-Shaked received base compensation of $41,600, a one-time cash bonus of $30,000 and other compensation in the amount of $1,518, which included 401(k) matching contributions and other miscellaneous expenses. Ms. Schroer-Shaked also participated in our health and wellness program available to all other eligible employees.
Leasing Arrangements
We lease approximately 172,000 square feet for our corporate headquarters and distribution center located at 10 Whatney and 12 Whatney, Irvine, California, from Shaked Holdings, the sole owners of which are Mr. Shaked and Ms. Levine. This lease began January 1, 2003 and expires December 31, 2012, with multiple options to renew thereafter. The lease provides for an initial base monthly lease payment of $120,627, which is adjusted annually based upon the Los Angeles/Anaheim/Riverside Urban Consumer Price Index, not to exceed 7% in any one annual increase. As of January 28, 2012, our monthly lease payment was $155,477. Prior to signing the lease, we received an independent market analysis regarding these properties and, therefore, we believe the terms of this lease are reasonable and are not materially different than terms we would have obtained from an unaffiliated third party.
We also lease approximately 24,000 square feet of office and warehouse space located at 15 Chrysler, Irvine, California, from Amnet Holdings. This lease began November 1, 2010 and expires October 31, 2014. The lease provides for an initial base monthly lease payment of $16,118, which increases every 12 months at $0.03 per square foot. As of January 28, 2012, our monthly lease payment was $16,291. We sublease approximately 17,000 square feet of this space to an unrelated third party. The sublease began on December 1, 2010 and terminates on May 31, 2014. The sublease provides for an initial base monthly lease payment of $11,223, which increases annually at a rate of $0.03 per square foot. Prior to signing the lease, we received an independent market analysis regarding this property and, therefore, we believe the terms of this lease are reasonable and are not materially different than terms we would have obtained from an unaffiliated third party.
On September 2, 2011, we entered into a lease for approximately 26,000 square feet of office and warehouse space located at 11 Whatney, Irvine, California with Amnet Holdings, LLC. Mr. Shaked is the sole
 
103

Table of Contents
member of Amnet Holdings. The building is currently being constructed by the landlord, and construction is expected to be completed during the first half of fiscal year 2012. Our lease terminates ten years from the earlier of (i) the date the building is substantially completed or (ii) the date we can access the building and begin tenant improvements. The lease provides for base monthly payments of $27,037 which adjust annually based upon the Los Angeles/Anaheim/Riverside Urban Consumer Price Index, not to exceed 7%, but a minimum of 3%, in any one annual increase. We are not required to make lease payments until access to the property has been granted to begin tenant improvements. Prior to signing the lease, we received an independent market analysis regarding this property and therefore we believe the terms of this lease are reasonable and are not materially different than terms we would have obtained from an unaffiliated third party.
On November 1, 2011, we entered into a lease for approximately 81,000 square feet of office and warehouse space located at 17 Pasteur, Irvine, California with Amnet Holdings, LLC. The lease terminates on October 31, 2021. We intend to use this property as our e-commerce distribution center. The lease provides for base monthly payments of $51,942, however the lease also provides for increased base monthly payments of $68,174 if the building is expanded by the landlord, which we expect to be completed by the first half for fiscal year 2013. The lease payments adjust annually based upon the Los Angeles/Anaheim/Riverside Urban Consumer Price Index, not to exceed 7%, but a minimum of 3%, in any one annual increase. Prior to signing the lease, we received an independent market analysis regarding this property and therefore we believe the terms of this lease are reasonable and are not materially different than terms we would have obtained from an unaffiliated third party.
The leases for the properties at 15 Chrysler, 11 Whatney and 17 Pasteur are accounted for as operating leases. With respect to the lease for the properties at 10 Whatney and 12 Whatney, the land component is accounted for as an operating lease and the building component is accounted for as a capital lease. As of January 28, 2012, future minimum rental commitments under the portion of these related party leases accounted for as operating leases were approximately $16.7 million in the aggregate. As of January 28, 2012, future minimum lease payments under the portion of the related party lease for 10 and 12 Whatney accounted for as a capital lease were approximately $4.6 million in the aggregate.
Consulting Fees
We entered into independent contractor agreements with each of Ms. Kerr and Mr. Johnson in July 2008 to serve as a consultant to our management and board of directors. In connection with these agreements, these individuals received the following compensation:

 	  	Janet Kerr	 	  	Seth Johnson	 	
2009	  	$	6,000	  	  	$	7,000	  	
2010	  	$	6,500	  	  	$	6,500	  	
These independent contractor agreements with Ms. Kerr and Mr. Johnson were terminated prior to their appointment to our board of directors.
In addition, Ms. Kerr and Mr. Johnson were each granted stock options in April 2009 to purchase 7,500 shares of the company’s common stock at a price of $6.45 per share. These options vest in four equal annual installments with the first vesting date having occurred on July 3, 2009 for Ms. Kerr and July 9, 2009 for Mr. Johnson. We must complete an initial public offering before any vested stock options become exercisable.
Loan Guaranty
The company provided a guaranty of the loan obtained by Shaked Holdings for its purchase of the properties at 10 Whatney and 12 Whatney. The initial principal amount of the loan was $9.2 million. As of January 28,
 
104

Table of Contents
2012, the outstanding balance of the loan was $4.6 million. As of March 9, 2011, the financial institution holding the mortgage guaranty cancelled the guaranty.
Offer Letter with Daniel Griesemer
Pursuant to the offer letter entered into between us and Mr. Griesemer dated January 15, 2011, Mr. Griesemer was appointed as a member of our board of directors. For more information regarding the terms of our offer letter with Mr. Griesemer, including compensation payable pursuant thereto, see the discussion included in “—Executive Compensation—Employment Agreements and Severance Benefits”.
Indemnification Agreements
We expect to enter into indemnification agreements with each of our directors and executive officers. Each indemnification agreement will provide that, subject to limited exceptions, and among other things, we will indemnify the director or executive officer to the fullest extent permitted by law for claims arising in his or her capacity as our director or officer. See “Description of Capital Stock—Limitations on Liability and Indemnification Matters” for a general description of these agreements.
Review, Approval or Ratification of Transactions with Related Persons
Prior to the completion of this offering, our board of directors will adopt a written statement of policy for the evaluation of and the approval, disapproval and monitoring of transactions involving us and “related persons”. For the purposes of the policy, “related persons” will include our executive officers, directors and director nominees or their immediate family members, or stockholders owning five percent or more of our outstanding common stock.
Our related person transactions policy will require:
 
 	•	 	that any transaction in which a related person has a material direct or indirect interest and which exceeds $120,000, such transaction referred to as a “related person transaction”, and any material amendment or modification to a related person transaction, be evaluated and approved or ratified by our audit committee or by the disinterested members of the audit committee; and	
 
 	•	 	that any employment relationship or transaction involving an executive officer and any related compensation solely resulting from that employment relationship or transaction must be approved by the compensation committee of our board of directors or recommended by the compensation committee to the board of directors for its approval.	
In connection with the review and approval or ratification of a related person transaction:
 
 	•	 	management must disclose to the audit committee or the disinterested members of the audit committee, as applicable, the material terms of the related person transaction, including the approximate dollar value of the amount involved in the transaction, and all the material facts as to the related person’s direct or indirect interest in, or relationship to, the related person transaction;	
 
 	•	 	management must advise the audit committee or the disinterested members of the audit committee, as applicable, as to whether the related person transaction complies with the terms of our agreements governing our material outstanding indebtedness;	
 
 	•	 	management must advise the audit committee or the disinterested members of the audit committee, as applicable, as to whether the related person transaction will be required to be disclosed in our SEC	
 
105

Table of Contents
 	filings. To the extent it is required to be disclosed, management must ensure that the related person transaction is disclosed in accordance with SEC rules; and	
 
 	•	 	management must advise the audit committee or the disinterested members of the audit committee, as applicable, as to whether the related person transaction constitutes a “personal loan” for purposes of Section 402 of Sarbanes-Oxley.	
In addition, the related person transaction policy will provide that the audit committee, in connection with any approval or ratification of a related person transaction involving a non-employee director or director nominee, should consider whether such transaction would compromise the director or director nominee’s status as an “independent”, “outside” or “non-employee” director, as applicable, under the rules and regulations of the SEC, the NYSE and the Code.
 
106

Table of Contents
PRINCIPAL STOCKHOLDERS
The following table sets forth certain information with respect to the beneficial ownership of our common stock as of February 29, 2012 and as adjusted to reflect the sale of our Class A common stock offering by this prospectus for:
 
 	•	 	each person known to us to own beneficially more than 5% of our outstanding common stock;	
 
 	•	 	each of our executive officers named in the summary compensation table;	
 
 	•	 	each of our directors; and	
 
 	•	 	all of our executive officers and directors as a group.	
Beneficial ownership is determined in accordance with the rules of the SEC and generally includes voting or investment power with respect to the shares. Except as indicated by footnote, each stockholder identified in the table possesses sole voting and investment power with respect to the shares shown as beneficially owned by such stockholder.
The table below assumes the completion of the Reorganization Transaction. Assuming the issuance of          shares of our Class A common stock in this offering, there will be          shares of Class A common stock and          shares of Class B common stock outstanding after this offering. Percentage of ownership is based on          shares of common stock outstanding on          and          shares of common stock outstanding after completion of this offering.
 
107

Table of Contents
Unless otherwise indicated in the footnotes, the address of each of the individuals named below is: c/o Tilly’s, Inc., 10 Whatney, Irvine, California, 92618.

Name of
Beneficial Owner	 	Shares of common stock beneficially owned
immediately prior to this offering	 	 	Shares of common stock
beneficially owned after this
offering, with no over-
allotment	 	Voting
power
with no
over-
allotment
option	 	Shares of common stock
beneficially owned after
this offering with over-
allotment option	 	Voting
power
with
over-
allotment
option	 	
 	 	Shares(4)	 	 	Options(5)	 	 	Total	 	 	Percent	 	 	Shares	 	Options	 	Total	 	Percent	 	 	 	Shares	 	Options	 	Total	 	%	 	 	 	 	
5% Stockholders not listed below:	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	
Hezy Shaked Trust(1)	 	 	10,000,000	  	 	 	0	  	 	 	10,000,000	  	 	 	48	% 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	
Tilly Levine Trust(2)	 	 	6,000,000	  	 	 	0	  	 	 	6,000,000	  	 	 	29	% 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	
HS Annuity Trust(3)	 	 	2,000,000	  	 	 	0	  	 	 	2,000,000	  	 	 	10	% 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	
TL Annuity Trust(3)	 	 	2,000,000	  	 	 	0	  	 	 	2,000,000	  	 	 	10	% 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	
Directors:	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	
Hezy Shaked	 	 	(1)(2)	  	 	 	0	  	 	 	(1)(2)	  	 	 	    	% 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	
Daniel Griesemer	 	 	0	  	 	 	100,000	  	 	 	100,000	  	 	 	*	  	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	
Doug Collier	 	 	0	  	 	 	0	  	 	 	0	  	 	 	—  	  	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	
Seth Johnson	 	 	0	  	 	 	5,625	  	 	 	5,625	  	 	 	*	  	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	
Janet Kerr	 	 	0	  	 	 	5,625	  	 	 	5,625	  	 	 	*	  	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	
Bernard Zeichner	 	 	0	  	 	 	0	  	 	 	0	  	 	 	—  	  	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	
Named Executive Officers	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	
Bill Langsdorf	 	 	0	  	 	 	197,500	  	 	 	197,500	  	 	 	1	% 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	
Debbie Anker-Morris	 	 	0	  	 	 	103,750	  	 	 	103,750	  	 	 	*	  	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	
Craig DeMerit	 	 	0	  	 	 	62,500	  	 	 	62,500	  	 	 	*	  	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	
All executive officers and directors as a group (9 persons)	 	 	16,000,000	  	 	 	475,000	  	 	 	16,475,000	  	 	 	78	% 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	
 
*	Represents less than 1%.	
(1)	Hezy Shaked is the trustee of the Hezy Shaked Living Trust established May 18, 1999 and controls the voting rights of these shares of common stock.	
(2)	Tilly Levine is the trustee of the Tilly Levine Separate Property Trust established March 31, 2004. Ms. Levine has entered into a voting trust agreement granting Mr. Shaked the rights to vote these shares of common stock.	
(3)	Amy Shaked and Netta Schroer-Shaked are co-trustees of the HS Annuity Trust established August 6, 2010 and the TL Annuity Trust established August 6, 2010, and have the ability to vote these shares of common stock.	
(4)	All shares identified in this column are shares of our Class B common stock.	
(5)	Represents vested options that will not become exercisable for Class A common stock until consummation of an initial public offering and unvested options that will vest within 60 days of the date above.	
 
108

Table of Contents
DESCRIPTION OF CAPITAL STOCK
The following is a description of our capital stock and the material provisions of our certificate of incorporation and bylaws. The following is only a summary and is qualified by applicable law and by the provisions of the certificate of incorporation and bylaws, copies of which are available as set forth under the caption entitled “Where You Can Find Additional Information”.
Upon consummation of this offering, our authorized capital stock will consist of 145,000,000 shares, 100,000,000 of which are designated Class A common stock with a par value of $0.001 per share, 35,000,000 of which are designated Class B common stock with a par value of $0.001 per share and 10,000,000 of which are designated as preferred stock with a par value of $0.001 per share. Upon completion of this offering,          shares of Class A common stock and          shares of Class B common stock, or          shares of Class A common stock and          shares of Class B common stock if the underwriters fully exercise their option to purchase additional shares, and no shares of preferred stock, will be issued and outstanding.
Reorganization Transaction
Tilly’s, Inc. is a Delaware corporation that has not, prior to the completion of the Reorganization Transaction, conducted any activities other than those incident to its formation and the preparation of this prospectus. Tilly’s, Inc. was formed solely for the purpose of becoming the parent corporation to World of Jeans & Tops and completing this offering.
On                     , all four shareholders of World of Jeans & Tops exchanged all of their equity interests in World of Jeans & Tops for shares of Tilly’s, Inc. Class B common stock on a one-for-one basis, and existing options to purchase World of Jeans & Tops common stock were exchanged for options to purchase Tilly’s, Inc. Class A common stock. In connection with the Reorganization Transaction, World of Jeans & Tops distributed to its existing shareholders, in proportion to their ownership, notes in an aggregate principal amount equal to $84.0 million, or 100% of its undistributed taxable income from the date of its formation up to the date of termination of its “S” Corporation status. This was a final distribution to its “S” Corporation shareholders resulting from the termination of its “S” Corporation status. Upon the completion of this offering, we will use $84.0 million of the net proceeds from this offering, to pay in full the principal amount of these undistributed earnings notes as described under “Use of Proceeds”. Upon completion of the Reorganization Transaction, World of Jeans & Tops will become our wholly owned subsidiary, its “S” Corporation status will terminate automatically, and it will be treated as a “C” Corporation.
Common Stock
Our certificate of incorporation divides our common stock into two classes of common stock, Class A common stock and Class B common stock. Holders of Class A common stock and Class B common stock have identical rights, except with respect to voting and conversion as further described below. The holders of Class A common stock are entitled to one vote per share held of record and holders of Class B common stock are entitled to 10 votes per share held of record on all matters submitted to a vote of stockholders, including the election of directors. Except as may be provided with respect to shares of preferred stock, the holders of our common stock will possess the exclusive voting power.
Holders of our common stock will have no preference, exchange, sinking fund, redemption or appraisal rights and have no preemptive rights to subscribe for any of our securities.
 
109

Table of Contents
Voting Rights
On all matters on which the holders of our common stock are entitled to vote, the holders of the Class A common stock and the Class B common stock vote together as a single class. Holders of Class A common stock are entitled to one vote for each share held of record and holders of Class B common stock are entitled to 10 votes for each share held of record on all matters submitted to a vote of stockholders. See “Risk Factors—Risks Related to this Offering and Ownership of Our Class A Common Stock—Our founders control a majority of the voting power of our common stock, which may prevent other stockholders from influencing corporate decisions and may result in conflicts of interest that cause the price of our Class A common stock to decline.” Holders of our common stock will not have cumulative voting rights, which means that in the election of directors, the holders of shares of common stock representing a plurality of the votes cast can elect all of the directors then standing for election, and the holders of the remaining shares will not be able to elect any directors. Our stockholders cannot amend, alter or repeal any provision of our bylaws without the affirmative vote of two thirds of all stockholders voting together as a single class.
Conversion
Shares of Class B common stock will convert automatically into a like number of shares of Class A common stock as follows:
 
 	•	 	The number of shares of Class A common stock and Class B common stock beneficially owned by Hezy Shaked and any Hezy Shaked Entity, in the aggregate, represents less than 15.0% of the total aggregate number of shares of Class A common stock and Class B common stock outstanding; and	
 
 	•	 	The death of Hezy Shaked or Mr. Shaked’s ceasing to be affiliated with us in any capacity as a result of a permanent disability.	
In addition, shares of Class B common stock that are transferred after this offering will automatically convert into a like number of shares of Class A common stock, other than transfers to a Hezy Shaked Entity.
For purposes of our certificate of incorporation, a “Hezy Shaked Entity” is:
 
 	•	 	any not-for-profit corporation controlled by Hezy Shaked, Tilly Levine or the children of Hezy Shaked and Tilly Levine, or any combination thereof;	
 
 	•	 	any other corporation if at least 66% of the value and voting power of its outstanding equity is owned by Hezy Shaked, Tilly Levine or the children of Hezy Shaked and Tilly Levine, or any combination thereof;	
 
 	•	 	any partnership if at least 66% of the value and voting power of its partnership interests are owned by Hezy Shaked, Tilly Levine or the children of Hezy Shaked and Tilly Levine, or any combination thereof;	
 
 	•	 	any limited liability or similar company if at least 66% of the value and voting power of the company and its membership interests are owned by Hezy Shaked, Tilly Levine or the children of Hezy Shaked and Tilly Levine; or	
 
 	•	 	any trust the primary beneficiaries of which are Hezy Shaked, Tilly Levine or the children of Hezy Shaked and Tilly Levine and/or charitable organizations, which if the trust is a wholly charitable trust, at least 66% of the trustees of such trust are appointed by Hezy Shaked, Tilly Levine or the children of Hezy Shaked and Tilly Levine.	
Dividend Rights
The holders of our common stock are entitled to receive pro rata such lawful dividends when, if and as may be declared from time to time by our board of directors out of funds legally available for payment. However,
 
110

Table of Contents
such dividends would be subject to preferences that may be applicable to the holders of any outstanding shares of our preferred stock. See “Dividend Policy”.
Liquidation
In the event of a liquidation, dissolution or winding up of the affairs of our company, whether voluntary or involuntary, the holders of our common stock will be entitled to receive pro rata all of our remaining assets available for distribution to our stockholders. Any such pro rata distribution would be subject to the rights of the holders of any outstanding shares of our preferred stock.
Rights and Preferences
The shares of our common stock have no preemptive rights, no redemption or sinking fund provisions and are not liable for further call or assessment. The rights, powers, preferences and privileges of holders of our common stock are subject to, and may be adversely affected by, the rights of the holders of shares of any series of our preferred stock that we may designate and issue in the future. The outstanding shares of our common stock are, and all shares of common stock to be issued in this offering will be, non-assessable.
Preferred Stock
As of February 29, 2012, we had no shares of preferred stock outstanding. Our board of directors has the authority, without further action by the stockholders, to issue up to 10,000,000 shares of preferred stock in one or more series and to fix the designations, powers, preferences, privileges, and relative participating, optional, or special rights as well as the qualifications, limitations, or restrictions of the preferred stock, including dividend rights, conversion rights, voting rights, terms of redemption and liquidation preferences, any or all of which may be greater than the rights of the common stock. Accordingly, our board of directors, without stockholder approval, may issue preferred stock with voting, conversion, or other rights that could adversely affect the voting power and other rights of the holders of common stock. Preferred stock could be issued quickly with terms calculated to delay or prevent a change of control or make removal of management more difficult. Additionally, the issuance of preferred stock may have the effect of decreasing the market price of our Class A common stock, may adversely affect the voting and other rights of the holders of our common stock, and could have the effect of delaying, deferring or preventing a change of control of our company or other corporate action. See “Anti-takeover Effects of Certain Provisions of Delaware Law and Charter Provisions”. At present, we have no plans to issue any shares of preferred stock following this offering.
Anti-takeover Effects of Certain Provisions of Delaware Law and Charter Provisions
Section 203 of the General Corporation Law of the State of Delaware
We will be subject to the provisions of Section 203 of the Delaware General Corporation Law, or DGCL. In general, Section 203 of the DGCL prohibits a Delaware corporation from engaging in any business combination with any interested stockholder for a period of three years following the date that such stockholder became an interested stockholder unless:
 
 	•	 	prior to such date, the board of directors of the corporation approved either the business combination or the transaction that resulted in the stockholder becoming an interested stockholder;	
 
 	•	 	upon consummation of the transaction that resulted in such stockholder becoming an interested stockholder, the interested stockholder owned at least 85% of the voting stock of the corporation outstanding at the time the transaction commenced, excluding for purposes of determining the voting stock outstanding those shares owned by persons who are directors and also officers, and employee	
 
111

Table of Contents
 	stock plans in which employee participants do not have the right to determine confidentially whether shares held under the plan will be tendered in a tender or exchange offer; or	
 
 	•	 	at or subsequent to such time the business combination is approved by the board of directors and authorized at an annual or special meeting of stockholders, and not by written consent, by the affirmative vote of at least two-thirds of the outstanding voting stock that is not owned by the interested stockholder.	
Section 203 defines “business combination” to include:
 
 	•	 	any merger or consolidation involving the corporation and the interested stockholder;	
 
 	•	 	any sale, transfer, pledge or other disposition involving the interested stockholder of 10% or more of the assets of the corporation;	
 
 	•	 	subject to certain exceptions, any transaction that results in the issuance or transfer by the corporation of any stock of the corporation to the interested stockholder;	
 
 	•	 	any transaction involving the corporation that has the effect of increasing the proportionate share of the stock or any class or series of the corporation beneficially owned by the interested stockholder; or	
 
 	•	 	the receipt by the interested stockholder of the benefit of any loans, advances, guarantees, pledges or other financial benefits provided by or through the corporation.	
In general, Section 203 defines an interested stockholder as any entity or person beneficially owning 15% or more of the outstanding voting stock of the corporation and any entity or person affiliated with or controlling or controlled by the entity or person.
Certificate of Incorporation and Bylaw Provisions
Our certificate of incorporation and our bylaws include a number of provisions that may have the effect of deterring hostile takeovers or delaying or preventing changes in control of our management team, including the following:
 
 	•	 	Board of Director Vacancies. Our certificate of incorporation and bylaws authorize only our board of directors to fill vacant directorships. In addition, the number of directors constituting our board of directors may be set only by resolution adopted by a majority vote of our entire board of directors. These provisions prevent a stockholder from increasing the size of our board of directors and gaining control of our board of directors by filling the resulting vacancies with their own nominees.	
 
 	•	 	Classified Board. Our certificate of incorporation provides that our board of directors will consist of a single class with each director serving a one-year term until such time as all shares of our Class B common stock are converted to Class A common stock or otherwise cease to be outstanding. At that time, our board of directors will be divided into three classes in the manner provided by our certificate of incorporation. After the directors in each class serve for the initial terms as provided for in our certificate of incorporation, each class will serve for a staggered three-year term.	
 
 	•	 	Stockholder Action; Special Meeting of Stockholders. Our certificate of incorporation provides that our stockholders will not be permitted to cumulate their votes for the election of directors. Further, special meetings of our stockholders may be called only by a majority of our board of directors, the chairman of our board of directors or our President and Chief Executive Officer.	
 
 	•	 	Advance Notice Requirements for Stockholder Proposals and Director Nominations. Our bylaws provide advance notice procedures for stockholders seeking to bring business before our annual meeting of stockholders, or to nominate candidates for election as directors at our annual meeting of stockholders. Our bylaws also specify certain requirements as to the form and content of a stockholder’s notice. These provisions may preclude our stockholders from bringing matters before our	
 
112

Table of Contents
 	annual meeting of stockholders or from making nominations for directors at our annual meeting of stockholders.	
 
 	•	 	Issuance of Undesignated Preferred Stock. Our certificate of incorporation provides that our board of directors have the authority, without further action by the stockholders, to issue up to 10,000,000 shares of undesignated preferred stock with rights and preferences, including voting rights, designated from time to time by our board of directors. The existence of authorized but unissued shares of preferred stock enables our board of directors to render more difficult or to discourage an attempt to obtain control of us by means of a merger, tender offer, proxy contest or otherwise.	
 
 	•	 	Bylaw Amendments. Stockholders will be permitted to amend our bylaws only upon receiving at least 66 2/3% of the votes entitled to be cast by holders of all outstanding shares then entitled to vote generally in the election of directors, voting together as a single class. Our certificate of incorporation authorizes our board of directors to modify, alter or repeal our bylaws.	
These provisions are intended to enhance the likelihood of continued stability in the composition of our board of directors and discourage certain tactics that may be used in proxy fights. However, such provisions could have the effect of discouraging others from making tender offers for our shares and, as a consequence, they also may suppress fluctuations in the market price of our stock that could result from actual or rumored takeover attempts.
Limitation on Liability and Indemnification Matters
As permitted by the DGCL, our certificate of incorporation limits the personal liability of our directors. Consequently, directors will not be personally liable to us or our stockholders for monetary damages or breach of fiduciary duty as a director, except for liability due to:
 
 	•	 	any breach of the director’s duty of loyalty to us or our stockholders;	
 
 	•	 	any act or omission not in good faith or involving intentional misconduct or a knowing violation of law;	
 
 	•	 	any transaction from which the director derived an improper personal benefit; or	
 
 	•	 	any unlawful payments related to dividends or unlawful stock repurchases, redemptions or other distributions.	
In addition, our bylaws provide that:
 
 	•	 	our board of directors is authorized to indemnify our directors, officers, employees and agents, to the fullest extent permitted by the DGCL, subject to limited exceptions; and	
 
 	•	 	we will advance expenses, including attorneys’ fees, to our directors and, in the discretion of our board of directors, certain officers, employees and agents, in connection with legal proceedings, subject to limited exceptions.	
In addition, we intend to enter into agreements with each of our directors and executive officers to provide that, subject to limited exceptions and among other things, we will indemnify our directors and executive officers for certain expenses, including attorneys’ fees, judgments, fines and settlement amounts incurred by any such person in any action or proceeding, including any action by us arising out of such person’s services as our director or executive officer. We believe that these provisions and agreements are necessary to attract and retain qualified persons as directors and executive officers. Currently, there is no pending litigation or proceeding involving any of our directors or executive officers for which indemnification is sought, nor are we aware of any threatened litigation that may result in claims for indemnification. We also currently have directors’ and officers’ liability insurance.
 
113

Table of Contents
These provisions may discourage stockholders from bringing a lawsuit against our directors for breach of their fiduciary duty. These provisions may also have the effect of reducing the likelihood of derivative litigation against directors and officers, even though such an action, if successful, might otherwise benefit us and our stockholders. Furthermore, a stockholder’s investment may be adversely affected to the extent we pay the costs of settlement and damage awards against directors and officers pursuant to these indemnification provisions. We believe that these provisions and the indemnification agreements are necessary to attract and retain talented and experienced directors and officers.
National Market Listing
We applied to list our Class A common stock for quotation on the NYSE under the symbol “TLYS”.
Transfer Agent and Registrar
We have retained the services of Continental Stock Transfer & Trust Company to act as our transfer agent and registrar immediately following the completion of this offering.
 
114

Table of Contents
SHARES ELIGIBLE FOR FUTURE SALE
Prior to this offering, there has been no public market for our Class A common stock. Future sales of substantial amounts of our Class A common stock in the public market, or the perception that such sales may occur, could adversely affect the prevailing market price of our Class A common stock. No prediction can be made as to the effect, if any, future sales of shares, or the availability of shares for future sales, will have on the market price of our Class A common stock prevailing from time to time. The sale of substantial amounts of our Class A common stock in the public market, or the perception that such sales could occur, could harm the prevailing market price of our Class A common stock. Although we intend to apply to have our Class A common stock quoted on the NYSE, we cannot assure you that there will be an active market for our Class A common stock.
Sale of Restricted Shares
Upon completion of this offering, we will have outstanding an aggregate of          shares of common stock, including          shares of Class A common stock and          shares of Class B common stock, assuming no exercise of outstanding options. All of the shares being sold in this offering will be freely tradable without restriction under the Securities Act, except for any such shares which may be held or acquired by an “affiliate” of ours, as that term is defined in Rule 144 promulgated under the Securities Act, which shares will be subject to the volume limitations and other restrictions of Rule 144 described below. The remaining          shares of our common stock that are outstanding upon completion of this offering will be “restricted securities” as that phrase is defined in Rule 144, and may be resold only after registration under the Securities Act or pursuant to an exemption from such registration, including, among others, the exemptions provided by Rules 144 and 701 under the Securities Act, which rules are summarized below. These remaining shares of common stock upon completion of this offering will be available for sale in the public market after the expiration of the lock-up agreements described in “Underwriting”, taking into account the provisions of Rules 144 and 701 under the Securities Act.
Each share of Class B common stock will be convertible at any time, at the option of the holder, into one share of Class A common stock. Each share of Class B common stock shall convert automatically into one share of Class A common stock upon transfer, with limited exceptions.
Rule 144
Pursuant to Rule 144, persons who became the beneficial owner of shares of our common stock prior to the completion of this offering may not sell their shares until the earlier of (i) the expiration of a six-month holding period, if we have been subject to the reporting requirements of the Exchange Act and have filed all required reports for at least 90 days prior to the date of the sale, or (ii) a one-year holding period.
At the expiration of the six-month holding period, a person who was not one of our affiliates at any time during the three months preceding a sale would be entitled to sell an unlimited number of shares of our common stock provided current public information about us is available, and a person who was one of our affiliates at any time during the three months preceding a sale would be entitled to sell within any three-month period only a number of shares of common stock that does not exceed the greater of either of the following:
 
 	•	 	1% of the number of shares of our common stock then outstanding, which will equal approximately          shares immediately after this offering; or	
 
 	•	 	the average weekly trading volume of our Class A common stock on the NYSE during the four calendar weeks preceding the filing of a notice on Form 144 with respect to the sale.	
 
115

Table of Contents
At the expiration of the one-year holding period, a person who was not one of our affiliates at any time during the three months preceding a sale would be entitled to sell an unlimited number of shares of our common stock without restriction (whether or not current public information about us is available). A person who was one of our affiliates at any time during the three months preceding a sale would remain subject to the volume restrictions described above.
Sales under Rule 144 by our affiliates of shares acquired after this offering will also be subject to manner of sale provisions and notice requirements and to the availability of current public information about us.
Rule 701
In general, under Rule 701, any of our employees, directors, officers, consultants or advisors who purchased shares from us in connection with a compensatory stock or option plan or other written agreement before the effective date of this offering, or who purchased shares from us after that date upon the exercise of options granted before that date, are eligible to resell such shares in reliance upon Rule 144 beginning 90 days after the date of this prospectus. If such person is not an affiliate, the sale may be made subject only to the manner of sale restrictions of Rule 144. If such a person is an affiliate, the sale may be made under Rule 144 without compliance with its one-year minimum holding period, but subject to the other Rule 144 restrictions.
Stock Plans
We intend to file one or more registration statements on Form S-8 under the Securities Act to register shares of our Class A common stock issued or reserved for issuance under our 2012 Plan or 2007 Plan. The first such registration statement is expected to be filed shortly after the date of this prospectus and will automatically become effective upon filing with the SEC. Accordingly, shares registered under such registration statement will be available for sale in the open market following the effective date, unless such shares are subject to vesting restrictions with us, Rule 144 restrictions applicable to our affiliates or the lock-up restrictions described below.
Lock-Up Agreements
Each of our executive officers and directors and the Shaked and Levine family entities have agreed, subject to certain exceptions, with the underwriters not to dispose of or hedge any of the shares of common stock or securities convertible into or exchangeable for shares of common stock during the period from the date of this prospectus continuing through the date 180 days after the date of this prospectus, except, in our case, for the issuance of common stock upon exercise of options under existing option plans. Goldman, Sachs & Co. and Merrill Lynch, Pierce, Fenner & Smith Incorporated may, in their sole discretion, release any of these shares from these restrictions at any time without notice. See “Underwriting”.
 
116

Table of Contents
MATERIAL U.S. FEDERAL INCOME TAX CONSEQUENCES
TO NON-U.S. HOLDERS OF OUR CLASS A COMMON STOCK
The following is a summary of the material United States federal income tax consequences to non-U.S. holders (as defined below) of the acquisition, ownership and disposition of our Class A common stock. This discussion is not a complete analysis of all of the potential U.S. federal income tax consequences relating thereto, nor does it address any estate and gift tax consequences or any tax consequences arising under any state, local or non-U.S. tax laws, or any other U.S. federal tax laws. This discussion is based on the Internal Revenue Code of 1986, as amended, or the Code, Treasury Regulations promulgated thereunder, judicial decisions, and published rulings and administrative pronouncements of the Internal Revenue Service, or IRS, all as in effect as of the date of this offering. These authorities may change, possibly retroactively, resulting in U.S. federal income tax consequences different from those discussed below. No ruling has been or will be sought from the IRS with respect to the matters discussed below, and there can be no assurance the IRS will not take a contrary position regarding the tax consequences of the acquisition, ownership or disposition of our common stock, or that any such contrary position would not be sustained by a court.
This discussion is limited to non-U.S. holders who purchase our Class A common stock issued pursuant to this offering and who hold such common stock as a “capital asset” within the meaning of Section 1221 of the Code (generally, property held for investment). This discussion does not address all of the U.S. federal income tax consequences that may be relevant to a particular holder in light of such holder’s particular circumstances. This discussion also does not consider any specific facts or circumstances that may be relevant to holders subject to special rules under the U.S. federal income tax laws, including, without limitation:
 
 	•	 	financial institutions, banks and thrifts;	
 
 	•	 	insurance companies;	
 
 	•	 	tax-exempt organizations;	
 
 	•	 	partnerships or other pass-through entities;	
 
 	•	 	real estate investment trusts;	
 
 	•	 	traders in securities that elect to mark to market;	
 
 	•	 	broker-dealers or dealers in securities or currencies;	
 
 	•	 	U.S. expatriates;	
 
 	•	 	“controlled foreign corporations”, “passive foreign investment companies” or corporations that accumulate earnings to avoid U.S. federal income tax;	
 
 	•	 	persons that own, or are deemed to own, more than five percent (5%) of our outstanding common stock (except to the extent specifically set forth below);	
 
 	•	 	persons deemed to sell our common stock under the constructive sale provisions of the Code;	
 
 	•	 	persons who hold or receive our common stock pursuant to the exercise of any employee stock option or otherwise as compensation;	
 
 	•	 	persons subject to the alternative minimum tax; or	
 
 	•	 	persons that hold our common stock as a position in a hedging transaction, “straddle”, “conversion transaction” or other risk reduction transaction.	
THIS DISCUSSION IS FOR GENERAL INFORMATION ONLY AND IS NOT TAX ADVICE. PROSPECTIVE INVESTORS SHOULD CONSULT THEIR TAX ADVISORS REGARDING THE
PARTICULAR U.S. FEDERAL INCOME TAX CONSEQUENCES TO THEM OF ACQUIRING,
OWNING AND DISPOSING OF OUR COMMON STOCK, AS WELL AS ANY TAX CONSEQUENCES
 
117

Table of Contents
ARISING UNDER ANY STATE, LOCAL OR NON-U.S. TAX LAWS AND ANY OTHER U.S. FEDERAL TAX LAWS.
Definition of Non-U.S. Holder
For purposes of this discussion, a non-U.S. holder is any beneficial owner of our common stock that is not a “U.S. person” or a partnership for U.S. federal income tax purposes. A U.S. person is any of the following:
 
 	•	 	an individual citizen or resident of the United States;	
 
 	•	 	a corporation (or other entity treated as a corporation for U.S. federal income tax purposes) created or organized under the laws of the United States, any state thereof or the District of Columbia;	
 
 	•	 	an estate the income of which is subject to U.S. federal income tax regardless of its source; or	
 
 	•	 	a trust (1) whose administration is subject to the primary supervision of a U.S. court and which has one or more U.S. persons who have the authority to control all substantial decisions of the trust, or (2) that has a valid election in effect under applicable Treasury Regulations to be treated as a U.S. person.	
If a partnership holds the common stock, the U.S. federal income tax treatment of a partner will generally depend on the status of the partner and the tax treatment of the partnership. A partner in a partnership holding the common stock should consult its tax advisor with regard to the U.S. federal income tax treatment of an investment in the common stock.
Distributions on Our Common Stock
We do not anticipate paying dividends on our common stock after the completion of this offering. However, if we make cash or other property distributions on our common stock, such distributions generally will constitute dividends for U.S. federal income tax purposes to the extent paid from our current or accumulated earnings and profits, as determined under U.S. federal income tax principles. Amounts not treated as dividends for U.S. federal income tax purposes will constitute a return of capital and will first be applied against and reduce a non-U.S. holder’s tax basis in the common stock, but not below zero. Distributions in excess of our current and accumulated earnings and profits and in excess of a non-U.S. holder’s tax basis in its shares will be taxable as capital gain realized on the sale or other disposition of the common stock and will be treated as described under “Dispositions of Our Common Stock” below.
Dividends paid to a non-U.S. holder of our common stock generally will be subject to U.S. federal withholding tax at a rate of 30% of the gross amount of the dividends, or such lower rate specified by an applicable income tax treaty. To receive the benefit of a reduced treaty rate, a non-U.S. holder must furnish to us or our paying agent a valid IRS Form W-8BEN (or applicable successor form, or in the case of payments made outside the United States to an offshore account, other documentary evidence establishing your entitlement to the lower treaty rate in accordance with U.S. Treasury Regulations) certifying such holder’s qualification for the reduced rate. This certification must be provided to us or our paying agent prior to the payment of dividends and must be updated periodically. Non-U.S. holders that do not timely provide us or our paying agent with the required certification, but that qualify for a reduced treaty rate, may obtain a refund of any excess amounts withheld by timely filing an appropriate claim for refund with the IRS. Non-U.S. holders should consult their tax advisors regarding their entitlement to benefits under an applicable income tax treaty.
Dividends paid on our common stock that are effectively connected with a non-U.S. holder’s conduct of a trade or business in the United States (and, if required by an applicable income tax treaty, are attributable to a permanent establishment maintained by the non-U.S. holder in the United States) will be exempt from U.S. federal withholding tax. To claim the exemption, the non-U.S. holder must generally furnish to us or our paying agent a properly executed IRS Form W-8ECI (or applicable successor form).
 
118

Table of Contents
Any dividends paid on our common stock that are effectively connected with a non-U.S. holder’s U.S. trade or business (and if required by an applicable income tax treaty, attributable to a permanent establishment maintained by the non-U.S. holder in the U.S.) generally will be subject to U.S. federal income tax on a net income basis at the regular graduated U.S. federal income tax rates in much the same manner as if such holder were a resident of the United States. A non-U.S. holder that is a corporation also may be subject to an additional branch profits tax equal to 30% (or such lower rate specified by an applicable income tax treaty) of its effectively connected earnings and profits for the taxable year, as adjusted for certain items. Non-U.S. holders should consult any applicable income tax treaties that may provide for different rules.
Dispositions of Our Common Stock
Subject to the discussion below regarding backup withholding, a non-U.S. holder generally will not be subject to U.S. federal income tax on any gain realized upon the sale or other disposition of our common stock, unless:
 
 	•	 	the gain is effectively connected with the non-U.S. holder’s conduct of a trade or business in the United States, and if required by an applicable income tax treaty, attributable to a permanent establishment maintained by the non-U.S. holder in the U.S.;	
 
 	•	 	the non-U.S. holder is a nonresident alien individual present in the U.S. for 183 days or more during the taxable year of the disposition, and certain other requirements are met; or	
 
 	•	 	our common stock constitutes a “U.S. real property interest” by reason of our status as a U.S. real property holding corporation, or USRPHC, for U.S. federal income tax purposes at any time within the shorter of the five-year period preceding the disposition or the non-U.S. holder’s holding period for our common stock.	
Gain described in the first bullet point above will be subject to U.S. federal income tax on a net income basis at the regular graduated U.S. federal income tax rates in much the same manner as if such holder were a resident of the U.S. A non-U.S. holder that is a corporation also may be subject to an additional branch profits tax equal to 30% (or such lower rate specified by an applicable income tax treaty) of its effectively connected earnings and profits for the taxable year, as adjusted for certain items. Non-U.S. holders should consult any applicable income tax treaties that may provide for different rules.
Gain described in the second bullet point above will be subject to U.S. federal income tax at a flat 30% rate (or such lower rate specified by an applicable income tax treaty), but may be offset by U.S. source capital losses (even though the individual is not considered a resident of the U.S.), provided that the non-U.S. holder has timely filed U.S. federal income tax returns with respect to such losses.
With respect to the third bullet point above, we believe we are not currently and do not anticipate becoming a USRPHC for United States federal income tax purposes. However, because the determination of whether we are a USRPHC depends on the fair market value of our United States real property interests relative to the fair market value of our other trade or business assets and our non-United States real property interests, there can be no assurance that we are not a USRPHC or will not become one in the future. Even if we are or were to become a USRPHC, gain arising from the sale or other taxable disposition by a non-U.S. holder of our common stock will not be subject to tax if such class of stock is “regularly traded,” as defined by applicable Treasury Regulations, on an established securities market, and such non-U.S. holder owned, actually or constructively, 5% or less of such class of our stock throughout the shorter of the five-year period ending on the date of the sale or exchange or the non-U.S. holder’s holding period for such stock. We expect our common stock to be “regularly traded” on an established securities market, although we cannot guarantee it will be so traded. If gain on the sale or other taxable disposition of our stock were subject to taxation under the third bullet point above, the non-U.S. holder would be subject to regular United States federal income tax with respect to such gain in generally the same manner as a United States person.
 
119

Table of Contents
Information Reporting and Backup Withholding
We must report annually to the IRS and to each non-U.S. holder the amount of distributions on our common stock paid to such holder and the amount, if any, of tax withheld with respect to those distributions. These information reporting requirements will apply in certain circumstances even if no withholding is required, such as where the distributions are effectively connected with the holder’s conduct of a U.S. trade or business or withholding is reduced or eliminated by an applicable income tax treaty. This information also may be made available under a specific treaty or agreement with the tax authorities in the country in which the non-U.S. holder resides or is established. Backup withholding, however, generally will not apply to distributions to a non-U.S. holder of our common stock provided the non-U.S. holder furnishes to us or our paying agent the required certification as to its non-U.S. status, such as by providing a valid IRS Form W-8BEN or IRS Form W-8ECI, or certain other requirements are met. Notwithstanding the foregoing, backup withholding may apply if either we or our paying agent has actual knowledge, or reason to know, that the holder is a U.S. person that is not an exempt recipient.
Unless a non-U.S. holder complies with certification procedures to establish that it is not a U.S. person, information returns may be filed with the IRS in connection with, and the non-U.S. holder may be subject to backup withholding on the proceeds from, a sale or other disposition of our common stock. The certification procedures described in the above paragraph will satisfy these certification requirements as well.
Backup withholding is not an additional tax. Any amounts withheld under the backup withholding rules may be allowed as a refund or a credit against a non-U.S. holder’s U.S. federal income tax liability, provided the required information is timely furnished to the IRS.
Foreign Accounts
Withholding taxes may apply to certain types of payments made to “foreign financial institutions” (as specially defined in the Code) and certain other non-U.S. entities. Specifically, a 30% withholding tax may be imposed on dividends on, and gross proceeds from the sale or other disposition of, our common stock paid to a foreign financial institution or to a non-financial foreign entity, unless (1) the foreign financial institution undertakes certain diligence and reporting and enters into an agreement with the IRS requiring, among other things, that it undertake to identify accounts held by certain United States persons or United States owned foreign entities, annually report certain information about such accounts, and withhold 30% on payments to non-compliant foreign financial institutions and certain other account holders, (2) the non-financial foreign entity either certifies it does not have any substantial United States owners or furnishes identifying information regarding each substantial United States owner, or (3) the foreign financial institution or non-financial foreign entity otherwise qualifies for an exemption from these rules.
Although these rules currently apply to applicable payments made after December 31, 2012, the IRS has issued Proposed Treasury Regulations providing that the withholding provisions described above will generally apply to payments of dividends made on or after January 1, 2014 and to payments of gross proceeds from a sale or other disposition of common stock on or after January 1, 2015.
The Proposed Treasury Regulations described above will not be effective until they are issued in their final form, and as of the date of this prospectus, it is not possible to determine whether the proposed regulations will be finalized in their current form or at all. Prospective investors should consult their tax advisors regarding these withholding provisions.
 
120

Table of Contents
UNDERWRITING
Tilly’s and the underwriters named below have entered into an underwriting agreement with respect to the shares of Class A common stock being offered. Subject to certain conditions, each underwriter has severally agreed to purchase the number of shares of Class A common stock indicated in the following table. Goldman, Sachs & Co. and Merrill Lynch, Pierce, Fenner & Smith Incorporated are the representatives of the underwriters.

Underwriters	 	Number of
Shares	
Goldman, Sachs & Co.	 	 	
Merrill Lynch, Pierce, Fenner & Smith,
                         Incorporated	 	 	
Piper Jaffray	 	 	
William Blair & Company, L.L.C.	 	 	
Stifel Nicolaus & Company, Incorporated	 	 	
 	 	 	
                    Total	 	 	
 	 	 	
The underwriters and their respective affiliates are full service financial institutions engaged in various activities, which may include securities trading, commercial and investment banking, financial advisory, investment management, investment research, principal investment, hedging, financial and brokerage activities. Certain of the underwriters and their respective affiliates have, from time to time, performed, and may in the future perform, various other financial advisory and investment banking services for us, for which they received or will receive customary fees and expenses.
In the ordinary course of their various business activities, the underwriters and their respective affiliates may make or hold a broad array of investments and actively trade debt and equity securities (or related derivative securities) and financial instruments (including bank loans) for their own account and for the accounts of their customers, and such investment and securities activities may involve securities and/or instruments of Tilly’s. The underwriters and their respective affiliates may also make investment recommendations and/or publish or express independent research views in respect of such securities or instruments and may at any time hold, or recommend to clients that they acquire, long and/or short positions in such securities and instruments.
                    , a FINRA member, has acted as our financial advisor in connection with our preparation for this offering.                      services have included, among other things, (i) analyzing our business, condition and financial position, (ii) advising us on the structure of the offering, (iii) preparing and implementing a plan for identifying and selecting appropriate participants in the underwriting syndicate, (iv) advising us on the preparation of financial and other information for potential underwriters, (v) evaluating proposals that were received from potential underwriters and (vi) determining various offering logistics.                      is not acting as an underwriter and will not sell or offer to sell any securities and will not identify, solicit or engage directly with potential investors. In addition,                      will not underwrite or purchase any of the offered securities or otherwise participate in any such undertaking. We have agreed to pay                      a fee of $         for their services, or $         if the underwriters fully exercise their option to purchase additional shares (based on the mid-point of the price range set forth on the cover page of this prospectus).
The underwriters are committed to take and pay for all of the shares being offered, if any are taken, other than the shares covered by the option described below unless and until this option is exercised.
If the underwriters sell more shares of Class A common stock than the total number set forth in the table above, the underwriters have an option to buy up to an additional          shares of Class A common stock from Tilly’s to cover such sales. They may exercise that option for 30 days. If any shares of Class A common stock are purchased pursuant to this option, the underwriters will severally purchase shares of Class A common stock in approximately the same proportion as set forth in the table above.
 
121

Table of Contents
The following table shows the per share and total underwriting discounts to be paid to the underwriters by Tilly’s. Such amounts are shown assuming both no exercise and full exercise of the underwriters’ option to purchase             additional shares of Class A common stock.

 	 	No Exercise	 	  	Full Exercise	 	
Per share	 	$	            	  	  	$	            	  	
Total by us	 	 	 	 	  	 	 	 	
Shares of Class A common stock sold by the underwriters to the public will initially be offered at the initial public offering price set forth on the cover of this prospectus. Any shares of Class A common stock sold by the underwriters to securities dealers may be sold at a discount of up to $         per share from the initial public offering price. If all the shares of Class A common stock are not sold at the initial public offering price, the representatives may change the offering price and the other selling terms. The offering of the shares of Class A common stock by the underwriters is subject to receipt and acceptance and subject to the underwriters’ right to reject any order in whole or in part.
Tilly’s and its officers, directors and holders of substantially all of its common stock have agreed with the underwriters, subject to certain exceptions, not to dispose of or hedge any of their common stock or securities convertible into or exchangeable for shares of common stock during the period from the date of this prospectus continuing through the date 180 days after the date of this prospectus, except with the prior written consent of Goldman, Sachs & Co. and Merrill Lynch, Pierce, Fenner & Smith Incorporated. This agreement does not apply to any existing employee benefit plans and the issuance of common stock in connection with the Reorganization Transaction. See “Shares Eligible for Future Sale” for a discussion of certain transfer restrictions.
The 180-day restricted period described in the preceding paragraph will be automatically extended if: (1) during the last 17 days of the 180-day restricted period Tilly’s issues an earnings release or announces material news or a material event; or (2) prior to the expiration of the 180-day restricted period, Tilly’s announces that it will release earnings results during the 15-day period following the last day of the 180-day period, in which case the restrictions described in the preceding paragraph will continue to apply until the expiration of the 18-day period beginning on the issuance of the earnings release of the announcement of the material news or material event.
Prior to the offering, there has been no public market for the Class A common stock. The initial public offering price for the Class A common stock has been negotiated among Tilly’s and the representatives. Among the factors considered in determining the initial public offering price of the shares, in addition to prevailing market conditions, were Tilly’s historical performance, estimates of the business potential and earnings prospects of Tilly’s, an assessment of Tilly’s management and the consideration of the above factors in relation to market valuation of companies in related businesses.
We applied to list our Class A common stock for quotation on the NYSE under the symbol “TLYS”. In order to meet one of the requirements for listing the Class A common stock on the NYSE, the underwriters have undertaken to sell lots of 100 or more shares to a minimum of 400 beneficial holders.
In connection with the offering, the underwriters may purchase and sell shares of Class A common stock in the open market. These transactions may include short sales, stabilizing transactions and purchases to cover positions created by short sales. Shorts sales involve the sale by the underwriters of a greater number of shares than they are required to purchase in the offering. “Covered” short sales are sales made in an amount not greater than the underwriters’ option to purchase additional shares from Tilly’s in the offering. The underwriters may close out any covered short position by either exercising their option to purchase additional shares or purchasing shares in the open market. In determining the source of shares to close out the covered short position, the underwriters will consider, among other things, the price of shares available for purchase in the open market as compared to the price at which they may purchase additional shares pursuant to the option granted to them.
 
122

Table of Contents
“Naked” short sales are any sales in excess of such option. The underwriters must close out any naked short position by purchasing shares in the open market. A naked short position is more likely to be created if the underwriters are concerned that there may be downward pressure on the price of the common stock in the open market after pricing that could adversely affect investors who purchase in the offering. Stabilizing transactions consist of various bids for or purchases of common stock made by the underwriters in the open market prior to the completion of the offering.
The underwriters may also impose a penalty bid. This occurs when a particular underwriter repays to the underwriters a portion of the underwriting discount received by it because the representatives have repurchased shares sold by or for the account of such underwriter in stabilizing or short covering transactions.
Purchases to cover a short position and stabilizing transactions, as well as other purchases by the underwriters for their own accounts, may have the effect of preventing or retarding a decline in the market price of the common stock, and together with the imposition of the penalty bid, may stabilize, maintain or otherwise affect the market price of the common stock. As a result, the price of the Class A common stock may be higher than the price that otherwise might exist in the open market. If these activities are commenced, they may be discontinued at any time. These transactions may be effected on the NYSE, in the over-the-counter market or otherwise.
Notice to Prospective Investors in the European Economic Area
In relation to each Member State of the European Economic Area which has implemented the Prospectus Directive (each, a Relevant Member State), each underwriter has represented and agreed that with effect from and including the date on which the Prospectus Directive is implemented in that Relevant Member State, or the Relevant Implementation Date, it has not made and will not make an offer of shares to the public in that Relevant Member State prior to the publication of a prospectus in relation to the shares which has been approved by the competent authority in that Relevant Member State or, where appropriate, approved in another Relevant Member State and notified to the competent authority in that Relevant Member State, all in accordance with the Prospectus Directive, except that it may, with effect from and including the Relevant Implementation Date, make an offer of shares to the public in that Relevant Member State at any time:
 
 	(a)	to legal entities which are authorized or regulated to operate in the financial markets or, if not so authorized or regulated, whose corporate purpose is solely to invest in securities;	
 
 	(b)	to any legal entity which has two or more of (1) an average of at least 250 employees during the last financial year; (2) a total balance sheet of more than €43,000,000 and (3) an annual net turnover of more than €50,000,000, as shown in its last annual or consolidated accounts;	
 
 	(c)	to fewer than 100 natural or legal persons (other than qualified investors as defined in the Prospectus Directive) subject to obtaining the prior consent of the representatives for any such offer; or	
 
 	(d)	in any other circumstances which do not require the publication by the Issuer of a prospectus pursuant to Article 3 of the Prospectus Directive.	
For the purposes of this provision, the expression an “offer of shares to the public” in relation to any shares in any Relevant Member State means the communication in any form and by any means of sufficient information on the terms of the offer and the shares to be offered so as to enable an investor to decide to purchase or subscribe the shares, as the same may be varied in that Relevant Member State by any measure implementing the Prospectus Directive in that Relevant Member State and the expression Prospectus Directive means Directive 2003/71/EC and includes any relevant implementing measure in each Relevant Member State.
 
123

Table of Contents
Each underwriter has represented and agreed that:
 
 	(a)	it has only communicated or caused to be communicated and will only communicate or cause to be communicated an invitation or inducement to engage in investment activity (within the meaning of Section 21 of the Financial Services and Markets Act 2000, or the FSMA) received by it in connection with the issue or sale of the shares in circumstances in which Section 21(1) of the FSMA would not, if the Issuer was not an authorized person, apply to the Issuer; and	
 
 	(b)	it has complied and will comply with all applicable provisions of the FSMA with respect to anything done by it in relation to the shares in, from or otherwise involving the United Kingdom.	
The shares may not be offered or sold by means of any document other than (i) in circumstances which do not constitute an offer to the public within the meaning of the Companies Ordinance (Cap.32, Laws of Hong Kong), or (ii) to “professional investors” within the meaning of the Securities and Futures Ordinance (Cap.571, Laws of Hong Kong) and any rules made thereunder, or (iii) in other circumstances which do not result in the document being a “prospectus” within the meaning of the Companies Ordinance (Cap.32, Laws of Hong Kong), and no advertisement, invitation or document relating to the shares may be issued or may be in the possession of any person for the purpose of issue (in each case whether in Hong Kong or elsewhere), which is directed at, or the contents of which are likely to be accessed or read by, the public in Hong Kong (except if permitted to do so under the laws of Hong Kong) other than with respect to shares which are or are intended to be disposed of only to persons outside Hong Kong or only to “professional investors” within the meaning of the Securities and Futures Ordinance (Cap. 571, Laws of Hong Kong) and any rules made thereunder.
Notice to Prospective Investors in Singapore
This prospectus has not been registered as a prospectus with the Monetary Authority of Singapore. Accordingly, this prospectus and any other document or material in connection with the offer or sale, or invitation for subscription or purchase, of the shares may not be circulated or distributed, nor may the shares be offered or sold, or be made the subject of an invitation for subscription or purchase, whether directly or indirectly, to persons in Singapore other than (i) to an institutional investor under Section 274 of the Securities and Futures Act, Chapter 289 of Singapore, or the SFA, (ii) to a relevant person, or any person pursuant to Section 275(1A), and in accordance with the conditions, specified in Section 275 of the SFA or (iii) otherwise pursuant to, and in accordance with the conditions of, any other applicable provision of the SFA.
Where the shares are subscribed or purchased under Section 275 by a relevant person which is: (a) a corporation (which is not an accredited investor) the sole business of which is to hold investments and the entire share capital of which is owned by one or more individuals, each of whom is an accredited investor; or (b) a trust (where the trustee is not an accredited investor) whose sole purpose is to hold investments and each beneficiary is an accredited investor, shares, debentures and units of shares and debentures of that corporation or the beneficiaries’ rights and interest in that trust shall not be transferable for 6 months after that corporation or that trust has acquired the shares under Section 275 except: (1) to an institutional investor under Section 274 of the SFA or to a relevant person, or any person pursuant to Section 275(1A), and in accordance with the conditions, specified in Section 275 of the SFA; (2) where no consideration is given for the transfer; or (3) by operation of law.
Notice to Prospective Investors in Japan
The securities have not been and will not be registered under the Financial Instruments and Exchange Law of Japan, or the Financial Instruments and Exchange Law, and each underwriter has agreed that it will not offer or sell any securities, directly or indirectly, in Japan or to, or for the benefit of, any resident of Japan (which term as used herein means any person resident in Japan, including any corporation or other entity organized under the laws of Japan), or to others for re-offering or resale, directly or indirectly, in Japan or to a resident of Japan, except pursuant
 
124

Table of Contents
to an exemption from the registration requirements of, and otherwise in compliance with, the Financial Instruments and Exchange Law and any other applicable laws, regulations and ministerial guidelines of Japan.
Notice to Prospective Investors in Switzerland
The shares may not be publicly offered in Switzerland and will not be listed on the SIX Swiss Exchange, or SIX, or on any other stock exchange or regulated trading facility in Switzerland. This document has been prepared without regard to the disclosure standards for issuance prospectuses under art. 652a or art. 1156 of the Swiss Code of Obligations or the disclosure standards for listing prospectuses under art. 27 ff. of the SIX Listing Rules or the listing rules of any other stock exchange or regulated trading facility in Switzerland. Neither this document nor any other offering or marketing material relating to the shares or the offering may be publicly distributed or otherwise made publicly available in Switzerland.
Neither this document nor any other offering or marketing material relating to the offering, the Issuer, the shares have been or will be filed with or approved by any Swiss regulatory authority. In particular, this document will not be filed with, and the offer of shares will not be supervised by, the Swiss Financial Market Supervisory Authority, or FINMA, and the offer of shares has not been and will not be authorized under the Swiss Federal Act on Collective Investment Schemes, or CISA. The investor protection afforded to acquirers of interests in collective investment schemes under the CISA does not extend to acquirers of shares.
Notice to Prospective Investors in the Dubai International Financial Centre
This offering memorandum relates to an Exempt Offer in accordance with the Offered Securities Rules of the Dubai Financial Services Authority, or DFSA. This offering memorandum is intended for distribution only to persons of a type specified in the Offered Securities Rules of the DFSA. It must not be delivered to, or relied on by, any other person. The DFSA has no responsibility for reviewing or verifying any documents in connection with Exempt Offers. The DFSA has not approved this offering memorandum nor taken steps to verify the information set forth herein and has no responsibility for the offering memorandum. The securities to which this offering memorandum relates may be illiquid and/or subject to restrictions on their resale. Prospective purchasers of the securities offered should conduct their own due diligence on the securities. If you do not understand the contents of this offering memorandum you should consult an authorized financial advisor.
The underwriters do not expect sales to discretionary accounts to exceed five percent of the total number of shares offered.
We estimate that our share of the total expenses of the offering, excluding the underwriting discount, will be approximately $         million. The underwriters have agreed to reimburse us for a portion of our out-of-pocket expenses in connection with this offering in an amount equal to $         or $         if the underwriters fully exercise their option to purchase additional shares (based on the mid-point of the price range set forth on the cover page of this prospectus).
We have agreed to indemnify the several underwriters against certain liabilities, including liabilities under the Securities Act.
 
125

Table of Contents
LEGAL MATTERS
The validity of the shares of Class A common stock offered hereby will be passed upon for us by Latham & Watkins LLP, Costa Mesa, California. The validity of shares of Class A common stock offered hereby will be passed upon for the underwriters by Sullivan & Cromwell LLP, Los Angeles, California.
EXPERTS
The financial statements of World of Jeans & Tops dba Tilly’s as of January 29, 2011 and January 28, 2012, and for each of the three fiscal years in the period ended January 28, 2012 included in this prospectus have been audited by Deloitte & Touche LLP, an independent registered public accounting firm, as stated in their report appearing herein. Such financial statements are included in reliance upon the report of such firm given upon their authority as experts in accounting and auditing.
The financial statement of Tilly’s, Inc. as of January 28, 2012, included in this prospectus has been audited by Deloitte & Touche LLP, an independent registered public accounting firm, as stated in their report appearing herein. Such financial statement is included in reliance upon the report of such firm given upon their authority as experts in accounting and auditing.
WHERE YOU CAN FIND ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
We have filed with the SEC a registration statement on Form S-1 under the Securities Act relating to the Class A common stock offered by this prospectus. This prospectus, which constitutes part of that registration statement, does not contain all of the information set forth in the registration statement and the exhibits and schedules to the registration statement. Statements contained in this prospectus as to the contents of any contract or other document referred to are not necessarily complete and in each instance we refer you to the copy of the contract or other document filed as an exhibit to the registration statement, each such statement being qualified in all respects by such reference. For further information with respect to our company and the Class A common stock offered by this prospectus, we refer you to the registration statement, exhibits and schedules.
Anyone may inspect a copy of the registration statement without charge at the public reference facility maintained by the SEC at 100 F Street, N.E., Washington, D.C. 20549. Copies of all or any part of the registration statement may be obtained from that facility upon payment of the prescribed fees. The public may obtain information on the operation of the public reference room by calling the SEC at 1-800-SEC-0330. The SEC maintains a website at www.sec.gov that contains reports, proxy and information statements and other information regarding registrants that file electronically with the SEC.
Upon the completion of this offering, we will be subject to the information and periodic reporting requirements of the Exchange Act applicable to a company with securities registered pursuant to Section 12 of the Exchange Act. In accordance therewith, we will file proxy statements and other information with the SEC. All documents filed with the SEC are available for inspection and copying at the public reference facilities and website of the SEC referred to above. We maintain a website at www.tillys.com. Upon the completion of this offering, you may access our reports, proxy statements and other information free of charge at this website as soon as reasonably practicable after such material is electronically filed with, or furnished to, the SEC. The information on our website does not constitute part of, and is not incorporated by reference into, this prospectus.
 
126

Table of Contents
INDEX TO FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

World of Jeans & Tops dba Tilly’s	 	 	 	 	
Report of Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm	 	 	F-2	  	
Balance Sheets as of January 29, 2011 and January 28, 2012	 	 	F-3	  	
Statements of Operations for the Fiscal Years ended January 30, 2010, January 29, 2011, and January 28, 2012	 	 	F-4	  	
Statements of Shareholders’ Equity for the Fiscal Years ended January 30, 2010, January 29, 2011 and January 28, 2012	 	 	F-5	  	
Statements of Cash Flows for the Fiscal Years ended January 30, 2010, January 29, 2011, and January 28, 2012	 	 	F-6	  	
Notes to Financial Statements as of January 29, 2011 and January 28, 2012 and the Fiscal Years Ended January 30, 2010, January 29, 2011 and January 28, 2012	 	 	F-7	  	
 	 	
Tilly’s, Inc.	 	 	 	 	
Report of Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm	 	 	F-22	  	
Statement of Financial Position as of January 28, 2012	 	 	F-23	  	
Notes to Financial Statement as of January 28, 2012	 	 	F-24	  	
Tilly’s, Inc.’s only asset is its investment in World of Jeans & Tops dba Tilly’s. For additional information regarding the reorganization of World of Jeans & Tops, refer to the “Reorganization” sections on pages F-8 and F-23.
 
F-1

Table of Contents
Report of Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm
To the Board of Directors and Shareholders of
World of Jeans & Tops dba Tilly’s
Irvine, California
We have audited the accompanying balance sheets of World of Jeans & Tops dba Tilly’s (the “Company”) as of January 29, 2011 and January 28, 2012, and the related statements of operations, shareholders’ equity, and cash flows for each of the three years in the period ended January 28, 2012. These financial statements are the responsibility of the Company’s management. Our responsibility is to express an opinion on these financial statements based on our audits.
We conducted our audits in accordance with the standards of the Public Company Accounting Oversight Board (United States). Those standards require that we plan and perform the audit to obtain reasonable assurance about whether the financial statements are free of material misstatement. The Company is not required to have, nor were we engaged to perform, an audit of its internal control over financial reporting. Our audits included consideration of internal control over financial reporting as a basis for designing audit procedures that are appropriate in the circumstances, but not for the purpose of expressing an opinion on the effectiveness of the Company’s internal control over financial reporting. Accordingly, we express no such opinion. An audit also includes examining, on a test basis, evidence supporting the amounts and disclosures in the financial statements, assessing the accounting principles used and significant estimates made by management, as well as evaluating the overall financial statement presentation. We believe that our audits provide a reasonable basis for our opinion.
In our opinion, such financial statements present fairly, in all material respects, the financial position of World of Jeans & Tops dba Tilly’s as of January 29, 2011 and January 28, 2012, and the results of its operations and its cash flows for each of the three years in the period ended January 28, 2012, in conformity with accounting principles generally accepted in the United States of America.

/s/ Deloitte & Touche LLP	
 	
Costa Mesa, CA	
March 23, 2012	
 
F-2

Table of Contents
WORLD OF JEANS & TOPS dba TILLY’S
BALANCE SHEETS
(In thousands, except per share data)

 	  	January 29,
2011	 	  	January 28,
2012	 	  	Pro Forma
January 28,
2012	
 	  	 	 	 	  	 	 	 	  	(unaudited)	
ASSETS	  	 	 	 	  	 	 	 	  	 	
Current assets:	  	 	 	 	  	 	 	 	  	 	
Cash and cash equivalents	  	$	29,338	  	  	$	25,091	  	  	 	
Receivables	  	 	4,301	  	  	 	6,605	  	  	 	
Merchandise inventories	  	 	33,503	  	  	 	36,531	  	  	 	
Prepaid expenses and other current assets	  	 	4,257	  	  	 	5,616	  	  	 	
 	  	 	 	 	  	 	 	 	  	 	
Total current assets	  	 	71,399	  	  	 	73,843	  	  	 	
Property and equipment, net	  	 	58,185	  	  	 	64,077	  	  	 	
Other assets	  	 	1,390	  	  	 	2,899	  	  	 	
 	  	 	 	 	  	 	 	 	  	 	
Total assets	  	$	130,974	  	  	$	140,819	  	  	 	
 	  	 	 	 	  	 	 	 	  	 	
LIABILITIES AND SHAREHOLDERS’ EQUITY	  	 	 	 	  	 	 	 	  	 	
 	 	 	 	
Current liabilities:	  	 	 	 	  	 	 	 	  	 	
Accounts payable	  	$	14,717	  	  	$	16,830	  	  	 	
Deferred revenue	  	 	4,125	  	  	 	4,865	  	  	 	
Accrued compensation and benefits	  	 	4,174	  	  	 	7,536	  	  	 	
Accrued expenses	  	 	11,168	  	  	 	12,935	  	  	 	
Current portion of deferred rent	  	 	2,680	  	  	 	3,335	  	  	 	
Current portion of capital lease obligation/Related party	  	 	628	  	  	 	669	  	  	 	
 	  	 	 	 	  	 	 	 	  	 	
Total current liabilities	  	 	37,492	  	  	 	46,170	  	  	 	
Long-term portion of deferred rent	  	 	26,752	  	  	 	30,256	  	  	 	
Long-term portion of capital lease obligation/Related party	  	 	4,638	  	  	 	3,969	  	  	 	
 	  	 	 	 	  	 	 	 	  	 	
Total long-term liabilities	  	 	31,390	  	  	 	34,225	  	  	 	
 	  	 	 	 	  	 	 	 	  	 	
Total liabilities	  	 	68,882	  	  	 	80,395	  	  	 	
Commitments and contingencies (Notes 12 and 13)	  	 	 	 	  	 	 	 	  	 	
 	 	 	 	
Shareholders’ equity:	  	 	 	 	  	 	 	 	  	 	
Common stock, $0.001 par value; 21,600,000 shares authorized, 20,000,000 shares issued and outstanding	  	 	20	  	  	 	20	  	  	 	
Additional paid-in capital	  	 	150	  	  	 	150	  	  	 	
Retained earnings	  	 	61,922	  	  	 	60,254	  	  	 	
 	  	 	 	 	  	 	 	 	  	 	
Total shareholders’ equity	  	 	62,092	  	  	 	60,424	  	  	 	
 	  	 	 	 	  	 	 	 	  	 	
Total liabilities and shareholders’ equity	  	$	130,974	  	  	$	140,819	  	  	 	

The accompanying notes are an integral part of these financial statements.
 
F-3

Table of Contents
WORLD OF JEANS & TOPS dba TILLY’S
STATEMENTS OF OPERATIONS
(In thousands, except per share data)

 	  	For the Years Ended	 	
 	  	January 30,
2010	 	  	January 29,
2011	 	  	January 28,
2012	 	
Net sales	  	$	282,764	  	  	$	332,604	  	  	$	400,624	  	
Cost of goods sold (includes buying, distribution, and occupancy costs)	  	 	195,430	  	  	 	229,989	  	  	 	271,482	  	
 	  	 	 	 	  	 	 	 	  	 	 	 	
Gross profit	  	 	87,334	  	  	 	102,615	  	  	 	129,142	  	
Selling, general and administrative expenses	  	 	65,912	  	  	 	77,668	  	  	 	94,217	  	
 	  	 	 	 	  	 	 	 	  	 	 	 	
Operating income	  	 	21,422	  	  	 	24,947	  	  	 	34,925	  	
Interest expense, net	  	 	284	  	  	 	249	  	  	 	196	  	
 	  	 	 	 	  	 	 	 	  	 	 	 	
Income before provision for income taxes	  	 	21,138	  	  	 	24,698	  	  	 	34,729	  	
Provision for income taxes	  	 	275	  	  	 	282	  	  	 	389	  	
 	  	 	 	 	  	 	 	 	  	 	 	 	
Net income	  	$	20,863	  	  	$	24,416	  	  	$	34,340	  	
 	  	 	 	 	  	 	 	 	  	 	 	 	
Basic income per common share	  	$	1.04	  	  	$	1.22	  	  	$	1.72	  	
Diluted income per common share	  	$	1.04	  	  	$	1.21	  	  	$	1.68	  	
Weighted average basic common shares outstanding	  	 	20,000	  	  	 	20,000	  	  	 	20,000	  	
Weighted average diluted common shares outstanding	  	 	20,014	  	  	 	20,098	  	  	 	20,500	  	
Pro forma income information (Note 1):	  	 	 	 	  	 	 	 	  	 	 	 	
Historical income before provision for income taxes	  	$	21,138	  	  	$	24,698	  	  	$	34,729	  	
Pro forma provision for income taxes (unaudited)	  	 	8,455	  	  	 	9,879	  	  	 	13,892	  	
 	  	 	 	 	  	 	 	 	  	 	 	 	
Pro forma net income (unaudited)	  	$	12,683	  	  	$	14,819	  	  	$	20,837	  	
 	  	 	 	 	  	 	 	 	  	 	 	 	
Pro forma basic income per common share (unaudited)	  	$	0.63	  	  	$	0.74	  	  	$	1.04	  	
Pro forma diluted income per common share (unaudited)	  	$	0.63	  	  	$	0.74	  	  	$	1.02	  	
 
The accompanying notes are an integral part of these financial statements.
 
F-4

Table of Contents
WORLD OF JEANS & TOPS dba TILLY’S
STATEMENTS OF SHAREHOLDERS’ EQUITY
(In thousands)

 	  	 	 	  	 	 	  	 	 	  	 	 	 	 	 	
 	  	Common stock	 	  	Additional
Paid-in	 	  	Retained	 	 	 	 	
 	  	Shares	 	  	Amount	 	  	Capital	 	  	Earnings	 	 	Total	 	
Balance January 31, 2009	  	 	20,000	  	  	$	20	  	  	$	150	  	  	$	54,883	  	 	$	55,053	  	
Net income	  	 	—	  	  	 	—	  	  	 	—	  	  	 	20,863	  	 	 	20,863	  	
Distributions	  	 	—	  	  	 	—	  	  	 	—	  	  	 	(16,020	) 	 	 	(16,020	) 	
 	  	 	 	 	  	 	 	 	  	 	 	 	  	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	
Balance January 30, 2010	  	 	20,000	  	  	 	20	  	  	 	150	  	  	 	59,726	  	 	 	59,896	  	
Net income	  	 	—	  	  	 	—	  	  	 	—	  	  	 	24,416	  	 	 	24,416	  	
Distributions	  	 	—	  	  	 	—	  	  	 	—	  	  	 	(22,220	) 	 	 	(22,220	) 	
 	  	 	 	 	  	 	 	 	  	 	 	 	  	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	
Balance January 29, 2011	  	 	20,000	  	  	 	20	  	  	 	150	  	  	 	61,922	  	 	 	62,092	  	
Net income	  	 	—	  	  	 	—	  	  	 	—	  	  	 	34,340	  	 	 	34,340	  	
Distributions	  	 	—	  	  	 	—	  	  	 	—	  	  	 	(36,008	) 	 	 	(36,008	) 	
 	  	 	 	 	  	 	 	 	  	 	 	 	  	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	
Balance January 28, 2012	  	 	20,000	  	  	$	20	  	  	$	150	  	  	$	60,254	  	 	$	60,424	  	

The accompanying notes are an integral part of these financial statements.
 
F-5

Table of Contents
WORLD OF JEANS & TOPS dba TILLY’S
STATEMENTS OF CASH FLOWS
(In thousands)

 	  	For the Years Ended	 	
 	  	January 30,	 	 	January 29,	 	 	January 28,	 	
 	  	2010	 	 	2011	 	 	2012	 	
Cash flows from operating activities	  	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	
Net income	  	$	20,863	  	 	$	24,416	  	 	$	34,340	  	
Adjustments to reconcile net income to net cash provided by operating activities:	  	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	
Depreciation and amortization	  	 	13,915	  	 	 	14,292	  	 	 	15,129	  	
Loss on disposal of equipment	  	 	784	  	 	 	224	  	 	 	232	  	
Impairment of assets	  	 	—	  	 	 	1,985	  	 	 	554	  	
Changes in operating assets and liabilities:	  	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	
Receivables	  	 	662	  	 	 	(2,153	) 	 	 	(2,304	) 	
Merchandise inventories	  	 	(3,938	) 	 	 	(9,621	) 	 	 	(3,028	) 	
Prepaid expenses and other assets	  	 	(684	) 	 	 	(1,356	) 	 	 	(2,868	) 	
Accounts payable	  	 	2,168	  	 	 	4,059	  	 	 	2,113	  	
Accrued expenses	  	 	(2,490	) 	 	 	5,327	  	 	 	155	  	
Accrued compensation and benefits	  	 	788	  	 	 	958	  	 	 	3,362	  	
Deferred rent	  	 	3,021	  	 	 	3,085	  	 	 	4,159	  	
Deferred revenue	  	 	167	  	 	 	486	  	 	 	740	  	
 	  	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	
Net cash provided by operating activities	  	 	35,256	  	 	 	41,702	  	 	 	52,584	  	
 	  	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	
Cash flows from investing activities	  	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	
Purchase of property and equipment	  	 	(17,514	) 	 	 	(15,674	) 	 	 	(20,223	) 	
Insurance proceeds from casualty loss	  	 	—	  	 	 	375	  	 	 	—	  	
Proceeds from disposal of property and equipment	  	 	3	  	 	 	41	  	 	 	28	  	
 	  	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	
Net cash used in investing activities	  	 	(17,511	) 	 	 	(15,258	) 	 	 	(20,195	) 	

Cash flows from financing activities	  	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	
Payment of capital lease obligation	  	 	(555	) 	 	 	(591	) 	 	 	(628	) 	
Distributions	  	 	(16,020	) 	 	 	(22,220	) 	 	 	(36,008	) 	
 	  	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	
Net cash used in financing activities	  	 	(16,575	) 	 	 	(22,811	) 	 	 	(36,636	) 	
 	  	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	
Change in cash and cash equivalents	  	 	1,170	  	 	 	3,633	  	 	 	(4,247	) 	
Cash and cash equivalents, beginning of period	  	 	24,535	  	 	 	25,705	  	 	 	29,338	  	
 	  	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	
Cash and cash equivalents, end of period	  	$	25,705	  	 	$	29,338	  	 	$	25,091	  	
 	  	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	
Supplemental disclosures of cash flow information	  	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	
Interest paid	  	$	397	  	 	$	363	  	 	$	327	  	
Income taxes paid	  	$	206	  	 	$	516	  	 	$	493	  	
Supplemental disclosure of non-cash activities	  	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	
Unpaid purchases of property and equipment	  	$	797	  	 	$	596	  	 	$	2,209	  	
The accompanying notes are an integral part of these financial statements.
 
F-6

Table of Contents
WORLD OF JEANS & TOPS dba TILLY’S
NOTES TO FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
1. Description of Company
World of Jeans & Tops dba Tilly’s (“Tilly’s” or the “Company”) operates a chain of specialty retail stores featuring casual clothing, footwear and accessories for teens and young adults. The Company operated a total of 125 and 140 stores as of January 29, 2011, and January 28, 2012, respectively. The stores are located in malls, lifestyle centers, ‘power’ centers, community centers, outlet centers and street-front locations in Arizona, California, Colorado, Delaware, Florida, Maryland, Nevada, New Jersey, New York, Pennsylvania, Utah, Virginia, Washington and Wisconsin. Tilly’s customers may also shop online at www.tillys.com, where the Company features a similar assortment of product as is carried in Tilly’s stores.
Fiscal Year
The Company’s fiscal year ends on the Saturday closest to January 31. Fiscal years 2009, 2010 and 2011 ended on January 30, 2010, January 29, 2011 and January 28, 2012, respectively. Fiscal years 2009, 2010 and 2011 each included 52 weeks.
Comprehensive Income
The Statements of Comprehensive Income has been excluded from these financial statements as comprehensive income equals net income.
Segment Reporting
Accounting principles generally accepted in the U.S. (“GAAP”) has established guidance for reporting information about a company’s operating segments, including disclosures related to a company’s products and services, geographic areas and major customers. The Company has aggregated its net sales generated from its retail stores and e-commerce store into one operating segment. The operating segment is aggregated as it has a similar class of customer, nature of products and production processes, as well as similar economic characteristics. All of the Company’s identifiable assets are in the U.S.
Unaudited Pro Forma Balance Sheet Information
The unaudited pro forma balance sheet information gives effect to (i) the Company’s issuance of the undistributed taxable earnings notes to its existing shareholders in the aggregate principal amount representing all of the undistributed taxable income from the date of formation up to the date of termination of its “S” Corporation status, as a final distribution resulting from the termination of the “S” Corporation status, equal to $84.0 million, and (ii) an increase in net deferred tax assets of approximately $3.9 million (consisting of an increase in current deferred tax assets of $5.0 million and an increase in non-current deferred tax liabilities of $1.1 million) assuming the “S” Corporation status terminated on January 28, 2012.
Unaudited Pro Forma Income Information
The unaudited pro forma income information gives effect to the anticipated conversion of the Company to a “C” Corporation. Prior to such anticipated conversion, the Company was an “S” Corporation and generally not subject to income taxes. The pro forma net income, therefore, includes an adjustment for income tax expense as if the Company had been a “C” Corporation as of February 1, 2009 at an assumed combined federal, state and local effective income tax rate of 40%, which approximates the calculated statutory tax rate for each period.
The unaudited pro forma basic and diluted net income per share is computed using unaudited pro forma net income, as discussed above, and unaudited pro forma weighted average number of common shares (basic and
 
F-7

Table of Contents
WORLD OF JEANS & TOPS dba TILLY’S
NOTES TO FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(continued)
 
diluted). The unaudited pro forma weighted average number of common shares (basic and diluted) gives effect to the increase in the number of shares which would be sufficient to replace the capital in excess of current year earnings being withdrawn from the anticipated conversion. The pro forma adjustment to weighted average basic common shares for fiscal years 2010 and 2011 is             and             , respectively. The pro forma adjustment to weighted average diluted common shares for fiscal years 2010 and 2011 is             and             , respectively.
Reorganization
Prior to the consummation of the Company’s initial public offering, the shareholders of World of Jeans & Tops will contribute all of their equity interests in World of Jeans & Tops to Tilly’s, Inc. in return for shares of Tilly’s, Inc. common stock on a one-for-one basis (collectively referred to as the “Reorganization”). As a result of the Reorganization, World of Jeans & Tops will become a wholly owned subsidiary of Tilly’s, Inc. Upon completion of the Reorganization, the only asset of Tilly’s, Inc. will be its investment in World of Jeans & Tops and all of its operations will be conducted through World of Jeans & Tops.
In addition, the Company expects a final “S” Corporation distribution to World of Jeans & Tops’ shareholders of undistributed taxable earnings. This is expected to be completed subsequent to the Reorganization.
2. Summary of Significant Accounting Policies
Cash and Cash Equivalents
The Company considers all short-term investments with an initial maturity of 90 days or less when purchased to be cash equivalents.
Merchandise Inventories
Merchandise inventories are comprised of finished goods offered for sale at the Company’s retail stores and online. Inventories are stated at the lower of cost or market using the retail inventory method. An initial markup is applied to inventory at cost in order to establish a cost-to-retail ratio. The Company believes that the retail inventory method approximates cost. Shipping and handling costs for merchandise shipped to customers of $2.5 million, $3.4 million and $5.1 million for the fiscal years ended January 30, 2010, January 29, 2011 and January 28, 2012, respectively, are included in cost of goods sold in the statements of operations.
The Company reviews its inventory levels to identify slow-moving merchandise and generally uses markdowns to clear this merchandise. At any given time, merchandise inventories include items that have been marked down to management’s best estimate of their fair market value at retail price, with a proportionate write-down to the cost of the inventory. Management bases the decision to mark down merchandise primarily upon its current sell-through rate and the age of the item, among other factors. These markdowns may have an adverse impact on earnings, depending on the extent and amount of inventory affected. Markdowns are recorded as an increase to cost of goods sold in the statements of operations. Total markdowns, including permanent and promotional markdowns, on a cost basis were $20.8 million, $22.8 million and $23.2 million in fiscal years 2009, 2010 and 2011, respectively. In addition, the Company accrued $0.3 million for planned but unexecuted markdowns, including markdowns related to slow moving merchandise, as of both January 29, 2011 and January 28, 2012.
 
F-8

Table of Contents
WORLD OF JEANS & TOPS dba TILLY’S
NOTES TO FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(continued)
 
Property and Equipment
Property and equipment are stated at cost less accumulated depreciation and amortization. Depreciation is provided using the straight-line method over the estimated useful lives of the assets. Equipment is depreciated over five to seven years. Furniture and fixtures are depreciated over five years. Computer software is depreciated over three years. Leasehold improvements and the cost of acquiring leasehold rights are amortized over the lesser of the term of the lease or the estimated useful life of the improvement. The cost of assets sold or retired and the related accumulated depreciation or amortization is removed from the accounts with any resulting gain or loss included in net income.
Repairs and maintenance costs are charged directly to expense as incurred. Major renewals, replacements and improvements that substantially extend the useful life of an asset are capitalized and depreciated.
Impairment of Long-Lived Assets
Impairments are recorded on long-lived assets used in operations whenever events or changes in circumstances indicate that the net carrying amounts may not be recoverable. Factors considered important that could result in an impairment review include, but are not limited to, significant underperformance relative to historical or planned operating results, significant changes in the manner of use of the assets or significant changes in the Company’s business strategies. An evaluation is performed using estimated undiscounted future cash flows from operating activities compared to the carrying value of related assets for the individual stores. If the undiscounted future cash flows are less than the carrying value, an impairment loss is recognized for the difference between the carrying value and the estimated fair value of the assets based on the discounted cash flows of the assets using a rate that approximates the Company’s weighted average cost of capital.
At least quarterly, the Company assesses whether events or changes in circumstances have occurred that potentially indicate the carrying value of long-lived assets may not be recoverable. The Company’s evaluations during fiscal years 2010 and 2011 indicated that operating losses or insufficient operating income existed at one retail store in each year, with a projection that the operating losses or insufficient operating income for these locations would continue. As such, the Company recorded noncash charges of $0.8 million and $0.6 million in selling, general and administrative expenses in fiscal years 2010 and 2011, respectively, to write down the carrying value of these stores’ long-lived assets to their estimated fair values. In addition, the Company recorded an impairment charge of $1.2 million in fiscal year 2010 due to smoke damage to assets resulting from a fire in the mall where one of the Company’s stores is located. The Company has an insurance policy covering the assets that were destroyed. The Company did not record any impairment charges in fiscal year 2009.
Deferred Offering Costs
Deferred offering costs of $1.5 million are included in other assets on the Company’s balance sheet as of January 28, 2012. Upon consummation of the initial public offering, these amounts will be offset against the proceeds of the offering. There were no amounts capitalized as of January 29, 2011.
Operating Leases
The Company leases its retail stores under noncancellable operating leases. Most store leases include tenant allowances from landlords, rent escalation clauses and/or contingent rent provisions. Tilly’s recognizes rent expense on a straight-line basis over the lease term, excluding contingent rent, and records the difference between the amount charged to expense and the rent paid as a deferred rent liability. Contingent rent, determined based on a percentage of sales in excess of specified levels, is recognized as rent expense when the achievement of the specified sales that triggers the contingent rent is probable.
 
F-9

Table of Contents
WORLD OF JEANS & TOPS dba TILLY’S
NOTES TO FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(continued)
 
Deferred Rent and Tenant Allowances
Deferred rent is recognized when a lease contains fixed rent escalations. The Company recognizes the related rent expense on a straight-line basis starting from the date of possession and records the difference between the recognized rental expense and cash rent payable as deferred rent. Deferred rent also includes tenant allowances received from landlords in accordance with negotiated lease terms. The tenant allowances are amortized as a reduction to rent expense on a straight-line basis over the term of the lease starting at the date of possession.
Accrued Expenses
The major components of accrued expenses at January 29, 2011 and January 28, 2012 included sales and use taxes payable, rent-related liabilities, accrued construction, accrued merchandise returns and accruals for various other administrative expenses.
Revenue Recognition
Revenue is recognized for store sales when the customer receives and pays for the merchandise at the register. Taxes collected from the Company’s customers are recorded on a net basis. For e-commerce sales, Tilly’s recognizes revenue, net of sales taxes and estimated sales returns, and the related cost of goods sold at the time the merchandise is received by the customer. The Company defers e-commerce revenue and the associated product and shipping costs for shipments that are in-transit to the customer. Customers typically receive goods within a few days of shipment. Deferred revenue and the associated product costs relating to e-commerce sales were immaterial as of January 29, 2011 and January 28, 2012. Amounts related to shipping and handling that are billed to customers are reflected in net sales, and the related costs are reflected in cost of goods sold.
The Company recognizes revenue from gift cards as they are redeemed for merchandise. Prior to redemption, the Company maintains a current liability for unredeemed gift card balances. The customer liability balance was $4.1 million and $4.9 million as of January 29, 2011 and January 28, 2012, respectively, and is included in deferred revenue on the balance sheets. Tilly’s gift cards do not have expiration dates; however, over time, the redemption of some gift cards is remote and there is no legal obligation to remit the unredeemed gift cards to relevant jurisdictions (gift card “breakage”). An assessment of the ultimate non-redemption rate of gift cards is performed when enough time has passed since the activation of the cards to enable a determination of the ultimate breakage rate based upon historical redemption experience. This date of assessment has historically been two full fiscal years after the fiscal year the cards were activated. At the time of assessment a breakage estimate is calculated and recorded in net sales. Breakage revenue for gift cards was $0.5 million, $0.4 million and $0.5 million in fiscal years 2009, 2010 and 2011, respectively.
Cost of Goods Sold and Selling, General and Administrative Expenses
The following illustrates the primary costs classified in each major expense category:
Cost of Goods Sold
 
 	•	 	Total cost of products sold include:	
 	¡  	Freight expenses associated with moving merchandise inventories from our vendors to our distribution center;	
 	¡  	Vendor allowances;	
 	¡  	Cash discounts on payments to merchandise vendors;	
 	¡  	Physical inventory losses; and	
 	¡  	Markdowns.	
 
F-10

Table of Contents
WORLD OF JEANS & TOPS dba TILLY’S
NOTES TO FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(continued)
 
 	•	 	Costs of buying and distribution of merchandise include:	
 	¡  	Payroll costs and incentive compensation for merchandise purchasing personnel;	
 	¡  	Customer shipping and handling expenses;	
 	¡  	Costs associated with operating our distribution center, including payroll and benefit costs, occupancy costs, and depreciation; and	
 	¡  	Freight expenses associated with moving merchandise inventories from our distribution center to our stores and e-commerce customers.	
 	•	 	Store occupancy costs including rent, maintenance, utilities, property taxes, business licenses, security costs and depreciation.	
Selling, General and Administrative Expenses
 
 	•	 	Payroll, benefit costs and incentive compensation for store, regional and corporate employees;	
 	•	 	Occupancy and maintenance costs of corporate office facilities;	
 	•	 	Depreciation and amortization related to corporate office assets;	
 	•	 	Advertising and marketing costs, net of reimbursement from vendors;	
 	•	 	Tender costs, including costs associated with credit and debit card interchange fees;	
 	•	 	Long-lived asset impairment charges;	
 	•	 	Other administrative costs such as supplies, consulting, audit and tax preparation fees, and travel and lodging; and	
 	•	 	Charitable contributions.	
Store Opening Costs
Store opening costs consist primarily of occupancy costs, which are included in cost of goods sold, and payroll expenses, which are included in selling, general and administrative expenses, in the statements of operations.
Advertising
The Company expenses advertising costs as incurred, except for direct-mail advertising expenses which are recognized at the time of mailing. Advertising costs include such things as production and distribution of catalogs, print advertising costs, radio advertisements and grand opening events. Advertising expense, which is classified in selling, general and administrative expenses in the accompanying statements of operations, was $2.9 million, $4.5 million and $6.6 million in fiscal years 2009, 2010 and 2011, respectively.
Stock-Based Compensation
The Company has adopted the provisions of Accounting Standards Codification (“ASC”) Topic 718, Compensation-Stock Compensation  (“ASC 718”), which establishes accounting for equity instruments exchanged for employee services. Under the provisions of this statement, stock-based compensation expense is measured at the grant date, based on the calculated fair value of the award, and is recognized as an expense on a straight-line basis over the employee’s requisite service period (generally the vesting period of the equity grant). As required under this guidance, the Company estimates forfeitures for options granted which are not expected to vest. Changes in these inputs and assumptions can materially affect the measurement of the estimated fair value of the Company’s stock-based compensation expense.
The Company’s stock options contain a performance condition wherein, if they are vested, they only become exercisable upon the consummation of an initial public offering of Tilly’s common stock. Unrecognized stock-based compensation expense, cumulative through January 28, 2012, for all stock options granted under the Tilly’s 2007 Stock Option Plan (the “2007 Plan”) and before any related tax benefit, was $7.1 million.
 
F-11

Table of Contents
WORLD OF JEANS & TOPS dba TILLY’S
NOTES TO FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(continued)
 
Income Taxes
Historically, Tilly’s has elected to be taxed under the provisions of subchapter “S” of the Internal Revenue Code for federal tax purposes. As a result, the Company’s income has not been subject to U.S. federal income taxes or state income taxes in those states where the “S” Corporation status is recognized. In general, the corporate income or loss of an “S” Corporation is allocated to its shareholders for inclusion in their personal federal income tax returns and personal state income tax returns in those states where the “S” Corporation status is recognized. No provision or liability for federal or state income tax has been provided in the Company’s financial statements except for those states where the “S” Corporation status is not recognized and for the 1.5% California franchise tax to which the Company is also subject as a California “S” Corporation. The provision for income tax in the current period consists of these taxes. Tilly’s distributes funds to the shareholders necessary to satisfy the shareholders’ estimated personal “S” Corporation income tax liabilities.
Net Income per Share
Basic net income per common share is computed using the weighted average number of shares outstanding. Diluted net income per common share is computed using the weighted average number of shares outstanding adjusted for the incremental shares attributed to outstanding options to purchase common stock. Incremental shares of 14,000, 98,000 and 500,000 for the fiscal years ended January 30, 2009, January 29, 2011 and January 28, 2012, respectively, were used in the calculation of diluted net income per common share.
Fair Value of Certain Financial Assets and Liabilities
The Company follows Accounting Standards Codification (“ASC”) Topic 820, Fair Value Measurements and Disclosures, (“ASC 820”) which requires disclosure of the estimated fair value of certain assets and liabilities defined by the guidance as financial instruments. As of January 28, 2012, management believes that the carrying amounts of cash and cash equivalents, receivables, and payables approximate their respective fair value because of their short maturities.
Concentration of Credit Risk
Financial instruments that potentially subject the Company to credit risk consist principally of cash and cash equivalents. At January 28, 2012, and at various times throughout the year, the Company had cash in financial institutions in excess of the $250,000 amount insured by the Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation. The Company typically invests its cash in highly rated, interest-bearing, short-term commercial paper or in money market funds.
Use of Estimates
The preparation of financial statements in conformity with GAAP requires management to make estimates and assumptions. These estimates and assumptions affect the reported amounts of assets and liabilities and disclosure of contingent assets and liabilities at the date of the financial statements and the reported amounts of net sales and expenses during the reporting period. Actual results could differ from those estimates. On an ongoing basis, management reviews its estimates based on currently available information. Changes in facts and circumstances may result in revised estimates.
 
F-12

Table of Contents
WORLD OF JEANS & TOPS dba TILLY’S
NOTES TO FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(continued)
 
Recent Accounting Pronouncements
In May 2011, the FASB issued Accounting Standards Update (“ASU”) No. 2011-04, “Amendments to Achieve Common Fair Value Measurement and Disclosure Requirements in U.S. GAAP and IFRSs .” ASU 2011-04 provides additional guidance on fair value measurements that clarifies the application of existing guidance and disclosure requirements, changes certain fair value measurement principles and requires additional disclosures about fair value measurements. The updated guidance became effective on a prospective basis for the Company on January 29, 2012. Based on the Company’s evaluation of this ASU, the adoption of this standard is not expected to have a material impact on the Company’s financial position or results of operations.
The FASB issues ASUs to amend the authoritative literature in the Accounting Standards Codification. There have been a number of ASUs to date that amend the original text of the Accounting Standards Codification. Except for the ASU listed above, those issued to date either (i) provide supplemental guidance, (ii) are technical corrections, (iii) are not applicable to the Company or (iv) are not expected to have a significant impact on the Company.
3. Receivables
At January 29, 2011 and January 28, 2012, receivables consisted of the following (in thousands):

 	  	January 29,	 	  	January 28,	 	
 	  	2011	 	  	2012	 	
Credit and debit card receivables	  	$	1,890	  	  	$	1,899	  	
Tenant allowances due from landlords	  	 	1,214	  	  	 	3,636	  	
Other	  	 	1,197	  	  	 	1,070	  	
 	  	 	 	 	  	 	 	 	
 	  	$	4,301	  	  	$	6,605	  	
 	  	 	 	 	  	 	 	 	
4. Prepaid Expenses and Other Current Assets
At January 29, 2011 and January 28, 2012, prepaid expenses and other current assets consisted of the following (in thousands):
 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	
 	  	January 29,	 	  	January 28,	 	
 	  	2011	 	  	2012	 	
Prepaid rent	  	$	3,635	  	  	$	4,441	  	
Prepaid maintenance agreements	  	 	340	  	  	 	395	  	
Prepaid insurance	  	 	163	  	  	 	403	  	
Other	  	 	119	  	  	 	377	  	
 	  	 	 	 	  	 	 	 	
 	  	$	4,257	  	  	$	5,616	  	
 	  	 	 	 	  	 	 	 	
5. Property and Equipment
At January 29, 2011 and January 28, 2012, property and equipment consisted of the following (in thousands):
 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	
 	  	January 29,	 	 	January 28,	 	
 	  	2011	 	 	2012	 	
Leasehold improvements	  	$	55,787	  	 	$	63,798	  	
Furniture and fixtures	  	 	22,951	  	 	 	26,139	  	
Machinery and equipment	  	 	22,338	  	 	 	23,245	  	
Building under capital lease	  	 	7,840	  	 	 	7,840	  	
Computer hardware and software	  	 	9,147	  	 	 	10,794	  	
Construction in progress	  	 	494	  	 	 	5,132	  	
Vehicles	  	 	1,759	  	 	 	1,820	  	
 	  	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	
 	  	 	120,316	  	 	 	138,768	  	
Accumulated depreciation and amortization	  	 	(62,131	) 	 	 	(74,691	) 	
 	  	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	
Property and equipment, net	  	$	58,185	  	 	$	64,077	  	

F-13

Table of Contents
WORLD OF JEANS & TOPS dba TILLY’S
NOTES TO FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(continued)
 
Depreciation and amortization expense related to property and equipment was $13.9 million, $14.3 million and $15.1 million for the fiscal years ended January 30, 2010, January 29, 2011 and January 28, 2012, respectively.
The Company incurred costs of $14.9 million, $15.7 million and $21.8 million for capital expenditures for the fiscal years ended January 30, 2010, January 29, 2011 and January 28, 2012, respectively.
6. Line of Credit
The Company has a $15.0 million line of credit with Wells Fargo Bank, NA that expires on August 1, 2012. Interest is charged either at the bank’s prime rate or at the London Interbank Offered Rate (LIBOR) plus 1.75%, which Tilly’s has the ability to select at the time of the advance. Advances are secured by substantially all of the assets of the Company. As a sub-feature under the line of credit, the bank may issue stand-by and commercial letters of credit up to $10.0 million. As of January 29, 2011 and January 28, 2012 there were no outstanding balances or letters of credit. Tilly’s is required to maintain certain financial and nonfinancial covenants in accordance with the line of credit agreement. These covenants include a number of affirmative and negative covenants, such as restrictions on liens, annual capital expenditures, additional indebtedness, dispositions, dividends or stock repurchases, and changes in the nature of the Company’s business, as well as requirements for certain levels of tangible net worth, liquidity and profitability. At January 28, 2012, the Company was in compliance with all of its covenants and had no outstanding borrowings under the line of credit.
7. Accrued Expenses
At January 29, 2011 and January 28, 2012, accrued expenses consisted of the following (in thousands):

 	  	January 29,	 	  	January 28,	 	
 	  	2011	 	  	2012	 	
Sales and use taxes payable	  	$	4,886	  	  	$	4,969	  	
Minimum rent and common area maintenance	  	 	731	  	  	 	779	  	
Accrued construction	  	 	596	  	  	 	2,209	  	
Accrued merchandise returns	  	 	510	  	  	 	609	  	
Other	  	 	4,445	  	  	 	4,369	  	
 	  	 	 	 	  	 	 	 	
Total accrued expenses	  	$	11,168	  	  	$	12,935	  	
 	  	 	 	 	  	 	 	 	
8. Financial Instruments
ASC Topic 820, Fair Value Measurements and Disclosures, (“ASC 820”) defines fair value, establishes a framework for measuring fair value and expands disclosures about fair value measurements. Fair value is defined under ASC 820 as the exit price associated with the sale of an asset or transfer of a liability in an orderly transaction between market participants at the measurement date. ASC 820 established the following three-tier fair value hierarchy, which prioritizes the inputs used in measuring fair value:
 
 	Ÿ	 	Level 1 – Quoted prices in active markets for identical assets and liabilities. The Company had money market securities within cash and cash equivalents totaling $29.3 million and $23.0 million at January 29, 2011 and January 28, 2012, respectively. These money market securities are reported at fair value utilizing Level 1 inputs, as quoted current market prices are readily available.	
 
F-14

Table of Contents
WORLD OF JEANS & TOPS dba TILLY’S
NOTES TO FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(continued)

 	Ÿ	 	Level 2 – Inputs other than Level 1 that are observable, either directly or indirectly, such as quoted prices for similar assets and liabilities; quoted prices in markets that are not active; or other inputs that are observable or can be corroborated by observable market data for substantially the full term of the assets or liabilities.	
 
 	Ÿ	 	Level 3 – Unobservable inputs (i.e. projections, estimates, interpretations, etc.) that are supported by little or no market activity and that are significant to the fair value of the assets or liabilities. During fiscal years 2010 and 2011, certain long-lived assets with a carrying value of $2.0 million and $0.6 million, respectively, were determined to be unable to recover their respective carrying values and, therefore, were written down to their fair value, resulting in a loss on impairment of assets of $2.0 million and $0.6 million, respectively. The fair value of the assets was determined using Level 3 inputs and the valuation techniques are described in Note 2 of the Notes to Financial Statements.	
The Company has no other financial instruments that would be considered significant for fair value measurement purposes.
9. Leases
The Company conducts all of its retail sales and corporate operations in leased facilities. Lease terms generally range up to ten years and provide for escalations in base rents. The Company is generally not obligated to renew leases. Certain leases provide for additional rent based on a percentage of sales and annual rent increases generally based upon the Consumer Price Index. In addition, many of the store leases contain certain co-tenancy provisions that permit the Company to pay rent based on a pre-determined percentage of sales when the occupancy of the retail center falls below minimums established in the lease.
The Company leases warehouse space that is owned by one of the co-founders of Tilly’s. This lease expires on October 31, 2014 and is being accounted for as an operating lease. The lease provides for base monthly payments of $16,118 which increase every 12 months at $0.03 per square foot per month. As of January 28, 2012, the Company’s monthly lease payment was $16,291. The Company incurred rent expense of $219,073 for fiscal year 2011 related to this lease. The Company subleases part of the building to an unrelated third party. The sublease began on December 1, 2010 and terminates on May 31, 2014. The sublease provides for base monthly payments of $11,223, which increases annually at a rate of $0.03 per square foot.
On September 2, 2011, the Company entered into a noncancellable lease agreement for office and warehouse space with a company that is owned by one of the co-founders of Tilly’s. This building is currently being constructed by the landlord, and construction is expected to be completed during the first half of fiscal year 2012. The lease terminates ten years from the earlier of (i) the date the building is substantially completed or (ii) the date the Company can access the building and begin tenant improvements. The lease provides for base monthly payments of $27,037 which adjust annually based upon the Los Angeles/Anaheim/Riverside Urban Consumer Price Index, not to exceed 7%, but a minimum of 3%, in any one annual increase. The Company is not required to make lease payments until access to the building has been granted to begin tenant improvements. Prior to signing the lease, the Company received an independent market analysis regarding this property and therefore believes that the terms of this lease are reasonable and are not materially different than terms the Company would have obtained from an unaffiliated third party.
On November 1, 2011, the Company entered into a noncancellable lease agreement with a company that is owned by one of the co-founders of Tilly’s. The lease terminates on October 31, 2021. The Company intends to use this property as its e-commerce distribution center. The lease provides for base monthly payments of $51,942, however the lease also provides for increased base monthly payments of $68,174 if the building is
 
F-15

Table of Contents
WORLD OF JEANS & TOPS dba TILLY’S
NOTES TO FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(continued)
 
expanded by the landlord, which the Company expects to be completed by the first half for fiscal year 2013. The lease payments adjust annually based upon the Los Angeles/Anaheim/Riverside Urban Consumer Price Index, not to exceed 7%, but a minimum of 3%, in any one annual increase. The Company incurred rent expense of $270,981 for fiscal year 2011 related to this lease. Prior to signing the lease, the Company received an independent market analysis regarding this property and therefore believes that the terms of this lease are reasonable and are not materially different than terms the Company would have obtained from an unaffiliated third party.
Future minimum rental commitments, by year and in the aggregate, under noncancellable operating leases as of January 28, 2012, are as follows (in thousands):

Fiscal Year	  	Related
Party	 	  	Other	 	  	Total	 	
2012	  	$	1,889	  	  	$	37,141	  	  	$	39,030	  	
2013	  	 	2,320	  	  	 	34,134	  	  	 	36,454	  	
2014	  	 	2,110	  	  	 	29,969	  	  	 	32,079	  	
2015	  	 	2,181	  	  	 	30,603	  	  	 	32,784	  	
2016	  	 	2,218	  	  	 	28,246	  	  	 	30,464	  	
Thereafter	  	 	7,729	  	  	 	86,369	  	  	 	94,098	  	
 	  	 	 	 	  	 	 	 	  	 	 	 	
Total	  	$	18,447	  	  	$	246,462	  	  	$	264,909	  	
 	  	 	 	 	  	 	 	 	  	 	 	 	
Rent expense under noncancellable operating leases for fiscal years 2009, 2010 and 2011 was as follows (in thousands):

 	  	January 30,
2010	 	  	January 29,
2011	 	  	January 28,
2012	 	
Minimum rentals	  	$	22,386	  	  	$	26,312	  	  	$	30,661	  	
Contingent rentals	  	 	48	  	  	 	15	  	  	 	50	  	
 	  	 	 	 	  	 	 	 	  	 	 	 	
Total rent expense	  	$	22,434	  	  	$	26,327	  	  	$	30,711	  	
 	  	 	 	 	  	 	 	 	  	 	 	 	
The Company leases its corporate headquarters and distribution center from a company that is owned by the co-founders of Tilly’s. This lease expires on December 31, 2012, with multiple options to renew thereafter. The land component of this lease is accounted for as an operating lease (included in the operating lease commitments schedule above) and the building component is accounted for as a capital lease. The monthly payments under the operating portion of the lease were $154,777 as of January 28, 2012. The initial obligation at inception under the capital lease was $9.2 million, with an outstanding balance of $4.6 million as of January 28, 2012. The gross amount of the building under capital lease was $7.8 million as of January 29, 2011 and January 28, 2012. The gross amount of the accumulated depreciation of the building under capital lease was $4.2 million and $4.7 million as of January 29, 2011 and January 28, 2012, respectively. The Company incurred rent expense of $0.8 million in both of the fiscal years ended January 30, 2010 and January 29, 2011 and $0.9 million for the fiscal year ended January 28, 2012 related to the operating lease.
 
F-16

Table of Contents
WORLD OF JEANS & TOPS dba TILLY’S
NOTES TO FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(continued)
 
Future commitments under the Company’s related party capital lease obligation as of January 28, 2012 are as follows (in thousands):

Fiscal Year	  	 	 	
2012	  	$	1,020	  	
2013	  	 	940	  	
2014	  	 	860	  	
2015	  	 	940	  	
2016	  	 	940	  	
Thereafter	  	 	860	  	
 	  	 	 	 	
Total minimum lease payments	  	 	5,560	  	
Less amount representing interest	  	 	922	  	
 	  	 	 	 	
Present value of net minimum lease payments	  	 	4,638	  	
Less current portion	  	 	669	  	
 	  	 	 	 	
Long-term portion	  	$	3,969	  	
 	  	 	 	 	
10. Income Taxes
The Company has elected to be taxed under the provisions of subchapter “S” of the Internal Revenue Code for federal and state income tax purposes. Under these provisions, the Company is generally not subject to corporate level income taxes on its taxable income. However, the company is subject to a 1.5% California franchise tax. As an “S” Corporation, the shareholders are liable for federal and state income taxes on their share of the Company’s taxable income. The provision for income tax in the current period consists primarily of the California franchise tax. The Company generally distributes funds necessary to satisfy the shareholders’ personal income tax liabilities associated with their share of the company’s taxable income.
The Company recognizes income tax liabilities related to unrecognized tax benefits in accordance with ASC 740, Income Taxes, guidance related to uncertain tax positions and adjusts these liabilities when its judgment changes as the result of the evaluation of new information. As of January 28, 2012, there were no material unrecognized tax benefits and the Company does not anticipate that there will be a material change in the balance of the unrecognized tax benefits within the next 12 months. The Company recognizes penalties and interest related to unrecognized tax benefits as income tax expense.
11. Stock-Based Compensation
The 2007 Plan authorizes the Company to issue options to employees, consultants and directors to purchase up to a total of 1,600,000 shares of common stock. The 2007 Plan provides for awards in the form of incentive stock options or nonqualified stock options. As of January 28, 2012, all awards granted by the Company have been nonqualified stock options. Under the 2007 Plan, stock options are generally granted at an exercise price equal to the fair value of the Company’s common stock at the date of grant. The stock options have graded vesting over a four-year period and generally expire at the earlier of 30 days after employment or services are terminated, or ten years from the date of the grant. There were 60,000 shares available for issuance pursuant to the 2007 Plan as of January 28, 2012.
The stock options also contain a performance condition wherein, if they are vested, they only become exercisable upon the consummation of an initial public offering of the Company’s common stock. If Tilly’s had consummated an initial public offering as of January 28, 2012, the Company would have recognized $7.1 million,
 
F-17

Table of Contents
WORLD OF JEANS & TOPS dba TILLY’S
NOTES TO FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(continued)
 
before any related tax benefit, of cumulative compensation expense, adjusted for estimated forfeitures and related to all outstanding stock options granted to date. An additional $2.4 million of compensation expense relating to all non-vested outstanding stock options granted to date as of January 28, 2012 would then be recognized over the remaining service period of the awards.
In the absence of a public trading market for its stock, the Company considered both objective and subjective factors including information provided by a third-party valuation firm to determine its best estimate of the fair market value of its common stock as of each valuation date. The awards to purchase the Company’s common stock granted under the 2007 Plan were measured at fair value on each of the grant dates using the Black-Scholes option valuation model.
Key input assumptions used to estimate the fair value of stock options include the exercise price of the award, the expected option term, expected volatility of the Company’s stock over the option’s expected term, the risk-free interest rate over the option’s expected term and the Company’s expected annual dividend yield, if any. The Company’s estimate of pre-vesting forfeitures, or forfeiture rate, was based on its internal analysis, which included the award recipients’ positions within the company and the vesting period of the awards. The Company will issue shares when the options are exercised.
The fair value of stock options granted during fiscal years 2009, 2010 and 2011 was estimated on the grant date using the following assumptions:

 	  	January 30,
2010	 	 	January 29,
2011	 	 	January 28,
2012	 	
Expected option term(1)	  	 	5.0 years	  	 	 	5.0 years	  	 	 	5.0 years	  	
Expected volatility factor(2)	  	 	45.5	% 	 	 	61.0	% 	 	 	59.7	% 	
Risk-free interest rate(3)	  	 	1.8	% 	 	 	1.0	% 	 	 	2.2	% 	
Expected annual dividend yield	  	 	0.0	% 	 	 	0.0	% 	 	 	0.0	% 	
 
(1)	The Company has limited historical information regarding expected option term. Accordingly, the Company determined the expected option term of the awards using the latest historical data available from comparable public companies and management’s expectation of exercise behavior.	
(2)	Stock volatility for each grant is measured using the weighted average of historical daily price changes of the Company’s competitors’ common stock over the most recent period equal to the expected option term of the Company’s awards.	
(3)	The risk-free interest rate is determined using the rate on treasury securities with the same term as the expected life of the stock option as of the grant date.	
A summary of stock option information for the fiscal year ended January 28, 2012 is as follows (aggregate intrinsic value in thousands):

 	  	Shares	 	 	Weighted-
Average
Exercise
Price	 	  	Weighted-
Average
Remaining
Contractual
Term	 	  	Aggregate
Intrinsic
Value	 	
Outstanding at January 29, 2011	  	 	975,500	  	 	$	8.41	  	  	 	 	 	  	 	 	 	
Granted	  	 	578,000	  	 	$	16.26	  	  	 	 	 	  	 	 	 	
Forfeited or expired	  	 	(13,500	) 	 	$	10.06	  	  	 	 	 	  	 	 	 	
 	  	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	  	 	 	 	  	 	 	 	
Outstanding at January 28, 2012	  	 	1,540,000	  	 	$	11.34	  	  	 	7.3 years	  	  	$	14,878	  	
 	  	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	  	 	 	 	  	 	 	 	
Vested and expected to vest in the future at January 28, 2012	  	 	1,443,209	  	 	$	11.18	  	  	 	7.2 years	  	  	$	14,169	  	
 
F-18

Table of Contents
WORLD OF JEANS & TOPS dba TILLY’S
NOTES TO FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(continued)
 
No stock options were exercisable as of January 28, 2012 as the performance condition of Tilly’s consummating an initial public offering had not been met as of that date.
In connection with a stock option grant during fiscal year 2011, the Company performed a valuation with the assistance of a third-party valuation specialist and determined that its current stock price was $16.26 per share.
During fiscal year 2010, the Company re-priced 739,500 out-of-the-money stock options with exercise prices ranging from $9.64 to $14.47 in order to continue maintaining an equity incentive for its employees. Most of these out-of-the-money stock options had been granted with prices based upon Company valuations performed prior to and during the recent economic instability, which reflected values greater than $8.98 per share. As a result of the re-pricing, all such stock options now have an exercise price of $8.98, with no modification to the vesting schedule of the previously granted options. Stock options granted on April 20, 2009 retained their original exercise price of $6.45 per share. The Company accounted for the re-pricing as a modification of the stock options. The re-pricing affected 48 optionees and resulted in incremental unrecognized stock-based compensation expense of $0.6 million.
A summary of the status of non-vested stock options as of January 28, 2012 and changes during the fiscal years ended January 30, 2010, January 29, 2011 and January 28, 2012 are presented below:

 	  	Shares	 	 	Weighted-
Average
Grant-Date
Fair Value	 	
Nonvested at January 31, 2009	  	 	507,250	  	 	$	6.42	  	
Granted	  	 	225,500	  	 	 	2.64	  	
Vested	  	 	(170,375	) 	 	 	6.33	  	
Nonvested shares forfeited	  	 	(2,000	) 	 	 	5.44	  	
 	  	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	
Nonvested at January 30, 2010	  	 	560,375	  	 	$	4.93	  	
Granted	  	 	106,500	  	 	 	5.06	  	
Vested	  	 	(222,000	) 	 	 	5.46	  	
Nonvested shares forfeited	  	 	(15,500	) 	 	 	4.69	  	
 	  	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	
Nonvested at January 29, 2011	  	 	429,375	  	 	$	4.70	  	
Granted	  	 	578,000	  	 	 	8.52	  	
Vested	  	 	(241,500	) 	 	 	5.42	  	
Nonvested shares forfeited	  	 	(9,250	) 	 	 	6.41	  	
 	  	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	
Nonvested at January 28, 2012	  	 	756,625	  	 	$	7.37	  	
 	  	 	 	 	 	 	 	 	
12. Commitments and Contingencies
Employment Contracts
The Company did not have any employment agreements as of January 29, 2011. On February 21, 2011, Daniel Griesemer joined Tilly’s as its new President and Chief Executive Officer. The Company is subject to an employment agreement with Mr. Griesemer, which provides for compensation and other certain benefits. The agreement also provides for severance payments under certain circumstances.
 
F-19

Table of Contents
WORLD OF JEANS & TOPS dba TILLY’S
NOTES TO FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(continued)
 
Indemnifications, Commitments, and Guarantees
During the normal course of business, the Company has made certain indemnifications, commitments, and guarantees under which Tilly’s may be required to make payments for certain transactions. These indemnifications include those given to various lessors in connection with facility leases for certain claims arising from such facility or lease, and indemnifications to directors and officers of the Company to the maximum extent permitted under the laws of the state of California. The majority of these indemnifications, commitments, and guarantees do not provide for any limitation of the maximum potential future payments we could be obligated to make, and their duration may be indefinite. The Company has not recorded any liability for these indemnifications, commitments, and guarantees in the accompanying balance sheets as the impact is expected to be immaterial.
13. Legal Proceedings
In October 2011, a putative class action, Deborah Lyddy v. World of Jeans & Tops and Tilly’s, Inc., (37-2011-00098812-CU-BT-CTL) was filed against the Company in the Superior Court of the State of California for the County of San Diego, alleging various causes of action based on the Company’s California gift card redemption policies. The complaint states that the plaintiff believes the total amount of the controversy is less than $5 million, but reserves the right to amend.
From time to time, the Company becomes involved in lawsuits and other claims arising from its ordinary course of business. Because of the uncertainties related to the incurrence, amount and range of loss on any pending litigation or claim, management is currently unable to predict the ultimate outcome of any litigation or claim, determine whether a liability has been incurred or make an estimate of the reasonably possible liability that could result from an unfavorable outcome. Management believes, after considering a number of factors and the nature of any outstanding litigation or claims, that the outcome will not have a material effect upon the Company’s results of operations, financial condition or cash flows. However, because of the unpredictable nature of these matters, the Company cannot provide any assurances regarding the outcome of any litigation or claim to which it is a party or the impact on it of an adverse ruling in such matters.
14. Retirement Savings Plan
The Tilly’s 401(k) Plan (the “401(k) Plan”) is a qualified plan under Section 401(k) of the Internal Revenue Code. The 401(k) Plan covers all full-time employees that have attained age 21 and completed at least three months of employment tenure. Company matching contributions to the 401(k) Plan are at the discretion of the Board of Directors. Total employer contributions to the 401(k) Plan totaled $0.4 million, $0.5 million and $0.5 million for the fiscal years ended January 30, 2010, January 29, 2011 and January 28, 2012, respectively.
15. Net Income Per Share
Basic net income per share is based on the weighted average number of common shares outstanding for the period. Diluted net income per share is based on the weighted average number of common shares and potentially dilutive common share equivalents outstanding for the period. Dilutive common share equivalents include shares issuable upon an assumed exercise of outstanding stock options using the “treasury stock” method, whereby proceeds from such exercise and unamortized compensation on share-based awards are assumed to be used by the Company to purchase the common shares at the average market price during the period. Total stock options of 662,500, 22,000 and 576,000 as of January 30, 2010, January 29, 2011 and January 28, 2012, respectively, have been excluded from the calculation of diluted earnings per share as the effect of including these options would have been anti-dilutive.
 
F-20

Table of Contents
WORLD OF JEANS & TOPS dba TILLY’S
NOTES TO FINANCIAL STATEMENTS—(continued)
 
16. Related Parties
As discussed in Note 9 to the Financial Statements, the Company leases corporate headquarters, distribution center and warehouse space from companies that are owned by the co-founders of Tilly’s.
There were no other related party transactions during fiscal years 2009, 2010 and 2011.
17. Subsequent Events
The Company evaluated subsequent events through March 23, 2012, the date the financial statements were issued.
 
F-21

Table of Contents
Report of Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm
To the Board of Directors and Stockholders of
Tilly’s, Inc.
Irvine, California
We have audited the accompanying statement of financial position of Tilly’s, Inc. (the “Company”) as of January 28, 2012. This statement of financial position is the responsibility of the Company’s management. Our responsibility is to express an opinion on this statement of financial position based on our audit.
We conducted our audit in accordance with the standards of the Public Company Accounting Oversight Board (United States). Those standards require that we plan and perform the audit to obtain reasonable assurance about whether the financial statement is free of material misstatement. The Company is not required to have, nor were we engaged to perform, an audit of its internal control over financial reporting. Our audit included consideration of internal controls over financial reporting as a basis for designing audit procedures that are appropriate in the circumstances, but not for the purpose of expressing an opinion on the effectiveness of the Company’s internal control over financial reporting. Accordingly, we express no such opinion. An audit also includes examining, on a test basis, evidence supporting the amounts and disclosures in the financial statements, assessing the accounting principles used and significant estimates made by management, as well as evaluating the overall financial statement presentation. We believe that our audit provides a reasonable basis for our opinion.
In our opinion, such statement of financial position presents fairly, in all material respects, the financial position of Tilly’s, Inc. as of January 28, 2012, in conformity with accounting principles generally accepted in the United States of America.
/s/ Deloitte & Touche LLP
Costa Mesa, CA
March 23, 2012
 
F-22

Table of Contents
TILLY’S, INC.
STATEMENT OF FINANCIAL POSITION

 	  	January 28,	 	
 	  	2012	 	
Assets	  	 	 	 	
Cash	  	$	1	  	
Total assets	  	$	1	  	
 	 	
Stockholders’ equity	  	 	 	 	
Class A Common stock, $0.001 par value; 100,000,000 shares authorized, 1,000 shares issued and outstanding	  	$	1	  	
Class B Common Stock, $0.001 par value; 35,000,000 shares authorized, no shares issued and outstanding	  	 	—	  	
Preferred stock, $0.001 par value; 10,000,000 shares authorized, no shares issued and outstanding	  	 	—	  	
Total stockholders’ equity	  	$	1	  	

The accompanying notes are an integral part of this financial statement.
 
F-23

Table of Contents
TILLY’S, INC.
NOTES TO FINANCIAL STATEMENT
1. Description of Company
Tilly’s, Inc. (the “Company”) was formed as a Delaware corporation on May 4, 2011 and has no material assets or operations.
Reorganization
The Company expects its shareholders will contribute their equity interests in World of Jeans & Tops to Tilly’s, Inc. in return for shares of Tilly’s, Inc. common stock on a one-for-one basis (collectively referred to as the “Reorganization”). As a result of the Reorganization, World of Jeans & Tops will become a wholly owned subsidiary of Tilly’s, Inc. Upon completion of the Reorganization, the only assets of Tilly’s, Inc. will be its investment in World of Jeans & Tops and all of its operations will be conducted through World of Jeans & Tops.
2. Basis of Presentation and Organization
The Company’s statement of financial position has been prepared in accordance with accounting principles generally accepted in the United States of America. Separate statements of operations and comprehensive income, changes in stockholders’ equity and of cash flows have not been presented because the Company has had not activity.
3. Stockholders’ Equity
As of January 28, 2012, the Company had 100,000,000 shares authorized and 1,000 shares issued and outstanding of Class A common stock with a par value of $0.001 to one stockholder. As of January 28, 2012, the Company had 35,000,000 shares authorized and no shares issued of Class B common stock with a par value of $0.001. As of January 28, 2012, the Company had 10,000,000 shares authorized and no shares issued of preferred stock with a par value of $0.001.
4. Subsequent Events
The Company evaluated subsequent events through March 23, 2012, the date the financial statement was issued.
 
F-24

Table of Contents

Table of Contents

 

Table of Contents
PART II
INFORMATION NOT REQUIRED IN PROSPECTUS
Item 13. Other Expenses of Issuance and Distribution
The actual and estimated expenses in connection with this offering, all of which will be borne by us, are as follows:

SEC Registration Fee	  	$	11,610	  	
FINRA Filing Fee	  	 	10,500	  	
New York Stock Exchange Listing Fee	  	 	            *	  	
Advisory Fees Payable to                     (1)	  	 	            *	  	
Accounting Fees and Expenses	  	 	            *	  	
Legal Fees and Expenses	  	 	            *	  	
Printing and Engraving Expenses	  	 	            *	  	
Miscellaneous	  	 	            *	  	
 	  	 	 	 	
Total	  	$	        	  	

*	To be updated by amendment	
(1)	Assumes an initial public offering price of $        , which is the mid-point of the price range set forth on the cover page of the prospectus.	
Item 14. Indemnification of Directors and Officers
Section 102(b)(7) of the DGCL provides that a corporation may, in its original certificate of incorporation or an amendment thereto, eliminate or limit the personal liability of a director for violations of the director’s fiduciary duty, except (1) for any breach of the director’s duty of loyalty to the corporation or its stockholders, (2) for acts or omissions not in good faith or which involve intentional misconduct or a knowing violation of law, (3) pursuant to Section 174 of the DGCL, which provides for liability of directors for unlawful payments of dividends or unlawful stock purchases or redemptions or (4) for any transaction from which a director derived an improper personal benefit.
Section 145 of the DGCL provides that a corporation may indemnify any person, including an officer or director, who is, or is threatened to be made, party to any threatened, pending or completed legal action, suit or proceeding, whether civil, criminal, administrative or investigative, other than an action by or in the right of such corporation, by reason of the fact that such person was an officer, director, employee or agent of such corporation or is or was serving at the request of such corporation as an officer, director, employee or agent of another corporation or enterprise. The indemnity may include expenses (including attorneys’ fees), judgments, fines and amounts paid in settlement actually and reasonably incurred by such person in connection with such action, suit or proceeding, provided such officer, director, employee or agent acted in good faith and in a manner he reasonably believed to be in, or not opposed to, the corporation’s best interest and, for criminal proceedings, had no reasonable cause to believe that his conduct was unlawful. A Delaware corporation may indemnify any officer or director in an action by or in the right of the corporation under the same conditions, except that no indemnification is permitted without judicial approval if the officer or director is adjudged to be liable to the corporation. Where an officer or director is successful on the merits or otherwise in the defense of any action referred to above, the corporation must indemnify him against the expenses that such officer or director actually and reasonably incurred.
Our bylaws provide for indemnification of the officers and directors to the full extent permitted by the DGCL.
 
II-1

Table of Contents
The proposed form of Underwriting Agreement to be filed as Exhibit 1.1 to this Registration Statement provides for indemnification by the underwriters of the registrant and its directors and certain officers for certain liabilities arising under the Securities Act.
Item 15. Recent Sale of Unregistered Securities
Set forth below is information regarding securities sold by us within the past three years that were not registered under the Securities Act:
 
 	(1)	In the past three years, we have granted options to employees, directors and consultants to purchase an aggregate of 1,540,000 shares of our common stock under our 2007 Stock Option Plan at exercise prices ranging from $6.45 to $16.26. However, in October 2010, our board of directors re-priced all options granted under the 2007 Stock Option Plan with exercise prices greater than $8.98 to $8.98 as of January 29, 2011. During this period, none of the shares were exercised.	
 
 	(2)	The registrant was incorporated in Delaware on May 4, 2011. The registrant’s business was in the past and currently is conducted through World of Jeans & Tops. Prior to the closing of this offering, World of Jeans & Tops will effect a corporate reorganization, which is sometimes referred to as the Reorganization Transaction, pursuant to which World of Jeans & Tops will become a wholly owned subsidiary of the registrant. In connection with the Reorganization Transaction, the outstanding shares of World of Jeans & Tops’ common stock will be converted into shares of the registrant’s common stock and outstanding options to purchase World of Jeans & Tops’ common stock will become options to purchase shares of the registrant’s common stock.	
 
 	(3)	Tilly’s, Inc. is a Delaware corporation that has not, to date, conducted any activities other than those incidental to our formation and the preparation of this prospectus. We were formed solely for the purpose of reorganizing the corporate structure of World of Jeans & Tops. In connection with the formation and initial capitalization of Tilly’s, Inc., the registrant issued a total of 1,000 shares of Class A common stock to Hezy Shaked in exchange for $0.001 per share.	
The issuances of options, the issuance of common stock in connection with the Reorganization Transaction and the issuance of Class A common stock in connection with the formation of Tilly’s, Inc., each as described above, were deemed exempt from registration under Section 4(2) or Regulation D of the Securities Act, and in certain circumstances, in reliance on Rule 701 promulgated under the Securities Act as transactions pursuant to compensatory benefit plans and contracts relating to compensation. All of the foregoing securities are deemed restricted securities for purposes of the Securities Act. The recipients of securities in the transactions exempt under Section 4(2) or Regulation D of the Securities Act represented their intention to acquire the securities for investment purposes only and not with a view to or for sale in connection with any distribution thereof and appropriate legends were affixed to the stock certificates and instruments issued in such transactions.
 
II-2

Table of Contents
Item 16.  Exhibits and Financial Statement Schedules

EXHIBIT
NO.	 	  	DESCRIPTION OF EXHIBIT	
 	 	
 	*1.1   	  	  	Form of Underwriting Agreement	
 	 	
 	**3.1   	  	  	Amended and Restated Certificate of Incorporation of Tilly’s, Inc.	
 	 	
 	**3.2   	  	  	Bylaws of Tilly’s, Inc.	
 	 	
 	*4.1   	  	  	Form of Stock Certificate	
 	 	
 	*5.1   	  	  	Opinion of Latham & Watkins LLP	
 	 	
 	**10.1   	  	  	Form of indemnification agreement between Tilly’s and each of its directors and officers	
 	 	
 	10.2   	  	  	Form of Amended and Restated Credit Agreement between World of Jeans & Tops and Wells Fargo Bank, NA dated as of                     , 2012	
 	 	
 	**10.3   	  	  	Form of General Pledge Agreement between Tilly’s, Inc. and Wells Fargo Bank, NA dated as of                     , 2012	
 	 	
 	**10.4   	  	  	Form of Amended and Restated Security Agreement-Equipment, between World of Jeans & Tops and Wells Fargo Bank, NA dated as of                     , 2012	
 	 	
 	**10.5   	  	  	Form of Amended and Restated Security Agreement-Rights to Payment and Inventory, between World of Jeans & Tops and Wells Fargo Bank, NA dated as of                     , 2012	
 	 	
 	**10.6   	  	  	Form of Continuing Guaranty of Tillys, Inc. with Wells Fargo Bank, NA dated as of                     , 2012	
 	 	
 	**10.7   	  	  	Form of Revolving Credit Agreement Note from World of Jeans & Tops dated as of                     , 2012	
 	 	
 	**10.8   	  	  	Amended and Restated Office and Warehouse Lease between Shaked Holdings, LLC and World of Jeans & Tops, dated as of September 21, 2007 (10 and 12 Whatney, Irvine, California)	
 	 	
 	**10.9   	  	  	Office and Warehouse Lease between Amnet Holdings, LLC and World of Jeans & Tops, dated as of November 1, 2010 (15 Chrysler, Irvine, California)	
 	 	
 	**10.10  	  	  	Amendment #1 to Office and Warehouse Lease between Amnet Holdings, LLC and World of Jeans & Tops, dated February 21, 2011 (15 Chrysler, Irvine California)	
 	 	
 	**10.11  	  	  	Form of Amended and Restated Tilly’s 2007 Stock Option Plan	
 	 	
 	**10.12  	  	  	Form of Stock Option Agreement Pursuant to 2007 Plan (Senior Executive Form)	
 	 	
 	**10.13  	  	  	Form of Stock Option Agreement Pursuant to 2007 Plan (Non-Executive Form)	
 	 	
 	**10.14  	  	  	Form of re-priced stock option grant agreement pursuant to the 2007 Plan	
 	 	
 	10.15  	  	  	Form of Tilly’s 2012 Equity and Incentive Award Plan	
 	 	
 	10.16  	  	  	Form of Stock Option Award Agreement Pursuant to 2012 Plan	
 	 	
 	10.17  	  	  	Form of Restricted Stock Award Agreement Pursuant to 2012 Plan	
 	 	
 	**10.18  	  	  	Offer Letter, dated as of January 15, 2011, by and between Daniel Griesemer and World of Jeans & Tops, d/b/a Tilly’s	
 	 	
 	**10.19  	  	  	Form of S Corporation Termination, Tax Allocation and Indemnification Agreement among Tilly’s, Inc., World of Jeans & Tops and the shareholders of World of Jeans & Tops dated                     , 2012 (including Form of Promissory Note as Exhibit A thereto)	
 	 	
 	**10.20  	  	  	Form of Share Exchange Agreement among Tilly’s, Inc., World of Jeans & Tops and the shareholders of World of Jeans & Tops dated                     , 2012	
 	 	
 	**10.21  	  	  	Cancellation of Loan Guaranty for World of Jeans & Tops dated March 9, 2011 from Union Bank	
 	 	
 	**10.22  	  	  	Office and Warehouse Lease between Amnet Holdings, LLC and World of Jeans & Tops, dated September 2, 2011 (11 Whatney, Irvine, California)	
 	 	
 	10.23	  	  	Office and Warehouse Lease between Amnet Holdings, LLC and World of Jeans & Tops, dated November 1, 2011 (17 Pasteur, Irvine, California)	
 
II-3

Table of Contents
 	 	 	 	 	
EXHIBIT
NO.	 	  	DESCRIPTION OF EXHIBIT	
 	 	
 	**21.1    	  	  	List of Subsidiaries	
 	 	
 	*23.1    	  	  	Consent of Latham & Watkins LLP (included in Exhibit 5.1)	
 	 	
 	23.2    	  	  	Consent of Deloitte & Touche LLP, Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm	
 	 	
 	23.3    	  	  	Consent of Deloitte & Touche LLP, Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm	
 	 	
 	24.1    	  	  	Powers of Attorney (included in the signature pages to this registration statement)	
 
*	To be filed by amendment.	
**	Previously filed.	
 
 	(B)	Financial Statement Schedules	
None.
Item 17. Undertakings
The undersigned registrant hereby undertakes to provide to the underwriters at the closing specified in the underwriting agreement certificates in such denominations and registered in such names as required by the underwriters to permit prompt delivery to each purchaser.
Insofar as indemnification for liabilities arising under the Securities Act may be permitted to our directors, officers, and controlling persons pursuant to the foregoing provisions, or otherwise, we have been advised that in the opinion of the SEC such indemnification is against public policy as expressed in the Securities Act and is, therefore, unenforceable. In the event that a claim for indemnification against such liabilities (other than the payment by us of expenses incurred or paid by a director, officer, or controlling person of us in the successful defense of any action, suit, or proceeding) is asserted by such director, officer, or controlling person in connection with the securities being registered, we will, unless in the opinion of counsel the matter has been settled by controlling precedent, submit to a court of appropriate jurisdiction the question whether such indemnification by us is against public policy as expressed in the Securities Act and will be governed by the final adjudication of such issue.
We hereby undertake that:
 
 	(i)	for purposes of determining any liability under the Securities Act, the information omitted from the form of prospectus filed as part of this registration statement in reliance upon Rule 430A and contained in a form of prospectus filed by the registrant pursuant to Rule 424(b)(1) or (4) or 497(h) under the Securities Act shall be deemed to be part of this registration statement as of the time it was declared effective.	
 
 	(ii)	for purposes of determining any liability under the Securities Act, each post-effective amendment that contains a form of prospectus shall be deemed to be a new registration statement relating to the securities offered therein, and the offering of such securities at that time shall be deemed to be the initial bona fide offering thereof.	
 
II-4

Table of Contents
SIGNATURES
Pursuant to the requirements of the Securities Act of 1933, as amended, the registrant has duly caused this Registration Statement to be signed on its behalf by the undersigned, thereunto duly authorized, in the city of Irvine, state of California, on March 23, 2012.

TILLY’S, INC.	
 	 	
By:	 	/s/    DANIEL GRIESEMER        	
 	 	  Daniel Griesemer	
 	 	  President and Chief Executive Officer	
SIGNATURES
POWER OF ATTORNEY AND SIGNATURES
Each person whose signature appears below constitutes and appoints Daniel Griesemer and William Langsdorf, and each of them singly, his or her true and lawful attorneys-in-fact and agents, with full power of substitution and resubstitution, for him or her and in his or her name, place and stead, in any and all capacities, to sign any and all amendments (including post-effective amendments) to this registration statement and any and all additional registration statements pursuant to Rule 462(b) of the Securities Act of 1933, as amended, and to file the same, with all exhibits thereto, and all other documents in connection therewith, with the Securities and Exchange Commission, granting unto each said attorney-in-fact and agents full power and authority to do and perform each and every act in person, hereby ratifying and confirming all that said attorneys-in-fact and agents or either of them or their or his or her substitute or substitutes may lawfully do or cause to be done by virtue hereof.
Pursuant to the requirements of the Securities Act of 1933, as amended, this registration statement has been signed by the following persons in the capacities and as of the dates indicated.

SIGNATURE	  	TITLE	 	DATE	
/s/    DANIEL GRIESEMER        
Daniel Griesemer	  	President, Chief Executive Officer and
Director (Principal Executive
Officer)	 	March 23, 2012	
 	 	 	
/s/    WILLIAM LANGSDORF        
William Langsdorf	  	Senior Vice President and
Chief Financial Officer
(Principal Financial Officer and
Principal Accounting Officer)	 	March 23, 2012	
 	 	 	
*
Hezy Shaked	  	Chairman of the Board and
Chief Strategy Officer	 	March 23, 2012	
 	 	 	
/S/    DOUG COLLIER
Doug Collier	  	Director	 	March 23, 2012	
 	 	 	
*
Seth Johnson	  	Director	 	March 23, 2012	
 
II-5

Table of Contents
 	 	 	 	 	
SIGNATURE	  	TITLE	 	DATE	
 	 	 	
*
Janet Kerr	  	Director	 	March 23, 2012	
 	 	 	
*
Bernard Zeichner	  	Director	 	March 23, 2012	
 	 	 	
*/s/    DANIEL GRIESEMER        
  Daniel Griesemer
  Attorney-in-Fact	  	 	 	 	
 
II-6

Exhibit 10.2
AMENDED AND RESTATED
CREDIT AGREEMENT
THIS AGREEMENT is entered into as of [            ], 2012, by and between WORLD OF JEANS & TOPS, a California corporation (“Borrower”), and WELLS FARGO BANK, NATIONAL ASSOCIATION (“Bank”).
RECITALS
Borrower and Bank are parties to that certain Credit Agreement dated as of May 1, 2003 (as amended to the date hereof, the “Existing Credit Agreement”), and Borrower and Bank desire to amend and restate the Existing Credit Agreement on the terms set forth herein.
Borrower has requested that Bank extend or continue credit to Borrower as described below, and Bank has agreed to provide such credit to Borrower on the terms and conditions contained herein.
NOW, THEREFORE, for valuable consideration, the receipt and sufficiency of which are hereby acknowledged, Bank and Borrower hereby agree as follows:
ARTICLE I
CREDIT TERMS
SECTION 1.1. LINE OF CREDIT.
(a) Line of Credit. Subject to the terms and conditions of this Agreement, Bank hereby agrees to make advances to Borrower from time to time up to and including [            ] 2014, not to exceed at any time the aggregate principal amount of Twenty Five Million Dollars ($25,000,000.00) (“Line of Credit”), the proceeds of which shall be used to finance Borrower’s working capital requirements. Borrower’s obligation to repay advances under the Line of Credit shall be evidenced by a promissory note substantially in the form of  Exhibit A  attached hereto (“Line of Credit Note”), all terms of which are incorporated herein by this reference.
(b) Letter of Credit Subfeature. As a subfeature under the Line of Credit, Bank agrees from time to time during the term thereof to issue or cause an affiliate to issue commercial and standby letters of credit for the account of Borrower (each, a “Letter of Credit” and collectively, “Letters of Credit”); provided however, that the aggregate undrawn amount of all outstanding Letters of Credit shall not at any time exceed Fifteen Million Dollars ($15,000,000.00). The form and substance of each Letter of Credit shall be subject to approval by Bank, in its sole discretion. Each Letter of Credit shall be issued for a term not to exceed three hundred sixty-five (365) days, as designated by Borrower; provided however, that no Letter of Credit shall have an expiration date more than one hundred twenty (120) days beyond the maturity date of the Line of Credit. The undrawn amount of all Letters of Credit shall be reserved under the Line of Credit and shall not be available for borrowings thereunder. Each Letter of Credit shall be subject to the additional terms and conditions of the Letter of Credit agreements, applications and any related documents required by Bank in connection with the issuance thereof. Each drawing paid under a Letter of Credit shall be deemed an advance under the Line of Credit and shall be repaid by Borrower in accordance with the terms and conditions

of this Agreement applicable to such advances; provided however, that if advances under the Line of Credit are not available, for any reason, at the time any drawing is paid, then Borrower shall immediately pay to Bank the full amount drawn, together with interest thereon from the date such drawing is paid to the date such amount is fully repaid by Borrower, at the rate of interest applicable to advances under the Line of Credit. In such event Borrower agrees that Bank, in its sole discretion, may debit any account maintained by Borrower with Bank for the amount of any such drawing.
(c) Limitation on Borrowings. During any Formula Period, outstanding borrowings under the Line of Credit shall not at any time exceed seventy five percent (75%) of Borrower’s eligible inventory (exclusive of work in process and inventory which is obsolete, unsalable or damaged), with the value determined on a cost basis. The foregoing shall be determined by Bank upon receipt and review of the collateral report required pursuant to Section 4.3(b) hereof and such other documents and collateral information as Bank may from time to time require. As used herein, “Formula Period” shall mean a period commencing from the first day of the calendar month immediately following a calendar month in which the average daily usage under the Line of Credit exceeds Fifteen Million Dollars ($15,000,000.00) and continuing up to and including the last day of a calendar quarter during which, in any month of such quarter, the average daily usage under the Line of Credit is equal to or less than Fifteen Million Dollars ($15,000,000.00).
(d) Borrowing and Repayment. Borrower may from time to time during the term of the Line of Credit borrow, partially or wholly repay its outstanding borrowings, and reborrow, subject to all of the limitations, terms and conditions contained herein or in the Line of Credit Note; provided however, that the total outstanding borrowings under the Line of Credit shall not at any time exceed the maximum principal amount available thereunder, as set forth above.
SECTION 1.2. INTEREST/FEES.
(a) Interest. The outstanding principal balance of each credit subject hereto shall bear interest, and the amount of each drawing paid under any Letter of Credit shall bear interest from the date such drawing is paid to the date such amount is fully repaid by Borrower, at the rate of interest set forth in each promissory note or other instrument or document executed in connection therewith.
(b) Computation and Payment. Interest shall be computed on the basis of a 360-day year, actual days elapsed. Interest shall be payable at the times and place set forth in each promissory note or other instrument or document required hereby.
(c) Unused Commitment Fee. Borrower shall pay to Bank a fee equal to ten-hundredths percent (0.10%) per annum (computed on the basis of a 360-day year, actual days elapsed) on the average daily unused amount of the Line of Credit, which fee shall be calculated on a calendar quarter basis by Bank and shall be due and payable by Borrower in arrears on the last day of each September, December, March and June.
(d) Letter of Credit Fees. Borrower shall pay to Bank (i) fees with respect to each standby Letter of Credit equal to 1.50% per annum (computed on the basis of a 360-day year,
 
- 2 -

actual days elapsed) of the face amount thereof, which fees shall be due and payable on each one-year anniversary of the issuance date of each such standby Letter of Credit and (ii) such other fees upon the issuance of each Letter of Credit, upon the payment or negotiation of each drawing under any Letter of Credit and upon the occurrence of any other activity with respect to any Letter of Credit (including without limitation, the transfer, amendment or cancellation of any Letter of Credit) determined in accordance with Bank’s standard fees and charges then in effect for such activity.
SECTION 1.3. COLLECTION OF PAYMENTS. Borrower authorizes Bank to collect all interest and fees due under the Line of Credit by charging Borrower’s deposit account number 4945-012565 with Bank, or any other deposit account maintained by Borrower with Bank, for the full amount thereof. Should there be insufficient funds in any such deposit account to pay all such sums when due, the full amount of such deficiency shall be immediately due and payable by Borrower.
SECTION 1.4. COLLATERAL.
As security for all indebtedness of Borrower to Bank subject hereto, Borrower hereby grants to Bank security interests of first priority in all Borrower’s accounts receivable and other rights to payment, general intangibles, inventory and equipment.
All of the foregoing shall be evidenced by and subject to the terms of such security agreements, financing statements, deeds of trust and other documents as Bank shall reasonably require, all in form and substance satisfactory to Bank. Borrower shall reimburse Bank immediately upon demand for all costs and expenses incurred by Bank in connection with any of the foregoing security, including without limitation, filing and recording fees and costs of appraisals, audits and title insurance.
SECTION 1.5. GUARANTIES. The payment and performance of all indebtedness and other obligations of Borrower to Bank hereunder and under the other Loan Documents shall be guaranteed by Tilly’s, Inc., as evidenced by and subject to the terms of guaranties in form and substance satisfactory to Bank and shall be secured by a first priority lien in favor of Bank on the equity interests of the Borrower owned by Tilly’s, Inc.
ARTICLE II
REPRESENTATIONS AND WARRANTIES
Borrower makes the following representations and warranties to Bank, which representations and warranties shall survive the execution of this Agreement and shall continue in full force and effect until the full and final payment, and satisfaction and discharge, of all obligations of Borrower to Bank subject to this Agreement.
SECTION 2.1. LEGAL STATUS. Borrower is a corporation, duly organized and existing and in good standing under the laws of the State of California, and is qualified or licensed to do business (and is in good standing as a foreign corporation, if applicable) in all jurisdictions in which such qualification or licensing is required or in which the failure to so qualify or to be so licensed could have a material adverse effect on Borrower.
 
- 3 -

SECTION 2.2. AUTHORIZATION AND VALIDITY. This Agreement and each promissory note, guarantee, security agreement, pledge agreement, contract, instrument and other document required hereby or at any time hereafter delivered to Bank in connection herewith (collectively, the “Loan Documents”) have been duly authorized, and upon their execution and delivery in accordance with the provisions hereof will constitute legal, valid and binding agreements and obligations of Borrower or the party which executes the same, enforceable in accordance with their respective terms.
SECTION 2.3. NO VIOLATION. The execution, delivery and performance by Borrower of each of the Loan Documents do not violate any provision of any law or regulation, or contravene any provision of the Articles of Incorporation or By-Laws of Borrower, or result in any breach of or default under any contract, obligation, indenture or other instrument to which Borrower is a party or by which Borrower may be bound.
SECTION 2.4. LITIGATION. There are no pending, or to the best of Borrower’s knowledge threatened, actions, claims, investigations, suits or proceedings by or before any governmental authority, arbitrator, court or administrative agency which could have a material adverse effect on the financial condition or operation of Borrower other than those disclosed by Borrower to Bank in writing prior to the date hereof.
SECTION 2.5. CORRECTNESS OF FINANCIAL STATEMENT. The financial statement of Borrower dated [                ], 2012, a true copy of which has been delivered by Borrower to Bank prior to the date hereof, (a) is complete and correct and presents fairly the financial condition of Borrower, (b) discloses all liabilities of Borrower that are required to be reflected or reserved against under generally accepted accounting principles, whether liquidated or unliquidated, fixed or contingent, and (c) has been prepared in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles consistently applied. Since the date of such financial statement there has been no material adverse change in the financial condition of Borrower, nor has Borrower mortgaged, pledged, granted a security interest in or otherwise encumbered any of its assets or properties except in favor of Bank or as otherwise permitted by Bank in writing.
SECTION 2.6. INCOME TAX RETURNS. Borrower has no knowledge of any pending assessments or adjustments of its income tax payable with respect to any year.
SECTION 2.7. NO SUBORDINATION. There is no agreement, indenture, contract or instrument to which Borrower is a party or by which Borrower may be bound that requires the subordination in right of payment of any of Borrower’s obligations subject to this Agreement to any other obligation of Borrower.
SECTION 2.8. PERMITS, FRANCHISES. Borrower possesses, and will hereafter possess, all permits, consents, approvals, franchises and licenses required and rights to all trademarks, trade names, patents, and fictitious names, if any, necessary to enable it to conduct the business in which it is now engaged in compliance with applicable law.
SECTION 2.9. ER1SA. Borrower is in compliance in all material respects with all applicable provisions of the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974, as amended or recodified from time to time (“ERISA”); Borrower has not violated any provision of any defined
 
- 4 -

employee pension benefit plan (as defined in ERISA) maintained or contributed to by Borrower (each, a “Plan”); no Reportable Event as defined in ERISA has occurred and is continuing with respect to any Plan initiated by Borrower; Borrower has met its minimum funding requirements under ERISA with respect to each Plan; and each Plan will be able to fulfill its benefit obligations as they come due in accordance with the Plan documents and under generally accepted accounting principles.
SECTION 2.10. OTHER OBLIGATIONS. Borrower is not in default on any obligation for borrowed money, any purchase money obligation or any other material lease, commitment, contract, instrument or obligation.
SECTION 2.11. ENVIRONMENTAL MATTERS. Except as disclosed by Borrower to Bank in writing prior to the date hereof, Borrower is in compliance in all material respects with all applicable federal or state environmental, hazardous waste, health and safety statutes, and any rules or regulations adopted pursuant thereto, which govern or affect any of Borrower’s operations and/or properties, including without limitation, the Comprehensive Environmental Response, Compensation and Liability Act of 1980, the Superfund Amendments and Reauthorization Act of 1986, the Federal Resource Conservation and Recovery Act of 1976, and the Federal Toxic Substances Control Act, as any of the same may be amended, modified or supplemented from time to time. None of the operations of Borrower is the subject of any federal or state investigation evaluating whether any remedial action involving a material expenditure is needed to respond to a release of any toxic or hazardous waste or substance into the environment. Borrower has no material contingent liability in connection with any release of any toxic or hazardous waste or substance into the environment.
ARTICLE III
CONDITIONS
SECTION 3.1. CONDITIONS OF EXTENSION OF CREDIT. The obligation of Bank to extend or continue to extend any credit contemplated by this Agreement is subject to the fulfillment to Bank’s satisfaction of all of the following conditions:
(a) Approval of Bank Counsel. All legal matters incidental to the extension of credit by Bank shall be satisfactory to Bank’s counsel.
(b) Documentation. Bank shall have received, in form and substance satisfactory to Bank, each of the following, duly executed:
 
 	(i)	This Agreement and each promissory note or other instrument or document required hereby.	
 
 	(ii)	Corporate Resolution: Borrowing.	
 
 	(iii)	Certificate of Incumbency.	
 
 	(iv)	Continuing Security Agreement: Rights to Payment and Inventory.	
 
 	(v)	Security Agreement: Equipment.	
 
 	(vi)	Disbursement Order.	
 
- 5 -

 	(vii)	A Continuing Guaranty and a Pledge Agreement executed by Tilly’s, Inc., together with a secretary’s certificate, board resolutions, and such other documents relating to Tilly’s, Inc. as required by Bank.	
 
 	(viii)	Such other documents as Bank may require under any other Section of this Agreement.	
(c) Financial Condition. There shall have been no material adverse change, as determined by Bank, in the financial condition or business of Borrower, nor any material decline, as determined by Bank, in the market value of any collateral required hereunder or a substantial or material portion of the assets of Borrower.
(d) Insurance. Borrower shall have delivered to Bank evidence of insurance coverage on all Borrower’s property, in form, substance, amounts, covering risks and issued by companies satisfactory to Bank, and where required by Bank, with loss payable endorsements in favor of Bank.
SECTION 3.2. CONDITIONS OF EACH EXTENSION OF CREDIT. The obligation of Bank to make each extension of credit requested by Borrower hereunder shall be subject to the fulfillment to Bank’s satisfaction of each of the following conditions:
(a) Compliance. The representations and warranties contained herein and in each of the other Loan Documents shall be true on and as of the date of the signing of this Agreement and on the date of each extension of credit by Bank pursuant hereto, with the same effect as though such representations and warranties had been made on and as of each such date, and on each such date, (i) no material adverse change in the business, assets, operations, prospects or condition (financial or otherwise) of the Borrower, the ability of the Borrower to perform any of its obligations under this Agreement or under any of the other Loan Documents, or the rights of or benefits available to the Bank under this Agreement or any of the other Loan Documents shall have occurred, and (ii) no Event of Default as defined herein, and no condition, event or act which with the giving of notice or the passage of time or both would constitute such an Event of Default, shall have occurred and be continuing or shall exist.
(b) Documentation. Bank shall have received all additional documents which may be required in connection with such extension of credit.
(c) Additional Letter of Credit Documentation. Prior to the issuance of each Letter of Credit, Bank shall have received a Letter of Credit Agreement, properly completed and duly executed by Borrower.
ARTICLE IV
AFFIRMATIVE COVENANTS
Borrower covenants that so long as Bank remains committed to extend credit to Borrower pursuant hereto, or any liabilities (whether direct or contingent, liquidated or unliquidated) of Borrower to Bank under any of the Loan Documents remain outstanding, and until payment in full of all obligations of Borrower subject hereto, Borrower shall, unless Bank otherwise consents in writing:
 
- 6 -

SECTION 4.1. PUNCTUAL PAYMENTS. Punctually pay all principal, interest, fees or other liabilities due under any of the Loan Documents at the times and place and in the manner specified therein, and immediately upon demand by Bank, the amount by which the outstanding principal balance of any credit subject hereto at any time exceeds any limitation on borrowings applicable thereto.
SECTION 4.2. ACCOUNTING RECORDS. Maintain adequate books and records in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles consistently applied, and permit any representative of Bank, at any reasonable time, to inspect, audit and examine such books and records, to make copies of the same, and to inspect the properties of Borrower.
SECTION 4.3. FINANCIAL STATEMENTS. Provide to Bank all of the following, in form and detail satisfactory to Bank:
(a) not later than 90 days after and as of the end of each fiscal year, audited consolidated and consolidating financial statements of Tilly’s, Inc., prepared by an independent certified public accountant acceptable to Bank, to include consolidated and consolidating balance sheet, income statement and statement of cash flow, management report, and auditor’s report, together with all supporting schedules and footnotes;
(b) [commencing with the fiscal quarter ending             , 2012,] not later than 45 days after and as of the end of each fiscal quarter, consolidated and consolidating financial statements of Tilly’s, Inc., prepared by Tilly’s, Inc., to include a balance sheet and income statement [, and with respect to each fiscal quarter ending prior to             , 2012, quarterly financial statements of Borrower, prepared by Borrower, to include a balance sheet and income statement];
(c) not later than 45 days after and as of the end of each fiscal quarter, a store profit and loss statement, prepared by Borrower, to include all revenues and expenses on an individual store basis for all of the Borrower’s then operating retail clothing store locations;
(d) contemporaneously with each delivery of annual and quarterly consolidated financial statements required hereby, a certificate of the president or chief financial officer of Borrower that said financial statements are accurate, that there exists no Event of Default nor any condition, act, or event which with the giving of notice or the passage of time or both would constitute an Event of Default, and setting forth in reasonable detail calculations of the financial covenants set forth in Section 4.9 hereof;
(e) not later than 90 days after commencement of each fiscal year of Tilly’s, Inc., projections for such fiscal year and for each quarter thereof including forecasted consolidated balance sheets and statements of income, together with an explanation of the assumptions on which such forecasts are based;
(f) promptly upon request by Bank, copies of audit reports, management letters or recommendations submitted to the board of directors (or any committee thereof) of Tilly’s, Inc. or the Borrower by independent accountants in connection with the accounts or books of such companies or any audit thereof;
 
- 7 -

(g) promptly after the same become available, copies of each annual report, proxy or financial statement or other report or communication sent to the stockholders of Tilly’s, Inc., and copies of all annual, regular, periodic and special reports and registration statements which Tilly’s, Inc. or Borrower may file or be required to file with the U.S. Securities and Exchange Commission and not otherwise required to be delivered to Bank pursuant to this Agreement;
(h) from time to time such other information as Bank may reasonably request.
Documents required to be delivered pursuant to Section 4.3(a), 4.3(b) and 4.3(g) (to the extent any such documents are included in materials otherwise filed with the U.S. Securities and Exchange Commission) may be delivered electronically and if so delivered, shall be deemed to have been delivered on the date (i) on which Tilly’s, Inc. posts such documents, or provides a link thereto on the website of Tilly’s, Inc. on the Internet at the website address www.tillys.com or another website address provided by the Borrower in a written notice to Bank or (ii) on which such documents are posted on a publicly available website maintained by or on behalf of the U.S. Securities and Exchange Commission for access to documents filed in the EDGAR database;  provided  that the Borrower shall notify Bank (by telecopier or electronic mail) of the posting of any such documents and, if requested by Bank, provide to Bank by electronic mail electronic versions (i.e., soft copies) of such documents.
SECTION 4.4. COMPLIANCE. Preserve and maintain all licenses, permits, governmental approvals, rights, privileges and franchises necessary for the conduct of its business; and comply with the provisions of all documents pursuant to which Borrower is organized and/or which govern Borrower’s continued existence and with the requirements of all laws, rules, regulations and orders of any governmental authority applicable to Borrower and/or its business.
SECTION 4.5. INSURANCE. Maintain and keep in force insurance of the types and in amounts customarily carried in lines of business similar to that of Borrower, including but not limited to fire, extended coverage, public liability, flood, property damage and workers’ compensation, with all such insurance carried with companies and in amounts satisfactory to Bank, and deliver to Bank from time to time at Bank’s request schedules setting forth all insurance then in effect.
SECTION 4.6. FACILITIES. Keep all properties useful or necessary to Borrower’s business in good repair and condition, and from time to time make necessary repairs, renewals and replacements thereto so that such properties shall be fully and efficiently preserved and maintained.
SECTION 4.7. TAXES AND OTHER LIABILITIES. Pay and discharge when due any and all indebtedness, obligations, assessments and taxes, both real or personal, including without limitation federal and state income taxes and state and local property taxes and assessments, except such (a) as Borrower may in good faith contest or as to which a bona fide dispute may arise, and (b) for which Borrower has made provision, to Bank’s satisfaction, for eventual payment thereof in the event Borrower is obligated to make such payment.
SECTION 4.8. LITIGATION. Promptly give notice in writing to Bank of any litigation pending or threatened against Borrower (i) affecting Tilly’s, Inc., Borrower or any of their
 
- 8 -

respective subsidiaries which, individually or in the aggregate, could reasonably be expected to have a material adverse effect on Borrower or such entity or involve a monetary claim in excess of $1,000,000, (ii) affecting or with respect to this Agreement, any other Loan Document or any security interest or lien created thereunder or (iii) involving an environmental claim or potential liability under environmental laws in excess of $500,000.
SECTION 4.9. FINANCIAL CONDITION. Maintain Borrower as a consolidated subsidiary of Tilly’s, Inc. for accounting purposes, and maintain Borrower’s financial condition as follows using generally accepted accounting principles consistently applied and used consistently with prior practices (except to the extent modified by the definitions herein):
(a) Current Ratio not at any time less than 1.25 to 1.00, determined as of the end of each fiscal quarter, with “Current Ratio” defined as total current assets of Tilly’s, Inc. and its consolidated subsidiaries divided by total current liabilities.
(b) Net Profit Before Tax of Tilly’s, Inc. and its consolidated subsidiaries not less than $1.00, excluding a non-cash expense of up to a maximum of $2,000,000.00 for the write-off of impaired fixed assets as per the requirements of Accounting Standard Classification Topic ASC 360 for the cumulative rolling four-quarter period being measured, determined as of the end of each fiscal quarter on a cumulative rolling four-quarter basis.
(c) Total Funded Debt to EBITDAR of Tilly’s, Inc. and its consolidated subsidiaries not greater than 4.00 to 1.00 as of each quarter end, determined on a rolling four-quarter basis, with “Funded Debt” defined as the sum of (i) all obligations for borrowed money, (ii) capital leases, and (iii) annual rent expense from all operating leases multiplied by eight (8) and “EBITDAR” defined as the sum of net income, interest expense, taxes, depreciation, amortization and annual rent expense.
SECTION 4.10. NOTICE TO BANK. Promptly (but in no event more than five (5) days after the occurrence of each such event or matter) give written notice to Bank in reasonable detail of: (a) the occurrence of any Event of Default, or any condition, event or act which with the giving of notice or the passage of time or both would constitute an Event of Default; (b) any change in the name or the organizational structure of Borrower; (c) the occurrence and nature of any Reportable Event or Prohibited Transaction, each as defined in ERISA, or any funding deficiency with respect to any Plan; or (d) any termination or cancellation of any insurance policy which Borrower is required to maintain, or any material uninsured or partially uninsured loss through liability or property damage, or through fire, theft or any other cause affecting Borrower’s property.
ARTICLE V
NEGATIVE COVENANTS
Borrower further covenants that so long as Bank remains committed to extend credit to Borrower pursuant hereto, or any liabilities (whether direct or contingent, liquidated or unliquidated) of Borrower to Bank under any of the Loan Documents remain outstanding, and until payment in full of all obligations of Borrower subject hereto, Borrower will not without Bank’s prior written consent:
 
- 9 -

SECTION 5.1. USE OF FUNDS. Use any of the proceeds of any credit extended hereunder except for the purposes stated in Article I hereof.
SECTION 5.2. CAPITAL EXPENDITURES. Make any additional investment in fixed assets in any fiscal year in excess of an aggregate of $50,000,000.00.
SECTION 5.3. OTHER INDEBTEDNESS. Create, incur, assume or permit to exist any indebtedness or liabilities resulting from borrowings, loans or advances, whether secured or unsecured, matured or unmatured, liquidated or unliquidated, joint or several, except (a) the liabilities of Borrower to Bank, (b) additional debt in an amount not to exceed $1,500,000.00 in the aggregate, (c) debt evidenced by those certain promissory notes dated on or about the date hereof in an aggregate principal amount not to exceed $90,000,000.00, issued by Borrower in favor of certain stockholders of Borrower the terms of which have been approved by Bank so long as (i) such notes have been repaid in full and cancelled by not later than 14 days after the date thereof and (ii) no Event of Default as defined herein, and no condition, event or act which with the giving of notice or the passage of time or both would constitute such an Event of Default, shall exist at the time of such repayment or shall result therefrom, (d) any other liabilities of Borrower existing as of, and disclosed to Bank prior to, the date hereof, and (e) capital lease obligations relating to the Borrower’s distribution and corporate headquarters facility.
SECTION 5.4. MERGER, CONSOLIDATION, TRANSFER OF ASSETS. Merge into or consolidate with any other entity (except for mergers in connection with acquisitions expressly permitted under Section 5.6 in which the Borrower is the survivor); make any substantial change in the nature of Borrower’s business as conducted as of the date hereof; nor sell, lease, transfer or otherwise dispose of all or a substantial or material portion of Borrower’s assets except in the ordinary course of its business.
SECTION 5.5. GUARANTIES. Guarantee or become liable in any way as surety, endorser (other than as endorser of negotiable instruments for deposit or collection in the ordinary course of business), accommodation endorser or otherwise for, nor pledge or hypothecate any assets of Borrower as security for, any liabilities or obligations of any other person or entity, except any of the foregoing in favor of Bank.
SECTION 5.6. LOANS, ADVANCES, INVESTMENTS, ACQUISITIONS. Make any loans or advances to or investments in any person or entity, or acquire any other person or entity or all or substantially all of the assets of any other person or entity or any business unit thereof, except (i) loans and advances made to employees or shareholders of the Borrower, (ii) any of the foregoing existing as of, and disclosed to Bank prior to, the date hereof, and (iii) acquisitions that meet all of the following criteria: (a) the persons or assets to be acquired are in the same or substantially similar lines of business as the Borrower, (b) the board of directors or equivalent governing body of the other parties to each such acquisition have approved or consented to the acquisition, (c) immediately before and after giving effect to each such proposed acquisition, no Event of Default shall have occurred and be continuing, (d) Borrower shall be in pro forma compliance with the financial covenants set forth in Section 4.9 hereof after giving effect to each such acquisition, (e) the aggregate total consideration paid in connection with all such acquisitions made during the term of this Agreement shall not exceed $25,000,000, (f) Borrower shall have adequate cash on hand from its operations to pay the purchase price and other
 
- 10 -

consideration to be paid in connection with each such acquisition, and, in any case, no proceeds of the loans made under this Agreement shall be used to pay the consideration for any such acquisition, and (g) prior to the consummation of any such acquisition, Borrower shall have delivered to Bank documentation of each of the foregoing in form and substance reasonably acceptable to Bank. In addition (and notwithstanding the foregoing) Borrower shall not form, create or acquire any subsidiaries.
SECTION 5.7. DIVIDENDS, DISTRIBUTIONS. Declare or pay any dividend or distribution, either in cash, stock or any other property on Borrower’s stock now or hereafter outstanding, nor redeem, retire, repurchase or otherwise acquire any shares of any class of Borrower’s stock now or hereafter outstanding, other than (i) distributions to Tilly’s, Inc. in an amount in any fiscal year not to exceed the amount required to discharge the consolidated tax liability of Tilly’s, Inc. and the Borrower payable during such fiscal year and (ii) payments permitted under Section 5.3(c) hereof to the extent such payments constitute a dividend or distribution.
SECTION 5.8. PLEDGE OF ASSETS. Mortgage, pledge, grant or permit to exist a security interest in, or lien upon, all or any portion of Borrower’s assets now owned or hereafter acquired, except any of the foregoing in favor of Bank or which is existing as of, and disclosed to Bank in writing prior to, the date hereof.
SECTION 5.9. TRANSACTIONS WITH AFFILIATES. Enter into any transaction of any kind with any shareholder or affiliate of the Borrower or Tilly’s, Inc., whether or not in the ordinary course of business, other than on fair and reasonable terms substantially as favorable to Borrower as would be obtained by Borrower in a comparable arm’s length transaction with a person other than an affiliate, except that the foregoing shall not prohibit (i) tax distributions permitted by Section 5.7 hereof or (ii) payment of reasonable and customary fees for, and reimbursement of out-of-pocket expenses incurred by, members of the board of directors of Borrower or Tilly’s, Inc.
ARTICLE VI
EVENTS OF DEFAULT
SECTION 6.1. The occurrence of any of the following shall constitute an “Event of Default” under this Agreement:
(a) Borrower shall fail to pay when due any principal, interest, fees or other amounts payable under any of the Loan Documents.
(b) Any financial statement or certificate furnished to Bank in connection with, or any representation or warranty made by Borrower or any other party under this Agreement or any other Loan Document shall prove to be incorrect, false or misleading in any material respect when furnished or made.
(c) Any default in the performance of or compliance with any obligation, agreement or other provision contained herein or in any other Loan Document (other than those specifically described as an “Event of Default” in this Section 6.1), and with respect to any such default which by its nature can be cured, such default shall continue for a period of twenty (20) days after the earlier of (i) an officer of Borrower becoming aware of such default or (ii) receipt by Borrower of notice from Bank of such default’s occurrence.
 
- 11 -

(d) Any default in the payment or performance of any obligation, or any defined event of default, under the terms of any contract or instrument (other than any of the Loan Documents) pursuant to which Borrower, any guarantor hereunder or any general partner or joint venturer in Borrower if a partnership or joint venture (with each such guarantor, general partner and/or joint venturer referred to herein as a “Third Party Obligor”) has incurred (i) any debt or other liability to Bank or (ii) any debt or other liability to any other person or entity in an individual principal amount of $500,000 or more or with an aggregate principal amount of $1,000,000 or more.
(e) Borrower or any Third Party Obligor shall become insolvent, or shall suffer or consent to or apply for the appointment of a receiver, trustee, custodian or liquidator of itself or any of its property, or shall generally fail to pay its debts as they become due, or shall make a general assignment for the benefit of creditors; Borrower or any Third Party Obligor shall file a voluntary petition in bankruptcy, or seeking reorganization, in order to effect a plan or other arrangement with creditors or any other relief under the Bankruptcy Reform Act, Title 11 of the United States Code, as amended or recodified from time to time (“Bankruptcy Code”), or under any state or federal law granting relief to debtors, whether now or hereafter in effect; or Borrower or any Third Party Obligor shall file an answer admitting the jurisdiction of the court and the material allegations of any involuntary petition; or Borrower or any Third Party Obligor shall be adjudicated a bankrupt, or an order for relief shall be entered against Borrower or any Third Party Obligor by any court of competent jurisdiction under the Bankruptcy Code or any other applicable state or federal law relating to bankruptcy, reorganization or other relief for debtors.
(f) The filing of a notice of judgment lien against Borrower or any Third Party Obligor; or the recording of any abstract of judgment against Borrower or any Third Party Obligor in any county in which Borrower or such Third Party Obligor has an interest in real property; or the service of a notice of levy and/or of a writ of attachment or execution, or other like process, against the assets of Borrower or any Third Party Obligor; or the entry of a judgment against Borrower or any Third Party Obligor; or any involuntary petition or proceeding pursuant to the Bankruptcy Code or any other applicable state or federal law relating to bankruptcy, reorganization or other relief for debtors is filed or commenced against Borrower or any Third Party Obligor.
(g) There shall exist or occur any event or condition that Bank in good faith believes impairs, or is substantially to impair, the prospect of payment or performance by Borrower, any Third Party Obligor, or the general partner of either if such entity is a partnership, of its obligations under any of the Loan Documents.
(h) The death or incapacity of Borrower or any Third Party Obligor if an individual; the dissolution or liquidation of Borrower or any Third Party Obligor if a corporation, partnership, joint venture or other type of entity; or Borrower or any such Third Party Obligor, or any of its directors, stockholders or members shall take action seeking to effect the dissolution or liquidation of Borrower or such Third Party Obligor.
(i) Any Loan Document, at any time after its execution and delivery for any reason other than satisfaction in full of all the Obligations, ceases to be in full force and effect; or any
 
- 12 -

Loan Party contests in any manner the validity or enforceability of any Loan Document; or any Loan Party denies that it has any further liability or obligation under any Loan Document or purports to revoke, terminate or rescind any Loan Document.
(j) Tilly’s, Inc. shall cease to own and control 100% of the issued and outstanding capital stock of the Borrower, or, as to Tilly’s, Inc., (i) any “person” or “group” (as such terms are used in Sections 13(d) and 14(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934) other than Hezy Shaked and Tialit Levine (and their respective heirs and executors, and trusts as to which they are settlors or trustees or other trusts to which such trusts are settlors) shall become the “beneficial owner” (as defined in Rules 13d-3 and 13d-5 under the Securities Exchange Act of 1934), directly or indirectly, of 25% or more of the equity interests of Tilly’s, Inc. entitled to vote for members of the board of directors of Tilly’s, Inc. on a fully-diluted basis or (ii) during any period of 12 consecutive months, a majority of the members of the board of directors of Tilly’s, Inc. cease to be composed of individuals who either were members of such board on the first day of such period or whose election or nomination to such board was approved by individuals who at the time of such election or nomination constituted at least a majority of such board (excluding, in each case, any individual whose initial nomination for or assumption of office as a member of such board occurred as a result of a solicitation of proxies or consents that was not made by or on behalf of the board of directors).
(k) Tilly’s, Inc. shall (i) engage in any business other than (A) entering into and performing its obligations under, and in accordance with, the Loan Documents to which it is a party, (B) owning the capital stock of Borrower and (C) issuing its own capital stock or options to acquire such capital stock, (ii) incur any indebtedness other than (A) its guarantee of the obligations of Borrower hereunder in favor of Bank and (B) its guarantee of the indebtedness or liabilities of Borrower permitted under Section 5.3 hereof and of Borrower’s obligations under real property leases entered into by Borrower in the ordinary course of business, or (iii) own any assets other than the capital stock of Borrower and cash and cash equivalents.
SECTION 6.2. REMEDIES. Upon the occurrence of any Event of Default: (a) all indebtedness of Borrower under each of the Loan Documents, any term thereof to the contrary notwithstanding, shall at Bank’s option and without notice become immediately due and payable without presentment, demand, protest or notice of dishonor, all of which are hereby expressly waived by each Borrower; (b) the obligation, if any, of Bank to extend any further credit under any of the Loan Documents shall immediately cease and terminate; and (c) Bank shall have all rights, powers and remedies available under each of the Loan Documents, or accorded by law, including without limitation the right to resort to any or all security for any credit subject hereto and to exercise any or all of the rights of a beneficiary or secured party pursuant to applicable law. All rights, powers and remedies of Bank may be exercised at any time by Bank and from time to time after the occurrence of an Event of Default, are cumulative and not exclusive, and shall be in addition to any other rights, powers or remedies provided by law or equity.
ARTICLE VII
MISCELLANEOUS
SECTION 7.1. NO WAIVER. No delay, failure or discontinuance of Bank in exercising any right, power or remedy under any of the Loan Documents shall affect or operate
 
- 13 -

as a waiver of such right, power or remedy; nor shall any single or partial exercise of any such right, power or remedy preclude, waive or otherwise affect any other or further exercise thereof or the exercise of any other right, power or remedy. Any waiver, permit, consent or approval of any kind by Bank of any breach of or default under any of the Loan Documents must be in writing and shall be effective only to the extent set forth in such writing.
SECTION 7.2. NOTICES. All notices, requests and demands which any party is required or may desire to give to any other party under any provision of this Agreement must be in writing delivered to each party at the following address:

 	 	BORROWER:	  	WORLD OF JEANS & TOPS	
 	 	 	  	10 Whatney
Irvine, CA 92618|	
 	 	 	
 	 	 	  	With a copy to:	
 	 	 	
 	 	 	  	Legal Department	
 	 	 	  	10 Whatney	
 	 	 	  	Irvine, CA 92618	
 	 	 	
 	 	BANK:	  	WELLS FARGO BANK, NATIONAL ASSOCIATION	
 	 	 	  	Orange Coast Regional Commercial Banking Office
2030 Main Street, Suite 900	
 	 	 	  	Irvine, CA 92614	
or to such other address as any party may designate by written notice to all other parties. Each such notice, request and demand shall be deemed given or made as follows: (a) if sent by hand delivery, upon delivery; (b) if sent by mail, upon the earlier of the date of receipt or three (3) days after deposit in the U.S. mail, first class and postage prepaid; and (c) if sent by telecopy, upon receipt.
SECTION 7.3. COSTS, EXPENSES AND ATTORNEYS’ FEES. Borrower shall pay to Bank immediately upon demand the full amount of all payments, advances, charges, costs and expenses, including reasonable attorneys’ fees (to include outside counsel fees and all allocated costs of Bank’s in-house counsel), expended or incurred by Bank in connection with (a) the negotiation and preparation of this Agreement and the other Loan Documents, Bank’s continued administration hereof and thereof, and the preparation of any amendments and waivers hereto and thereto, (b) the enforcement of Bank’s rights and/or the collection of any amounts which become due to Bank under any of the Loan Documents, and (c) the prosecution or defense of any action in any way related to any of the Loan Documents, including without limitation, any action for declaratory relief, whether incurred at the trial or appellate level, in an arbitration proceeding or otherwise, and including any of the foregoing incurred in connection with any bankruptcy proceeding (including without limitation, any adversary proceeding, contested matter or motion brought by Bank or any other person) relating to any Borrower or any other person or entity.
SECTION 7.4. SUCCESSORS, ASSIGNMENT. This Agreement shall be binding upon and inure to the benefit of the heirs, executors, administrators, legal representatives, successors and assigns of the parties; provided however, that Borrower may not assign or
 
- 14 -

transfer its interest hereunder without Bank’s prior written consent. Bank reserves the right to sell, assign, transfer, negotiate or grant participations in all or any part of, or any interest in, Bank’s rights and benefits under each of the Loan Documents. In connection therewith, Bank may disclose all documents and information which Bank now has or may hereafter acquire relating to any credit subject hereto, Borrower or its business, or any collateral required hereunder.
SECTION 7.5. ENTIRE AGREEMENT; AMENDMENT. This Agreement and the other Loan Documents constitute the entire agreement between Borrower and Bank with respect to each credit subject hereto and supersede all prior negotiations, communications, discussions and correspondence concerning the subject matter hereof. This Agreement may be amended or modified only in writing signed by each party hereto.
SECTION 7.6. NO THIRD PARTY BENEFICIARIES, This Agreement is made and entered into for the sole protection and benefit of the parties hereto and their respective permitted successors and assigns, and no other person or entity shall be a third party beneficiary of, or have any direct or indirect cause of action or claim in connection with, this Agreement or any other of the Loan Documents to which it is not a party.
SECTION 7.7. TIME. Time is of the essence of each and every provision of this Agreement and each other of the Loan Documents.
SECTION 7.8. SEVERABILITY OF PROVISIONS. If any provision of this Agreement shall be prohibited by or invalid under applicable law, such provision shall be ineffective only to the extent of such prohibition or invalidity without invalidating the remainder of such provision or any remaining provisions of this Agreement.
SECTION 7.9. COUNTERPARTS. This Agreement may be executed in any number of counterparts, each of which when executed and delivered shall be deemed to be an original, and all of which when taken together shall constitute one and the same Agreement.
SECTION 7.10. GOVERNING LAW. This Agreement shall be governed by and construed in accordance with the laws of the State of California.
SECTION 7.11. ARBITRATION.
(a) Arbitration. The parties hereto agree, upon demand by any party, to submit to binding arbitration all claims, disputes and controversies between or among them (and their respective employees, officers, directors, attorneys, and other agents), whether in tort, contract or otherwise arising out of or relating to in any way (i) the loan and related Loan Documents which are the subject of this Agreement and its negotiation, execution, collateralization, administration, repayment, modification, extension, substitution, formation, inducement, enforcement, default or termination; or (ii) requests for additional credit.
(b) Governing Rules. Any arbitration proceeding will (i) proceed in a location in California selected by the American Arbitration Association (“AAA”); (ii) be governed by the Federal Arbitration Act (Title 9 of the United States Code), notwithstanding any conflicting choice of law provision in any of the documents between the parties; and (iii) be conducted by
 
- 15 -

the AAA, or such other administrator as the parties shall mutually agree upon, in accordance with the AAA’s commercial dispute resolution procedures, unless the claim or counterclaim is at least $1,000,000.00 exclusive of claimed interest, arbitration fees and costs in which case the arbitration shall be conducted in accordance with the AAA’s optional procedures for large, complex commercial disputes (the commercial dispute resolution procedures or the optional procedures for large, complex commercial disputes to be referred to, as applicable, as the “Rules”). If there is any inconsistency between the terms hereof and the Rules, the terms and procedures set forth herein shall control. Any party who fails or refuses to submit to arbitration following a demand by any other party shall bear all costs and expenses incurred by such other party in compelling arbitration of any dispute. Nothing contained herein shall be deemed to be a waiver by any party that is a bank of the protections afforded to it under 12 U.S.C. §91 or any similar applicable state law.
(c) No Waiver of Provisional Remedies, Self-Help and Foreclosure. The arbitration requirement does not limit the right of any party to (i) foreclose against real or personal property collateral; (ii) exercise self-help remedies relating to collateral or proceeds of collateral such as setoff or repossession; or (iii) obtain provisional or ancillary remedies such as replevin, injunctive relief, attachment or the appointment of a receiver, before during or after the pendency of any arbitration proceeding. This exclusion does not constitute a waiver of the right or obligation of any party to submit any dispute to arbitration or reference hereunder, including those arising from the exercise of the actions detailed in sections (i), (ii) and (iii) of this paragraph.
(d) Arbitrator Qualifications and Powers. Any arbitration proceeding in which the amount in controversy is $5,000,000.00 or less will be decided by a single arbitrator selected according to the Rules, and who shall not render an award of greater than $5,000,000.00. Any dispute in which the amount in controversy exceeds $5,000,000.00 shall be decided by majority vote of a panel of three arbitrators; provided however, that all three arbitrators must actively participate in all hearings and deliberations. The arbitrator will be a neutral attorney licensed in the State of California or a neutral retired judge of the state or federal judiciary of California, in either case with a minimum of ten years experience in the substantive law applicable to the subject matter of the dispute to be arbitrated. The arbitrator will determine whether or not an issue is arbitratable and will give effect to the statutes of limitation in determining any claim. In any arbitration proceeding the arbitrator will decide (by documents only or with a hearing at the arbitrator’s discretion) any pre-hearing motions which are similar to motions to dismiss for failure to state a claim or motions for summary adjudication. The arbitrator shall resolve all disputes in accordance with the substantive law of California and may grant any remedy or relief that a court of such state could order or grant within the scope hereof and such ancillary relief as is necessary to make effective any award. The arbitrator shall also have the power to award recovery of all costs and fees, to impose sanctions and to take such other action as the arbitrator deems necessary to the same extent a judge could pursuant to the Federal Rules of Civil Procedure, the California Rules of Civil Procedure or other applicable law. Judgment upon the award rendered by the arbitrator may be entered in any court having jurisdiction. The institution and maintenance of an action for judicial relief or pursuit of a provisional or ancillary remedy shall not constitute a waiver of the right of any party, including the plaintiff, to submit the controversy or claim to arbitration if any other party contests such action for judicial relief.
 
- 16 -

(e) Discovery. In any arbitration proceeding discovery will be permitted in accordance with the Rules. All discovery shall be expressly limited to matters directly relevant to the dispute being arbitrated and must be completed no later than 20 days before the hearing date and within 180 days of the filing of the dispute with the AAA. Any requests for an extension of the discovery periods, or any discovery disputes, will be subject to final determination by the arbitrator upon a showing that the request for discovery is essential for the party’s presentation and that no alternative means for obtaining information is available.
(f) Class Proceedings and Consolidations. The resolution of any dispute arising pursuant to the terms of this Agreement shall be determined by a separate arbitration proceeding and such dispute shall not be consolidated with other disputes or included in any class proceeding.
(g) Payment Of Arbitration Costs And Fees. The arbitrator shall award all costs and expenses of the arbitration proceeding.
(h) Real Property Collateral; Judicial Reference. Notwithstanding anything herein to the contrary, no dispute shall be submitted to arbitration if the dispute concerns indebtedness secured directly or indirectly, in whole or in part, by any real property unless (i) the holder of the mortgage, lien or security interest specifically elects in writing to proceed with the arbitration, or (ii) all parties to the arbitration waive any rights or benefits that might accrue to them by virtue of the single action rule statute of California, thereby agreeing that all indebtedness and obligations of the parties, and all mortgages, liens and security interests securing such indebtedness and obligations, shall remain fully valid and enforceable. If any such dispute is not submitted to arbitration, the dispute shall be referred to a referee in accordance with California Code of Civil Procedure Section 638 et seq., and this general reference agreement is intended to be specifically enforceable in accordance with said Section 638. A referee with the qualifications required herein for arbitrators shall be selected pursuant to the AAA’s selection procedures. Judgment upon the decision rendered by a referee shall be entered in the court in which such proceeding was commenced in accordance with California Code of Civil Procedure Sections 644 and 645.
(i) Miscellaneous. To the maximum extent practicable, the AAA, the arbitrators and the parties shall take all action required to conclude any arbitration proceeding within 180 days of the filing of the dispute with the AAA. No arbitrator or other party to an arbitration proceeding may disclose the existence, content or results thereof, except for disclosures of information by a party required in the ordinary course of its business or by applicable law or regulation. If more than one agreement for arbitration by or between the parties potentially applies to a dispute, the arbitration provision most directly related to the Loan Documents or the subject matter of the dispute shall control. This arbitration provision shall survive termination, amendment or expiration of any of the Loan Documents or any relationship between the parties.
(j) Small Claims Court. Notwithstanding anything herein to the contrary, each party retains the right to pursue in Small Claims Court any dispute within that court’s jurisdiction. Further, this arbitration provision shall apply only to disputes in which either party seeks to recover an amount of money (excluding attorneys’ fees and costs) that exceeds the jurisdictional limit of the Small Claims Court.
 
- 17 -

SECTION 7.12. NO NOVATION OR IMPAIRMENT OF SECURITY INTERESTS. This Agreement shall not cause a novation, payment and reborrowing, or termination of any of the indebtedness or obligations of Borrower under the Existing Credit Agreement or other loan documents executed in connection therewith (collectively, the “Existing Loan Documents”), nor shall it extinguish, discharge, terminate or impair Borrower’s indebtedness or obligations or Bank’s rights or remedies under the Existing Credit Agreement and the other Existing Loan Documents; provided, however, that all such indebtedness, obligations, rights and remedies shall be on the terms and conditions of, and as set forth in, this Agreement and the Loan Documents. In addition, this Agreement shall not release, limit or impair in any way the priority of any security interests and liens held by Bank against any assets of Borrower arising under the Existing Credit Agreement or the other Existing Loan Documents.
 
- 18 -

IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties hereto have caused this Agreement to be executed as of the day and year first written above.

WORLD OF JEANS & TOPS	    	WELLS FARGO BANK,
NATIONAL ASOCIATION	
 	 	 	 	
By:	 	 	    	By:	  	 	
 	 	Name:	 	 	    	 	  	Name:	  	 	
 	 	Title:	 	 	    	 	  	Title:	  	 	
 
- 19 -

Exhibit A
Form of Line of Credit Note

 	 	 	
WELLS FARGO	 	REVOLVING LINE OF CREDIT NOTE	
 	 	
$25,000,000.00	 	Irvine, California	
 	 	[            ], 2012	
FOR VALUE RECEIVED, the undersigned WORLD OF JEANS & TOPS (“Borrower”) promises to pay to the order of WELLS FARGO BANK, NATIONAL ASSOCIATION (“Bank”) at its office at Orange County RCBO, 2030 Main Street, Suite #900, Irvine, CA 92614, or at such other place as the holder hereof may designate, in lawful money of the United States of America and in immediately available funds, the principal sum of $25,000,000.00, or so much thereof as may be advanced and be outstanding, with interest thereon, to be computed on each advance from the date of its disbursement as set forth herein.
ARTICLE VIIIDEFINITIONS.
As used herein, the following terms shall have the meanings set forth after each, and any other term defined in this Note shall have the meaning set forth at the place defined:
SECTION 8.1. “Business Day” means any day except a Saturday, Sunday or any other day on which commercial banks in California are authorized or required by law to close.
SECTION 8.2. “Fixed Rate Term” means a period commencing on a Business Day and continuing for 1, 2 or 3 months, as designated by Borrower, during which all or a portion of the outstanding principal balance of the Note bears interest determined in relation to LIBOR; provided however, that no Fixed Rate Term may be selected for a principal amount less than $100,000.00; and provided further, that no Fixed Rate Term shall extend beyond the scheduled maturity date hereof. If any Fixed Rate Term would end on a day which is not a Business Day, then such Fixed Rate Term shall be extended to the next succeeding Business Day.
SECTION 8.3. “LIBOR” means the rate per annum (rounded upward, if necessary, to the nearest whole 1/8 of 1%) determined pursuant to the following formula:

 	 	LIBOR =	  	Base LIBOR	  	 	
 	 	 	  	100% - LIBOR Reserve Percentage	  	 	
(a) “Base LIBOR” means the rate per annum for United States dollar deposits quoted by Bank as the Inter-Bank Market Offered Rate, with the understanding that such rate is quoted by Bank for the purpose of calculating effective rates of interest for loans making reference thereto, on the first day of a Fixed Rate Term for delivery of funds on said date for a period of time approximately equal to the number of days in such Fixed Rate Term and in an amount approximately equal to the principal amount to which such Fixed Rate Term applies. Borrower understands and agrees that Bank may base its quotation of the Inter-Bank Market Offered Rate upon such offers or other market indicators of the Inter-Bank Market as Bank in its discretion deems appropriate including, but not limited to, the rate offered for U.S. dollar deposits on the London Inter-Bank Market.

(b) “LIBOR Reserve Percentage” means the reserve percentage prescribed by the Board of Governors of the Federal Reserve System (or any successor) for “Eurocurrency Liabilities” (as defined in Regulation D of the Federal Reserve Board, as amended), adjusted by Bank for expected changes in such reserve percentage during the applicable Fixed Rate Term.
SECTION 8.4. “Prime Rate” means at any time the rate of interest most recently announced within Bank at its principal office as its Prime Rate, with the understanding that the Prime Rate is one of Bank’s base rates and serves as the basis upon which effective rates of interest are calculated for those loans making reference thereto, and is evidenced by the recording thereof after its announcement in such internal publication or publications as Bank may designate.
ARTICLE IXINTEREST.
SECTION 9.1. Interest. The outstanding principal balance of this Note shall bear interest (computed on the basis of a 360-day year, actual days elapsed) either (a) at a fluctuating rate per annum equal to 0.00000% above the Prime Rate in effect from time to time, or (b) at a fixed rate per annum determined by Bank to be 1.75000% above LIBOR in effect on the first day of the applicable Fixed Rate Term. When interest is determined in relation to the Prime Rate, each change in the rate of interest hereunder shall become effective on the date each Prime Rate change is announced within Bank. With respect to each LIBOR selection hereunder, Bank is hereby authorized to note the date, principal amount, interest rate and Fixed Rate Term applicable thereto and any payments made thereon on Bank’s books and records (either manually or by electronic entry) and/or on any schedule attached to this Note, which notations shall be prima facie evidence of the accuracy of the information noted.
SECTION 9.2. Selection of Interest Rate Options. At any time any portion of this Note bears interest determined in relation to LIBOR, it may be continued by Borrower at the end of the Fixed Rate Term applicable thereto so that all or a portion thereof bears interest determined in relation to the Prime Rate or to LIBOR for a new Fixed Rate Term designated by Borrower. At any time any portion of this Note bears interest determined in relation to the Prime Rate, Borrower may convert all or a portion thereof so that it bears interest determined in relation to LIBOR for a Fixed Rate Term designated by Borrower. At such time as Borrower requests an advance hereunder or wishes to select a LIBOR option for all or a portion of the outstanding principal balance hereof, and at the end of each Fixed Rate Term, Borrower shall give Bank notice specifying: (a) the interest rate option selected by Borrower; (b) the principal amount subject thereto; and (c) for each LIBOR selection, the length of the applicable Fixed Rate Term. Any such notice may be given by telephone (or such other electronic method as Bank may permit) so long as, with respect to each LIBOR selection, (i) if requested by Bank, Borrower provides to Bank written confirmation thereof not later than 3 Business Days after such notice is given, and (ii) such notice is given to Bank prior to 10:00 a.m. on the first day of the Fixed Rate Term, or at a later time during any Business Day if Bank, at its sole option but without obligation to do so, accepts Borrower’s notice and quotes a fixed rate to Borrower. If Borrower does not immediately accept a fixed rate when quoted by Bank, the quoted rate shall expire and any subsequent LIBOR request from Borrower shall be subject to redetermination by Bank of the applicable fixed rate. If no specific designation of interest is made at the time any advance is requested hereunder or at the end of any Fixed Rate Term, Borrower shall be deemed to have

made a Prime Rate interest selection for such advance or the principal amount to which such Fixed Rate Term applied.
SECTION 9.3. Taxes and Regulatory Costs. Borrower shall pay to Bank immediately upon demand, in addition to any other amounts due or to become due hereunder, any and all (a) withholdings, interest equalization taxes, stamp taxes or other taxes (except income and franchise taxes) imposed by any domestic or foreign governmental authority and related in any manner to LIBOR, and (b) future, supplemental, emergency or other changes in the LIBOR Reserve Percentage, assessment rates imposed by the Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation or similar requirements or costs imposed by any domestic or foreign governmental authority or resulting from compliance by Bank with any request or directive (whether or not having the force of law) from any central bank or other governmental authority and related in any manner to LIBOR to the extent they are not included in the calculation of LIBOR. In determining which of the foregoing are attributable to any LIBOR option available to Borrower hereunder, any reasonable allocation made by Bank among its operations shall be conclusive and binding upon Borrower.
SECTION 9.4. Payment of Interest. Interest accrued on this Note shall be payable on the 1st day of each month, commencing [            ] 1, 2012.
SECTION 9.5. Default Interest. From and after the maturity date of this Note, or such earlier date as all principal owing hereunder becomes due and payable by acceleration or otherwise, or at Bank’s option upon the occurrence, and during the continuance of an Event of Default, the outside principal balance of this Note shall bear interest at an increased rate per annum (computed on the basis of a 360-day year, actual days elapsed) equal to 4% above the rate of interest from time to time applicable to this Note.
ARTICLE XBORROWING AND REPAYMENT.
SECTION 10.1. Borrowing and Repayment. Borrower may from time to time during the term of this Note borrow, partially or wholly repay its outstanding borrowings, and reborrow, subject to all of the limitations, terms and conditions of this Note and of the Credit Agreement between Borrower and Bank defined below; provided however, that the total outstanding borrowings under this Note shall not at any time exceed the principal amount stated above. The unpaid principal balance of this obligation at any time shall be the total amounts advanced hereunder by the holder hereof less the amount of principal payments made hereon by or for Borrower, which balance may be endorsed hereon from time to time by the holder. The outstanding principal balance of this Note shall be due and payable in full on [            ], 2014.
SECTION 10.2. Advances. Advances hereunder, to the total amount of the principal sum available hereunder, may be made by the holder at the oral or written request of (a) any authorized officer of Borrower, acting alone, who is authorized to request advances and direct the disposition of any advances and as to which the holder has received evidence of incumbency and such authorization, until written notice of revocation of such authority is received by the holder at the office designated above, or (b) any person, with respect to advances deposited to the credit of any deposit account of Borrower, which advances, when so deposited, shall be conclusively presumed to have been made to or for the benefit of Borrower regardless of the fact that persons other than those authorized to request advances may have authority to draw against

such account. The holder shall have no obligation to determine whether any person requesting an advance is or has been authorized by Borrower.
SECTION 10.3. Application of Payments. Each payment made on this Note shall be credited first, to any interest then due and second, to the outstanding principal balance hereof. All payments credited to principal shall be applied first, to the outstanding principal balance of this Note which bears interest determined in relation to the Prime Rate, if any, and second, to the outstanding principal balance of this Note which bears interest determined in relation to LIBOR, with such payments applied to the oldest Fixed Rate Term first.
ARTICLE XIPREPAYMENT.
SECTION 11.1. Prime Rate. Borrower may prepay principal on any portion of this Note which bears interest determined in relation to the Prime Rate at any time, in any amount and without penalty.
SECTION 11.2. LIBOR. Borrower may prepay principal on any portion of this Note which bears interest determined in relation to LIBOR at any time and in the minimum amount of $100,000.00; provided however, that if the outstanding principal balance of such portion of this Note is less than said amount, the minimum prepayment amount shall be the entire outstanding principal balance thereof. In consideration of Bank providing this prepayment option to Borrower, or if any such portion of this Note shall become due and payable at any time prior to the last day of the Fixed Rate Term applicable thereto by acceleration or otherwise, Borrower shall pay to Bank immediately upon demand a fee which is the sum of the discounted monthly differences for each month from the month of prepayment through the month in which such Fixed Rate Term matures, calculated as follows for each such month:
(a) Determine the amount of interest which would have accrued each month on the amount prepaid at the interest rate applicable to such amount had it remained outstanding until the last day of the Fixed Rate Term applicable thereto.
(b) Subtract from the amount determined in (a) above the amount of interest which would have accrued for the same month on the amount prepaid for the remaining term of such Fixed Rate Term at LIBOR in effect on the date of prepayment for new loans made for such term and in a principal amount equal to the amount prepaid.
(c) If the result obtained in (b) for any month is greater than zero, discount that difference by LIBOR used in (b) above.
Borrower acknowledges that prepayment of such amount may result in Bank incurring additional costs, expenses and/or liabilities, and that it is difficult to ascertain the full extent of such costs, expenses and/or liabilities. Borrower, therefore, agrees to pay the above-described prepayment fee and agrees that said amount represents a reasonable estimate of the prepayment costs, expenses and/or liabilities of Bank. If Borrower fails to pay any prepayment fee when due, the amount of such prepayment fee shall thereafter bear interest until paid at a rate per annum 2.000% above the Prime Rate in effect from time to time (computed on the basis of a 360-day year, actual days elapsed).

ARTICLE XIIEVENTS OF DEFAULT.
This Note is made pursuant to and is subject to the terms and conditions of that certain Amended and Restated Credit Agreement between Borrower and Bank dated as of [            ], 2012, as amended from time to time (the “Credit Agreement”). Any default in the payment or performance of any obligation under this Note, or any defined event of default under the Credit Agreement, shall constitute an “Event of Default” under this Note.
ARTICLE XIIIMISCELLANEOUS.
SECTION 13.1. Remedies. Upon the occurrence of any Event of Default, the holder of this Note, at the holder’s option, may declare all sums of principal and interest outstanding hereunder to be immediately due and payable without presentment, demand, notice of nonperformance, notice of protest, protest or notice of dishonor, all of which are expressly waived by Borrower, and the obligation, if any, of the holder to extend any further credit hereunder shall immediately cease and terminate. Borrower shall pay to the holder immediately upon demand the full amount of all payments, advances, charges, costs and expenses, including reasonable attorneys’ fees (to include outside counsel fees and all allocated costs of the holder’s in-house counsel), expended or incurred by the holder in connection with the enforcement of the holder’s rights and/or the collection of any amounts which become due to the holder under this Note, and the prosecution or defense of any action in any way related to this Note, including without limitation, any action for declaratory relief, whether incurred at the trial or appellate level, in an arbitration proceeding or otherwise, and including any of the foregoing incurred in connection with any bankruptcy proceeding (including without limitation, any adversary proceeding, contested matter or motion brought by Bank or any other person) relating to Borrower or any other person or entity.
SECTION 13.2. Obligations Joint and Several. Should more than one person or entity sign this Note as a Borrower, the obligations of each such Borrower shall be joint and several.
SECTION 13.3. Governing Law. This Note shall be governed by and construed in accordance with the laws of the State of California.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the undersigned has executed this Note as of the date first written above.

WORLD OF JEANS & TOPS	
 	 	
By:	 	 	
 	 	 	
 	 	Name:	 	 	
 	 	 	
 	 	Title:	 	 	

 
Exhibit 10.15
TILLY’S, INC.
2012 EQUITY AND INCENTIVE AWARD PLAN
ARTICLE 1.
PURPOSE
The purpose of the Tilly’s Inc. 2012 Equity and Incentive Award Plan (as it may be amended or restated from time to time, the “ Plan ”) is to promote the success and enhance the value of Tilly’s, Inc. (the “ Company ”) by linking the individual interests of the members of the Board, Employees, and Consultants to those of Company stockholders and by providing such individuals with an incentive for outstanding performance to generate superior returns to Company stockholders. The Plan is further intended to provide flexibility to the Company in its ability to motivate, attract, and retain the services of members of the Board, Employees, and Consultants upon whose judgment, interest, and special effort the successful conduct of the Company’s operation is largely dependent.
ARTICLE 2.
DEFINITIONS AND CONSTRUCTION
Wherever the following terms are used in the Plan they shall have the meanings specified below, unless the context clearly indicates otherwise. The singular pronoun shall include the plural where the context so indicates.
2.1 “Administrator” shall mean the entity that conducts the general administration of the Plan as provided in Article 13. With reference to the duties of the Committee under the Plan which have been delegated to one or more persons pursuant to Section 13.6, or as to which the Board has assumed, the term “Administrator” shall refer to such person(s) unless the Committee or the Board has revoked such delegation or the Board has terminated the assumption of such duties.
2.2 “Affiliate” shall mean (a) Subsidiary; and (b) any domestic eligible entity that is disregarded, under Treasury Regulation Section 301.7701-3, as an entity separate from either (i) the Company or (ii) any Subsidiary.
2.3 “Applicable Accounting Standards” shall mean Generally Accepted Accounting Principles in the United States, International Financial Reporting Standards or such other accounting principles or standards as may apply to the Company’s financial statements under United States federal securities laws from time to time.
2.4 “Award” shall mean an Option, a Restricted Stock award, a Restricted Stock Unit award, a Performance Award, a Dividend Equivalents award, a Deferred Stock award, a Deferred Stock Unit award, a Stock Payment award or a Stock Appreciation Right, which may be awarded or granted under the Plan (collectively, “ Awards ”).

2.5 “Award Agreement” shall mean any written notice, agreement, terms and conditions, contract or other instrument or document evidencing an Award, including through electronic medium, which shall contain such terms and conditions with respect to an Award as the Administrator shall determine consistent with the Plan.
2.6 “Award Limit” shall mean with respect to Awards that shall be payable in Shares or in cash, as the case may be, the respective limit set forth in Section 3.3.
2.7 “Board” shall mean the Board of Directors of the Company.
2.8 “Change in Control” shall mean and includes each of the following:
(a) A transaction or series of transactions (other than an offering of Common Stock to the general public through a registration statement filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission) whereby any “person” or related “group” of “persons” (as such terms are used in Sections 13(d) and 14(d)(2) of the Exchange Act) (other than the Company, any of its subsidiaries, an employee benefit plan maintained by the Company or any of its subsidiaries or a “person” that, prior to such transaction, directly or indirectly controls, is controlled by, or is under common control with, the Company) directly or indirectly acquires beneficial ownership (within the meaning of Rule 13d-3 under the Exchange Act) of securities of the Company possessing more than 50% of the total combined voting power of the Company’s securities outstanding immediately after such acquisition, excluding any transaction involving a transfer or distribution of Shares held by a “Hezy Shaked Entity” (as defined in the Company’s Amended and Restated Certificate of Incorporation) to entities directly or indirectly controlled by any such person or to their family trusts, if and to the extent the Board finds such transfer or distribution to not be within the intent of this Section 2.8(a); or
(b) During any period of twelve months, individuals who, at the beginning of such period, constitute the Board together with any new Director(s) (other than a Director designated by a person who shall have entered into an agreement with the Company to effect a transaction described in Section 2.8(a) or Section 2.8(c)) whose election by the Board or nomination for election by the Company’s stockholders was approved by a vote of at least a majority of the Directors then still in office who either were Directors at the beginning of such twelve-month period or whose election or nomination for election was previously so approved, cease for any reason to constitute a majority thereof; or
(c) The consummation by the Company (whether directly involving the Company or indirectly involving the Company through one or more intermediaries) of (x) a merger, consolidation, reorganization, or business combination or (y) a sale or other disposition of all or substantially all of the Company’s assets in any single transaction or series of related transactions or (z) the acquisition of assets or stock of another entity, in each case other than a transaction:
(i) Which results in the Company’s voting securities outstanding immediately before the transaction continuing to represent (either by remaining outstanding or by being converted into voting securities of the Company or the person that, as a result of the transaction, controls, directly or indirectly, the Company or owns, directly or indirectly, all or
 
2

substantially all of the Company’s assets or otherwise succeeds to the business of the Company (the Company or such person, the “ Successor Entity ”)) directly or indirectly, at least a majority of the combined voting power of the Successor Entity’s outstanding voting securities immediately after the transaction, and
(ii) After which no person or group beneficially owns voting securities representing 50% or more of the combined voting power of the Successor Entity;  provided ,  however , that no person or group shall be treated for purposes of this Section 2.8(c)(ii) as beneficially owning 50% or more of combined voting power of the Successor Entity solely as a result of the voting power held in the Company prior to the consummation of the transaction; or
(d) The Company’s stockholders approve a liquidation or dissolution of the Company.
In addition, if a Change in Control constitutes a payment event with respect to any Award which provides for the deferral of compensation and is subject to Section 409A of the Code, the transaction or event described in subsection (a), (b), (c) or (d) with respect to such Award must also constitute a “change in control event,” as defined in Treasury Regulation §1.409A-3(i)(5) to the extent required by Section 409A.
The Committee shall have full and final authority to determine conclusively whether a Change in Control of the Company has occurred pursuant to the above definition, and the date of the occurrence of such Change in Control and any incidental matters relating thereto.
2.9 “Code” shall mean the Internal Revenue Code of 1986, as amended from time to time, together with the regulations and official guidance promulgated thereunder.
2.10 “Committee” shall mean the Compensation Committee of the Board, or another committee or subcommittee of the Board, appointed as provided in Section 13.1.
2.11 “Common Stock” shall mean the common stock of the Company, par value $$0.001 per share.
2.12 “Company” shall have the meaning set forth in Article 1.
2.13 “Consultant” shall mean any consultant or adviser engaged to provide services to the Company or any Affiliate that qualifies as a consultant under the applicable rules of the Securities and Exchange Commission for registration of shares on a Form S-8 Registration Statement.
2.14 “Covered Employee” shall mean any Employee who is, or could be, a “covered employee” within the meaning of Section 162(m) of the Code.
2.15 “Deferred Stock” shall mean a right to receive Shares awarded under Section 10.4.
2.16 “Deferred Stock Unit” shall mean a right to receive Shares awarded under Section 10.5.
 
3

2.17 “Director” shall mean a member of the Board, as constituted from time to time.
2.18 “Disability” shall mean that the Holder is either (a) unable to engage in any substantial gainful activity by reason of any medically determinable physical or mental impairment that can be expected to result in death or can be expected to last for a continuous period of not less than twelve months, or (b) by reason of any medically determinable physical or mental impairment that can be expected to result in death or can be expected to last for a continuous period of not less than twelve months, receiving income replacement benefits for a period of not less than three months under an accident and health plan covering employees of the Company. For purposes of the Plan, a Holder shall be deemed to have incurred a Disability if the Holder is determined to be totally disabled by the Social Security Administration or in accordance with the applicable disability insurance program of the Company’s,  provided  that the definition of “disability” applied under such disability insurance program complies with the requirements of this definition.
2.19 “Dividend Equivalent” shall mean a right to receive the equivalent value (in cash or Shares) of dividends paid on Shares, awarded under Section 10.2.
2.20 “DRO” shall mean a domestic relations order as defined by the Code or Title I of the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974, as amended from time to time, or the rules thereunder.
2.21 “Effective Date” shall mean the day prior to the Public Trading Date.
2.22 “Eligible Individual” shall mean any person who is an Employee, a Consultant or a Non-Employee Director, as determined by the Committee.
2.23 “Employee” shall mean any officer or other employee (as determined in accordance with Section 3401(c) of the Code and the Treasury Regulations thereunder) of the Company or of any Affiliate.
2.24 “Equity Restructuring” shall mean a nonreciprocal transaction between the Company and its stockholders, such as a stock dividend, stock split, spin-off, rights offering or recapitalization through a large, nonrecurring cash dividend, that affects the number or kind of shares of Common Stock (or other securities of the Company) or the share price of Common Stock (or other securities) and causes a change in the per share value of the Common Stock underlying outstanding Awards.
2.25 “Exchange Act” shall mean the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as amended from time to time.
2.26 “Fair Market Value” shall mean, as of any given date, the value of a Share determined as follows:
(a) If the Common Stock is listed on any (i) established securities exchange (such as the New York Stock Exchange, the NASDAQ Global Market and the NASDAQ Global Select Market), (ii) national market system or (iii) automated quotation system on which the
 
4

Shares are listed, quoted or traded, its Fair Market Value shall be the closing sales price for a share of Common Stock as quoted on such exchange or system for such date or, if there is no closing sales price for a share of Common Stock on the date in question, the closing sales price for a share of Common Stock on the last preceding date for which such quotation exists, as reported in  The Wall Street Journal  or such other source as the Administrator deems reliable;
(b) If the Common Stock is not listed on an established securities exchange, national market system or automated quotation system, but the Common Stock is regularly quoted by a recognized securities dealer, its Fair Market Value shall be the mean of the high bid and low asked prices for such date or, if there are no high bid and low asked prices for a share of Common Stock on such date, the high bid and low asked prices for a share of Common Stock on the last preceding date for which such information exists, as reported in  The Wall Street Journal  or such other source as the Administrator deems reliable; or
(c) If the Common Stock is neither listed on an established securities exchange, national market system or automated quotation system nor regularly quoted by a recognized securities dealer, its Fair Market Value shall be established by the Administrator in good faith.
Notwithstanding the foregoing, with respect to any Award granted after the effectiveness of the Company’s registration statement relating to its initial public offering and prior to the Public Trading Date, the Fair Market Value shall mean the initial public offering price of a Share as set forth in the Company’s final prospectus relating to its initial public offering filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission.
2.27 “Full Value Award” shall mean any Award other than (i) an Option, (ii) a Stock Appreciation Right or (iii) any other Award for which the Holder pays the intrinsic value existing as of the date of grant (whether directly or by forgoing a right to receive a payment from the Company or any Affiliate).
2.28 “Greater Than 10% Stockholder” shall mean an individual then owning (within the meaning of Section 424(d) of the Code) more than 10% of the total combined voting power of all classes of stock of the Company or any subsidiary corporation (as defined in Section 424(f) of the Code) or parent corporation thereof (as defined in Section 424(e) of the Code).
2.29 “Holder” shall mean a person who has been granted an Award.
2.30 “Incentive Stock Option” shall mean an Option that is intended to qualify as an incentive stock option and conforms to the applicable provisions of Section 422 of the Code.
2.31 “Non-Employee Director” shall mean a Director of the Company who is not an Employee.
2.32 “Non-Employee Director Equity Compensation Policy” shall have the meaning set forth in Section 4.6.
2.33 “Non-Qualified Stock Option” shall mean an Option that is not an Incentive Stock Option.
2.34 “Option” shall mean a right to purchase Shares at a specified exercise price, granted under Article 6. An Option shall be either a Non-Qualified Stock Option or an Incentive Stock Option;  provided ,  however , that Options granted to Non-Employee Directors and Consultants shall only be Non-Qualified Stock Options.
 
5

2.35 “Option Term” shall have the meaning set forth in Section 6.4.
2.36 “Parent” shall mean any entity (other than the Company), whether domestic or foreign, in an unbroken chain of entities ending with the Company if each of the entities other than the Company beneficially owns, at the time of the determination, securities or interests representing at least fifty percent (50%) of the total combined voting power of all classes of securities or interests in one of the other entities in such chain.
2.37 “Performance Award” shall mean a cash bonus award, stock bonus award, performance award or incentive award that is paid in cash, Shares or a combination of both, awarded under Section 10.1.
2.38 “Performance-Based Compensation” shall mean any compensation that is intended to qualify as “performance-based compensation” as described in Section 162(m)(4)(C) of the Code.
2.39 “Performance Criteria” shall mean the criteria (and adjustments) that the Committee selects for an Award for purposes of establishing the Performance Goal or Performance Goals for a Performance Period, determined as follows:
(a) The Performance Criteria that shall be used to establish Performance Goals are limited to the following: (i) net earnings (either before or after one or more of the following: (A) interest, (B) taxes, (C) depreciation and (D) amortization); (ii) gross or net sales or revenue; (iii) net income (either before or after taxes); (iv) adjusted net income; (v) operating earnings or profit; (vi) cash flow (including, but not limited to, operating cash flow and free cash flow); (vii) return on assets; (viii) return on capital; (ix) return on stockholders’ equity; (x) total stockholder return; (xi) return on sales; (xii) gross or net profit or operating margin; (xiii) costs; (xiv) funds from operations; (xv) expenses; (xvi) working capital; (xvii) earnings per share; (xviii) adjusted earnings per share; (xix) price per share of Common Stock; (xx) regulatory body approval for commercialization of a product; (xxi) implementation or completion of critical projects; (xxii) market share; and (xxiii) economic value, any of which may be measured either in absolute terms or as compared to any incremental increase or decrease or as compared to results of a peer group or to market performance indicators or indices.
(b) The Administrator may, in its sole discretion, provide that one or more objectively determinable adjustments shall be made to one or more of the Performance Goals. Such adjustments may include one or more of the following: (i) items related to a change in accounting principle; (ii) items relating to financing activities; (iii) expenses for restructuring or productivity initiatives; (iv) other non-operating items; (v) items related to acquisitions; (vi) items attributable to the business operations of any entity acquired by the Company during the Performance Period; (vii) items related to the disposal of a business or segment of a business; (viii) items related to discontinued operations that do not qualify as a segment of a business under Applicable Accounting Standards; (ix) items attributable to any stock dividend, stock split, combination or exchange of stock occurring during the Performance Period; (x) any other items of significant income or expense which are determined to be appropriate adjustments; (xi) items relating to unusual or extraordinary corporate transactions, events or developments, (xii) items related to amortization of acquired intangible assets; (xiii) items that are outside the scope of the
 
6

Company’s core, on-going business activities; (xiv) items related to acquired in-process research and development; (xv) items relating to changes in tax laws; (xvi) items relating to major licensing or partnership arrangements; (xvii) items relating to asset impairment charges; (xviii) items relating to gains or losses for litigation, arbitration and contractual settlements; or (xix) items relating to any other unusual or nonrecurring events or changes in applicable laws, accounting principles or business conditions. For all Awards intended to qualify as Performance-Based Compensation, such determinations shall be made within the time prescribed by, and otherwise in compliance with, Section 162(m) of the Code.
2.40 “Performance Goals” shall mean, for a Performance Period, one or more goals established in writing by the Administrator for the Performance Period based upon one or more Performance Criteria. Depending on the Performance Criteria used to establish such Performance Goals, the Performance Goals may be expressed in terms of overall Company performance or the performance of a Subsidiary, division, business unit, or an individual. The achievement of each Performance Goal shall be determined, to the extent applicable, with reference to Applicable Accounting Standards.
2.41 “Performance Period” shall mean one or more periods of time, which may be of varying and overlapping durations, as the Administrator may select, over which the attainment of one or more Performance Goals will be measured for the purpose of determining a Holder’s right to, and the payment of, an Award.
2.42 “Performance Stock Unit” shall mean a Performance Award awarded under Section 10.1 which is denominated in units of value including dollar value of shares of Common Stock.
2.43 “Permitted Transferee” shall mean, with respect to a Holder, any “family member” of the Holder, as defined under the instructions to use the Form S-8 Registration Statement under the Securities Act, after taking into account any state, federal, local or foreign tax and securities laws applicable to transferable Awards.
2.44 “Plan” shall have the meaning set forth in Article 1.
2.45 “Prior Plan” shall mean the Company’s 2007 Stock Option Plan, as such plan may be amended from time to time.
2.46 “Program” shall mean any program adopted by the Administrator pursuant to the Plan containing the terms and conditions intended to govern a specified type of Award granted under the Plan and pursuant to which such type of Award may be granted under the Plan.
2.47 “Public Trading Date” shall mean the first date upon which Common Stock is listed (or approved for listing) upon notice of issuance on any securities exchange or designated (or approved for designation) upon notice of issuance as a national market security on an interdealer quotation system.
2.48 “Restricted Stock” shall mean Common Stock awarded under Article 8 that is subject to certain restrictions and may be subject to risk of forfeiture or repurchase.
 
7

2.49 “Restricted Stock Units” shall mean the right to receive Shares awarded under Article 9.
2.50 “Securities Act” shall mean the Securities Act of 1933, as amended.
2.51 “Shares” shall mean shares of Common Stock.
2.52 “Stock Appreciation Right” shall mean a stock appreciation right granted under Article 11.
2.53 “Stock Appreciation Right Term” shall have the meaning set forth in Section 11.4.
2.54 “Stock Payment” shall mean (a) a payment in the form of Shares, or (b) an option or other right to purchase Shares, as part of a bonus, deferred compensation or other arrangement, awarded under Section 10.3.
2.55 “Subsidiary” shall mean any entity (other than the Company), whether domestic or foreign, in an unbroken chain of entities beginning with the Company if each of the entities other than the last entity in the unbroken chain beneficially owns, at the time of the determination, securities or interests representing at least fifty percent (50%) of the total combined voting power of all classes of securities or interests in one of the other entities in such chain.
2.56 “Substitute Award” shall mean an Award granted under the Plan upon the assumption of, or in substitution for, outstanding equity awards previously granted by a company or other entity in connection with a corporate transaction, such as a merger, combination, consolidation or acquisition of property or stock;  provided ,  however , that in no event shall the term “Substitute Award” be construed to refer to an award made in connection with the cancellation and repricing of an Option or Stock Appreciation Right.
2.57 “Termination of Service” shall mean:
(a) As to a Consultant, the time when the engagement of a Holder as a Consultant to the Company or an Affiliate is terminated for any reason, with or without cause, including, without limitation, by resignation, discharge, death or retirement, but excluding terminations where the Consultant simultaneously commences or remains in employment or service with the Company or any Affiliate.
(b) As to a Non-Employee Director, the time when a Holder who is a Non-Employee Director ceases to be a Director for any reason, including, without limitation, a termination by resignation, failure to be elected, death or retirement, but excluding terminations where the Holder simultaneously commences or remains in employment or service with the Company or any Affiliate.
(c) As to an Employee, the time when the employee-employer relationship between a Holder and the Company or any Affiliate is terminated for any reason, including, without limitation, a termination by resignation, discharge, death, disability or retirement; but
 
8

excluding terminations where the Holder simultaneously commences or remains in employment or service with the Company or any Affiliate.
The Administrator, in its sole discretion, shall determine the effect of all matters and questions relating to Terminations of Service, including, without limitation, the question of whether a Termination of Service resulted from a discharge for cause and all questions of whether particular leaves of absence constitute a Termination of Service;  provided ,  however , that, with respect to Incentive Stock Options, unless the Administrator otherwise provides in the terms of the Program, the Award Agreement or otherwise, a leave of absence, change in status from an employee to an independent contractor or other change in the employee-employer relationship shall constitute a Termination of Service only if, and to the extent that, such leave of absence, change in status or other change interrupts employment for the purposes of Section 422(a)(2) of the Code and the then applicable regulations and revenue rulings under said Section. For purposes of the Plan, a Holder’s employee-employer relationship or consultancy relations shall be deemed to be terminated in the event that the Affiliate employing or contracting with such Holder ceases to remain an Affiliate following any merger, sale of stock or other corporate transaction or event (including, without limitation, a spin-off).
ARTICLE 3.
SHARES SUBJECT TO THE PLAN
3.1 Number of Shares.
(a) Subject to Section 14.2 and Section 3.1(b), the aggregate number of Shares which may be issued or transferred pursuant to Awards under the Plan is                       ;  provided ,  however , that such aggregate number of Shares available for issuance under the Plan shall be reduced by 1.5 shares for each Share delivered in settlement of any Full Value Award.
(b) Notwithstanding Section 3.1(a): (i) the Committee may adopt reasonable counting procedures to ensure appropriate counting, avoid double counting (as, for example, in the case of tandem or substitute awards), and make adjustments if the number of shares of Common Stock actually delivered differs from the number of shares previously counted in connection with an Award; (ii) shares of Common Stock that are potentially deliverable under any Award (or any stock option or other award granted pursuant to the Prior Plan) that expires or is canceled, forfeited, settled in cash or otherwise terminated without a delivery of such shares to the Holder will not be counted as delivered under the Plan or the Prior Plan; (iii) shares of Common Stock that have been issued in connection with any Award (e.g., Restricted Stock) or Prior Plan award that is canceled, forfeited, or settled in cash such that those shares are returned to the Company will again be available for Awards; and (iv) shares of Common Stock withheld in payment of the exercise price or taxes relating to any Award or Prior Plan award and shares equal to the number surrendered in payment of any exercise price or taxes relating to any Award or Prior Plan award shall be deemed to constitute shares not delivered to the Holder and shall be deemed to be available for Awards under the Plan; provided ,  however,  that, no shares shall become available pursuant to this Section 3.1(b) to the extent that (x) the transaction resulting in
 
9

the return of shares occurs more than ten years after the date of the most recent shareholder approval of the Plan, or (y) such return of shares would constitute a “material revision” of the Plan subject to stockholder approval under then applicable rules of the New York Stock Exchange (or any other applicable exchange or quotation system). In addition, in the case of any Award granted in substitution for an award of a company or business acquired by the Company or an Affiliate, shares of Common Stock issued or issuable in connection with such substitute Award shall not be counted against the number of shares reserved under the Plan, but shall be available under the Plan by virtue of the Company’s assumption of the plan or arrangement of the acquired company or business. This Section 3.1 shall apply to the share limit imposed to conform to the regulations promulgated under the Code with respect to Incentive Stock Options only to the extent consistent with applicable regulations relating to Incentive Stock Options under the Code. Because shares will count against the number reserved in Section 3.1 upon delivery, the Committee may, subject to the share counting rules under this Section 3.1, determine that Awards may be outstanding that relate to a greater number of shares than the aggregate remaining available under the Plan, so long as Awards will not result in delivery and vesting of shares in excess of the number then available under the Plan. The payment of Dividend Equivalents in conjunction with any outstanding Awards shall not be counted against the shares available for issuance under the Plan.
(c) Substitute Awards shall not reduce the Shares authorized for grant under the Plan. Additionally, in the event that a company acquired by the Company or any Affiliate or with which the Company or any Affiliate combines has shares available under a pre-existing plan approved by stockholders and not adopted in contemplation of such acquisition or combination, the shares available for grant pursuant to the terms of such pre-existing plan (as adjusted, to the extent appropriate, using the exchange ratio or other adjustment or valuation ratio or formula used in such acquisition or combination to determine the consideration payable to the holders of common stock of the entities party to such acquisition or combination) may be used for Awards under the Plan and shall not reduce the Shares authorized for grant under the Plan;  provided  that Awards using such available shares shall not be made after the date awards or grants could have been made under the terms of the pre-existing plan, absent the acquisition or combination, and shall only be made to individuals who were not employed by or providing services to the Company or its Affiliates immediately prior to such acquisition or combination.
3.2 Stock Distributed. Any Shares distributed pursuant to an Award may consist, in whole or in part, of authorized and unissued Common Stock, treasury Common Stock or Common Stock purchased on the open market.
3.3 Limitation on Number of Shares Subject to Awards. Notwithstanding any provision in the Plan to the contrary, and subject to Section 14.2, the maximum aggregate number of Shares with respect to one or more Awards that may be granted to any one person during any calendar year shall be                       and the maximum aggregate amount of cash that may be paid in cash to any one person during any calendar year with respect to one or more Awards payable in cash shall be $                    ;  provided ,  however , that the foregoing limitations shall not apply prior to the Public Trading Date and, following the Public Trading Date, the foregoing limitations shall not apply until the earliest of: (a) the first material modification of the Plan (including any increase in the number of shares reserved for issuance under the Plan in accordance with Section 3.1); (b) the issuance of all of the Shares reserved for issuance under the Plan; (c) the expiration of the Plan; (d) the first meeting of stockholders at which members
 
10

of the Board are to be elected that occurs after the close of the third calendar year following the calendar year in which occurred the first registration of an equity security of the Company under Section 12 of the Exchange Act; or (e) such other date required by Section 162(m) of the Code and the rules and regulations promulgated thereunder. To the extent required by Section 162(m) of the Code, Shares subject to Awards which are canceled shall continue to be counted against the Award Limit.
3.4 Full Value Award Vesting Limitations. Notwithstanding any other provision of the Plan to the contrary, Full Value Awards made to Employees or Consultants shall become vested over a period of not less than two years (or, in the case of vesting based upon the attainment of Performance Goals or other performance-based objectives, over a period of not less than one year measured from the commencement of the period over which performance is evaluated) following the date the Award is made;  provided ,  however , that, notwithstanding the foregoing, (a) the Administrator may provide that such vesting restrictions may lapse or be waived upon the Holder’s death, disability or retirement and (b) Full Value Awards that result in the issuance of an aggregate of up to 5% of the shares of Common Stock available pursuant to Section 3.1(a) may be granted to any one or more Holders without respect to such minimum vesting provisions.
ARTICLE 4.
GRANTING OF AWARDS
4.1 Participation. The Administrator may, from time to time, select from among all Eligible Individuals, those to whom an Award shall be granted and shall determine the nature and amount of each Award, which shall not be inconsistent with the requirements of the Plan. Except as provided in Section 4.6 regarding the grant of Awards pursuant to the Non-Employee Director Equity Compensation Policy, no Eligible Individual shall have any right to be granted an Award pursuant to the Plan.
4.2 Award Agreement. Each Award shall be evidenced by an Award Agreement that sets forth the terms, conditions and limitations for such Award, which may include the term of the Award, the provisions applicable in the event of the Holder’s Termination of Service, and the Company’s authority to unilaterally or bilaterally amend, modify, suspend, cancel or rescind an Award. Award Agreements evidencing Awards intended to qualify as Performance-Based Compensation shall contain such terms and conditions as may be necessary to meet the applicable provisions of Section 162(m) of the Code. Award Agreements evidencing Incentive Stock Options shall contain such terms and conditions as may be necessary to meet the applicable provisions of Section 422 of the Code.
4.3 Limitations Applicable to Section 16 Persons. Notwithstanding any other provision of the Plan, the Plan, and any Award granted or awarded to any individual who is then subject to Section 16 of the Exchange Act, shall be subject to any additional limitations set forth in any applicable exemptive rule under Section 16 of the Exchange Act (including Rule 16b-3 of the Exchange Act and any amendments thereto) that are requirements for the application of such exemptive rule. To the extent permitted by applicable law, the Plan and
 
11

Awards granted or awarded hereunder shall be deemed amended to the extent necessary to conform to such applicable exemptive rule.
4.4 At-Will Employment; Voluntary Participation. Nothing in the Plan or in any Program or Award Agreement hereunder shall confer upon any Holder any right to continue in the employ of, or as a Director or Consultant for, the Company or any Affiliate, or shall interfere with or restrict in any way the rights of the Company and any Affiliate, which rights are hereby expressly reserved, to discharge any Holder at any time for any reason whatsoever, with or without cause, and with or without notice, or to terminate or change all other terms and conditions of employment or engagement, except to the extent expressly provided otherwise in a written agreement between the Holder and the Company or any Affiliate. Participation by each Holder in the Plan shall be voluntary and nothing in the Plan shall be construed as mandating that any Eligible Individual shall participate in the Plan.
4.5 Foreign Holders. Notwithstanding any provision of the Plan to the contrary, in order to comply with the laws in countries other than the United States in which the Company and its Affiliates operate or have Employees, Non-Employee Directors or Consultants, or in order to comply with the requirements of any foreign securities exchange, the Administrator, in its sole discretion, shall have the power and authority to: (a) determine which Affiliates shall be covered by the Plan; (b) determine which Eligible Individuals outside the United States are eligible to participate in the Plan; (c) modify the terms and conditions of any Award granted to Eligible Individuals outside the United States to comply with applicable foreign laws or listing requirements of any such foreign securities exchange; (d) establish subplans and modify exercise procedures and other terms and procedures, to the extent such actions may be necessary or advisable (any such subplans and/or modifications shall be attached to the Plan as appendices);  provided ,  however , that no such subplans and/or modifications shall increase the share limitations contained in Sections 3.1 and 3.3; and (e) take any action, before or after an Award is made, that it deems advisable to obtain approval or comply with any necessary local governmental regulatory exemptions or approvals or listing requirements of any such foreign securities exchange. Notwithstanding the foregoing, the Administrator may not take any actions hereunder, and no Awards shall be granted, that would violate the Code, the Exchange Act, the Securities Act, any other securities law or governing statute, the rules of the securities exchange or automated quotation system on which the Shares are listed, quoted or traded or any other applicable law. For purposes of the Plan, all references to foreign laws, rules, regulations or taxes shall be references to the laws, rules, regulations and taxes of any applicable jurisdiction other than the United States or a political subdivision thereof.
4.6 Non-Employee Director Awards. The Administrator may, in its discretion, provide that Awards granted to Non-Employee Directors shall be granted pursuant to a written non-discretionary formula established by the Administrator (the “ Non-Employee Director Equity Compensation Policy ”), subject to the limitations of the Plan. The Non-Employee Director Equity Compensation Policy shall set forth the type of Award(s) to be granted to Non-Employee Directors, the number of Shares to be subject to Non-Employee Director Awards, the conditions on which such Awards shall be granted, become exercisable and/or payable and expire, and such other terms and conditions as the Administrator shall determine in its discretion. The Non-Employee Director Equity Compensation Policy may be modified by the Administrator from time to time in its discretion.
 
12

4.7 Stand-Alone and Tandem Awards. Awards granted pursuant to the Plan may, in the sole discretion of the Administrator, be granted either alone, in addition to, or in tandem with, any other Award granted pursuant to the Plan. Awards granted in addition to or in tandem with other Awards may be granted either at the same time as or at a different time from the grant of such other Awards.
ARTICLE 5.
PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO AWARDS INTENDED TO QUALIFY AS
PERFORMANCE-BASED COMPENSATION.
5.1 Purpose. The Committee, in its sole discretion, may determine at the time an Award is granted or at any time thereafter whether such Award is intended to qualify as Performance-Based Compensation. If the Committee, in its sole discretion, decides to grant such an Award to an Eligible Individual that is intended to qualify as Performance-Based Compensation, then the provisions of this Article 5 shall control over any contrary provision contained in the Plan. The Administrator may in its sole discretion grant Awards to other Eligible Individuals that are based on Performance Criteria or Performance Goals but that do not satisfy the requirements of this Article 5 and that are not intended to qualify as Performance-Based Compensation. Unless otherwise specified by the Administrator at the time of grant, the Performance Criteria with respect to an Award intended to be Performance-Based Compensation payable to a Covered Employee shall be determined on the basis of Applicable Accounting Standards.
5.2 Applicability. The grant of an Award to an Eligible Individual for a particular Performance Period shall not require the grant of an Award to such Individual in any subsequent Performance Period and the grant of an Award to any one Eligible Individual shall not require the grant of an Award to any other Eligible Individual in such period or in any other period.
5.3 Types of Awards. Notwithstanding anything in the Plan to the contrary, the Committee may grant any Award to an Eligible Individual intended to qualify as Performance-Based Compensation, including, without limitation, Restricted Stock the restrictions with respect to which lapse upon the attainment of specified Performance Goals, Restricted Stock Units that vest and become payable upon the attainment of specified Performance Goals and any Performance Awards described in Article 10 that vest or become exercisable or payable upon the attainment of one or more specified Performance Goals.
5.4 Procedures with Respect to Performance-Based Awards. To the extent necessary to comply with the requirements of Section 162(m)(4)(C) of the Code, with respect to any Award granted to one or more Eligible Individuals which is intended to qualify as Performance-Based Compensation, no later than 90 days following the commencement of any Performance Period or any designated fiscal period or period of service (or such earlier time as may be required under Section 162(m) of the Code), the Committee shall, in writing, (a) designate one or more Eligible Individuals, (b) select the Performance Criteria applicable to the Performance Period, (c) establish the Performance Goals, and amounts of such Awards, as applicable, which may be earned for such Performance Period based on the Performance
 
13

Criteria, and (d) specify the relationship between Performance Criteria and the Performance Goals and the amounts of such Awards, as applicable, to be earned by each Covered Employee for such Performance Period. Following the completion of each Performance Period, the Committee shall certify in writing whether and the extent to which the applicable Performance Goals have been achieved for such Performance Period. In determining the amount earned under such Awards, the Committee shall have the right to reduce or eliminate (but not to increase) the amount payable at a given level of performance to take into account additional factors that the Committee may deem relevant, including the assessment of individual or corporate performance for the Performance Period.
5.5 Payment of Performance-Based Awards. Unless otherwise provided in the applicable Program or Award Agreement and only to the extent otherwise permitted by Section 162(m)(4)(C) of the Code, as to an Award that is intended to qualify as Performance-Based Compensation, the Holder must be employed by the Company or an Affiliate throughout the Performance Period. Unless otherwise provided in the applicable Performance Goals, Program or Award Agreement, a Holder shall be eligible to receive payment pursuant to such Awards for a Performance Period only if and to the extent the Performance Goals for such period are achieved.
5.6 Additional Limitations. Notwithstanding any other provision of the Plan and except as otherwise determined by the Administrator, any Award which is granted to an Eligible Individual and is intended to qualify as Performance-Based Compensation shall be subject to any additional limitations set forth in Section 162(m) of the Code or any regulations or rulings issued thereunder that are requirements for qualification as Performance-Based Compensation, and the Plan, the Program and the Award Agreement shall be deemed amended to the extent necessary to conform to such requirements.
ARTICLE 6.
GRANTING OF OPTIONS
6.1 Granting of Options to Eligible Individuals. The Administrator is authorized to grant Options to Eligible Individuals from time to time, in its sole discretion, on such terms and conditions as it may determine which shall not be inconsistent with the Plan.
6.2 Qualification of Incentive Stock Options. No Incentive Stock Option shall be granted to any person who is not an Employee of the Company or any subsidiary corporation (as defined in Section 424(f) of the Code) of the Company. No person who qualifies as a Greater Than 10% Stockholder may be granted an Incentive Stock Option unless such Incentive Stock Option conforms to the applicable provisions of Section 422 of the Code. Any Incentive Stock Option granted under the Plan may be modified by the Administrator, with the consent of the Holder, to disqualify such Option from treatment as an “incentive stock option” under Section 422 of the Code. To the extent that the aggregate Fair Market Value of stock with respect to which “incentive stock options” (within the meaning of Section 422 of the Code, but without regard to Section 422(d) of the Code) are exercisable for the first time by a Holder during any calendar year under the Plan, and all other plans of the Company and any subsidiary or parent corporation thereof (each as defined in Section 424(f) and (e) of the Code,
 
14

respectively), exceeds $100,000, the Options shall be treated as Non-Qualified Stock Options to the extent required by Section 422 of the Code. The rule set forth in the preceding sentence shall be applied by taking Options and other “incentive stock options” into account in the order in which they were granted and the Fair Market Value of stock shall be determined as of the time the respective options were granted.
6.3 Option Exercise Price. The exercise price per Share subject to each Option shall be set by the Administrator, but shall not be less than 100% of the Fair Market Value of a Share on the date the Option is granted (or, as to Incentive Stock Options, on the date the Option is modified, extended or renewed for purposes of Section 424(h) of the Code). In addition, in the case of Incentive Stock Options granted to a Greater Than 10% Stockholder, such price shall not be less than 110% of the Fair Market Value of a Share on the date the Option is granted (or the date the Option is modified, extended or renewed for purposes of Section 424(h) of the Code).
6.4 Option Term. The term of each Option (the “Option Term”) shall be set by the Administrator in its sole discretion; provided, however , that the Option Term shall not be more than ten (10) years from the date the Option is granted, or five (5) years from the date an Incentive Stock Option is granted to a Greater Than 10% Stockholder. The Administrator shall determine the time period, including the time period following a Termination of Service, during which the Holder has the right to exercise the vested Options, which time period may not extend beyond the last day of the Option Term. Except as limited by the requirements of Section 409A or Section 422 of the Code and regulations and rulings thereunder, the Administrator may extend the Option Term of any outstanding Option, and may extend the time period during which vested Options may be exercised, in connection with any Termination of Service of the Holder, and may amend any other term or condition of such Option relating to such a Termination of Service.
6.5 Option Vesting.
(a) The period during which the right to exercise, in whole or in part, an Option vests in the Holder shall be set by the Administrator and the Administrator may determine that an Option may not be exercised in whole or in part for a specified period after it is granted. Such vesting may be based on service with the Company or any Affiliate, any of the Performance Criteria, or any other criteria selected by the Administrator.
(b) No portion of an Option which is unexercisable at a Holder’s Termination of Service shall thereafter become exercisable, except as may be otherwise provided by the Administrator either in the Program, the Award Agreement or by action of the Administrator following the grant of the Option.
6.6 Substitute Awards. Notwithstanding the foregoing provisions of this Article 6 to the contrary, in the case of an Option that is a Substitute Award, the price per share of the shares subject to such Option may be less than the Fair Market Value per share on the date of grant;  provided  that the excess of: (a) the aggregate Fair Market Value (as of the date such Substitute Award is granted) of the shares subject to the Substitute Award, over (b) the aggregate exercise price thereof does not exceed the excess of: (x) the aggregate fair market
 
15

value (as of the time immediately preceding the transaction giving rise to the Substitute Award, such fair market value to be determined by the Administrator) of the shares of the predecessor entity that were subject to the grant assumed or substituted for by the Company, over (y) the aggregate exercise price of such shares.
6.7 Substitution of Stock Appreciation Rights. The Administrator may provide in the applicable Program or the Award Agreement evidencing the grant of an Option that the Administrator, in its sole discretion, shall have the right to substitute a Stock Appreciation Right for such Option at any time prior to or upon exercise of such Option;  provided  that such Stock Appreciation Right shall be exercisable with respect to the same number of Shares for which such substituted Option would have been exercisable, and shall also have the same exercise price, vesting schedule and remaining Option Term as the substituted Option.
ARTICLE 7.
EXERCISE OF OPTIONS
7.1 Partial Exercise. An exercisable Option may be exercised in whole or in part. However, an Option shall not be exercisable with respect to fractional shares and the Administrator may require that, by the terms of the Option, a partial exercise must be with respect to a minimum number of shares.
7.2 Manner of Exercise. All or a portion of an exercisable Option shall be deemed exercised upon delivery of all of the following to the Secretary of the Company, or such other person or entity designated by the Administrator, or his, her or its office, as applicable:
(a) A written or electronic notice complying with the applicable rules established by the Administrator stating that the Option, or a portion thereof, is exercised. The notice shall be signed by the Holder or other person then entitled to exercise the Option or such portion of the Option;
(b) Such representations and documents as the Administrator, in its sole discretion, deems necessary or advisable to effect compliance with all applicable provisions of the Securities Act and any other federal, state or foreign securities laws or regulations, the rules of any securities exchange or automated quotation system on which the Shares are listed, quoted or traded or any other applicable law. The Administrator may, in its sole discretion, also take whatever additional actions it deems appropriate to effect such compliance including, without limitation, placing legends on share certificates and issuing stop-transfer notices to agents and registrars;
(c) In the event that the Option shall be exercised pursuant to Section 12.3 by any person or persons other than the Holder, appropriate proof of the right of such person or persons to exercise the Option, as determined in the sole discretion of the Administrator; and
(d) Full payment of the exercise price and applicable withholding taxes to the stock administrator of the Company for the shares with respect to which the Option, or portion thereof, is exercised, in a manner permitted by Section 12.1 and 12.2.
 
16

7.3 Notification Regarding Disposition. The Holder shall give the Company prompt written or electronic notice of any disposition of shares of Common Stock acquired by exercise of an Incentive Stock Option which occurs within (a) two years from the date of granting (including the date the Option is modified, extended or renewed for purposes of Section 424(h) of the Code) such Option to such Holder, or (b) one year after the transfer of such shares to such Holder.
ARTICLE 8.
AWARD OF RESTRICTED STOCK
8.1 Award of Restricted Stock.
(a) The Administrator is authorized to grant Restricted Stock to Eligible Individuals, and shall determine the terms and conditions, including the restrictions applicable to each award of Restricted Stock, which terms and conditions shall not be inconsistent with the Plan, and may impose such conditions on the issuance of such Restricted Stock as it deems appropriate.
(b) The Administrator shall establish the purchase price, if any, and form of payment for Restricted Stock; provided, however, that if a purchase price is charged, such purchase price shall be no less than the par value, if any, of the Shares to be purchased, unless otherwise permitted by applicable law. In all cases, legal consideration shall be required for each issuance of Restricted Stock.
8.2 Rights as Stockholders. Subject to Section 8.4, upon issuance of Restricted Stock, the Holder shall have, unless otherwise provided by the Administrator, all the rights of a stockholder with respect to said shares, subject to the restrictions in the applicable Program or in each individual Award Agreement, including the right to receive all dividends and other distributions paid or made with respect to the shares;  provided ,  however , that, in the sole discretion of the Administrator, any extraordinary distributions with respect to the Shares shall be subject to the restrictions set forth in Section 8.3. In addition, with respect to a share of Restricted Stock with performance-based vesting, dividends which are paid prior to vesting shall only be paid out to the Holder to the extent that the performance-based vesting conditions are subsequently satisfied and the share of Restricted Stock vests.
8.3 Restrictions. All shares of Restricted Stock (including any shares received by Holders thereof with respect to shares of Restricted Stock as a result of stock dividends, stock splits or any other form of recapitalization) shall, in the terms of the applicable Program or in each individual Award Agreement, be subject to such restrictions and vesting requirements as the Administrator shall provide. Such restrictions may include, without limitation, restrictions concerning voting rights and transferability and such restrictions may lapse separately or in combination at such times and pursuant to such circumstances or based on such criteria as selected by the Administrator, including, without limitation, criteria based on the Holder’s duration of employment, directorship or consultancy with the Company, the Performance Criteria, Company performance, individual performance or other criteria selected by the Administrator. By action taken after the Restricted Stock is issued, the Administrator may, on
 
17

such terms and conditions as it may determine to be appropriate, accelerate the vesting of such Restricted Stock by removing any or all of the restrictions imposed by the terms of the Program or the Award Agreement. Restricted Stock may not be sold or encumbered until all restrictions are terminated or expire.
8.4 Repurchase or Forfeiture of Restricted Stock. Except as otherwise determined by the Administrator at the time of the grant of the Award or thereafter, if no price was paid by the Holder for the Restricted Stock, upon a Termination of Service during the applicable restriction period, the Holder’s rights in unvested Restricted Stock then subject to restrictions shall lapse, and such Restricted Stock shall be surrendered to the Company and cancelled without consideration. If a price was paid by the Holder for the Restricted Stock, upon a Termination of Service during the applicable restriction period, the Company shall have the right to repurchase from the Holder the unvested Restricted Stock then subject to restrictions at a cash price per share equal to the price paid by the Holder for such Restricted Stock or such other amount as may be specified in the Program or the Award Agreement. Notwithstanding the foregoing, except as otherwise provided by Section 3.4, the Administrator in its sole discretion may provide that in the event of certain events, including a Change in Control, the Holder’s death, retirement or disability or any other specified Termination of Service or any other event, the Holder’s rights in unvested Restricted Stock shall not lapse, such Restricted Stock shall vest and, if applicable, the Company shall not have a right of repurchase.
8.5 Certificates for Restricted Stock. Restricted Stock granted pursuant to the Plan may be evidenced in such manner as the Administrator shall determine. Certificates or book entries evidencing shares of Restricted Stock must include an appropriate legend referring to the terms, conditions, and restrictions applicable to such Restricted Stock. The Company may, in it sole discretion, (a) retain physical possession of any stock certificate evidencing shares of Restricted Stock until the restrictions thereon shall have lapsed and/or (b) require that the stock certificates evidencing shares of Restricted Stock be held in custody by a designated escrow agent (which may but need not be the Company) until the restrictions thereon shall have lapsed, and that the Holder deliver a stock power, endorsed in blank, relating to such Restricted Stock.
8.6 Section 83(b) Election. If a Holder makes an election under Section 83(b) of the Code to be taxed with respect to the Restricted Stock as of the date of transfer of the Restricted Stock rather than as of the date or dates upon which the Holder would otherwise be taxable under Section 83(a) of the Code, the Holder shall be required to deliver a copy of such election to the Company promptly after filing such election with the Internal Revenue Service.
ARTICLE 9.
AWARD OF RESTRICTED STOCK UNITS
9.1 Grant of Restricted Stock Units. The Administrator is authorized to grant Awards of Restricted Stock Units to any Eligible Individual selected by the Administrator in such amounts and subject to such terms and conditions as determined by the Administrator.
9.2 Term. Except as otherwise provided herein, the term of a Restricted Stock Unit award shall be set by the Administrator in its sole discretion.
 
18

9.3 Purchase Price. The Administrator shall specify the purchase price, if any, to be paid by the Holder to the Company with respect to any Restricted Stock Unit award;  provided ,  however , that value of the consideration shall not be less than the par value of a Share, unless otherwise permitted by applicable law.
9.4 Vesting of Restricted Stock Units. At the time of grant, the Administrator shall specify the date or dates on which the Restricted Stock Units shall become fully vested and nonforfeitable, and may specify such conditions to vesting as it deems appropriate, including, without limitation, vesting based upon the Holder’s duration of service to the Company or any Affiliate, one or more Performance Criteria, Company performance, individual performance or other specific criteria, in each case on a specified date or dates or over any period or periods, as determined by the Administrator, subject to Section 3.4.
9.5 Maturity and Payment. At the time of grant, the Administrator shall specify the maturity date applicable to each grant of Restricted Stock Units which shall be no earlier than the vesting date or dates of the Award and may be determined at the election of the Holder (if permitted by the applicable Award Agreement);  provided  that, except as otherwise determined by the Administrator, set forth in any applicable Award Agreement, and subject to compliance with Section 409A of the Code, in no event shall the maturity date relating to each Restricted Stock Unit occur following the later of (a) the 15 th  day of the third month following the end of calendar year in which the Restricted Stock Unit vests; or (b) the 15 th  day of the third month following the end of the Company’s fiscal year in which the Restricted Stock Unit vests. On the maturity date, the Company shall, subject to Section 12.4(e), transfer to the Holder one unrestricted, fully transferable share of Common Stock for each Restricted Stock Unit scheduled to be paid out on such date and not previously forfeited, or in the sole discretion of the Administrator, an amount in cash equal to the Fair Market Value of such shares on the maturity date or a combination of cash and Common Stock as determined by the Administrator.
9.6 Payment upon Termination of Service. An Award of Restricted Stock Units shall only be payable while the Holder is an Employee, a Consultant or a member of the Board, as applicable;  provided ,  however , that the Administrator, in its sole and absolute discretion may provide (in an Award Agreement or otherwise) that a Restricted Stock Unit award may be paid subsequent to a Termination of Service in certain events, including a Change in Control, the Holder’s death, retirement or disability or any other specified Termination of Service.
9.7 No Rights as a Stockholder. Unless otherwise determined by the Administrator, a Holder who is awarded Restricted Stock Units shall possess no incidents of ownership with respect to the Shares represented by such Restricted Stock Units, unless and until the same are transferred to the Holder pursuant to the terms of this Plan and the Award Agreement.
9.8 Dividend Equivalents. Subject to Section 10.2, the Administrator may, in its sole discretion, provide that Dividend Equivalents shall be earned by a Holder of Restricted Stock Units based on dividends declared on the Common Stock, to be credited as of dividend payment dates during the period between the date an Award of Restricted Stock Units is granted to a Holder and the maturity date of such Award.
 
19

ARTICLE 10.
AWARD OF PERFORMANCE AWARDS, DIVIDEND EQUIVALENTS, STOCK
PAYMENTS, DEFERRED STOCK, DEFERRED STOCK UNITS
10.1 Performance Awards.
(a) The Administrator is authorized to grant Performance Awards, including Awards of Performance Stock Units, to any Eligible Individual and to determine whether such Performance Awards shall be Performance-Based Compensation. The value of Performance Awards, including Performance Stock Units, may be linked to any one or more of the Performance Criteria or other specific criteria determined by the Administrator, in each case on a specified date or dates or over any period or periods determined by the Administrator. Performance Awards, including Performance Stock Unit awards may be paid in cash, Shares, or a combination of cash and Shares, as determined by the Administrator.
(b) Without limiting Section 10.1(a), the Administrator may grant Performance Awards to any Eligible Individual in the form of a cash bonus payable upon the attainment of objective Performance Goals, or such other criteria, whether or not objective, which are established by the Administrator, in each case on a specified date or dates or over any period or periods determined by the Administrator. Any such bonuses paid to a Holder which are intended to be Performance-Based Compensation shall be based upon objectively determinable bonus formulas established in accordance with the provisions of Article 5.
10.2 Dividend Equivalents.
(a) Dividend Equivalents may be granted by the Administrator based on dividends declared on the Common Stock, to be credited as of dividend payment dates during the period between the date an Award is granted to a Holder and the date such Award vests, is exercised, is distributed or expires, as determined by the Administrator. Such Dividend Equivalents shall be converted to cash or additional shares of Common Stock by such formula and at such time and subject to such limitations as may be determined by the Administrator. In addition, Dividend Equivalents with respect to an Award with performance-based vesting that are based on dividends paid prior to the vesting of such Award shall only be paid out to the Holder to the extent that the performance-based vesting conditions are subsequently satisfied and the Award vests.
(b) Notwithstanding the foregoing, no Dividend Equivalents shall be payable with respect to Options or Stock Appreciation Rights.
10.3 Stock Payments. The Administrator is authorized to make Stock Payments to any Eligible Individual. The number or value of shares of any Stock Payment shall be determined by the Administrator and may be based upon one or more Performance Criteria or any other specific criteria, including service to the Company or any Affiliate, determined by the Administrator. Shares underlying a Stock Payment which is subject to a vesting schedule or other conditions or criteria set by the Administrator will not be issued until those conditions have been satisfied. Unless otherwise provided by the Administrator, a Holder of a Stock Payment shall have no rights as a Company stockholder with respect to such Stock Payment
 
20

until such time as the Stock Payment has vested and the Shares underlying the Award have been issued to the Holder. Stock Payments may, but are not required to, be made in lieu of base salary, bonus, fees or other cash compensation otherwise payable to such Eligible Individual.
10.4 Deferred Stock. The Administrator is authorized to grant Deferred Stock to any Eligible Individual. The number of shares of Deferred Stock shall be determined by the Administrator and may (but is not required to) be based on one or more Performance Criteria or other specific criteria, including service to the Company or any Affiliate, as the Administrator determines, in each case on a specified date or dates or over any period or periods determined by the Administrator. Shares underlying a Deferred Stock award which is subject to a vesting schedule or other conditions or criteria set by the Administrator will be issued on the vesting date(s) or date(s) that those conditions and criteria have been satisfied, as applicable. Unless otherwise provided by the Administrator, a Holder of Deferred Stock shall have no rights as a Company stockholder with respect to such Deferred Stock until such time as the Award has vested and any other applicable conditions and/or criteria have been satisfied and the Shares underlying the Award have been issued to the Holder.
10.5 Deferred Stock Units. The Administrator is authorized to grant Deferred Stock Units to any Eligible Individual. The number of Deferred Stock Units shall be determined by the Administrator and may (but is not required to) be based on one or more Performance Criteria or other specific criteria, including service to the Company or any Affiliate, as the Administrator determines, in each case on a specified date or dates or over any period or periods determined by the Administrator. Each Deferred Stock Unit shall entitle the Holder thereof to receive one share of Common Stock on the date the Deferred Stock Unit becomes vested or upon a specified settlement date thereafter (which settlement date may (but is not required to) be the date of the Holder’s Termination of Service). Shares underlying a Deferred Stock Unit award which is subject to a vesting schedule or other conditions or criteria set by the Administrator will not be issued until on or following the date that those conditions and criteria have been satisfied. Unless otherwise provided by the Administrator, a Holder of Deferred Stock Units shall have no rights as a Company stockholder with respect to such Deferred Stock Units until such time as the Award has vested and any other applicable conditions and/or criteria have been satisfied and the Shares underlying the Award have been issued to the Holder.
10.6 Term. The term of a Performance Award, Dividend Equivalent award, Stock Payment award, Deferred Stock award and/or Deferred Stock Unit award shall be set by the Administrator in its sole discretion.
10.7 Purchase Price. The Administrator may establish the purchase price of a Performance Award, shares distributed as a Stock Payment award, shares of Deferred Stock or shares distributed pursuant to a Deferred Stock Unit award;  provided ,  however , that value of the consideration shall not be less than the par value of a Share, unless otherwise permitted by applicable law.
10.8 Termination of Service. A Performance Award, Stock Payment award, Dividend Equivalent award, Deferred Stock award and/or Deferred Stock Unit award is distributable only while the Holder is an Employee, Director or Consultant, as applicable. The
 
21

Administrator, however, in its sole discretion may provide that the Performance Award, Dividend Equivalent award, Stock Payment award, Deferred Stock award and/or Deferred Stock Unit award may be distributed subsequent to a Termination of Service in certain events, including a Change in Control, the Holder’s death, retirement or disability or any other specified Termination of Service.
ARTICLE 11.
AWARD OF STOCK APPRECIATION RIGHTS
11.1 Grant of Stock Appreciation Rights.
(a) The Administrator is authorized to grant Stock Appreciation Rights to Eligible Individuals from time to time, in its sole discretion, on such terms and conditions as it may determine consistent with the Plan.
(b) A Stock Appreciation Right shall entitle the Holder (or other person entitled to exercise the Stock Appreciation Right pursuant to the Plan) to exercise all or a specified portion of the Stock Appreciation Right (to the extent then exercisable pursuant to its terms) and to receive from the Company an amount determined by multiplying the difference obtained by subtracting the exercise price per share of the Stock Appreciation Right from the Fair Market Value on the date of exercise of the Stock Appreciation Right by the number of Shares with respect to which the Stock Appreciation Right shall have been exercised, subject to any limitations the Administrator may impose. Except as described in (c) below, the exercise price per Share subject to each Stock Appreciation Right shall be set by the Administrator, but shall not be less than 100% of the Fair Market Value on the date the Stock Appreciation Right is granted.
(c) Notwithstanding the foregoing provisions of Section 11.1(b) to the contrary, in the case of an Stock Appreciation Right that is a Substitute Award, the price per share of the shares subject to such Stock Appreciation Right may be less than 100% of the Fair Market Value per share on the date of grant;  provided  that the excess of: (i) the aggregate Fair Market Value (as of the date such Substitute Award is granted) of the shares subject to the Substitute Award, over (ii) the aggregate exercise price thereof does not exceed the excess of: (x) the aggregate fair market value (as of the time immediately preceding the transaction giving rise to the Substitute Award, such fair market value to be determined by the Administrator) of the shares of the predecessor entity that were subject to the grant assumed or substituted for by the Company, over (y) the aggregate exercise price of such shares.
11.2 Stock Appreciation Right Vesting.
(a) The period during which the right to exercise, in whole or in part, a Stock Appreciation Right vests in the Holder shall be set by the Administrator and the Administrator may determine that a Stock Appreciation Right may not be exercised in whole or in part for a specified period after it is granted. Such vesting may be based on service with the Company or any Affiliate, or any other criteria selected by the Administrator. At any time after grant of a Stock Appreciation Right, the Administrator may, in its sole discretion and subject to whatever
 
22

terms and conditions it selects, accelerate the period during which a Stock Appreciation Right vests.
(b) No portion of a Stock Appreciation Right which is unexercisable at Termination of Service shall thereafter become exercisable, except as may be otherwise provided by the Administrator either in the applicable Program or Award Agreement or by action of the Administrator following the grant of the Stock Appreciation Right.
11.3 Manner of Exercise. All or a portion of an exercisable Stock Appreciation Right shall be deemed exercised upon delivery of all of the following to the stock administrator of the Company, or such other person or entity designated by the Administrator, or his, her or its office, as applicable:
(a) A written or electronic notice complying with the applicable rules established by the Administrator stating that the Stock Appreciation Right, or a portion thereof, is exercised. The notice shall be signed by the Holder or other person then entitled to exercise the Stock Appreciation Right or such portion of the Stock Appreciation Right;
(b) Such representations and documents as the Administrator, in its sole discretion, deems necessary or advisable to effect compliance with all applicable provisions of the Securities Act and any other federal, state or foreign securities laws or regulations. The Administrator may, in its sole discretion, also take whatever additional actions it deems appropriate to effect such compliance; and
(c) In the event that the Stock Appreciation Right shall be exercised pursuant to this Section 11.3 by any person or persons other than the Holder, appropriate proof of the right of such person or persons to exercise the Stock Appreciation Right.
11.4 Stock Appreciation Right Term. The term of each Stock Appreciation Right (the “Stock Appreciation Right Term”) shall be set by the Administrator in its sole discretion;  provided ,  however , that the term shall not be more than ten (10) years from the date the Stock Appreciation Right is granted. The Administrator shall determine the time period, including the time period following a Termination of Service, during which the Holder has the right to exercise the vested Stock Appreciation Rights, which time period may not extend beyond the expiration date of the Stock Appreciation Right Term. Except as limited by the requirements of Section 409A of the Code and regulations and rulings thereunder, the Administrator may extend the Stock Appreciation Right Term of any outstanding Stock Appreciation Right, and may extend the time period during which vested Stock Appreciation Rights may be exercised, in connection with any Termination of Service of the Holder, and may amend any other term or condition of such Stock Appreciation Right relating to such a Termination of Service.
11.5 Payment. Payment of the amounts payable with respect to Stock Appreciation Rights pursuant to this Article 11 shall be in cash, Shares (based on its Fair Market Value as of the date the Stock Appreciation Right is exercised), or a combination of both, as determined by the Administrator.
 
23

ARTICLE 12.
ADDITIONAL TERMS OF AWARDS
12.1 Payment. The Administrator shall determine the methods by which payments by any Holder with respect to any Awards granted under the Plan shall be made, including, without limitation: (a) cash or check, (b) Shares (including, in the case of payment of the exercise price of an Award, Shares issuable pursuant to the exercise of the Award) or Shares held for such period of time as may be required by the Administrator in order to avoid adverse accounting consequences, in each case, having a Fair Market Value on the date of delivery equal to the aggregate payments required, (c) delivery of a written or electronic notice that the Holder has placed a market sell order with a broker with respect to Shares then issuable upon exercise or vesting of an Award, and that the broker has been directed to pay a sufficient portion of the net proceeds of the sale to the Company in satisfaction of the aggregate payments required;  provided  that payment of such proceeds is then made to the Company upon settlement of such sale, or (d) other form of legal consideration acceptable to the Administrator. The Administrator shall also determine the methods by which Shares shall be delivered or deemed to be delivered to Holders. Notwithstanding any other provision of the Plan to the contrary, no Holder who is a Director or an “executive officer” of the Company within the meaning of Section 13(k) of the Exchange Act shall be permitted to make payment with respect to any Awards granted under the Plan, or continue any extension of credit with respect to such payment, with a loan from the Company or a loan arranged by the Company in violation of Section 13(k) of the Exchange Act.
12.2 Tax Withholding. The Company or any Affiliate shall have the authority and the right to deduct or withhold, or require a Holder to remit to the Company, an amount sufficient to satisfy federal, state, local and foreign taxes (including the Holder’s FICA or employment tax obligation) required by law to be withheld with respect to any taxable event concerning a Holder arising as a result of the Plan. The Administrator may in its sole discretion and in satisfaction of the foregoing requirement allow a Holder to elect to have the Company withhold Shares otherwise issuable under an Award (or allow the surrender of Shares). The number of Shares which may be so withheld or surrendered shall be limited to the number of shares which have a Fair Market Value on the date of withholding or repurchase equal to the aggregate amount of such liabilities based on the minimum statutory withholding rates for federal, state, local and foreign income tax and payroll tax purposes that are applicable to such supplemental taxable income. The Administrator shall determine the fair market value of the Shares, consistent with applicable provisions of the Code, for tax withholding obligations due in connection with a broker-assisted cashless Option or Stock Appreciation Right exercise involving the sale of shares to pay the Option or Stock Appreciation Right exercise price or any tax withholding obligation.
12.3 Transferability of Awards.
(a) Except as otherwise provided in Section 12.3(b):
(i) No Award under the Plan may be sold, pledged, assigned or transferred in any manner other than by will or the laws of descent and distribution or, subject to
 
24

the consent of the Administrator, pursuant to a DRO, unless and until such Award has been exercised, or the shares underlying such Award have been issued, and all restrictions applicable to such shares have lapsed;
(ii) No Award or interest or right therein shall be liable for the debts, contracts or engagements of the Holder or his successors in interest or shall be subject to disposition by transfer, alienation, anticipation, pledge, hypothecation, encumbrance, assignment or any other means whether such disposition be voluntary or involuntary or by operation of law by judgment, levy, attachment, garnishment or any other legal or equitable proceedings (including bankruptcy), and any attempted disposition thereof shall be null and void and of no effect, except to the extent that such disposition is permitted by the preceding sentence; and
(iii) During the lifetime of the Holder, only the Holder may exercise an Award (or any portion thereof) granted to him under the Plan, unless it has been disposed of pursuant to a DRO; after the death of the Holder, any exercisable portion of an Award may, prior to the time when such portion becomes unexercisable under the Plan or the applicable Program or Award Agreement, be exercised by his personal representative or by any person empowered to do so under the deceased Holder’s will or under the then applicable laws of descent and distribution.
(b) Notwithstanding Section 12.3(a), the Administrator, in its sole discretion, may determine to permit a Holder to transfer an Award other than an Incentive Stock Option to any one or more Permitted Transferees, subject to the following terms and conditions: (i) an Award transferred to a Permitted Transferee shall not be assignable or transferable by the Permitted Transferee other than by will or the laws of descent and distribution; (ii) an Award transferred to a Permitted Transferee shall continue to be subject to all the terms and conditions of the Award as applicable to the original Holder (other than the ability to further transfer the Award); (iii) any transfer of a Non-Qualified Stock Option to a Permitted Transferee shall be without consideration; and (iv) the Holder and the Permitted Transferee shall execute any and all documents requested by the Administrator, including, without limitation documents to (A) confirm the status of the transferee as a Permitted Transferee, (B) satisfy any requirements for an exemption for the transfer under applicable federal, state and foreign securities laws and (C) evidence the transfer.
(c) Notwithstanding Section 12.3(a), a Holder may, in the manner determined by the Administrator, designate a beneficiary to exercise the rights of the Holder and to receive any distribution with respect to any Award upon the Holder’s death. A beneficiary, legal guardian, legal representative, or other person claiming any rights pursuant to the Plan is subject to all terms and conditions of the Plan and any Program or Award Agreement applicable to the Holder, except to the extent the Plan, the Program and the Award Agreement otherwise provide, and to any additional restrictions deemed necessary or appropriate by the Administrator. If the Holder is married and resides in a community property state, a designation of a person other than the Holder’s spouse as his or her beneficiary with respect to more than 50% of the Holder’s interest in the Award shall not be effective without the prior written or electronic consent of the Holder’s spouse. If no beneficiary has been designated or survives the Holder, payment shall be made to the person entitled thereto pursuant to the Holder’s will or the laws of descent and distribution. Subject to the foregoing, a beneficiary designation may be changed or revoked by a
 
25

Holder at any time; provided that the change or revocation is filed with the Administrator prior to the Holder’s death.
12.4 Conditions to Issuance of Shares.
(a) Notwithstanding anything herein to the contrary, the Company shall not be required to issue or deliver any certificates or make any book entries evidencing Shares pursuant to the exercise of any Award, unless and until the Board or the Committee has determined, with advice of counsel, that the issuance of such shares is in compliance with all applicable laws, regulations of governmental authorities and, if applicable, the requirements of any exchange on which the Shares are listed or traded, and the Shares are covered by an effective registration statement or applicable exemption from registration. In addition to the terms and conditions provided herein, the Board or the Committee may require that a Holder make such reasonable covenants, agreements, and representations as the Board or the Committee, in its discretion, deems advisable in order to comply with any such laws, regulations, or requirements.
(b) All Share certificates delivered pursuant to the Plan and all shares issued pursuant to book entry procedures are subject to any stop-transfer orders and other restrictions as the Administrator deems necessary or advisable to comply with federal, state, or foreign securities or other laws, rules and regulations and the rules of any securities exchange or automated quotation system on which the Shares are listed, quoted, or traded. The Administrator may place legends on any Share certificate or book entry to reference restrictions applicable to the Shares.
(c) The Administrator shall have the right to require any Holder to comply with any timing or other restrictions with respect to the settlement, distribution or exercise of any Award, including a window-period limitation, as may be imposed in the sole discretion of the Administrator.
(d) No fractional Shares shall be issued and the Administrator shall determine, in its sole discretion, whether cash shall be given in lieu of fractional shares or whether such fractional shares shall be eliminated by rounding down.
(e) Notwithstanding any other provision of the Plan, unless otherwise determined by the Administrator or required by any applicable law, rule or regulation, the Company shall not deliver to any Holder certificates evidencing Shares issued in connection with any Award and instead such Shares shall be recorded in the books of the Company (or, as applicable, its transfer agent or stock plan administrator).
12.5 Forfeiture and Claw-Back Provisions. Pursuant to its general authority to determine the terms and conditions applicable to Awards under the Plan, the Administrator shall have the right to provide, in an Award Agreement or otherwise, or to require a Holder to agree by separate written or electronic instrument, that:
(a) (i) Any proceeds, gains or other economic benefit actually or constructively received by the Holder upon any receipt or exercise of the Award, or upon the receipt or resale of any Shares underlying the Award, must be paid to the Company, and (ii) the Award shall terminate and any unexercised portion of the Award (whether or not vested) shall be
 
26

forfeited, if (x) a Termination of Service occurs prior to a specified date, or within a specified time period following receipt or exercise of the Award, or (y) the Holder at any time, or during a specified time period, engages in any activity in competition with the Company, or which is inimical, contrary or harmful to the interests of the Company, as further defined by the Administrator or (z) the Holder incurs a Termination of Service for “cause” (as such term is defined in the sole discretion of the Administrator, or as set forth in a written agreement relating to such Award between the Company and the Holder); and
(b) All Awards (including any proceeds, gains or other economic benefit actually or constructively received by the Holder upon any receipt or exercise of any Award or upon the receipt or resale of any Shares underlying the Award) shall be subject to the provisions of any claw-back policy implemented by the Company, including, without limitation, any claw-back policy adopted to comply with the requirements of the Dodd-Frank Wall Street Reform and Consumer Protection Act and any rules or regulations promulgated thereunder, to the extent set forth in such claw-back policy and/or in the applicable Award Agreement.
12.6 Prohibition on Repricing. Subject to Section 14.2, the Administrator shall not, without the approval of the stockholders of the Company, (i) authorize the amendment of any outstanding Option or Stock Appreciation Right to reduce its price per share, or (ii) cancel any Option or Stock Appreciation Right in exchange for cash or another Award when the Option or Stock Appreciation Right price per share exceeds the Fair Market Value of the underlying Shares. Subject to Section 14.2, the Administrator shall have the authority, without the approval of the stockholders of the Company, to amend any outstanding Award to increase the price per share or to cancel and replace an Award with the grant of an Award having a price per share that is greater than or equal to the price per share of the original Award. Furthermore, for purposes of this Section 12.6, except in connection with a corporate transaction involving the Company (including, without limitation, any stock dividend, stock split, extraordinary cash dividend, recapitalization, reorganization, merger, consolidation, split-up, spin-off, combination, or exchange of shares), the terms of outstanding Awards may not be amended to reduce the exercise price per share of outstanding Options or Stock Appreciation Rights or cancel outstanding Options or Stock Appreciation Rights in exchange for cash, other Awards or Options or Stock Appreciation Rights with an exercise price per share that is less than the exercise price per share of the original Options or Stock Appreciation Rights without the approval of the stockholders of the Company.
ARTICLE 13.
ADMINISTRATION
13.1 Administrator. The Committee (or another committee or a subcommittee of the Board assuming the functions of the Committee under the Plan) shall administer the Plan (except as otherwise permitted herein) and, unless otherwise determined by the Board, shall consist solely of two or more Non-Employee Directors appointed by and holding office at the pleasure of the Board, each of whom is intended to qualify as both a “non-employee director” as defined by Rule 16b-3 of the Exchange Act or any successor rule, an “outside director” for purposes of Section 162(m) of the Code and an “independent director” under the rules of any securities exchange or automated quotation system on which the Shares are listed, quoted or
 
27

traded; provided that any action taken by the Committee shall be valid and effective, whether or not members of the Committee at the time of such action are later determined not to have satisfied the requirements for membership set forth in this Section 13.l or otherwise provided in any charter of the Committee. Except as may otherwise be provided in any charter of the Committee, appointment of Committee members shall be effective upon acceptance of appointment. Committee members may resign at any time by delivering written or electronic notice to the Board. Vacancies in the Committee may only be filled by the Board. Notwithstanding the foregoing, (a) the full Board, acting by a majority of its members in office, shall conduct the general administration of the Plan with respect to Awards granted to Non-Employee Directors and, with respect to such Awards, the terms “Administrator” and “Committee” as used in the Plan shall be deemed to refer to the Board and (b) the Board or Committee may delegate its authority hereunder to the extent permitted by Section 13.6.
13.2 Duties and Powers of Committee. It shall be the duty of the Committee to conduct the general administration of the Plan in accordance with its provisions. The Committee shall have the power to interpret the Plan, the Program and the Award Agreement, and to adopt such rules for the administration, interpretation and application of the Plan as are not inconsistent therewith, to interpret, amend or revoke any such rules and to amend any Program or Award Agreement;  provided  that the rights or obligations of the Holder of the Award that is the subject of any such Program or Award Agreement are not affected adversely by such amendment, unless the consent of the Holder is obtained or such amendment is otherwise permitted under Section 14.10. Any such grant or award under the Plan need not be the same with respect to each Holder. Any such interpretations and rules with respect to Incentive Stock Options shall be consistent with the provisions of Section 422 of the Code. In its sole discretion, the Board may at any time and from time to time exercise any and all rights and duties of the Committee under the Plan except with respect to matters which under Rule 16b-3 under the Exchange Act or any successor rule, or Section 162(m) of the Code, or any regulations or rules issued thereunder, or the rules of any securities exchange or automated quotation system on which the Shares are listed, quoted or traded are required to be determined in the sole discretion of the Committee.
13.3 Action by the Committee. Unless otherwise established by the Board or in any charter of the Committee, a majority of the Committee shall constitute a quorum and the acts of a majority of the members present at any meeting at which a quorum is present, and acts approved in writing by all members of the Committee in lieu of a meeting, shall be deemed the acts of the Committee. Each member of the Committee is entitled to, in good faith, rely or act upon any report or other information furnished to that member by any officer or other employee of the Company or any Affiliate, the Company’s independent certified public accountants, or any executive compensation consultant or other professional retained by the Company to assist in the administration of the Plan.
13.4 Authority of Administrator. Subject to the Company’s Bylaws, the Committee’s Charter and any specific designation in the Plan, the Administrator has the exclusive power, authority and sole discretion to:
(a) Designate Eligible Individuals to receive Awards;
 
28

(b) Determine the type or types of Awards to be granted to each Eligible Individual;
(c) Determine the number of Awards to be granted and the number of Shares to which an Award will relate;
(d) Determine the terms and conditions of any Award granted pursuant to the Plan, including, but not limited to, the exercise price, grant price, or purchase price, any performance criteria, any restrictions or limitations on the Award, any schedule for vesting, lapse of forfeiture restrictions or restrictions on the exercisability of an Award, and accelerations or waivers thereof, and any provisions related to non-competition and recapture of gain on an Award, based in each case on such considerations as the Administrator in its sole discretion determines;
(e) Determine whether, to what extent, and pursuant to what circumstances an Award may be settled in, or the exercise price of an Award may be paid in cash, Shares, other Awards, or other property, or an Award may be canceled, forfeited, or surrendered;
(f) Prescribe the form of each Award Agreement, which need not be identical for each Holder;
(g) Decide all other matters that must be determined in connection with an Award;
(h) Establish, adopt, or revise any rules and regulations as it may deem necessary or advisable to administer the Plan;
(i) Interpret the terms of, and any matter arising pursuant to, the Plan, any Program or any Award Agreement;
(j) Make all other decisions and determinations that may be required pursuant to the Plan or as the Administrator deems necessary or advisable to administer the Plan; and
(k) Accelerate wholly or partially the vesting or lapse of restrictions of any Award or portion thereof at any time after the grant of an Award, subject to whatever terms and conditions it selects and Sections 3.4 and 14.2(d).
13.5 Decisions Binding. The Administrator’s interpretation of the Plan, any Awards granted pursuant to the Plan, any Program, any Award Agreement and all decisions and determinations by the Administrator with respect to the Plan are final, binding, and conclusive on all parties.
13.6 Delegation of Authority. To the extent permitted by applicable law or the rules of any securities exchange or automated quotation system on which the Shares are listed, quoted or traded, the Board or Committee may from time to time delegate to a committee of one or more members of the Board or one or more officers of the Company the authority to
 
29

grant or amend Awards or to take other administrative actions pursuant to Article 13; provided, however, that in no event shall an officer of the Company be delegated the authority to grant awards to, or amend awards held by, the following individuals: (a) individuals who are subject to Section 16 of the Exchange Act, (b) Covered Employees, or (c) officers of the Company (or Directors) to whom authority to grant or amend Awards has been delegated hereunder;  provided ,  further , that any delegation of administrative authority shall only be permitted to the extent it is permissible under Section 162(m) of the Code and applicable securities laws or the rules of any securities exchange or automated quotation system on which the Shares are listed, quoted or traded. Any delegation hereunder shall be subject to the restrictions and limits that the Board or Committee specifies at the time of such delegation, and the Board may at any time rescind the authority so delegated or appoint a new delegatee. At all times, the delegatee appointed under this Section 13.6 shall serve in such capacity at the pleasure of the Board and the Committee.
ARTICLE 14.
MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS
14.1 Amendment, Suspension or Termination of the Plan. Except as otherwise provided in this Section 14.1, the Plan may be wholly or partially amended or otherwise modified, suspended or terminated at any time or from time to time by the Board or the Committee. However, without approval of the Company’s stockholders given within twelve (12) months before or after the action by the Administrator, no action of the Administrator may, except as provided in Section 14.2, (a) increase the limits imposed in Section 3.1 on the maximum number of shares which may be issued under the Plan, or (b) reduce the price per share of any outstanding Option or Stock Appreciation Right granted under the Plan, or take any action prohibited under Section 12.6, or (c) cancel any Option or Stock Appreciation Right in exchange for cash or another Award when the Option or Stock Appreciation Right price per share exceeds the Fair Market Value of the underlying Shares. Except as provided in Section 14.10, no amendment, suspension or termination of the Plan shall, without the consent of the Holder, impair any rights or obligations under any Award theretofore granted or awarded, unless the Award itself otherwise expressly so provides. No Awards may be granted or awarded during any period of suspension or after termination of the Plan, and in no event may any Award be granted under the Plan after the tenth (10 th ) anniversary of the Effective Date.
14.2 Changes in Common Stock or Assets of the Company, Acquisition or Liquidation of the Company and Other Corporate Events.
(a) In the event of any stock dividend, stock split, combination or exchange of shares, merger, consolidation or other distribution (other than normal cash dividends) of Company assets to stockholders, or any other change affecting the shares of the Company’s stock or the share price of the Company’s stock other than an Equity Restructuring, the Administrator shall make equitable adjustments, if any, to reflect such change with respect to (i) the aggregate number and kind of shares that may be issued under the Plan (including, but not limited to, adjustments of the limitations in Section 3.1 on the maximum number and kind of shares which may be issued under the Plan, adjustments of the Award Limit, and adjustments of the manner in which shares subject to Full Value Awards will be counted); (ii) the number and
 
30

kind of shares of Common Stock (or other securities or property) subject to outstanding Awards; (iii) the terms and conditions of any outstanding Awards (including, without limitation, any applicable performance targets or criteria with respect thereto); and (iv) the grant or exercise price per share for any outstanding Awards under the Plan. Any adjustment affecting an Award intended as Performance-Based Compensation shall be made consistent with the requirements of Section 162(m) of the Code.
(b) In the event of any transaction or event described in Section 14.2(a) or any unusual or nonrecurring transactions or events affecting the Company, any Affiliate of the Company, or the financial statements of the Company or any Affiliate, or of changes in applicable laws, regulations or accounting principles, the Administrator, in its sole discretion, and on such terms and conditions as it deems appropriate, either by the terms of the Award or by action taken prior to the occurrence of such transaction or event and either automatically or upon the Holder’s request, is hereby authorized to take any one or more of the following actions whenever the Administrator determines that such action is appropriate in order to prevent dilution or enlargement of the benefits or potential benefits intended to be made available under the Plan or with respect to any Award under the Plan, to facilitate such transactions or events or to give effect to such changes in laws, regulations or principles:
(i) To provide for either (A) termination of any such Award in exchange for an amount of cash, if any, equal to the amount that would have been attained upon the exercise of such Award or realization of the Holder’s rights (and, for the avoidance of doubt, if as of the date of the occurrence of the transaction or event described in this Section 14.2 the Administrator determines in good faith that no amount would have been attained upon the exercise of such Award or realization of the Holder’s rights, then such Award may be terminated by the Company without payment) or (B) the replacement of such Award with other rights or property selected by the Administrator in its sole discretion having an aggregate value not exceeding the amount that could have been attained upon the exercise of such Award or realization of the Holder’s rights had such Award been currently exercisable or payable or fully vested;
(ii) To provide that such Award be assumed by the successor or survivor corporation, or a parent or subsidiary thereof, or shall be substituted for by similar options, rights or awards covering the stock of the successor or survivor corporation, or a parent or subsidiary thereof, with appropriate adjustments as to the number and kind of shares and prices;
(iii) To make adjustments in the number and type of shares of the Company’s stock (or other securities or property) subject to outstanding Awards, and in the number and kind of outstanding Restricted Stock or Deferred Stock and/or in the terms and conditions of (including the grant or exercise price), and the criteria included in, outstanding Awards and Awards which may be granted in the future;
(iv) To provide that such Award shall be exercisable or payable or fully vested with respect to all shares covered thereby, notwithstanding anything to the contrary in the Plan or the applicable Program or Award Agreement; and
 
31

(v) To provide that the Award cannot vest, be exercised or become payable after such event.
(c) In connection with the occurrence of any Equity Restructuring, and notwithstanding anything to the contrary in Sections 14.2(a) and 14.2(b):
(i) The number and type of securities subject to each outstanding Award and the exercise price or grant price thereof, if applicable, shall be equitably adjusted; and/or
(ii) The Administrator shall make such equitable adjustments, if any, as the Administrator in its discretion may deem appropriate to reflect such Equity Restructuring with respect to the aggregate number and kind of shares that may be issued under the Plan (including, but not limited to, adjustments of the limitations in Section 3.1 on the maximum number and kind of shares which may be issued under the Plan, adjustments of the Award Limit, and adjustments of the manner in which shares subject to Full Value Awards will be counted). The adjustments provided under this Section 14.2(c) shall be nondiscretionary and shall be final and binding on the affected Holder and the Company.
(d) Notwithstanding any other provision of the Plan, in the event of a Change in Control, each outstanding Award shall continue in effect or be assumed or an equivalent Award substituted by the successor corporation or a parent or subsidiary of the successor corporation. In the event an Award continues in effect or is assumed or an equivalent Award substituted, and a Holder has a Termination of Service by the Company or its successor without Cause upon or within twelve (12) months following the Change in Control, then such Holder shall be fully vested in such continued, assumed or substituted Award .
(e) In the event that the successor corporation in a Change in Control refuses to assume or substitute for the Award, the Administrator may cause any or all of such Awards to become fully exercisable immediately prior to the consummation of such transaction and all forfeiture restrictions on any or all of such Awards to lapse. If an Award is exercisable in lieu of assumption or substitution in the event of a Change in Control, the Administrator shall notify the Holder that the Award shall be fully exercisable for a period of fifteen (15) days from the date of such notice, contingent upon the occurrence of the Change in Control, and the Award shall terminate upon the expiration of such period.
(f) For the purposes of this Section 14.2, an Award shall be considered assumed if, following the Change in Control, the Award confers the right to purchase or receive, for each share of Common Stock subject to the Award immediately prior to the Change in Control, the consideration (whether stock, cash, or other securities or property) received in the Change in Control by holders of Common Stock for each share held on the effective date of the transaction (and if holders were offered a choice of consideration, the type of consideration chosen by the holders of a majority of the outstanding shares);  provided ,  however , that if such consideration received in the Change in Control was not solely common stock of the successor corporation or its parent, the Administrator may, with the consent of the successor corporation, provide for the consideration to be received upon the exercise of the Award, for each share of Common Stock subject to an Award, to be solely common stock of the successor corporation or
 
32

its parent equal in fair market value to the per share consideration received by holders of Common Stock in the Change in Control.
(g) The Administrator may, in its sole discretion, include such further provisions and limitations in any Award, agreement or certificate, as it may deem equitable and in the best interests of the Company that are not inconsistent with the provisions of the Plan.
(h) With respect to Awards which are granted to Covered Employees and are intended to qualify as Performance-Based Compensation, no adjustment or action described in this Section 14.2 or in any other provision of the Plan shall be authorized to the extent that such adjustment or action would cause such Award to fail to so qualify as Performance-Based Compensation, unless the Administrator determines that the Award should not so qualify. No adjustment or action described in this Section 14.2 or in any other provision of the Plan shall be authorized to the extent that such adjustment or action would cause the Plan to violate Section 422(b)(1) of the Code. Furthermore, no such adjustment or action shall be authorized to the extent such adjustment or action would result in short-swing profits liability under Section 16 or violate the exemptive conditions of Rule 16b-3 unless the Administrator determines that the Award is not to comply with such exemptive conditions.
(i) The existence of the Plan, the Program, the Award Agreement and the Awards granted hereunder shall not affect or restrict in any way the right or power of the Company or the stockholders of the Company to make or authorize any adjustment, recapitalization, reorganization or other change in the Company’s capital structure or its business, any merger or consolidation of the Company, any issue of stock or of options, warrants or rights to purchase stock or of bonds, debentures, preferred or prior preference stocks whose rights are superior to or affect the Common Stock or the rights thereof or which are convertible into or exchangeable for Common Stock, or the dissolution or liquidation of the Company, or any sale or transfer of all or any part of its assets or business, or any other corporate act or proceeding, whether of a similar character or otherwise.
(j) No action shall be taken under this Section 14.2 which shall cause an Award to fail to comply with Section 409A of the Code or the Treasury Regulations thereunder, to the extent applicable to such Award.
(k) In the event of any pending stock dividend, stock split, combination or exchange of shares, merger, consolidation or other distribution (other than normal cash dividends) of Company assets to stockholders, or any other change affecting the shares of Common Stock or the share price of the Common Stock including any Equity Restructuring, for reasons of administrative convenience, the Company in its sole discretion may refuse to permit the exercise of any Award during a period of thirty (30) days prior to the consummation of any such transaction.
14.3 Approval of Plan by Stockholders. The Plan will be submitted for the approval of the Company’s stockholders within twelve (12) months after the date of the Board’s initial adoption of the Plan. Awards may be granted or awarded prior to such stockholder approval; provided  that such Awards shall not be exercisable, shall not vest and the restrictions thereon shall not lapse and no shares of Common Stock shall be issued pursuant thereto prior to the
 
33

time when the Plan is approved by the stockholders; and provided, further, that if such approval has not been obtained at the end of said twelve (12) month period, all Awards previously granted or awarded under the Plan shall thereupon be canceled and become null and void.
14.4 No Stockholders Rights. Except as otherwise provided herein, a Holder shall have none of the rights of a stockholder with respect to shares of Common Stock covered by any Award until the Holder becomes the record owner of such shares of Common Stock.
14.5 Paperless Administration. In the event that the Company establishes, for itself or using the services of a third party, an automated system for the documentation, granting or exercise of Awards, such as a system using an internet website or interactive voice response, then the paperless documentation, granting or exercise of Awards by a Holder may be permitted through the use of such an automated system.
14.6 Effect of Plan upon Other Compensation Plans. The adoption of the Plan shall not affect any other compensation or incentive plans in effect for the Company or any Affiliate. Nothing in the Plan shall be construed to limit the right of the Company or any Affiliate: (a) to establish any other forms of incentives or compensation for Employees, Directors or Consultants of the Company or any Affiliate, or (b) to grant or assume options or other rights or awards otherwise than under the Plan in connection with any proper corporate purpose including without limitation, the grant or assumption of options in connection with the acquisition by purchase, lease, merger, consolidation or otherwise, of the business, stock or assets of any corporation, partnership, limited liability company, firm or association.
14.7 Compliance with Laws. The Plan, the granting and vesting of Awards under the Plan and the issuance and delivery of Shares and the payment of money under the Plan or under Awards granted or awarded hereunder are subject to compliance with all applicable federal, state, local and foreign laws, rules and regulations (including but not limited to state, federal and foreign securities law and margin requirements), the rules of any securities exchange or automated quotation system on which the Shares are listed, quoted or traded, and to such approvals by any listing, regulatory or governmental authority as may, in the opinion of counsel for the Company, be necessary or advisable in connection therewith. Any securities delivered under the Plan shall be subject to such restrictions, and the person acquiring such securities shall, if requested by the Company, provide such assurances and representations to the Company as the Company may deem necessary or desirable to assure compliance with all applicable legal requirements. To the extent permitted by applicable law, the Plan and Awards granted or awarded hereunder shall be deemed amended to the extent necessary to conform to such laws, rules and regulations.
14.8 Titles and Headings, References to Sections of the Code or Exchange Act. The titles and headings of the Sections in the Plan are for convenience of reference only and, in the event of any conflict, the text of the Plan, rather than such titles or headings, shall control. References to sections of the Code or the Exchange Act shall include any amendment or successor thereto.
 
34

14.9 Governing Law. The Plan and any agreements hereunder shall be administered, interpreted and enforced under the internal laws of the State of Delaware without regard to conflicts of laws thereof or of any other jurisdiction.
14.10 Section 409A. To the extent that the Administrator determines that any Award granted under the Plan is subject to Section 409A of the Code, the Program pursuant to which such Award is granted and the Award Agreement evidencing such Award shall incorporate the terms and conditions required by Section 409A of the Code. To the extent applicable, the Plan, the Program and any Award Agreements shall be interpreted in accordance with Section 409A of the Code and Department of Treasury regulations and other interpretive guidance issued thereunder, including without limitation any such regulations or other guidance that may be issued after the Effective Date. Notwithstanding any provision of the Plan to the contrary, in the event that following the Effective Date the Administrator determines that any Award may be subject to Section 409A of the Code and related Department of Treasury guidance (including such Department of Treasury guidance as may be issued after the Effective Date), the Administrator may adopt such amendments to the Plan and the applicable Program and Award Agreement or adopt other policies and procedures (including amendments, policies and procedures with retroactive effect), or take any other actions, that the Administrator determines are necessary or appropriate to (a) exempt the Award from Section 409A of the Code and/or preserve the intended tax treatment of the benefits provided with respect to the Award, or (b) comply with the requirements of Section 409A of the Code and related Department of Treasury guidance and thereby avoid the application of any penalty taxes under such Section.
14.11 No Rights to Awards. No Eligible Individual or other person shall have any claim to be granted any Award pursuant to the Plan, and neither the Company nor the Administrator is obligated to treat Eligible Individuals, Holders or any other persons uniformly.
14.12 Unfunded Status of Awards. The Plan is intended to be an “unfunded” plan for incentive compensation. With respect to any payments not yet made to a Holder pursuant to an Award, nothing contained in the Plan or any Program or Award Agreement shall give the Holder any rights that are greater than those of a general creditor of the Company or any Affiliate.
14.13 Indemnification. To the extent allowable pursuant to applicable law, each member of the Committee or of the Board shall be indemnified and held harmless by the Company from any loss, cost, liability, or expense that may be imposed upon or reasonably incurred by such member in connection with or resulting from any claim, action, suit, or proceeding to which he or she may be a party or in which he or she may be involved by reason of any action or failure to act pursuant to the Plan and against and from any and all amounts paid by him or her in satisfaction of judgment in such action, suit, or proceeding against him or her;  provided  he or she gives the Company an opportunity, at its own expense, to handle and defend the same before he or she undertakes to handle and defend it on his or her own behalf. The foregoing right of indemnification shall not be exclusive of any other rights of indemnification to which such persons may be entitled pursuant to the Company’s Articles of Incorporation or Bylaws, as a matter of law, or otherwise, or any power that the Company may have to indemnify them or hold them harmless.
 
35

14.14 Relationship to other Benefits. No payment pursuant to the Plan shall be taken into account in determining any benefits under any pension, retirement, savings, profit sharing, group insurance, welfare or other benefit plan of the Company or any Affiliate except to the extent otherwise expressly provided in writing in such other plan or an agreement thereunder.
14.15 Expenses. The expenses of administering the Plan shall be borne by the Company and its Affiliates.
* * * * *
I hereby certify that the foregoing Plan was duly adopted by the Board of Directors of Tilly’s, Inc. on                          , 2012.
* * * * *
I hereby certify that the foregoing Plan was approved by the stockholders of Tilly’s, Inc. on                          , 2012.
Executed on this      day of                     , 2012.

 
Corporate Secretary	
 
36

 
Exhibit 10.16
TILLY’S INC.
2012 EQUITY AND INCENTIVE AWARD PLAN
STOCK OPTION GRANT NOTICE AND
STOCK OPTION AGREEMENT
Tilly’s Inc., a Delaware corporation (the “Company”), pursuant to its 2012 Equity and Incentive Award Plan (the “ Plan ”), hereby grants to the individual listed below (“ Participant ”), an option to purchase the number of shares of the Company’s common stock, par value $0.001 (“ Stock ”), set forth below (the “ Option ”). This Option is subject to all of the terms and conditions as set forth herein and in the Stock Option Agreement attached hereto as  Exhibit A  (the “ Stock Option Agreement ”) and the Plan, each of which are incorporated herein by reference. Unless otherwise defined herein, the terms defined in the Plan shall have the same defined meanings in this Grant Notice and the Stock Option Agreement.

Participant:	 	 	  	 	
Grant Date:	 	 	  	 	
Exercise Price per Share:	 	$	  	 	
Total Exercise Price:	 	$	  	 	
Total Number of Shares
Subject to the Option:	 	shares	  	 	
Expiration Date:	 	 	  	 	
Type of Option:                 ¨  Incentive Stock Option            ¨  Non-Qualified Stock Option
Vesting Schedule:              [To be specified in individual agreements]
By his or her signature, Participant agrees to be bound by the terms and conditions of the Plan, the Stock Option Agreement and this Grant Notice. Participant has reviewed the Stock Option Agreement, the Plan and this Grant Notice in their entirety, has had an opportunity to obtain the advice of counsel prior to executing this Grant Notice and fully understands all provisions of this Grant Notice, the Stock Option Agreement and the Plan. Participant hereby agrees to accept as binding, conclusive and final all decisions or interpretations of the Administrator of the Plan upon any questions arising under the Plan, this Grant Notice or the Stock Option Agreement.

TILLY’S INC.	    	PARTICIPANT	
 	 	 	 	
By:	  	 	    	By:	  	 	
Print Name:	  	 	    	Print Name:	  	 	
Title:	  	 	    	 	  	 	
Address:	  	10 Whatney	    	Address:	  	 	
 	  	Irvine, CA 92618	    	 	  	 	

EXHIBIT A
TO STOCK OPTION GRANT NOTICE
TILLY’S INC. STOCK OPTION AGREEMENT
Pursuant to the Stock Option Grant Notice (the “Grant Notice”) to which this Stock Option Agreement (this “ Agreement ”) is attached, Tilly’s Inc., a Delaware corporation (the “ Company ”), has granted to Participant an option under the Tilly’s Inc. 2012 Equity and Incentive Award Plan, as amended from time to time (the “ Plan ”) to purchase the number of shares of Stock indicated in the Grant Notice.
ARTICLE I.
GENERAL
1.1 Defined Terms. Wherever the following terms are used in this Agreement they shall have the meanings specified below, unless the context clearly indicates otherwise. Capitalized terms not specifically defined herein shall have the meanings specified in the Plan and the Grant Notice.
(a) “Administrator” shall mean the Board or the Committee responsible for conducting the general administration of the Plan in accordance with Article 13 of the Plan; provided that if Participant is an Independent Director, “Administrator” shall mean the Board.
(b) “Termination of Consultancy” shall mean the time when the engagement of Participant as a Consultant to the Company or a Subsidiary is terminated for any reason, with or without cause, including, but not by way of limitation, by resignation, discharge, death, Disability or retirement, but excluding: (a) terminations where there is a simultaneous employment or continuing employment of Participant by the Company or any Subsidiary, and (b) terminations where there is a simultaneous re-establishment of a consulting relationship or continuing consulting relationship between Participant and the Company or any Subsidiary. The Administrator, in its absolute discretion, shall determine the effect of all matters and questions relating to Termination of Consultancy, including, but not by way of limitation, the question of whether a particular leave of absence constitutes a Termination of Consultancy. Notwithstanding any other provision of the Plan, the Company or any Subsidiary has an absolute and unrestricted right to terminate a Consultant’s service at any time for any reason whatsoever, with or without cause, except to the extent expressly provided otherwise in writing.
(c) “Termination of Directorship” shall mean the time when Participant, if he or she is or becomes an Independent Director, ceases to be a Director for any reason, including, but not by way of limitation, a termination by resignation, failure to be elected, death or retirement. The Board, in its sole and absolute discretion, shall determine the effect of all matters and questions relating to Termination of Directorship with respect to Independent Directors.
(d) “Termination of Employment” shall mean the time when the employee-employer relationship between Participant and the Company or any Subsidiary is terminated for any reason, with or without cause, including, but not by way of limitation, a termination by resignation, discharge, death, Disability or retirement; but excluding: (a) terminations where there is a simultaneous reemployment or continuing employment of Participant by the Company or any Subsidiary, and (b) terminations where there is a simultaneous establishment of a consulting relationship or continuing consulting relationship between Participant and the Company or any Subsidiary. The Administrator, in its absolute discretion, shall determine the effect of all matters and questions relating to Termination of Employment, including, but not by way of limitation, the question of whether a particular leave of
 
A-2

absence constitutes a Termination of Employment; provided, however, that, if this Option is an Incentive Stock Option, unless otherwise determined by the Administrator in its discretion, a leave of absence, change in status from an employee to an independent contractor or other change in the employee-employer relationship shall constitute a Termination of Employment if, and to the extent that, such leave of absence, change in status or other change interrupts employment for the purposes of Section 422(a)(2) of the Code and the then applicable regulations and revenue rulings under said Section.
(e) “Termination of Services” shall mean Participant’s Termination of Consultancy, Termination of Directorship or Termination of Employment, as applicable.
1.2 Incorporation of Terms of Plan. The Option is subject to the terms and conditions of the Plan which are incorporated herein by reference. In the event of any inconsistency between the Plan and this Agreement, the terms of the Plan shall control.
ARTICLE II.
GRANT OF OPTION
2.1 Grant of Option. In consideration of Participant’s past and/or continued employment with or service to the Company or a Subsidiary and for other good and valuable consideration, effective as of the Grant Date set forth in the Grant Notice (the “ Grant Date ”), the Company irrevocably grants to Participant the Option to purchase any part or all of an aggregate of the number of shares of Stock set forth in the Grant Notice, upon the terms and conditions set forth in the Plan and this Agreement. Unless designated as a Non-Qualified Stock Option in the Grant Notice, the Option shall be an Incentive Stock Option to the maximum extent permitted by law.
2.2 Exercise Price. The exercise price of the shares of Stock subject to the Option shall be as set forth in the Grant Notice, without commission or other charge;  provided ,  however , that the price per share of the shares of Stock subject to the Option shall not be less than 100% of the Fair Market Value of a share of Stock on the Grant Date. Notwithstanding the foregoing, if this Option is designated as an Incentive Stock Option and Participant owns (within the meaning of Section 424(d) of the Code) more than 10% of the total combined voting power of all classes of stock of the Company or any “subsidiary corporation” of the Company or any “parent corporation” of the Company (each within the meaning of Section 424 of the Code), the price per share of the shares of Stock subject to the Option shall not be less than 110% of the Fair Market Value of a share of Stock on the Grant Date.
2.3 Consideration to the Company. In consideration of the grant of the Option by the Company, Participant agrees to render faithful and efficient services to the Company or any Subsidiary. Nothing in the Plan or this Agreement shall confer upon Participant any right to continue in the employ or service of the Company or any Subsidiary or shall interfere with or restrict in any way the rights of the Company and its Subsidiaries, which rights are hereby expressly reserved, to discharge or terminate the services of Participant at any time for any reason whatsoever, with or without Cause, except to the extent expressly provided otherwise in a written agreement between the Company or a Subsidiary and Participant.
 
A-3

ARTICLE III.
PERIOD OF EXERCISABILITY
3.1 Commencement of Exercisability.
(a) Subject to Sections 3.2, 3.3, 5.8 and 5.10, the Option shall become vested and exercisable in such amounts and at such times as are set forth in the Grant Notice.
(b) No portion of the Option which has not become vested and exercisable at the date of Participant’s Termination of Employment, Termination of Directorship or Termination of Consultancy shall thereafter become vested and exercisable, except as may be otherwise provided by the Administrator or as set forth in a written agreement between the Company and Participant.
(c) Notwithstanding Sections 3.1(a) and 3.1(b), pursuant to Section 14.2 of the Plan, the Option shall become fully vested and exercisable in the event of a Change in Control, in connection with which the successor corporation does not assume the Option or substitute an equivalent right for the Option. Should the successor corporation assume the Option or substitute an equivalent right, then no such acceleration shall apply unless Participant has a Termination of Services by the Company or its successor without Cause upon or within twelve months following the Change in Control, in which case the Option shall become fully vested and exercisable.
3.2 Duration of Exercisability. The installments provided for in the vesting schedule set forth in the Grant Notice are cumulative. Each such installment which becomes vested and exercisable pursuant to the vesting schedule set forth in the Grant Notice shall remain vested and exercisable until it becomes unexercisable under Section 3.3.
3.3 Expiration of Option. The Option may not be exercised to any extent by anyone after the first to occur of the following events:
(a) The expiration of ten years from the Grant Date;
(b) If this Option is designated as an Incentive Stock Option and Participant owned (within the meaning of Section 424(d) of the Code), at the time the Option was granted, more than 10% of the total combined voting power of all classes of stock of the Company or any “subsidiary corporation” of the Company or any “parent corporation” of the Company (each within the meaning of Section 424 of the Code), the expiration of five years from the Grant Date;
(c) The expiration of three months from the date of Participant’s Termination of Services, unless such termination occurs by reason of Participant’s death or Disability;
(d) The expiration of one year from the date of Participant’s Termination of Services by reason of Participant’s death or Disability; or
Participant acknowledges that an Incentive Stock Option exercised more that three months after Participant’s Termination of Employment, other than by reason of death or Disability, will be taxed as a Non-Qualified Stock Option.
3.4 Special Tax Consequences. Participant acknowledges that, to the extent that the aggregate Fair Market Value (determined as of the time the Option is granted) of all shares of Stock with respect to which Incentive Stock Options, including the Option, are exercisable for the first time by
 
A-4

Participant in any calendar year exceeds $100,000, the Option and such other options shall be Non-Qualified Stock Options to the extent necessary to comply with the limitations imposed by Section 422(d) of the Code. Participant further acknowledges that the rule set forth in the preceding sentence shall be applied by taking the Option and other “incentive stock options” into account in the order in which they were granted, as determined under Section 422(d) of the Code and the Treasury Regulations thereunder.
ARTICLE IV.
EXERCISE OF OPTION
4.1 Person Eligible to Exercise. Except as provided in Sections 5.2(b) and 5.2(c), during the lifetime of Participant, only Participant may exercise the Option or any portion thereof. After the death of Participant, any exercisable portion of the Option may, prior to the time when the Option becomes unexercisable under Section 3.3, be exercised by Participant’s personal representative or by any person empowered to do so under the deceased Participant’s will or under the then applicable laws of descent and distribution.
4.2 Partial Exercise. Any exercisable portion of the Option or the entire Option, if then wholly exercisable, may be exercised in whole or in part at any time prior to the time when the Option or portion thereof becomes unexercisable under Section 3.3.
4.3 Manner of Exercise. The Option, or any exercisable portion thereof, may be exercised solely by delivery to the Secretary of the Company (or any third party administrator or other person or entity designated by the Company) of all of the following prior to the time when the Option or such portion thereof becomes unexercisable under Section 3.3:
(a) An Exercise Notice in a form specified by the Administrator, stating that the Option or portion thereof is thereby exercised, such notice complying with all applicable rules established by the Administrator;
(b) The receipt by the Company of full payment for the shares of Stock with respect to which the Option or portion thereof is exercised, including payment of any applicable withholding tax, which may be in one or more of the forms of consideration permitted under Section 4.4;
(c) Any other written representations as may be required in the Administrator’s reasonable discretion to evidence compliance with the Securities Act or any other applicable law rule, or regulation; and
(d) In the event the Option or portion thereof shall be exercised pursuant to Section 4.1 by any person or persons other than Participant, appropriate proof of the right of such person or persons to exercise the Option.
Notwithstanding any of the foregoing, the Company shall have the right to specify all conditions of the manner of exercise, which conditions may vary by country and which may be subject to change from time to time.
4.4 Method of Payment. Payment of the exercise price shall be by any of the following, or a combination thereof, at the election of Participant:
(a) Cash;
 
A-5

(b) Check;
(c) With the consent of the Administrator, delivery of a notice that Participant has placed a market sell order with a broker with respect to shares of Stock then issuable upon exercise of the Option, and that the broker has been directed to pay a sufficient portion of the net proceeds of the sale to the Company in satisfaction of the aggregate exercise price;  provided , that payment of such proceeds is then made to the Company upon settlement of such sale;
(d) With the consent of the Administrator, surrender of other shares of Stock which (A) in the case of shares of Stock acquired from the Company, have been owned by Participant for more than six (6) months on the date of surrender, and (B) have a Fair Market Value on the date of surrender equal to the aggregate exercise price of the shares of Stock with respect to which the Option or portion thereof is being exercised;
(e) With the consent of the Administrator, surrendered shares of Stock issuable upon the exercise of the Option having a Fair Market Value on the date of exercise equal to the aggregate exercise price of the shares of Stock with respect to which the Option or portion thereof is being exercised; or
(f) With the consent of the Administrator, property of any kind which constitutes good and valuable consideration.
4.5 Conditions to Issuance of Stock Certificates. The shares of Stock deliverable upon the exercise of the Option, or any portion thereof, may be either previously authorized but unissued shares of Stock or issued shares of Stock which have then been reacquired by the Company. Such shares of Stock shall be fully paid and nonassessable. The Company shall not be required to issue or deliver any shares of Stock purchased upon the exercise of the Option or portion thereof prior to fulfillment of all of the following conditions:
(a) The admission of such shares of Stock to listing on all stock exchanges on which such Stock is then listed;
(b) The completion of any registration or other qualification of such shares of Stock under any state or federal law or under rulings or regulations of the Securities and Exchange Commission or of any other governmental regulatory body, which the Administrator shall, in its absolute discretion, deem necessary or advisable;
(c) The obtaining of any approval or other clearance from any state or federal governmental agency which the Administrator shall, in its absolute discretion, determine to be necessary or advisable;
(d) The receipt by the Company of full payment for such shares of Stock, including payment of any applicable withholding tax, which may be in one or more of the forms of consideration permitted under Section 4.4; and
(e) The lapse of such reasonable period of time following the exercise of the Option as the Administrator may from time to time establish for reasons of administrative convenience.
4.6 Rights as Stockholder. Participant shall not be, nor have any of the rights or privileges of, a stockholder of the Company in respect of any shares of Stock purchasable upon the exercise of any part of the Option unless and until such shares of Stock shall have been issued by the Company to such
 
A-6

Participant (as evidenced by the appropriate entry on the books of the Company or of a duly authorized transfer agent of the Company). No adjustment will be made for a dividend or other right for which the record date is prior to the date the shares of Stock are issued, except as provided in Section 14.2 of the Plan.
ARTICLE V.
OTHER PROVISIONS
5.1 Administration. The Administrator shall have the power to interpret the Plan and this Agreement and to adopt such rules for the administration, interpretation and application of the Plan as are consistent therewith and to interpret, amend or revoke any such rules. All actions taken and all interpretations and determinations made by the Administrator in good faith shall be final and binding upon Participant, the Company and all other interested persons. No member of the Committee or the Board shall be personally liable for any action, determination or interpretation made in good faith with respect to the Plan, this Agreement or the Option.
5.2 Option Not Transferable.
(a) Subject to Section 5.2(b), the Option may not be sold, pledged, assigned or transferred in any manner other than by will or the laws of descent and distribution, unless and until the shares of Stock underlying the Option have been issued, and all restrictions applicable to such shares of Stock have lapsed. Neither the Option nor any interest or right therein shall be liable for the debts, contracts or engagements of Participant or his or her successors in interest or shall be subject to disposition by transfer, alienation, anticipation, pledge, encumbrance, assignment or any other means whether such disposition be voluntary or involuntary or by operation of law by judgment, levy, attachment, garnishment or any other legal or equitable proceedings (including bankruptcy), and any attempted disposition thereof shall be null and void and of no effect, except to the extent that such disposition is permitted by the preceding sentence.
(b) Notwithstanding any other provision in this Agreement, with the consent of the Administrator and to the extent the Option is not intended to qualify as an Incentive Stock Option, Participant may transfer the Option (or any portion thereof) to any one or more Permitted Transferees (as defined below), subject to the following terms and conditions: (i) any portion of the Option transferred to a Permitted Transferee shall not be assignable or transferable by the Permitted Transferee other than by will or the laws of descent and distribution; (ii) any portion of the Option which is transferred to a Permitted Transferee shall continue to be subject to all the terms and conditions of the Option as applicable to Participant (other than the ability to further transfer the Option); and (iii) Participant and the Permitted Transferee shall execute any and all documents requested by the Administrator, including, without limitation documents to (A) confirm the status of the transferee as a Permitted Transferee, (B) satisfy any requirements for an exemption for the transfer under applicable federal and state securities laws and (C) evidence the transfer. For purposes of this Section 5.2(b), “ Permitted Transferee ” shall mean, with respect to a Participant, any child, stepchild, grandchild, parent, stepparent, grandparent, spouse, former spouse, sibling, niece, nephew, mother-in-law, father-in-law, son-in-law, daughter-in-law, brother-in-law, or sister-in-law, including adoptive relationships, any person sharing Participant’s household (other than a tenant or employee), a trust in which these persons (or Participant) control the management of assets, and any other entity in which these persons (or Participant) own more than fifty percent of the voting interests, or any other transferee specifically approved by the Administrator after taking into account any state or federal tax or securities laws applicable to transferable Options.
 
A-7

(c) Unless transferred to a Permitted Transferee in accordance with Section 5.2(b), during the lifetime of Participant, only Participant may exercise the Option or any portion thereof. Subject to such conditions and procedures as the Administrator may require, a Permitted Transferee may exercise the Option or any portion thereof during Participant’s lifetime. After the death of Participant, any exercisable portion of the Option may, prior to the time when the Option becomes unexercisable under Section 3.3, be exercised by Participant’s personal representative or by any person empowered to do so under the deceased Participant’s will or under the then applicable laws of descent and distribution.
5.3 Adjustments. Participant acknowledges that the Option is subject to modification and termination in certain events as provided in this Agreement and Article 14 of the Plan.
5.4 Notices. Any notice to be given under the terms of this Agreement to the Company shall be addressed to the Company in care of the Secretary of the Company at the address given beneath the signature of the Company’s authorized officer on the Grant Notice, and any notice to be given to Participant shall be addressed to Participant at the address given beneath Participant’s signature on the Grant Notice. By a notice given pursuant to this Section 5.4, either party may hereafter designate a different address for notices to be given to that party. Any notice which is required to be given to Participant shall, if Participant is then deceased, be given to the person entitled to exercise his or her Option pursuant to Section 4.1 by written notice under this Section 5.4. Any notice shall be deemed duly given when sent via email or when sent by certified mail (return receipt requested) and deposited (with postage prepaid) in a post office or branch post office regularly maintained by the United States Postal Service.
5.5 Titles. Titles are provided herein for convenience only and are not to serve as a basis for interpretation or construction of this Agreement.
5.6 Governing Law; Severability. The laws of the State of Delaware shall govern the interpretation, validity, administration, enforcement and performance of the terms of this Agreement regardless of the law that might be applied under principles of conflicts of laws.
5.7 Conformity to Securities Laws. Participant acknowledges that the Plan and this Agreement are intended to conform to the extent necessary with all provisions of the Securities Act and the Exchange Act and any and all regulations and rules promulgated by the Securities and Exchange Commission thereunder, and state securities laws and regulations. Notwithstanding anything herein to the contrary, the Plan shall be administered, and the Option is granted and may be exercised, only in such a manner as to conform to such laws, rules and regulations. To the extent permitted by applicable law, the Plan and this Agreement shall be deemed amended to the extent necessary to conform to such laws, rules and regulations.
5.8 Amendments, Suspension and Termination. To the extent permitted by the Plan, this Agreement may be wholly or partially amended or otherwise modified, suspended or terminated at any time or from time to time by the Committee or the Board , provided,  that, except as may otherwise be provided by the Plan, no amendment, modification, suspension or termination of this Agreement shall adversely effect the Option in any material way without the prior written consent of Participant.
5.9 Successors and Assigns. The Company may assign any of its rights under this Agreement to single or multiple assignees, and this Agreement shall inure to the benefit of the successors and assigns of the Company. Subject to the restrictions on transfer herein set forth in Section 5.2, this Agreement shall be binding upon Participant and his or her heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns.
 
A-8

5.10 Notification of Disposition. If this Option is designated as an Incentive Stock Option, Participant shall give prompt notice to the Company of any disposition or other transfer of any shares of Stock acquired under this Agreement if such disposition or transfer is made (a) within two years from the Grant Date with respect to such shares of Stock or (b) within one year after the transfer of such shares of Stock to him. Such notice shall specify the date of such disposition or other transfer and the amount realized, in cash, other property, assumption of indebtedness or other consideration, by Participant in such disposition or other transfer.
5.11 Limitations Applicable to Section 16 Persons. Notwithstanding any other provision of the Plan or this Agreement, if Participant is subject to Section 16 of the Exchange Act, the Plan, the Option and this Agreement shall be subject to any additional limitations set forth in any applicable exemptive rule under Section 16 of the Exchange Act (including any amendment to Rule 16b-3 of the Exchange Act) that are requirements for the application of such exemptive rule. To the extent permitted by applicable law, this Agreement shall be deemed amended to the extent necessary to conform to such applicable exemptive rule.
5.12 Not a Contract of Employment. Nothing in this Agreement or in the Plan shall confer upon Participant any right to continue to serve as an employee or other service provider of the Company or any of its Subsidiaries.
5.13 Entire Agreement. The Plan, the Grant Notice and this Agreement (including all Exhibits thereto) constitute the entire agreement of the parties and supersede in their entirety all prior undertakings and agreements of the Company and Participant with respect to the subject matter hereof.
5.14 Section 409A. Notwithstanding any other provision of the Plan, this Agreement or the Grant Notice, the Plan, this Agreement and the Grant Notice shall be interpreted in accordance with, and incorporate the terms and conditions required by, Section 409A of the U.S. Internal Revenue Code of 1986, as amended (together with any Department of Treasury regulations and other interpretive guidance issued thereunder, including without limitation any such regulations or other guidance that may be issued after the date hereof, “ Section 409A ”). The Committee may, in its discretion, adopt such amendments to the Plan, this Agreement or the Grant Notice or adopt other policies and procedures (including amendments, policies and procedures with retroactive effect), or take any other actions, as the Committee determines are necessary or appropriate to comply with the requirements of Section 409A.
 
A-9

 
Exhibit 10.17
TILLY’S INC.
2012 EQUITY AND INCENTIVE AWARD PLAN
RESTRICTED STOCK AWARD GRANT NOTICE AND
RESTRICTED STOCK AWARD AGREEMENT
Tilly’s Inc., a Delaware corporation (the “Company”), pursuant to its 2012 Equity and Incentive Award Plan (the “ Plan ”), hereby grants to the individual listed below (“ Participant ”), the number of shares of the Company’s common stock, par value $0.001 (“ Stock ”), set forth below (the “ Shares ”). This Restricted Stock Award is subject to all of the terms and conditions as set forth herein and in the Restricted Stock Award Agreement attached hereto as  Exhibit A  (the “ Restricted Stock Agreement ”) (including without limitation the Restrictions on the Shares set forth in the Restricted Stock Agreement) and the Plan, each of which are incorporated herein by reference. Unless otherwise defined herein, the terms defined in the Plan shall have the same defined meanings in this Grant Notice and the Restricted Stock Agreement.

Participant:	  	[                                         ]	  	 	
 	 	 	
Grant Date:	  	[                                         ]	  	 	
 	 	 	
Total Number of Shares of
Restricted Stock:	  	[                    ] shares	  	 	
 	 	 	
Purchase Price per Share:	  	$[            ]	  	 	
 	 	 	
Total Purchase Price:	  	$[            ]	  	 	
 	 	 	
Vesting Commencement Date:	  	[                                         ]	  	 	
 	 	 	
Vesting Schedule:	  	[To be specified in individual Grant Notices.]	  	 	
By his or her signature, Participant agrees to be bound by the terms and conditions of the Plan, the Restricted Stock Agreement and this Grant Notice. Participant has reviewed the Restricted Stock Agreement, the Plan and this Grant Notice in their entirety, has had an opportunity to obtain the advice of counsel prior to executing this Grant Notice and fully understands all provisions of this Grant Notice, the Restricted Stock Agreement and the Plan. Participant hereby agrees to accept as binding, conclusive and final all decisions or interpretations of the Administrator of the Plan upon any questions arising under the Plan, this Grant Notice or the Restricted Stock Agreement. If Participant is married, his or her spouse has signed the Consent of Spouse attached to this Grant Notice as  Exhibit B .

TILLY’S INC.:	    	PARTICIPANT:	
 	 	 	 	
By:	  	 	    	By:	  	 	
Print Name:	  	 	    	Print Name:	  	 	
Title:	  	 	    	 	  	 	
Address:	  	10 Whatney	    	Address:	  	 	
 	  	Irvine, CA 92618	    	 	  	 	

EXHIBIT A
TO RESTRICTED STOCK AWARD GRANT NOTICE
TILLY’S INC. RESTRICTED STOCK AWARD AGREEMENT
Pursuant to the Restricted Stock Award Grant Notice (the “Grant Notice”) to which this Restricted Stock Award Agreement (this “ Agreement ”) is attached, Tilly’s Inc., a Delaware corporation (the “ Company ”) has granted to Participant the right to purchase the number of shares of Restricted Stock under the Tilly’s Inc. 2012 Equity and Incentive Award Plan, as amended from time to time (the “ Plan ”), as set forth in the Grant Notice.
ARTICLE I.
GENERAL
1.1 Defined Terms. Wherever the following terms are used in this Agreement they shall have the meanings specified below, unless the context clearly indicates otherwise. Capitalized terms not specifically defined herein shall have the meanings specified in the Plan and the Grant Notice.
(a) “Administrator” shall mean the Board or the Committee responsible for conducting the general administration of the Plan in accordance with Article 13 of the Plan; provided that if Participant is an Independent Director, “Administrator” shall mean the Board.
(b) “Termination of Consultancy” shall mean the time when the engagement of Participant as a Consultant to the Company or a Subsidiary is terminated for any reason, with or without cause, including, but not by way of limitation, by resignation, discharge, death, Disability or retirement, but excluding: (a) terminations where there is a simultaneous employment or continuing employment of Participant by the Company or any Subsidiary, and (b) terminations where there is a simultaneous re-establishment of a consulting relationship or continuing consulting relationship between Participant and the Company or any Subsidiary. The Administrator, in its absolute discretion, shall determine the effect of all matters and questions relating to Termination of Consultancy, including, but not by way of limitation, the question of whether a particular leave of absence constitutes a Termination of Consultancy. Notwithstanding any other provision of the Plan, the Company or any Subsidiary has an absolute and unrestricted right to terminate a Consultant’s service at any time for any reason whatsoever, with or without cause, except to the extent expressly provided otherwise in writing.
(c) “Termination of Directorship” shall mean the time when Participant, if he or she is or becomes an Independent Director, ceases to be a Director for any reason, including, but not by way of limitation, a termination by resignation, failure to be elected, death or retirement. The Board, in its sole and absolute discretion, shall determine the effect of all matters and questions relating to Termination of Directorship with respect to Independent Directors.
(d) “Termination of Employment” shall mean the time when the employee-employer relationship between Participant and the Company or any Subsidiary is terminated for any reason, with or without cause, including, but not by way of limitation, a termination by resignation, discharge, death, Disability or retirement; but excluding: (a) terminations where there is a simultaneous reemployment or continuing employment of Participant by the Company or any Subsidiary, and (b) terminations where there is a simultaneous establishment of a consulting relationship or continuing consulting relationship between Participant and the Company or any Subsidiary. The Administrator, in its absolute discretion, shall determine the effect of all matters and questions relating to Termination of Employment, including, but not by way of limitation, the question of whether a particular leave of
 
A-2

absence constitutes a Termination of Employment; provided, however, that, if this Option is an Incentive Stock Option, unless otherwise determined by the Administrator in its discretion, a leave of absence, change in status from an employee to an independent contractor or other change in the employee-employer relationship shall constitute a Termination of Employment if, and to the extent that, such leave of absence, change in status or other change interrupts employment for the purposes of Section 422(a)(2) of the Code and the then applicable regulations and revenue rulings under said Section.
(e) “Termination of Services” shall mean Participant’s Termination of Consultancy, Termination of Directorship or Termination of Employment, as applicable.
1.2 Incorporation of Terms of Plan. The Award is subject to the terms and conditions of the Plan which are incorporated herein by reference. In the event of any inconsistency between the Plan and this Agreement, the terms of the Plan shall control.
ARTICLE II.
AWARD OF RESTRICTED STOCK
2.1 Award of Restricted Stock.
(a) Award. In consideration of Participant’s past and/or continued employment with or service to the Company or one of its Subsidiaries, and for other good and valuable consideration which the Administrator has determined exceeds the aggregate par value of the Stock subject to the Award (as defined below), as of the Grant Date, the Company issues to Participant the Award described in this Agreement (the “ Award ”). The number of shares of Restricted Stock (the “ Shares ”) subject to the Award is set forth in the Grant Notice. Participant is an Employee, Director or Consultant of the Company or one of its Subsidiaries.
(b) Purchase Price; Book Entry Form. The purchase price of the Shares is set forth on the Grant Notice. At the sole discretion of the Administrator, the Shares will be issued in either (i) uncertificated form, with the Shares recorded in the name of Participant in the books and records of the Company’s transfer agent with appropriate notations regarding the restrictions on transfer imposed pursuant to this Agreement, and upon vesting and the satisfaction of all conditions set forth in Section 2.2(d), the Company shall cause certificates representing the Shares to be issued to Participant; or (ii) certificate form pursuant to the terms of Sections 2.1(c) and (d).
(c) Legend. Certificates representing Shares issued pursuant to this Agreement shall, until all Restrictions (as defined below) imposed pursuant to this Agreement lapse or shall have been removed and the Shares shall thereby have become vested or the Shares represented thereby have been forfeited hereunder, bear the following legend (or such other legend as shall be determined by the Administrator):
“THE SECURITIES REPRESENTED BY THIS CERTIFICATE ARE SUBJECT TO CERTAIN VESTING REQUIREMENTS AND MAY BE SUBJECT TO FORFEITURE UNDER THE TERMS OF A RESTRICTED STOCK AWARD AGREEMENT, BY AND BETWEEN TILLY’S INC. AND THE REGISTERED OWNER OF SUCH SHARES, AND SUCH SHARES MAY NOT BE, DIRECTLY OR INDIRECTLY, OFFERED, TRANSFERRED, SOLD, ASSIGNED, PLEDGED, HYPOTHECATED OR OTHERWISE DISPOSED OF UNDER ANY CIRCUMSTANCES, EXCEPT PURSUANT TO THE PROVISIONS OF SUCH AGREEMENT.”
 
A-3

(d) Escrow. The Secretary of the Company or such other escrow holder as the Administrator may appoint may retain physical custody of the certificates representing the Shares until all of the restrictions on transfer imposed pursuant to this Agreement lapse or shall have been removed; in such event Participant shall not retain physical custody of any certificates representing unvested Shares issued to him. Participant, by acceptance of the Award, shall be deemed to appoint, and does so appoint the Company and each of its authorized representatives as Participant’s attorney(s)-in-fact to effect any transfer of unvested forfeited Shares (or Shares otherwise reacquired by the Company hereunder) to the Company as may be required pursuant to the Plan or this Agreement and to execute such documents as the Company or such representatives deem necessary or advisable in connection with any such transfer.
(e) Delivery of Certificates Upon Vesting. As soon as administratively practicable after the vesting of any Shares subject to the Award pursuant to Section 2.2(b), the Company shall, as applicable, either remove the notations on any Shares subject to the Award issued in book entry form which have vested or deliver to Participant a certificate or certificates evidencing the number of Shares subject to the Award which have vested (or, in either case, such lesser number of shares as may be permitted pursuant to Section 8.4 or 12.4 of the Plan). Participant (or the beneficiary or personal representative of Participant in the event of Participant’s death or incapacity, as the case may be) shall deliver to the Company any representations or other documents or assurances required by the Company. The Shares so delivered shall no longer be subject to the Restrictions hereunder.
2.2 Restrictions.
(a) Forfeiture. Any Award which is not vested as of the date Participant’s Termination of Services shall thereupon be forfeited immediately and without any further action by the Company. For purposes of this Agreement, “ Restrictions ” shall mean the restrictions on sale or other transfer set forth in Section 3.2 and the exposure to forfeiture set forth in this Section 2.2(a).
(b) Vesting and Lapse of Restrictions. Subject to Sections 2.2(a) and 2.2(c), the Award shall vest and Restrictions shall lapse in accordance with the vesting schedule set forth on the Grant Notice.
(c) Acceleration of Vesting. Notwithstanding Sections 2.2(a) and 2.2(b) hereof, pursuant to Section 14.2 of the Plan, the Award shall become fully vested and all Restrictions applicable to such Award shall lapse in the event of a Change in Control, in connection with which the successor corporation does not assume the Award or substitute an equivalent right for the Award. Should the successor corporation assume the Award or substitute an equivalent right, then no such acceleration shall apply unless Participant has a Termination of Services by the Company or its successor without Cause upon or within twelve months following the Change in Control, in which case the Option shall become fully vested and exercisable.
(d) Tax Withholding. Notwithstanding any other provision of this Agreement (including without limitation Section 2.1(b) hereof), no new certificate shall be delivered to Participant or his legal representative unless and until Participant or his legal representative shall have paid to the Company the full amount of all federal and state withholding or other taxes applicable to the taxable income of Participant resulting from the grant of Shares or the lapse or removal of the Restrictions. Such payment shall be made by deduction from other compensation payable to Participant or in such other form of consideration acceptable to the Company which may, in the sole discretion of the Administrator, include:
(i) Cash or check;
 
A-4

(ii) Shares of Stock held for such period of time as may be required by the Administrator in order to avoid adverse accounting consequences and having a Fair Market Value on the date of delivery equal to the minimum amount required to be withheld by statute; or
(iii) Other property acceptable to the Administrator (including, without limitation, through the delivery of a notice that Participant has placed a market sell order with a broker with respect to shares of Stock for which the Restrictions are then subject to lapse, and that the broker has been directed to pay a sufficient portion of the net proceeds of the sale to the Company in satisfaction of its withholding obligations; provided that payment of such proceeds is then made to the Company upon settlement of such sale).
The Company shall not be obligated to deliver any new certificate representing Shares to Participant or Participant’s legal representative or enter such Share in book entry form unless and until Participant or Participant’s legal representative shall have paid or otherwise satisfied in full the amount of all federal, state and local taxes applicable to the taxable income of Participant resulting from the grant of the Award or the issuance of Shares hereunder.
(e) Conditions to Delivery of Shares. Subject to Section 2.1, the Shares deliverable under this Award may be either previously authorized but unissued shares of Stock or issued shares of Stock which have then been reacquired by the Company. Such Shares shall be fully paid and nonassessable. The Company shall not be required to issue or deliver any Shares under this Award prior to fulfillment of all of the following conditions:
(i) The admission of such Shares to listing on all stock exchanges on which the Shares are then listed;
(ii) The completion of any registration or other qualification of such Shares under any state or federal law or under rulings or regulations of the Securities and Exchange Commission or of any other governmental regulatory body, which the Administrator shall, in its absolute discretion, deem necessary or advisable;
(iii) The obtaining of any approval or other clearance from any state or federal governmental agency which the Administrator shall, in its absolute discretion, determine to be necessary or advisable;
(iv) The receipt by the Company of full payment for such Shares, including payment of any applicable withholding tax; and
(v) The lapse of such reasonable period of time following the grant of this Award as the Administrator may from time to time establish for reasons of administrative convenience.
2.3 Consideration to the Company. In consideration of the grant of the Award by the Company, Participant agrees to render faithful and efficient services to the Company or any Subsidiary. Nothing in the Plan or this Agreement shall confer upon Participant any right to continue in the employ or service of the Company or any Subsidiary or shall interfere with or restrict in any way the rights of the Company and its Subsidiaries, which rights are hereby expressly reserved, to discharge or terminate the services of Participant at any time for any reason whatsoever, with or without cause, except to the extent expressly provided otherwise in a written agreement between the Company or a Subsidiary and Participant.
 
A-5

ARTICLE III.
OTHER PROVISIONS
3.1 Tax Withholding and Section 83(b) Election. The Company shall be entitled to require a cash payment by or on behalf of Participant and/or to deduct from other compensation payable to Participant any sums required by federal, state or local tax law to be withheld with respect to the grant or vesting of the Award or the lapse of the Restrictions hereunder. Participant understands that Section 83(a) of the Internal Revenue Code taxes as ordinary income the difference between the amount, if any, paid for the Shares and the Fair Market Value of such Shares at the time the Restrictions on such Shares lapse. Participant understands that, notwithstanding the preceding sentence, Participant may elect to be taxed at the time of the Grant Date, rather that at the time the Restrictions lapse, by filing an election under Section 83(b) of the Code (an “ 83(b) Election ”) with the Internal Revenue Service within 30 days of the Grant Date. In the event Participant files an 83(b) Election, Participant shall provide the Company a copy thereof prior to the expiration of such 30 day period. Participant understands that in the event an 83(b) Election is filed with the Internal Revenue Service within such time period, Participant will recognize ordinary income in an amount equal to the difference between the amount, if any, paid for the Shares and the Fair Market Value of such Shares as of the Grant Date. Participant further understands that an additional copy of such 83(b) Election form should be filed with his or her federal income tax return for the calendar year in which the date of this Agreement falls. Participant acknowledges that the foregoing is only a summary of the effect of United States federal income taxation with respect to the Award hereunder, and does not purport to be complete. PARTICIPANT FURTHER ACKNOWLEDGES THAT THE COMPANY IS NOT RESPONSIBLE FOR FILING PARTICIPANT’S 83(b) ELECTION, AND THE COMPANY HAS DIRECTED PARTICIPANT TO SEEK INDEPENDENT ADVICE REGARDING THE APPLICABLE PROVISIONS OF THE INTERNAL REVENUE CODE, THE INCOME TAX LAWS OF ANY MUNICIPALITY, STATE OR FOREIGN COUNTRY IN WHICH PARTICIPANT MAY RESIDE, AND THE TAX CONSEQUENCES OF PARTICIPANT’S DEATH.
PARTICIPANT HEREBY ASSUMES ALL RESPONSIBILITY FOR FILING PARTICIPANT’S 83(b) ELECTION AND PAYING ANY TAXES RESULTING FROM SUCH ELECTION OR FROM FAILURE TO FILE THE ELECTION AND PAYING TAXES RESULTING FROM THE LAPSE OF THE RESTRICTIONS ON THE UNVESTED SHARES.
PARTICIPANT UNDERSTANDS THAT PARTICIPANT MAY SUFFER ADVERSE TAX CONSEQUENCES AS A RESULT OF PARTICIPANT’S PURCHASE OR DISPOSITION OF THE SHARES AND PARTICIPANT REPRESENTS THAT PARTICIPANT IS NOT RELYING ON THE COMPANY FOR ANY TAX ADVICE.
3.2 Restricted Stock Not Transferable. No Shares or any interest or right therein or part thereof shall be liable for the debts, contracts or engagements of Participant or his successors in interest or shall be subject to disposition by transfer, alienation, anticipation, pledge, encumbrance, assignment or any other means whether such disposition be voluntary or involuntary or by operation of law by judgment, levy, attachment, garnishment or any other legal or equitable proceedings (including bankruptcy), and any attempted disposition thereof shall be null and void and of no effect;  provided, however,  that this Section 3.2 notwithstanding, with the consent of the Administrator, the Shares may be transferred to certain persons or entities related to Participant, including but not limited to members of Participant’s family, charitable institutions or trusts or other entities whose beneficiaries or beneficial owners are members of Participant’s family or to such other persons or entities as may be expressly approved by the Administrator, pursuant to any such conditions and procedures the Administrator may require.
 
A-6

3.3 Rights as Stockholder. Except as otherwise provided herein, upon the Grant Date Participant shall have all the rights of a stockholder with respect to the Shares, subject to the Restrictions herein, including the right to vote the Shares and the right to receive any cash or stock dividends paid to or made with respect to the Shares;  provided, however,  that at the discretion of the Company, and prior to the delivery of Shares, Participant may be required to execute a stockholders agreement in such form as shall be determined by the Company.
3.4 Not a Contract of Employment. Nothing in this Agreement or in the Plan shall confer upon Participant any right to continue to serve as an employee or other service provider of the Company or any of its Subsidiaries.
3.5 Governing Law. The laws of the State of Delaware shall govern the interpretation, validity, administration, enforcement and performance of the terms of this Agreement regardless of the law that might be applied under principles of conflicts of laws.
3.6 Conformity to Securities Laws. Participant acknowledges that the Plan and this Agreement are intended to conform to the extent necessary with all provisions of the Securities Act and the Exchange Act, and any and all regulations and rules promulgated thereunder by the Securities and Exchange Commission. Notwithstanding anything herein to the contrary, the Plan shall be administered, and the Award is granted, only in such a manner as to conform to such laws, rules and regulations. To the extent permitted by applicable law, the Plan and this Agreement shall be deemed amended to the extent necessary to conform to such laws, rules and regulations.
3.7 Amendment, Suspension and Termination. To the extent permitted by the Plan, this Agreement may be wholly or partially amended or otherwise modified, suspended or terminated at any time or from time to time by the Committee or the Board , provided,  that, except as may otherwise be provided by the Plan, no amendment, modification, suspension or termination of this Agreement shall adversely effect the Award in any material way without the prior written consent of Participant.
3.8 Notices. Notices required or permitted hereunder shall be given in writing and shall be deemed effectively given upon personal delivery or upon deposit in the United States mail by certified mail, with postage and fees prepaid, addressed to Participant to his address shown in the Company records, and to the Company at its principal executive office.
3.9 Successors and Assigns. The Company may assign any of its rights under this Agreement to single or multiple assignees, and this Agreement shall inure to the benefit of the successors and assigns of the Company. Subject to the restrictions on transfer herein set forth, this Agreement shall be binding upon Participant and his or her heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns.
3.10 Limitations Applicable to Section 16 Persons. Notwithstanding any other provision of the Plan or this Agreement, if Participant is subject to Section 16 of the Exchange Act, the Plan, the Award and this Agreement shall be subject to any additional limitations set forth in any applicable exemptive rule under Section 16 of the Exchange Act (including any amendment to Rule 16b-3 of the Exchange Act) that are requirements for the application of such exemptive rule. To the extent permitted by applicable law, this Agreement shall be deemed amended to the extent necessary to conform to such applicable exemptive rule.
3.11 Entire Agreement. The Plan, the Grant Notice and this Agreement (including all Exhibits thereto) constitute the entire agreement of the parties and supersede in their entirety all prior undertakings and agreements of the Company and Participant with respect to the subject matter hereof.
 
A-7

3.12 Limitation on Participant’s Rights. Participation in the Plan confers no rights or interests other than as herein provided. This Agreement creates only a contractual obligation on the part of the Company as to amounts payable and shall not be construed as creating a trust. Neither the Plan nor any underlying program, in and of itself, has any assets. Participant shall have only the rights of a general unsecured creditor of the Company with respect to amounts credited and benefits payable, if any, with respect to the Shares issuable hereunder.
 
A-8

EXHIBIT B
TO RESTRICTED STOCK AWARD GRANT NOTICE 
CONSENT OF SPOUSE
I,                     , spouse of                     , have read and approve the foregoing Agreement. In consideration of issuing to my spouse the shares of the common stock of Tilly’s Inc. set forth in the Agreement, I hereby appoint my spouse as my attorney-in-fact in respect to the exercise of any rights under the Agreement and agree to be bound by the provisions of the Agreement insofar as I may have any rights in said Agreement or any shares of the common stock of Tilly’s Inc. issued pursuant thereto under the community property laws or similar laws relating to marital property in effect in the state of our residence as of the date of the signing of the foregoing Agreement.

Dated:                     ,     	 	 	
 	 	Signature of Spouse	
 
A-9

Exhibit 10.23
OFFICE AND WAREHOUSE LEASE
BETWEEN
AMNET HOLDINGS, LLC,
AS LANDLORD
AND
WORLD OF JEANS and TOPS,
A CALIFORNIA CORPORATION,
AS TENANT
17 Pasteur
IRVINE, CA 92618
 
Page 1

OFFICE AND WAREHOUSE LEASE AGREEMENT
This OFFICE AND WAREHOUSE LEASE (the “Agreement”) dated as of November 1, 2011, is between AMNET HOLDINGS, LLC, a California limited liability company (hereinafter referred to as “Landlord”), and WORLD OF JEANS & TOPS, a California corporation (hereinafter referred to as “Tenant”). For good and valuable consideration, the parties hereby enter into this Agreement based upon the terms below.
ARTICLE 1
BASIC AGREEMENT PROVISIONS

1.1    Date of Agreement Preparation:	  	November 1, 2011	  	 	
 	 	 	
1.2    Landlord:	  	Amnet Holdings, LLC (“Landlord”)	  	 	
 	 	 	
1.3    Tenant:	  	World of Jeans & Tops, a California corporation (“Tenant”)	  	 	
 	 	 	
1.4    Tenant’s Trade Name:	  	Tilly’s	  	 	
 	 	 	
1.5    Tenant’s Address :	  	10 Whatney, Irvine, CA 92618	  	 	
 	 	 	
1.6    Premises Address:	  	17 Pasteur, Irvine, CA 92618 (approximately 81,159 square foot industrial building, consisting of approximately 54,631 of warehouse and 26,528 of office) (“Building”).	  	(Article 2)	
 	 	 	
1.7    Term:	  	120 months commencing the first full calendar month following the Rental Commencement Date.	  	(Article 3)	
 	 	 	
1.8    Rent Commencement Date:	  	November 1, 2011. If the Landlord modifies the Building to provide internal roof clearance of at least 40’, then Tenant will pay the increased Minimum Monthly Rent set forth in Section 1.9 upon the earlier of (i) the date Landlord substantially completes the Building modification, or (ii) Tenant has access to the Building.	  	 	
 	 	 	
1.9    Minimum Monthly Rent and Minimum Annual Rent:	  	Fifty One Thousand Nine Hundred Forty One and 76/100 Dollars ($51,941.76), subject to the additional increases in accordance with Section 4.2 below. If Landlord modifies the Building pursuant to Section 1.8, then the Minimum Monthly Rent base will be increased to Sixty Eight Thousand One Hundred Seventy Three and 56/100 ($68,173.56), and subject to additional increases in accordance with Section 4.2 below if the conditions in (i) or (ii) of Section 1.8 do not occur until after November 1, 2012.The Minimum Annual Rent is 12 times the Minimum Monthly Rent. Annual Increases per Article 4.2	  	(Article 4)	
 	 	 	
1.10 Use of Premises:	  	General office, light manufacturing, and distribution, all in accordance with the requirements of Articles 8 and 26 below, and any necessary permits and licenses to be obtained and maintained by Tenant at Tenant’s expense.	  	(Article 8)	
 	 	 	
1.11 Security Deposit:	  	One Hundred Eighty Three Thousand Five Hundred Thirty Eight and 30/100 Dollars ($183,538.30).	  	(Article 5)	
 	 	 	
1.12 Guarantor:	  	None	  	 	
 	 	 	
1.13 Addresses for Notices:	  	 	  	(Article 25.3)	
 	 	 	
          LANDLORD:
 
                        Notices to:
 
                        Amnet Holdings, LLC	  	TENANT:
 
Notices to:
 
Tilly’s
10 Whatney
Irvine, CA 92618
Attention: Lease Administration	  	 	
 
Page 2

 	 	 	
with a copy to:
 
N/A	  	with a copy to:
 
Tilly’s
10 Whatney
Irvine, CA 92618
Attention: Legal Department	
 	 	
Landlord’s Address for Payments and Reports:
 
Amnet Holdings, LLC	  	Tenant’s Address for Payments and Reports:
 
Tilly’s
10 Whatney
Irvine, CA 92618
Attention: Lease Administration	
This Agreement is subject to the terms, covenants, conditions, Rules and Regulations herein set forth and Tenant covenants as a material part of the consideration for this Agreement to keep and perform each and all of said terms, covenants, and conditions by it to be kept and performed and that this Agreement is made upon the condition of said performance.
This Article is intended to supplement and/or summarize the provisions set forth in the balance of this Agreement. If there is any conflict between any provisions contained in this Article and the balance of the Agreement, the balance of the Agreement shall control.
ARTICLE 2
PREMISES
Landlord hereby leases to Tenant and Tenant hereby leases from Landlord the Premises, which are stated in Section 1.6 of this Agreement. Notwithstanding the foregoing, the rentable square footage of the Premises as set forth in this Agreement are final and shall not be subject to revision, even if incorrect. The rentable square footage of the Premises shall not include any part of the roof located at the Premises.
This Agreement is subject to the terms, covenants, conditions, Rules and Regulations herein set forth and Tenant covenants as a material part of the consideration for this Agreement to keep and perform each and all of said terms, covenants, conditions, rules and regulations by it to be kept and performed and that this Agreement is made upon the condition of said performance.
ARTICLE 3
TERM AND POSSESSION
3.1 Term. The Commencement Date, Expiration Date and Term are stated in Section 1.7 and 1.8. of this Agreement.
3.2 “As Is”. Tenant is hereby agrees that Tenant is leasing the Premises “as is”, and Tenant agrees to accept the Premises in “as is” condition as of the date of delivery from Landlord, and without any warranties or representations made by Landlord as to the condition thereof. Tenant’s execution of this Agreement shall constitute Tenant’s acknowledgement that the Premises are delivered in good condition. Landlord undertakes no obligation to make any improvements to the Premises, including, without limitation, no obligation to increase the roof clearance within the Building.
ARTICLE 4
RENTAL
4.1 Minimum Monthly Rental. Tenant agrees to pay to Landlord as Minimum Monthly Rent for the Premises (“MMR”), without prior notice or demand and without set off or deduction the sum of Fifty One Thousand Nine Hundred Forty One and 76/100 Dollars ($51,941.76) commencing on the Rent Commencement Date in Section 1.8, and a like sum on or before the first day of each and every successive calendar month thereafter during the period of the tenancy except that the first month’s MMR shall be paid upon the execution hereof. If Landlord modifies the Building as set forth in Section 1.8, then the base MMR will be increased to Sixty Eight Thousand One Hundred Seventy Three and 56/100 ($68,173.56) upon the earlier of (i) the date Landlord substantially completes the Building modification, or (ii) Tenant has access to the Building. If Tenant is granted occupancy prior to the Rent Commencement Date then, (a) Tenant shall pay in advance an occupancy fee equal to one-thirtieth of the MMR amount for each day of such early occupancy, and (b) such early occupancy shall not affect the termination date of this Agreement. If Landlord modifies the Building pursuant to Section 1.8 and Tenant cannot enter the Building and occupy the whole or any part on account of Landlord’s modification, Tenant’s obligation to pay Rent shall be abated. Once Tenant can re-enter and re-occupy the Building, Tenant’s obligation to pay Rent will resume. The amount of Rent not paid by Tenant during the abatement period will be paid by Tenant in equal monthly installments, together with MMR, over the remaining Lease Term. Any Rent abatement resulting from Section 1.8 will not impact the Rent Adjustment Date.
4.2 Rent Increases. Commencing on the first day of the first full calendar month following 12 months after the Rent Commencement Date and on each first day of that calendar month thereafter (each date referred to as the
 
Page 3

“Rent Adjustment Date”) the MMR shall be increased a percentage equal to the actual increase in the Index based on the Los Angeles, Anaheim, Riverside all Urban Consumers Price Index (Base 1982-1984=100) as published by the US Department of Labor, Bureau of Labor Statistics ( “CPI”) for the month which is four (4) months prior to the Rent Adjustment Date compared to the Index published for the month which is sixteen (16) months prior to such Rent Adjustment Date; however, in no event shall the MMR be increased on any adjustment date by more than seven percent (7%) calculated on a cumulative basis and no less than three percent (3%) calculated on a cumulative basis. At no time will the MMR ever decrease, even if the square footage of the Premises decreases. The formula to be used is as follows:
Ending CPI         times         Previous MMR = Adjusted MMR
Beginning CPI
If this CPI is discontinued or revised during the term, such other governmental index or computation with which it is replaced shall be used in order to obtain substantially the same results as would be obtained if the CPI had not been discontinued or revised. No reduction in the MMR is allowed for reduced CPI
4.3 Payment Policies. Tenant acknowledges that it is Landlord’s policy to require payment by cashier’s check, money order, or immediate funds subsequent to the receipt by Landlord of two or more checks returned on Tenant’s account due to non-sufficient funds in the account upon which the check is drawn. Additionally, in the event that Tenant is served with a default notice requiring the payment of Rent, Additional Rent or other amounts due under the terms of the Agreement, then Landlord shall have the right to require Tenant’s tender of monies pursuant to such default notice to be in immediate funds.
4.4 Returned Check Charge. Tenant acknowledges that in the event a check is returned or dishonored on Tenant’s account due to non-sufficient funds, Tenant shall pay to Landlord Fifty and 00/100 Dollars ($50.00) as a Returned Check Charge. Tenant further acknowledges that said Returned Check Charge is included as “ Additional Rent ” (as defined in Section 4.5 herein).
4.5 Additional Rent. All amounts that Tenant is required to pay to Landlord under this Agreement, other than Minimum Annual Rent, shall be deemed additional rent and referred to as “ Additional Rent .” All Additional Rent due under this Agreement shall be payable concurrently with the monthly installments of Minimum Annual Rent, unless Landlord expressly in writing sets forth another time period for the payment of such Additional Rent.
4.6 Prorated Rent. Rent for any period during the term hereof which is for less than one (1) month shall be a prorated portion of the MMR herein, based upon a thirty (30) day month.
4.7 Place of Payment. Any Rent (as defined in Section 20.4 herein) payable according to the provisions of this Agreement shall be paid to Landlord, at the address herein stated, without deduction or offset, in lawful money of the United States of America, which shall be legal tender at the time of payment, or to such other person or at such other place as Landlord may from time to time designate in writing.
4.8 Late Charges. Tenant hereby acknowledges that late payment by Tenant to Landlord of Rent due hereunder will cause Landlord to incur costs not contemplated by this Agreement, the exact amount of which will be extremely difficult to ascertain. Such costs include but are not limited to processing and accounting charges and late charges which may be imposed upon Landlord by terms of any mortgage or trust deed covering the Premises. Accordingly, if any installment of Rent or of a sum due from Tenant shall not be received by Landlord or Landlord’s designee by the fifth (5th) day of the month after the date such installment is due, then Tenant shall pay to Landlord a late charge, of five percent (5%) of the MMR per occurrence, after the first late payment in any consecutive twelve (12) month period. The parties hereby agree that such late charges represent a fair and reasonable estimate of the cost that Landlord will incur by reason of the late payment by Tenant. Acceptance of such late charges by the Landlord shall in no event constitute a waiver of Tenant’s default with respect to such overdue amount, nor prevent Landlord from exercising any of the other rights and remedies granted hereunder.
4.9 Accord and Satisfaction. No payment by Tenant or receipt by Landlord of a lesser amount of MMR, or Additional Rent shall be deemed to be other than a payment of the earliest due MMR or Additional Rent, nor shall any endorsement or statement on a check or any letter accompanying any such check or payment be deemed an accord and satisfaction, and Landlord may accept such check or payment without prejudice to Landlord’s right to recover the balance of such MMR or Additional Rent or payment or pursue any other remedy available in this Agreement, at law or in equity. Landlord may accept any partial payment from Tenant without invalidation of any contractual notice required to be given herein (to the extent such contractual notice is required) and without invalidation of any notice given or required to be given pursuant to applicable law. Landlord shall have the right to apply any payments first to Late Charges and interest payable by Tenant, then to Additional Rent, then to MMR.
ARTICLE 5
SECURITY DEPOSIT
Tenant has deposited with Landlord the sum of One Hundred Eighty Three Thousand Five Hundred Thirty Eight and 30/100 Dollars ($183,538.30), which represents the security deposit (“ Security Deposit ”). Said sum shall be held by
 
Page 4

Landlord as security for Tenant’s faithful performance of the terms, covenants, and conditions of this Agreement. If Tenant defaults with respect to any provision of this Agreement, including but not limited to the payment of Rent, Landlord may (but shall not be required to) use, apply, and retain all or any part of the Security Deposit for the payment of any Rent or any other sum in default, for the payment of any amount which Landlord may spend or become obligated to spend by reason of Tenant’s default, to compensate Landlord for any other loss or damage which Landlord may suffer by reason of Tenant’s default (including without limitation damages for rent lost after the termination of this Agreement and all other amounts recoverable under California Civil Code section 1951.2), or repair damage to the Premises caused by Tenant or for which Tenant is liable under this Agreement, or to clean the Premises upon the termination of this Agreement. If any portion of the Security Deposit is so used or applied, Tenant shall, within five (5) days after written demand therefor, deposit with Landlord, in Immediate Funds, an amount sufficient to restore the Security Deposit to its original amount and Tenant’s failure to do so shall be a material breach of this Agreement. Tenant shall not be entitled to receive interest on the Security Deposit and Landlord shall not be required to segregate the Security Deposit from its general funds. Landlord shall refund the unused balance of the Security Deposit within thirty (30) days after the later of (i) Landlord’s recovery of possession of the Premises, or (ii) the termination or expiration of this Agreement. Upon the termination of Landlord’s interest in this Agreement, Landlord shall transfer the Security Deposit to Landlord’s successor in interest. Tenant waives all rights under California Civil Code section 1950.7 to the extent inconsistent with this Agreement. At Landlord’s option, Tenant shall increase the amount of the Security Deposit to be equal to the then existing MMR.
ARTICLE 6
POSSESSION AND QUIET ENJOYMENT
6.1 Possession. If Landlord, for any reason whatsoever, including a failure to obtain possession, cannot deliver possession of the Premises to Tenant at the commencement of the term hereof, this Agreement shall not be void or voidable, nor shall Landlord be liable to Tenant for any loss or damage resulting therefrom, nor shall the Expiration Date of the above term be in any way extended; but in that event, all Rent shall be abated during the period between the Commencement Date and the time when Landlord delivers possession.
6.2 Quiet Enjoyment. Upon Tenant paying the Rent reserved hereunder and observing and performing all of the covenants, conditions, and provisions on Tenant’s part to be observed and performed hereunder, Tenant shall have quiet enjoyment of the Premises for the entire term hereof, subject to all the provisions of this Agreement.
6.3 Non-Smoking. Tenant acknowledges that the Premises a non-smoking building, per local code or ordinance. Tenant covenants and warrants that it shall not, in accordance with Article 8 below and Rule 19 in Article 26 below, allow or permit any smoking within the Premises or any portions of the Building.
ARTICLE 7
SERVICES, ASSESSMENTS, RESERVES AND UTILITIES
7.1 Services Provided. Tenant agrees to pay directly to the appropriate utility company all charges for utility services supplied to the Premises.
7.2 Assessments. Tenant agrees to pay to Landlord, as Additional Rent, (i) the regular assessments under any covenants, conditions and restrictions or imposed by any association thereunder encumbering the Premises, which regular assessments shall be paid together with Minimum Monthly Rent or on such less frequent schedule as Landlord may require, and (ii) any special assessments imposed under any covenants, conditions and restrictions or imposed by any association thereunder encumbering the Premises, within fifteen (15) days after written demand therefore from Landlord.
7.3 Increased Costs. Tenant shall pay any increases in service, insurance premiums, and utility costs incurred as a result of Tenant’s occupation of the Premises.
7.4 Excess Costs. If Tenant requires utility service in excess of that furnished or supplied for the use of the Premises, Tenant shall first procure the written consent of Landlord before making any changes to the Premises. If Landlord agrees to the changes, Tenant shall be responsible for any and all costs associated with increasing utility service to the Premises.
7.5 Access. Tenant shall permit access to the Premises during normal business hours to installers or repairmen of utility services.
7.6 Waiver of Liability. Landlord shall not be liable for, and Tenant shall not be entitled to, any Rent reductions by reason the failure to furnish any utility services to the Premises whether such failure is caused by accident, breakage, repairs, strikes, lockouts, or other labor disturbances or labor disputes of any character, or by any other cause, similar or dissimilar, beyond the reasonable control of Landlord. Landlord shall not be liable under any circumstances for a loss of or injury to property, however occurring, through or in connection with or incidental to failure to furnish any of the foregoing. Without limiting the foregoing, Landlord shall not be in default hereunder or be liable for any damages directly or indirectly resulting from, or by reason of (i) the installation, use or interruption of use of any equipment in connection with the furnishing of the foregoing utilities and services, (ii) failure of any such utilities or services, or (iii) the limitation, curtailment, rationing or restriction on use of water or electricity, gas or any other form of energy or any other service or utility whatsoever serving the Premises. Furthermore, Landlord and Tenant shall be entitled to (and, if Landlord so elects, Tenant shall be obligated to) cooperate in a reasonable manner with the requirements of national, state or local governmental agencies or utilities suppliers in reducing energy or other resource consumption.
 
Page 5

7.7 HVAC Disclaimer. Tenant acknowledges that the functioning of heating, ventilating and air conditioning systems is subject to variation from time to time, that such functioning can be effected by, among other things, outside temperature conditions, sunlight through windows at various times during the day, and heat-generating machines, lighting and equipment, and that Landlord cannot be responsible for room temperatures and is not responsible for maintaining any particular temperature in all or any portion of the Premises.
7.8 Utility Facilities Overload. Tenant may not install upon the Premises any electrical equipment which overloads the utility facilities servicing the Premises; if Tenant does so, Tenant, at its own expense, shall make whatever changes are necessary to comply with the requirements of Landlord, the insurance underwriters, and any appropriate utility or governmental authority.
7.9 Utility Disruption. Landlord shall not be liable in damages or otherwise for any loss, damage or expense that Tenant may sustain or incur by reason of any change, failure, interference, interruption or defect in the electric and/or other utility services provided to the Premises and/or the Building. No such change, failure, interference, interruption or defect shall entitle Tenant to terminate this Agreement or to abate the payments Tenant is required to make under this Agreement.
7.10 Reserves. Landlord shall have the right to impose, and if imposed Tenant shall pay as Additional Rent at the same time as payment of Minimum Monthly Rent, monthly impound funds towards the cost of replacement of HVAC units at the Building, reroofing of the Building, repainting of the exterior of the Building, and slurry and stripe of the parking lot area of the Premises, all based on Landlord’s determination of the anticipated costs thereof and the reasonable useful life of each such component.
ARTICLE 8
USE AND COMPLIANCE WITH THE LAW
8.1 Use. Tenant shall use the Premises for the purpose stated in Section 1.10 of the Agreement and shall not use or permit the Premises to be used for any other purpose without the prior written consent of Landlord, which consent may be withheld in the sole discretion of Landlord. Tenant shall not do or permit anything to be done in or about the Premises, nor bring or keep anything therein which will in any way increase the existing rate of or affect any fire or other insurance upon the Building, or any of its contents, or cause cancellation of any insurance policy covering the Building or any part thereof or any of its contents. Tenant shall not do or permit anything to be done in or about the Premises, including the parking and loading areas of the Building and the property, which will in any way obstruct or interfere with the rights of other tenants or occupants of the Building or injure or annoy them, or use or allow the Premises to be used for any improper, immoral, unlawful, or objectionable purpose, nor shall Tenant cause, maintain, or permit any nuisance in, on, or about the Premises. Tenant shall not permit the Premises to be used for any activity that causes extraordinary wear and tear within the Premises. Tenant shall not commit or suffer to be committed any waste in or upon the Premises. Tenant shall honor the terms of all recorded covenants, conditions, and restrictions relating to the property on which the Premises are located.
8.2 Compliance with Law. Tenant shall not use the Premises or permit anything to be done in or about the Premises which will in any way conflict with any law, statute, ordinance, or governmental rule or regulation now in force or which may hereafter be enacted or promulgated. Tenant shall, at its sole cost and expense, promptly comply with all laws, statutes, ordinances, and governmental rules, regulations, or requirements now in force or which may hereafter be in force and with the requirements of any board of fire insurance underwriters or other similar bodies now or hereafter constituted, relating to, or affecting the condition, use, or occupancy of the Premises, excluding structural changes not related to or affected by Tenant’s improvements or acts. The judgment of any court of competent jurisdiction or the admission of Tenant in any action against Tenant, whether Landlord be a party thereto or not, that Tenant has violated any law, statute, ordinance, or governmental rule, regulation, or requirement, shall be conclusive of that fact as between Landlord and Tenant.
ARTICLE 9
HOLD HARMLESS
9.1 Assumption of Risk. Tenant as a material part of the consideration of this Agreement hereby assumes all risk of damage to property or injury to persons in, upon, or about the Premises from any cause other than Landlord’s sole active negligence or willful misconduct, and Tenant hereby waives all claims in respect thereof against Landlord.
9.2 Indemnity. Tenant shall indemnify and hold Landlord harmless against and from any and all liability, claims, judgments, or demands arising from Tenant’s use of the Premises for the conduct of its business or from any activity, work, or other thing done, permitted, or suffered by Tenant in, on, or about the Building, or arising from any breach or default in the performance of any obligation on Tenant’s part to be performed under the terms of this Agreement, or arising from any act or negligence of Tenant or any officer, agent, employee, guest, or invitee of Tenant, save and except claims or litigation arising through the sole active negligence or sole willful misconduct of Landlord, and from all and against all costs, attorneys’ fees, expenses and liabilities incurred by reason of any such claim or any action or proceeding brought thereon, and in any case, action, or proceeding brought against Landlord by reason of any such claim. Tenant upon notice from Landlord shall defend the same at Tenant’s expense by counsel reasonably satisfactory to Landlord.
 
Page 6

9.3 Waiver of Liability. Landlord and its agents shall not be liable for any damage to property entrusted to employees of the Building, nor for loss or damage to any property by theft or otherwise, nor for any injury or damage to persons or property resulting from fire, explosion, falling plaster, steam, gas, electricity, water, or rain which may leak from any part of the Building or from the pipes, appliances, or plumbing works therein or from the roof, street, or subsurface, or from any other place resulting from dampness or any other cause whatsoever, unless caused by or due to the active negligence or willful misconduct of Landlord. Landlord or its agents shall not be liable for interference with the light or other incorporeal hereditaments, loss of business or loss or any income therefrom by Tenant, loss from damages to goods, wares, merchandise or other property of Tenant, nor shall Landlord be liable for any latent defect in the Premises or in the Building. Tenant shall give prompt notice to Landlord in case of fire or accidents in the Premises or in the Building, or of defects therein, or in the fixtures or equipment.
ARTICLE 10
TENANT’S INSURANCE
10.1 Tenant’s Insurance. Tenant shall, at its sole cost and expense, commencing on the Rent Commencement Date and continuing thereafter during the term, procure, pay for, and keep in full force and effect the following types of insurance, in at least the amounts specified below subject to increase as Landlord may reasonably require from time to time, and in the form specified below.
 
 	(a)	Commercial liability insurance with a combined single limit coverage limit of not less than One Million Dollars ($1,000,000) covering bodily injury, personal injury, death and property damage liability per occurrence and in the aggregate of not less than Two Million Dollars ($2,000,000), or the current limit carried by Tenant, whichever is greater, insuring Landlord and Tenant against any and all liability with respect to the Premises or arising out of the maintenance, use, or occupancy of the Premises, or related to the exercise of any rights of Tenant pursuant to this Agreement. All such insurance shall specifically insure the performance by Tenant of the indemnity agreement set forth in Section 9.2 above. Further, all such insurance shall include, but not be limited to, blanket contractual, cross-liability, and severability of interest clauses, products/completed operations, broad form property damage and independent contractors. In addition, at Landlord’s option, Tenant shall increase such coverage limits to comply with industry standards in effect from time to time.	
 
 	(b)	Workers’ compensation coverage, as required by law, together with employer’s liability coverage in an aggregate amount of not less than One Million Dollars ($1,000,000) or any greater amount required under California laws from time to time in effect, and a waiver by Tenant’s insurer of any right of subrogation against Landlord by reason of any payment pursuant to such coverage.	
 
 	(c)	Business interruption or loss of income insurance in an amount not less than Five Million Dollars ($5,000,000).	
 
 	(d)	Rental value insurance, payable to Landlord, insuring the loss of the full Rent for one year with an extended period of indemnity for an additional 180 days.	
 
 	(e)	Plate glass insurance covering all plate glass on the Premises, if any, at full replacement value. So long as Tenant maintains a minimum net worth of Five Million Dollars ($5,000,000) Tenant shall have the option either to insure the risk or to self-insure.	
 
 	(f)	Insurance covering Tenant’s leasehold improvements, alterations permitted under Article 12, trade fixtures, merchandise and personal property (“covered items”) from time to time in, on, or about the Premises, in an amount not less than full replacement value, providing protection against earthquakes (if deemed necessary by Landlord in Landlord’s sole judgment) and any peril included within the classification “fire and extended coverage,” sprinkler damage, vandalism, malicious mischief, and such other additional perils as covered in a standard “all risk” insurance policy. Upon the occurrence of a covered casualty, any policy proceeds shall be used for the repair or replacement of the property damaged or destroyed unless this Agreement shall terminate under the provisions of Article 14. In addition, Tenant shall maintain comprehensive boiler and machinery coverage on all heating, air-conditioning, and ventilation equipment, electrical, mechanical, and other systems serving the Premises in an amount not less than the replacement value thereof. Replacement values shall be determined no less frequently than annually at Tenant’s expense by an engineer selected by the insurance carrier issuing the applicable policy. It is understood and acknowledged by Tenant that Landlord shall have no liability whatsoever for any damage or loss to any of Tenant’s “covered items” as specified in this Article.	
 
 	(g)	Commercial automobile liability and property insurance insuring all owned, non-owned, and hired vehicles used in the conduct of Tenant’s business and operated upon or parked within the Premises with a combined single limit of not less than One Million Dollars ($1,000,000) covering bodily injury, death, and property damage per occurrence and in the aggregate.	
10.2 Policy Form. All policies of insurance provided for herein shall comply with the following:
 
 	(a)	policies must be issued by insurance companies with general policy holder’s ratings of not less than A-, and financial ratings of not less than Class VII, as rated in the most current available “Best’s Key Rating Guide,” and which are qualified to do business in the state where the Premises is situated;	
 
Page 7

 	(b)	any policies issued on a “Claims Made” basis must be renewed for a 3-year period after the termination of this Agreement or provide for a 3-year tail reporting period if coverage is not renewed;	
 
 	(c)	all such policies shall name Landlord, Landlord’s property manager, and Landlord’s mortgagee(s) or beneficiary(ies) as additional insureds (or, in the case of casualty policies, shall name Landlord, Landlord’s property manager, and Landlord’s mortgagee(s) or beneficiary(ies) as loss payees), and all such policies shall be for the mutual and joint benefit and protection of Landlord, Tenant, Landlord’s property manager, and Landlord’s mortgagee(s) or beneficiary(ies); and	
 
 	(d)	All public liability, property damage, and other casualty policies shall be written as primary policies and any insurance carried by Landlord shall not be contributing with such policies.	
Executed copies of the policies of insurance, with certificates indicating that such insurance is currently in force, or certificates thereof, shall be delivered to Landlord prior to Tenant, its agents, or employees entering the Premises for any purpose. Thereafter, upon Landlord’s request, executed copies of renewal policies or certificates thereof shall be delivered to Landlord within thirty (30) days prior to the expiration of the term of each policy. If Tenant delivers a certificate of insurance to Landlord pursuant to either of the foregoing two sentences, Tenant shall, upon Landlord’s request, deliver to Landlord an executed copy of the underlying policy. Whether or not Landlord requires Tenant to provide a copy of the underlying policies of insurance covered under this Article, Tenant shall provide Landlord with an endorsement to each such policy, appropriately issued by Tenant’s insurance company to the effect that (a) the insurance is primary and any insurance carried by Landlord shall not be contributing with such policies, and (b) Landlord, Landlord’s property manager, and Landlord’s mortgagee(s) or beneficiary(ies) are named as additional insureds or loss payees, as applicable, and (c) the insurer will give Landlord at least thirty (30) days’ written notice in advance of any cancellation or lapse, or of the effective date of any reduction in the amounts, of insurance.
10.3 Blanket Policies. Notwithstanding anything to the contrary contained in this Article, Tenant’s obligations to carry insurance may be satisfied by coverage under a so-called blanket policy of insurance, provided that the requirements set forth in this Agreement are otherwise satisfied and any such blanket policy contains a provision that the limit(s) of the policy shall apply independently to the Premises and the activities conducted thereon in amounts not less than those amounts required by this Article 10.
10.4 Increased Premiums Due to Use of Premises. Tenant shall not do any act in or about the Premises which will tend to increase the insurance rates upon the Building. Tenant agrees to pay to Landlord upon demand the amount of any increase in premiums for insurance resulting to Landlord or any other tenant of the Building from Tenant’s use of the Premises, whether or not Landlord shall have consented to such use on the part of Tenant.
10.5 Tenant’s Building Insurance Requirement. In the event Tenant is the sole occupant of the Building in which the Premises are a part, then Tenant, during the term shall maintain in effect a policy or policies of insurance covering the Building, in an amount not less than one hundred percent (100%) of the full replacement cost (exclusive of the cost of excavations, foundations, and footings), or the amount of insurance Landlord’s mortgagee(s) or beneficiary(ies) may require Landlord to maintain, whichever is the greater, providing protection against any peril generally included in the classification “fire and extended coverage,” and such other additional perils as covered in a standard “Special Risk” insurance policy, with earthquake coverage insurance if deemed necessary by Landlord in Landlord’s sole judgment or if required by Landlord’s mortgagee(s) or beneficiary(ies), or by any governmental agency and including a rental interruption endorsement, if available (“Landlord’s Insurance”). Tenant’s obligation to carry insurance may be brought within the coverage of any so-called blanket policy or policies of insurance carried and maintained by Landlord. However, in the event the Building in which the Premises are a part is occupied by other occupants, then Landlord shall maintain such policy(ies), and Tenant agrees to pay to Landlord, as Additional Rent, its share of the cost of Landlord’s insurance (plus any finance charges payable by Landlord to the insurance carrier with respect thereto). The cost for any partial year of the term shall be prorated. Tenant shall pay its share of such premiums (plus finance charges) in advance based on estimates made by Landlord from time to time within ten (10) days after Tenant’s receipt of Landlord’s written estimate. Landlord shall revise such estimates within a reasonable time following the end of each year on the basis of the actual premiums paid for such year. Thereafter, Tenant shall pay its proportionate share of the adjusted estimated premiums in equal monthly installments. If the premiums for the previous year were underestimated, Tenant shall pay its share of the deficiency along with the monthly installment of MMR next due. Any excess payment shall be credited against Tenant’s payment of estimated premiums next due.
10.6 INTENTIONALLY DELETED.
10.7 Waiver of Subrogation. Neither Landlord nor Tenant shall be liable to the other or to any insurance company (by way of subrogation or otherwise) insuring the other party for any direct or consequential loss or damage to any Building, structure or other tangible property, or any resulting loss of income, or losses under workers’ compensation laws and benefits, even though such loss or damage might have been occasioned by the negligence of such party, its agents or employees, if any such loss or damage is covered by insurance benefiting the party suffering such loss or damage. To the extent it may be necessary, Landlord and Tenant agree to obtain from the insurer(s) issuing property policies required hereunder endorsements which shall provide that the insurer waives all right of recovery by way of subrogation against the other party. Notwithstanding the foregoing, (i) nothing contained in this Section 10.7 shall absolve Tenant of its obligations of maintenance and repair, payment of insurance deductibles, self-insured retentions and co-insurance, or indemnification obligations contained elsewhere in this Agreement, and (ii) in the event that any loss is due to the act, omission or negligence or willful misconduct of Tenant or its agents, employees, contractors, subtenants, guests or invitees, Tenant’s liability insurance shall be primary and shall cover all losses and damages prior to any other insurance.
 
Page 8

10.8 Failure by Tenant To Maintain Insurance. If Tenant neglects to secure and maintain insurance policies complying with the provisions of this Article, Landlord may secure the appropriate insurance policies and Tenant shall pay, upon demand, the cost of same to Landlord, plus a service fee equal to fifteen percent (15%) of the total annual premium cost of the policy or policies, as Additional Rent. Landlord, or an affiliate of Landlord, may act as an insurance agent or broker in such transactions and will be paid as a result of the placement of such insurance.
ARTICLE 11
REPAIRS AND MAINTENANCE
11.1 Tenant’s Repairs and Maintenance. Tenant shall, at Tenant’s sole expense, keep the Premises (both exterior and interior), utility installations, and alterations in good order, condition and repair (whether or not the portion of the Premises requiring repairs, or the means of repairing the same, are reasonably or readily accessible to Tenant, and whether or not the need for such repairs occurs as a result of Tenant’s use, any prior use, the elements or the age of such portion of the Premises), including, but not limited to, all equipment or facilities, such as plumbing, heating, ventilating, air-conditioning, electrical, lighting facilities, boilers, pressure vessels, fire protection system, fixtures, walls (interior and exterior), foundations, ceilings, roofs, floors, windows, doors, gate, roll-up doors, railings, plate glass, skylights, roof insulation, roof foil paper, landscaping, driveways, parking lots including slurry and striping, fences, retaining walls, signs, sidewalks and parkways located in, on, or adjacent to the Premises. Tenant, in keeping the Premises in good order, condition and repair, shall exercise and perform good maintenance practices, specifically including the procurement and maintenance of the service contracts required by Section 11.1(a) below. Tenant’s obligations shall include restorations, replacements or renewals when necessary to keep the Premises and all improvements thereon or a part thereof in good order, condition and state of repair. Tenant shall, during the term of this Agreement, keep the exterior appearance of the Building in a first-class condition consistent with the exterior appearance of other similar facilities of comparable age and size in the vicinity, including, when necessary, the exterior repainting of the Building.
(a) Service Contracts. Tenant shall, at Tenant’s sole expense, procure and maintain contracts with licensed vendors approved by Landlord, with copies to Landlord, in customary form and substance for, and with contractors specializing and experienced in the maintenance of the following equipment and improvements, if any, if and when installed on the Premises: (i) HVAC equipment, (ii) boiler, and pressure vessels, (iii) fire extinguishing systems, including fire alarm and/or smoke detection and/or fire suppression and/or EFS fire systems, (iv) landscaping and irrigation systems, (v) roof covering and drains, (vi) driveways and parking lots, (vii) roll-up doors (viii) basic utility feed to the perimeter of the Building, and (ix) any other equipment, as required by Landlord. Tenant agrees at all times, from and after the Rent Commencement Date at its own cost and expense, to repair, replace, and maintain in good and tenantable condition, normal wear and tear excepted, the Premises and every part thereof (except that portion of the Premises to be maintained by Landlord as hereinafter provided), and including without limitation all fixtures, carpeting, interior walls, and wall coverings, floor covering, plumbing repairs, air-conditioning, and heating equipment, interior electrical repairs (including replacement of light bulbs and ballasts), carpet and other floor covering repairs, Tenant’s equipment therein, all Tenant’s signs, locks and closing devices, roll-up doors, and all window sash, blinds, casement, or frames, such items of repair, maintenance, alteration and improvement, or reconstruction as may at any time or from time to time be required by a governmental agency having jurisdiction over the Premises or any part thereof. All glass, both exterior and interior, is at the sole risk of Tenant, and any glass broken shall be promptly replaced by Tenant with glass of the same kind, size, and quality.
(b) Replacement. Subject to Tenant’s indemnification of Landlord as set forth in Sections 9.2 and 24.3, and without relieving Tenant of liability resulting from Tenant’s failure to exercise and perform maintenance practices described in Section 11.1 (a), if the items in 11.1(a) above cannot be repaired other than at a cost which is in excess of 50% of the cost of replacing such item, then such item shall be replaced by Landlord, and the cost thereof shall be borne as follows: (i) if the replacement is covered under a warranty or Landlord has impounded from Tenant during the Term the cost of replacement of such item, then the cost shall be borne by Landlord up to the amount of the warranty payment or impound payments received; or (ii) if Landlord has not collected from Tenant impound reserves for the replacement of such item, or if the replacement is required before the expiration of the useful life of such item as reasonably determined by Landlord’s service contractors due to damage, misuse, failure to properly maintain, or other actions or inactions by Tenant or its agents, employees, contractors, subtenants, guests or invitees (and even though Landlord has collected impound reserves from Tenant for such replacement), then the entire cost of such replacement shall be borne by Tenant.
11.2 Landlord’s Repair and Maintenance. Subject to the provisions of Article 14, it is intended by the Parties hereto that Landlord have no obligation, in any manner whatsoever, to repair and maintain the Premises, or the equipment therein, all of which obligations are intended to be that of the Tenant. It is the intention of the Parties that the terms of this Agreement govern the respective obligations of the Parties as to maintenance and repair of the Premises, and they expressly waive the benefit of any statute now or hereafter in effect to the extent it is in consistent with the terms of this Agreement.
11.3 Failure to Repair and/or Maintain. If Tenant refuses or neglects to make repairs and/or maintain the Premises, or any part thereof, in a manner reasonably satisfactory to Landlord, Landlord shall have the right, upon giving Tenant reasonable written notice of its election to do so, to make such repairs or perform such maintenance on behalf of and for the account of Tenant. In such event such work shall be paid for by Tenant as Additional Rental no later than ten (10) days after Tenant’s receipt of a bill therefor together with an administrative fee in an amount equal to ten percent (10%) of the costs so incurred, as well as interest thereon at the Default Rate (as defined in Section 20.6 below).
 
Page 9

11.4 Surrender of the Premises. Upon any surrender of the Premises, Tenant shall redeliver the Premises to Landlord in good order, condition, and state of repair, ordinary wear and tear and insured casualty damage excepted. Any construction within the Premises must be approved by the appropriate governmental authorities and documented by issued permits. Any construction which is not permitted must be returned to the non-permitted state upon surrender to Landlord. All improvements made to the Premises by Tenant, including but not limited to, ceilings, rooms, light fixtures, wall coverings, floor coverings and partitions and other items comprising Tenant’s Work, but excluding Removable Personal Property, shall become, at Landlord’s sole discretion, the property of Landlord upon the expiration or earlier termination of this Agreement. Alternatively, if Landlord so conditions its consent to such improvements or if such improvements were installed without the consent of Landlord, Landlord may require Tenant to remove, at Tenant’s sole cost and expense, any and all improvements, trade fixtures and personal property, including, but not limited to, ceilings, rooms, light fixtures, wall coverings, additional or modified fire systems and related equipment such as an EFS fire system and fire pump, warehouse racking or warehouse equipment fixed to the premises, floor coverings and partitions and other items comprising Tenant’s Work, to repair any damage to the Premises caused by such removal, and to restore the Premises to substantially the condition it was in on the date of delivery of the Premises by Landlord to Tenant. Any offices removed from the Premises must be restored to substantially the same condition as they were on the date of delivery of the Premises by Landlord to Tenant and approved by Landlord. Any penetrations or attachment to the concrete slab or floor shall be filled by a method approved by the Landlord including refinishing and resealing the floor to a condition solely approved by the Landlord. Any HVAC or air conditioning equipment relocated or removed from the roof shall be replaced or reinstalled by the Tenant at Landlord’s sole discretion. All low voltage wiring shall be left in tact and not cut. All wall outlets, jacks, and plates shall be left in place and white in color. Upon the expiration or earlier termination of this Agreement, Tenant shall surrender the Premises broom clean, in good condition and repair, reasonable wear and tear and casualty damage excepted. For purposes of this Agreement and particularly this Section 11.4, “reasonable wear and tear” shall (a) not include any damage or deterioration that could have been prevented by good maintenance practice or by Tenant performing all of its maintenance, repair and replacement obligations under this Agreement, including without limitation under Section 11.1 above, and (b) mean and require that, at a minimum, there must be not less than five (5) years of remaining useful life for each of the roof of the Building, the heating, ventilating and air conditioning systems, the parking lot, and the exterior paint on the Building, as of the expiration or earlier termination of the Term, all as reasonably determined by Landlord, and all landscaping must be alive.
Should Tenant hold over in the Premises beyond the expiration or earlier termination of this Agreement, the holding over shall not constitute a renewal or extension of this Agreement or give Tenant any rights under this Agreement. In such event, Landlord may, in its sole discretion, treat Tenant as a tenant at will, subject to all of the terms and conditions in this Agreement, except that MMR shall be an amount equal to one and one-quarter (1-1/4) times the sum of MMR which was payable by Tenant for the twelve (12)-month period immediately preceding the expiration or earlier termination of this Agreement. In the event Tenant fails to surrender the Premises upon the expiration or earlier termination of this Agreement, Tenant shall indemnify and hold Landlord harmless from all loss or liability which may accrue therefrom including, without limitation, any claims made by any succeeding tenant founded on or resulting from Tenant’s failure to surrender. Acceptance by Landlord of any MMR or Additional Rent after the expiration or earlier termination of this Agreement shall not constitute a consent to a hold-over hereunder, constitute acceptance of Tenant as a tenant at will, or result in a renewal of this Agreement.
Tenant is allowed to install equipment and racking. Upon surrender Tenant shall be responsible for repairing any damage to the floor to fill in any holes, using a two (2) part epoxy, approved by Landlord prior to such repair.
11.5 Landlord’s Entry. The Tenant agrees to permit the Landlord and its authorized representatives to enter the Premises In accordance with the rights set forth in Article 15 below in connection with the rights and obligations of Landlord set forth in this Article 11. No exercise by the Landlord of any rights herein reserved shall entitle Tenant to any damage for any injury or inconvenience occasioned thereby nor to any abatement of Rent. In the event Landlord makes or causes any such repairs to be made or performed, as provided for herein Tenant shall pay the cost thereof to Landlord forthwith, as Additional Rent upon receipt of a bill therefor, except for that work as provided herein which will be at the sole cost and expense of Landlord. Nothing herein contained shall imply any duty on the part of the Landlord to do any such work which, under any provision of this Agreement, Tenant may be required to do, nor shall it constitute a waiver of Tenant’s default in failing to do the same.
ARTICLE 12
IMPROVEMENTS, ALTERATIONS, AND ADDITIONS
12.1 Alterations. Tenant shall not make or suffer to be made any alterations, additions, or improvements to or of the Premises or any part thereof without Landlord’s prior written consent, which Landlord may withhold in its sole discretion, except that Landlord’s consent shall not be required for non-structural alterations costing less than fifty thousand dollars ($50,000.00) that are not visible from the exterior of the Premises. All alterations, additions, and improvements to the Premises, including but not limited to floor coverings, wall coverings, window coverings, paneling, and built-in cabinet work, but excluding movable furniture, trade fixtures, and other unattached personal property, shall on the expiration of the Term become a part of the realty and belong to Landlord, and shall be surrendered with the Premises whether or not installed with Landlord’s consent. Notwithstanding the foregoing, Tenant shall, at its sole cost and expense, remove any alterations, additions, or improvements designated for removal by Landlord upon written notice given to Tenant within thirty (30) days after the termination of this Agreement. If Tenant receives any such designation at least ten (10) days before the termination of this Agreement, the removal shall be completed prior to termination. Otherwise the removal shall be completed within ten (10) days after Tenant’s receipt of Landlord’s designation. Tenant shall repair any damage to the Premises caused in connection with the removal of any items pursuant to this Article and restore
 
Page 10

all damaged areas to a condition consistent with the surrounding finish. Landlord’s consent to any alterations, additions, or improvements, when given, shall be deemed to be conditioned upon Tenant acquiring any governmental approvals or permits which may be required, all at Tenant’s sole cost and expense. All alterations, additions, and improvements shall be made by Tenant at Tenant’s sole cost and expense by licensed contractors and in compliance with all laws and regulations. If requested by Landlord, Tenant shall provide a Payment and Performance Bond for Landlord Approved Construction over One Hundred Thousand Dollars ($100,000). Each contractor must first be approved in writing by Landlord. Tenant shall cause its contractors to submit to Landlord prior to entering the Premises certificates and endorsements evidencing liability insurance meeting the requirements for Tenant’s commercial generally liability policy set forth in Article 10 hereof and workers compensation and employer’s liability coverage as required by law. Each commercial general liability policy shall name as additional insureds Landlord, Landlord’s property manager, and Landlord’s Mortgagees.
12.2 Signs and Other Displays. Tenant shall not, without Landlord’s prior written consent, which Landlord may withhold in its sole discretion, display any signs, advertising placards, names, insignia, trademarks, descriptive material, or any similar item (i) on the exterior of the Premises, or (ii) inside the Premises within twenty-four inches (24”) of any window or exterior door. Once given, Landlord may revoke its consent upon thirty (30) days’ advance written notice. Any sign request shall be made in accordance with the application process in place at the time of the request, and all such signs shall be in compliance with all covenants and restrictions encumbering the Premises, and all conditions and requirements of all applicable governmental authorities. Prior to Landlord’s approval, Tenant shall submit to Landlord all plans and specifications for the installation of any signage. The indemnity provisions of Section 9.2 above shall apply against any loss, cost or expense (including reasonable attorneys fees) which may be sustained or incurred by Landlord, and all liability for any property damage or bodily injuries in any manner related to, Tenant’s installation, maintenance, operation or removal of any signage. Tenant agrees to pay all taxes, permit fees, insurance premiums, and repairs to the area where any signage has been installed resulting from the installation of such signage. If any sign is placed on or about the Premises without the consent of Landlord, Landlord may, if the same is not removed and any damage caused by such removal repaired by Tenant within five (5) days following written demand by Landlord that Tenant remove such signs, remove such signs and Tenant shall pay Landlord the cost of removal together with interest at the Default Rate (as defined in Section 20.6 below) from date of expenditure until payment is made in full. Tenant shall pay all such amounts within ten (10) days after Landlord invoices Tenant for such costs. Tenant shall pay all costs of permitted signs and all costs and expenses of installation, alteration, repair and maintenance of such signs. Tenant shall repair any damage which alteration, renovation or removal of its signs may cause during the Term. Tenant, at its expense, shall remove its signs from the Premises at the termination or expiration of this Agreement and repair any damage to the Premises caused by such removal.
ARTICLE 13
LIENS
Tenant shall keep the Premises free from any liens arising out of any work performed, materials furnished, or obligations incurred by Tenant. Landlord may require, at Landlord’s sole option, that Tenant shall provide to Landlord at Tenant’s sole cost and expense a lien and completion bond in an amount equal to one and one-half (1-1/2) times any and all estimated cost of any improvements, additions, or alterations in the Premises to protect Landlord against any liability for mechanics’ and materialmen’s liens and to assure completion of the work. Tenant shall give Landlord not less than ten (10) days’ notice in writing prior to the commencement of the improvements and Landlord shall have the right to post a Notice of Non-Responsibility in or on the Premises, as provided by law, and the costs incurred by Landlord in procuring and recording such Notice of Non-Responsibility shall be immediately payable by Tenant to Landlord as Additional Rent. If Tenant disputes the correctness or validity of any claim of lien, Tenant shall, within ten (10) days after written request by Landlord, record a statutory lien release bond as will release said property from the lien claimed and thereafter renew such bond as required.
ARTICLE 14
RECONSTRUCTION
14.1 Landlord’s Right to Terminate. If the Premises are damaged by fire or other casualty, Landlord may terminate this Agreement upon written notice to Tenant given within one hundred twenty (120) days after the casualty if:
 
 	(a)	The cost of repair is not fully covered by the net proceeds of the policy for Landlord’s Property Insurance (other than any deductible or self-insured retention) that are actually received by Landlord and made available by its Mortgagees,  unless  within thirty (30) days after Landlord’s notice of termination, Tenant pays to Landlord the full amount of the shortfall needed to complete the repair; or	
 
 	(b)	The cost of repair exceeds ten percent (10%) of the full replacement cost; or	
 
 	(c)	Landlord reasonably estimates that it will take longer than 180 days to complete the repairs of the Premises.	
14.2 End of Term Damage. If the Premises are materially damaged by fire or other casualty during the final two (2) years of the Term, either party may terminate this Agreement upon notice to the other given within one hundred twenty (120) days after the casualty, provided that this Agreement shall not terminate if Tenant possesses an unexercised option to extend the Term for at least two (2) years and exercises the option within thirty (30) days after the casualty. For purposes of this section, damage is “material” if the cost of repair exceeds Two Thousand Dollars ($2,000) per month remaining in the Term at the time of the casualty, with a proration for partial months.
 
Page 11

14.3 Obligation to Repair. If this Agreement is not terminated pursuant to this Article following any casualty damage to the Premises, then Landlord shall repair, reconstruct, and restore the basic shell of the Premises only,, and Tenant shall, at its expense, replace or fully repair all Tenant’s personal property, trade fixtures, utility installations, interior improvements and alterations existing at the time of such damage. If the Premises are to be repaired in accordance with the foregoing, (i) Landlord shall make available to Tenant any portion of insurance proceeds it receives which are allocable solely to any interior improvements installed at the inception of this Agreement, and (ii) Tenant shall fully cooperate with Landlord in removing Tenant’s personal property, trade fixtures, and any debris from the Premises to facilitate the making of repairs. Landlord shall attempt in good faith to commence the repair, reconstruction, and restoration within six (6) months after the casualty, subject to force majeure, and shall prosecute the same diligently to completion. Under no circumstances shall Landlord be required to repair any casualty damage to property installed in the Premises by Tenant. Upon the substantial completion of Landlord’s repairs, Tenant shall promptly commence, at its sole cost, the repair, reconstruction, and restoration of the remainder of the Premises.
14.4 Rent Abatement. If the Premises are materially damaged by casualty (except for casualty damage caused by the negligence or intentional misconduct of Tenant or its employees, agents, or independent contractors), and as a result of the casualty all or a portion of the Premises is rendered unusable for the operation of Tenant’s business, MMR shall proportionately abate, with the abatement percentage equal to the ratio which the Rentable Area of the Premises rendered unusable bears to the total Rentable Area of the Premises immediately before the casualty. The abatement shall commence as of the date of the casualty and continue until the earlier of the date on which Tenant operates its business from the damaged area or fifteen (15) days after the substantial completion of Landlord’s repairs.
14.5 No Compensation. Except as expressly provided in this Article, Tenant shall have no claim for, and shall not be entitled to, any compensation from Landlord for damages for the loss of the use of the whole or any part of the Premises or of Tenant’s personal property, or for any inconvenience or annoyance occasioned by the damage or by any repair, reconstruction, or restoration. If this Agreement is terminated pursuant to this Article 14, Landlord shall, subject to the rights of any Mortgagees, be entitled to receive and retain all insurance proceeds resulting from or attributable to such damage or destruction, except for proceeds payable under policies obtained by Tenant which specifically insure Tenant’s personal property and trade fixtures.
14.6 Waiver of Termination Rights. Landlord and Tenant waive any statutory or common-law right to terminate this Agreement by reason of casualty damage to the Premises.
ARTICLE 15
ENTRY BY LANDLORD
Landlord may, but shall not be obligated to, enter the Premises upon reasonable notice (except in emergency, in which case no notice shall be required) and without any abatement of Rent: (a) to examine the Premises; (b) to perform any obligation or exercise any right or remedy of Landlord under this Agreement; (c) to make repairs, alterations, improvements, and additions to the Premises as Landlord deems necessary or desirable; (d) to perform work necessary to comply with laws, ordinances, rules, or the regulations of any governmental authority or of any insurance underwriter; (e) to perform work that Landlord deems necessary to prevent waste or deterioration in connection with the Premises; (f) to show the Premises to prospective or actual purchasers, tenants, Mortgagees, investors, and insurers; (g) to post notices of non-responsibility; and (h) for any other purpose permitted by law. In entering the Premises pursuant to this Article, Landlord may take thereon any reasonably required materials. Landlord may erect scaffolding and other necessary structures around and within the Premises where reasonably required by the character of any work to be performed, always providing that the entrance to the Premises shall not be blocked thereby, and further providing that Landlord shall use reasonable efforts, in light of expense and practicality, to minimize any interference with Tenant’s business. Tenant hereby waives any claim for damages or for any injury or inconvenience to or interference with Tenant’s business, any loss of occupancy or quiet enjoyment of the Premises, and any other loss occasioned thereby. Any entry to the Premises obtained by Landlord by any of said means or otherwise shall not under any circumstances be construed or deemed to be a forcible or unlawful entry into, or a detainer of, the Premises or an eviction of Tenant from the Premises or any portion thereof. During the six (6) months prior to the expiration of the Term, Landlord may place upon the Premises leasing and/or for sale notices, which Tenant shall permit to remain without molestation.
ARTICLE 16
TAXES ON TENANT’S PROPERTY
16.1 Personal Property Taxes. Tenant shall be liable for and shall pay, at least ten (10) days before delinquency, all taxes levied against any person, property or trade fixtures placed by Tenant in or about the Premises. If any such taxes on Tenant’s personal property or trade fixtures are levied against Landlord or Landlord’s property or if the assessed value of the Premises is increased by the inclusion therein of a value placed upon such personal property or trade fixtures of Tenant and if Landlord, after written notice to Tenant, pays the taxes based upon such increased assessment, which Landlord shall have the right to do regardless of the validity hereof, but only under proper protest if requested by Tenant, Tenant shall, upon demand, repay to Landlord the taxes so levied against Landlord, or the portion of such taxes resulting from such increase in the assessment.
16.2 Real Property Taxes. As used herein, the term “Real Property Taxes” shall include any form of assessment; real estate, general, special, ordinary or extraordinary, or rental levy or tax (other than inheritance, personal income or estate taxes); improvement bond; and/or license fee imposed upon or levied against any legal or equitable interest of Landlord in the Premises, Landlord’s right to other income therefrom, and/or Landlord’s business of leasing, by any authority having the direct or indirect power to tax and where the funds are
 
Page 12

generated with reference to the Building address and where the proceeds so generated are to be applied by the city, county or other local taxing authority of a jurisdiction within which the Premises are located. The term “Real Property Taxes” shall also include any tax, fee, levy, assessment or charge, or any increase therein, imposed by reason of events occurring during the term of this Agreement, including but not limited to, a change in the ownership of the Premises.
16.3 Payment of Real Property Taxes. Tenant shall pay the Real Property Taxes applicable to the Premises during the term of this Agreement. Subject to Section , all such payments shall be made at least ten (10) days prior to any delinquency date. Upon Landlord request, Tenant shall promptly furnish Landlord with satisfactory evidence that such taxes have been paid. If any such taxes shall cover any period of time prior to or after the expiration or termination of this Agreement, Tenant’s share of such taxes shall be prorated to cover only that portion of the tax bill applicable to the period that this Agreement is in effect, and Landlord shall reimburse Tenant for any overpayment. If Tenant shall fail to pay any required Real Property Taxes, Landlord shall have the right to pay the same, and Tenant shall reimburse Landlord therefor upon demand.
16.4 Advance Payment. Notwithstanding Section 16.3 above, Landlord may, at Landlord’s option, estimate the current Real Property Taxes, and require that such taxes be paid in advance to Landlord by Tenant, either: (i) in a lump sum amount equal to the installment due, at least twenty (20) days prior to the applicable delinquency date, or (ii) monthly in advance with the payment of the MMR. If Landlord elects to require payment monthly in advance, the monthly payment shall be an amount equal to the amount of the estimated installment of taxes divided by the number of months remaining before the month in which said installment becomes delinquent. When the actual amount of the applicable tax bill is known, the amount of such equal monthly advance payments shall be adjusted as required to provide the funds needed to pay the applicable taxes. If the amount collected by Landlord is insufficient to pay such Real Property Taxes when due, Tenant shall pay Landlord, upon demand, such additional sums as are necessary to pay such obligations. All monies paid to Landlord under this Section may be intermingled with other monies of Landlord and shall not bear interest. In the event of a Breach by Tenant in the performance of its obligations under this Agreement, then any balance of funds paid to Landlord under the provisions of this Section may, at the option of Landlord, be treated as an additional Security Deposit.
16.5 Increased Taxes. If alterations, utility installations, installation of trade or other fixtures or equipment, or any specialized improvements for the use of Tenant or the tenant improvements in the Premises, whether installed, and/or paid for by Landlord or Tenant and whether or not affixed to the real property so as to become a part thereof, are assessed for real property tax purposes at a valuation higher than the valuation at which tenant improvements conforming to Landlord’s “ Building Standard ”, then the Real Property Taxes and assessments levied against the Building by reason of such excess assessed valuation shall be deemed to be taxes levied against personal property of Tenant and shall be governed by the provisions of Section 16.1 above. If the records of the County Assessor are not available or sufficiently detailed to serve as a basis for making said determination, the actual cost of construction shall be used.
ARTICLE 17
EMINENT DOMAIN
If more than twenty-five percent (25%) of the Building shall be taken or appropriated by any public or quasi-public authority under the power of eminent domain, and/or if Landlord shall agree to sell or convey to the authority under threat, or in lieu, of condemnation, either party hereto shall have the right, at its option, to terminate this Agreement and Landlord shall be entitled to any and all income, Rent, award, or any interest therein whatsoever which may be paid or made in connection with such public or quasi-public use or purpose and Tenant shall have no claim against Landlord for all or any portion of the proceeds or for the value of any unexpired term of this Agreement. If either less than twenty-five percent (25%) of the Building is taken, or more than twenty-five percent (25%) is taken, and neither party elects to terminate as herein provided, the Rent thereafter to be paid shall be equitably reduced based upon the ratio which the square feet of floor area in the Building taken bears to the total square feet of floor area in the Building immediately before the taking.
ARTICLE 18
ESTOPPEL CERTIFICATES
18.1 Tenant Certificates. Tenant shall from time to time within ten (10) days after Landlord’s written request execute, acknowledge, and deliver an estoppel certificate certifying to Landlord and its Mortgagees, investors, and purchasers (i) that this Agreement is unmodified and in full force and effect except as stated in the certificate, (ii) that a complete copy of this Agreement and all amendments is attached to the certificate as an exhibit, (iii) the amount of Minimum Annual Rent and Additional Rent then in effect or payable, (iv) the dates through which Minimum Annual Rent and Additional Rent have been paid, (v) that no Rent has been paid in advance except as specified, (vi) that except as specified there are no uncured defaults on the part of Landlord hereunder and no events have occurred which, with the giving of notice or the passage of time or both, would constitute defaults on the part of Landlord, (vii) the dates on which Minimum Annual Rent and Additional Rent commenced to accrue, (viii) the first and last days of the Term, subject to any remaining extension options, (ix) identifying which extension options Tenant has exercised and which remain unexercised, if any, and (x) any other information reasonably requested by Landlord. Landlord and its Mortgagees, investors, and purchasers may detrimentally rely on the certificate.
18.2 Assignor Certificates. Within ten (10) days after receiving Landlord’s written request given from time to time following any assignment of the Tenant’s interest in this Agreement, each assignor, whether the named Tenant herein or any subsequent assignor, shall execute, acknowledge, and deliver to Landlord an estoppel certificate signed by the assignor containing the information required under Section 18.1 above for estoppel certificates signed by Tenant and certifying that, except as stated in the certificate, (a) the assignor remains liable for the
 
Page 13

obligations and liabilities of the Tenant under this Agreement, and (b) the assignor knows of no defenses or offsets to such obligations and liabilities. Landlord and its Mortgagees, investors, and purchasers may detrimentally rely on the certificate.
ARTICLE 19
FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
Within ten (10) days after Landlord’s written request, Tenant shall furnish Landlord with the following documents: Financial statements, including, but not limited to, balance sheets, profit and loss statements and statements of changes to financial condition, reflecting Tenant’s current financial condition in connection with an actual or proposed sale, financing or refinancing of the Premises. In the event Tenant is a publicly-traded corporation, Tenant’s last published financial information shall be deemed satisfactory.
ARTICLE 20
DEFAULTS BY TENANT
20.1 Events of Default. Tenant shall be in default under the terms of this Agreement if:
 
 	(a)	Tenant fails to make any payment of Rental (as defined in Section 20.4) within three (3) days after written notice;	
 
 	(b)	Tenant commits a breach of any of its obligations under this Agreement other than the failure to make a payment of Rental, including, but not limited to, Tenant’s being in default in the prompt and full performance of any its promises, covenants, or agreements herein contained for more than a reasonable time, in no event to exceed ten (10) days, after written notice thereof from Landlord to Tenant describing the nature of the default in reasonable detail;	
 
 	(c)	Tenant vacates or abandons the Premises prior to the end of the Term or any extension thereof;	
 
 	(d)	Tenant makes any general assignment for the benefit of creditors;	
 
 	(e)	A petition has been filed against Tenant to have Tenant adjudged a bankrupt or a petition for reorganization or arrangement under any law relating to bankruptcy (unless, in the case of a petition filed against Tenant, the same is dismissed within sixty (60) days);	
 
 	(f)	Tenant institutes any proceedings under the Bankruptcy Code or any similar or successor statute, code, or act;	
 
 	(g)	An appointed trustee or receiver takes possession of all or substantially all of Tenant’s assets or of Tenant’s assets at the Premises, or of Tenant’s interest in this Agreement, where possession is not restored to Tenant within thirty (30) days; or should all or substantially all of Tenant’s assets located at the Premises or Tenant’s interest in this Agreement have been attached or judicially seized, where the seizure is not discharged within thirty (30) days;	
 
 	(h)	Tenant fails to pay its debts generally as such debts become due (excluding debts which are subject to bona fide dispute).	
Any notice provided for in this Section 20.1 shall be in lieu of, and not in addition to, any notice required under Section 1161 of the California Code of Civil Procedure, or any similar superseding statute.
20.2 Rights of Landlord upon Breach. Landlord may treat the occurrence of any one (1) or more of the foregoing events as a breach of this Agreement, and, in addition to any and all other rights or remedies of Landlord under this Agreement, at law or in equity, Landlord shall have the option, without further notice or demand of any kind to Tenant or any other person except as then may be required by law, to:
 
 	(a)	Declare the term ended and to re-enter and take possession of the Premises, and remove all persons therefrom;	
 
 	(b)	Re-enter the Premises and occupy the whole or any part for and on account of Tenant, to the extent then permitted by California law, without declaring this Agreement terminated, and to collect any unpaid Rental and other charges which have become due and payable, or which may thereafter become due and payable; or	
 
 	(c)	Even though Landlord may have re-entered the Premises pursuant to Subsection 20.2(b), to elect thereafter to terminate this Agreement and all of the rights of Tenant in or to the Premises; provided, however, that Landlord shall not be deemed to have terminated this Agreement, or the liability of Tenant to pay any Rental, by re-entering the Premises pursuant to this Section, or by any action in unlawful detainer or otherwise to obtain possession of the Premises, unless Landlord shall have notified Tenant in writing that it has so elected to terminate this Agreement.	
 
Page 14

20.3 Termination of Agreement. Should Landlord elect to terminate this Agreement pursuant to the provisions of Sections 20.1 and 20.2 above, Landlord may recover from Tenant, as damages, the following:
 
 	(a)	The worth at the time of award of the unpaid Rental which had been earned at the time of termination; plus	
 
 	(b)	The worth at the time of award of the amount by which the unpaid Rental which would have been earned after termination until the time of award exceeds the amount of such Rental loss that Tenant proves could have been reasonably avoided; plus	
 
 	(c)	The worth at the time of award of the amount by which the unpaid Rental for the balance of the Term after the time of award exceeds the amount of Rental loss that Tenant proves could have been reasonably avoided; plus	
 
 	(d)	Any other amount necessary to compensate Landlord for the detriment proximately caused by Tenant’s failure to perform its obligations under this Agreement or which in the ordinary course of things would be likely to result therefrom, including, but not limited to, any costs or expenses incurred by Landlord in (i) retaking possession of the Premises, including reasonable attorneys’ fees (including charges of in-house counsel) therefor, (ii) maintaining or preserving the Premises after any default, (iii) preparing the Premises for reletting to a new tenant, including repairs or alterations to the Premises, (iv) payment of leasing commissions, and (v) payment of any other costs necessary or appropriate to relet the Premises; plus (vi) at Landlord’s election, any other amounts in addition to or in lieu of the foregoing as may be permitted from time to time by the laws of the state where the Premises is situated.	
As used in Subsections 20.3(a) and (b) above, the “worth at the time of award” shall be computed by allowing interest at the maximum lawful rate. As used in Subsection 20.3(c) above, the “worth at the time of award” shall be computed by discounting such amount at the discount rate of the Federal Reserve Bank of San Francisco at the time of award, plus one percent (1%).
20.4 Definition of Rent. The term “Rent” shall be deemed to be the MMR, Additional Rent, and all other sums required to be paid by Tenant pursuant to the terms of this Agreement, including after-accruing sums. All sums, for the purpose of calculating any amount due under the provisions of Sections 20.2(b) and 20.2(c) above, shall be computed on the basis of the average monthly amount accruing during the immediately preceding six (6) month period, except that if it becomes necessary to compute these sums before a six (6) month period has elapsed during the Term, then these sums shall be computed on the basis of the average monthly amount accruing during the shorter period.
20.5 Non-Monetary Defaults.
 
 	(a)	Notwithstanding any other provision of this Article, if the default complained of, other than a default for the payment of monies, cannot be cured within the period requiring curing as specified in Landlord’s written notice of default, then the default shall be deemed to be cured if Tenant, within the notice period, shall have commenced the curing of the default and shall thereafter diligently prosecute the same to completion, so long as (i) such cure is fully completed within one hundred twenty (120) days after the date that Landlord serves written notice to Tenant of the incident constituting the breach of this Agreement, and (ii) the continuance of which for the period required for cure will not subject Landlord or any Mortgagee to prosecution for a crime, termination or foreclosure of any Mortgage, damage to the Premises or other property, or liability for potential injury or other harm to persons or property.	
 
 	(b)	In addition, Landlord shall have the right, but not the obligation, to perform on Tenant’s behalf any action necessary to cure a default by Tenant hereunder. However, such action by Landlord shall not cure Tenant’s default under this Agreement. Landlord shall charge Tenant a sum equal to the full cost of Landlord’s action plus an administrative fee of ten percent (10%) of such aggregate cost. Tenant’s failure to pay such charge within five (5) days after Landlord’s written demand therefor shall be a separate default under this Agreement, but Tenant’s payment of such charge within such five (5) day period shall cure the underlying default for which such costs were incurred by Landlord.	
20.6 Default Interest. In addition to any other remedies Landlord may have under this Agreement, and without reducing or adversely affecting any of Landlord’s rights and remedies under this Article 20, if any Rental or other amounts payable hereunder by Tenant to Landlord are not paid within ten (10) days after demand therefore, the same shall bear interest at the annual rate of fifteen percent (15%) or the maximum rate permitted by law, whichever is less (the “Default Rate”), calculated monthly from the due date thereof until paid, and the amount of such interest shall be included as Additional Rent.
ARTICLE 21
DEFAULTS BY LANDLORD
21.1 Failure To Perform. If Landlord fails to perform any of the covenants, provisions, or conditions contained in this Agreement on its part to be performed within thirty (30) days after Tenant’s written notice of default to Landlord (or if more than thirty (30) days shall be required because of the nature of the default, if Landlord shall fail to promptly commence performance within such thirty (30) day period and thereafter proceed diligently to cure the default), then Landlord shall be liable to Tenant for damages sustained by Tenant as a direct result of
 
Page 15

Landlord’s breach as described below but Tenant shall not be entitled to terminate this Agreement as a result thereof or to set off any such damages against Rent otherwise due Landlord. For purposes of this Agreement, damages sustained as a direct result of Landlord’s breach shall only include the following: (a) the actual costs of replacement, repair, or restoration of Tenant’s tangible property or the tangible property of third parties for which Tenant is responsible, to the extent the damage or destruction of such tangible property occurred as a direct result of Landlord’s breach; and (b) actual damages awarded to third parties by courts of competent jurisdiction against Tenant but only to the extent such damages are directly attributable to Landlord’s breach; and all other consequential damages (including, but not limited to, damages for lost profits) are hereby expressly waived by Tenant and shall not be recoverable against Landlord. Notwithstanding anything to the contrary elsewhere in this Agreement, (i) Tenant shall be barred from asserting any claim or demand against Landlord hereunder unless Tenant commences an action thereon within six (6) months after the date of the action, omission, or event to which the claim or demand relates, and (ii) Landlord shall not be liable to Tenant for any aggregate amount greater than the value of Landlord’s interest in the Premises less the sum of all liens recorded against Landlord’s interest in the Premises from time to time.
21.2 Cure by Assignee. If any part of the Premises is at any time subject to a mortgage or a deed of trust and this Agreement or the Rental due from Tenant hereunder is assigned to a mortgagee, trustee, or beneficiary (called “Assignee” for purposes of this Article only) and Tenant is given written notice of the assignment, including the address of Assignee, then Tenant shall give written notice of any default by Landlord to Assignee simultaneously with giving such notice to Landlord, specifying the default in reasonable detail and affording Assignee thirty (30) days beyond Landlord’s cure period provided in Section 21.1 to itself cure, or commence to cure, such default(s). Tenant further agrees not to invoke any of its remedies under this Agreement until said thirty (30) days have elapsed, or during any period that such Assignee is proceeding to cure such default with due diligence, or is taking steps with due diligence to obtain the legal right to enter the Premises or adjoining property to cure the default. If and when Assignee has made performance on behalf of Landlord, the default shall be deemed cured. It is understood that the Assignee shall have the right, but not the obligation, to cure any default on the part of Landlord. Tenant agrees that if an Assignee shall succeed to the interest of Landlord under this Agreement, neither the Assignee nor its successors or assigns shall be: liable for any prior act or omission of Landlord; subject to any claims, offsets, credits or defenses which Tenant might have against any prior landlord (including Landlord); or bound by any assignment (except as otherwise expressly permitted hereunder), surrender, release, waiver, amendment or modification of this Agreement made without such Assignee’s prior written consent; or obligated to make any payment to Tenant or liable for refund of all or any part of any security deposit or other prepaid charge to Tenant held by Landlord for any purpose unless the Assignee shall have come into exclusive possession of such deposit or charge. In addition, if an Assignee shall succeed to the interest of Landlord under this Agreement, the Assignee shall have no obligation, nor incur any liability, beyond its then equity interest, if any, in the Premises.
ARTICLE 22
ASSIGNMENT AND SUBLETTING
22.1 No Assignment Without Consent. Tenant shall not transfer, assign, sublet, enter into license or concession agreements with respect to any portion of the Premises, or hypothecate this Agreement or Tenant’s interest in and to the Premises in whole or in part, or otherwise permit occupancy of all or any part of the Premises by anyone with, through or under it, without first procuring the written consent of Landlord, which may be withheld in Landlord’s sole discretion. Any attempt at a transfer shall be null and void and confer no rights upon a 3rd person. These prohibitions shall not be construed to refer to events occurring by operation of law, legal process, receivership, bankruptcy, issuance of stock to the public, or otherwise. For purposes of this Article 22, a transfer of more than 50% of the voting ownership interests of Tenant in one or a series of related transactions shall be deemed to be an assignment of this Agreement.
Anything in this Article 22 to the contrary notwithstanding, Tenant shall have the right, provided that Tenant is not in default beyond the applicable cure period, to assign or sublease all or any portion of this Agreement (i) to Tenant’s direct or remote corporate parent, (ii) to any subsidiary of Tenant or of Tenant’s direct or remote corporate parents, or (iii) to a successor to Tenant pursuant to a merger, consolidation, public offering, or a purchase of a majority of the assets or ownership interests of Tenant, without Landlord’s consent, provided that the following conditions are met:
 
 	(a)	that the proposed use is identical to Tenant’s use under this Agreement;	
 
 	(b)	that the proposed use will not violate competitive restriction clauses, if any;	
 
 	(c)	that total Rent payable to Landlord after such assignment or subletting will be not less than total Rent payable before such transfer, taking into account rent increases or any other factors applicable to the existing tenancy, so that Landlord does not suffer economic detriment resulting therefrom;	
 
 	(d)	that all provisions of this Agreement would apply to and be ratified by the proposed transferee;	
 
 	(e)	that regardless of whether such transfer of interest is denominated an assignment, sublease, or other conveyance, the obligations of Tenant pursuant to this Agreement shall not be reduced or released and Tenant shall guarantee and make good any and all obligations of the transferee arising out of this Agreement;	
 
 	(f)	that the proposed transferee is not less creditworthy than the Tenant; and.	
 
Page 16

 	(g)	that any surrender, cancellation, or other termination of this Agreement shall, at Landlord’s option, terminate any or all subtenancies or, alternately, act as an assignment to Landlord of Tenant’s interest in such subtenancies.	
Neither the transfer of Tenant’s stock to its employees pursuant to an employee stock ownership plan or other similar arrangement with one or more employees, or any transfer of Tenant’s stock by gift, bequest or inheritance shall be deemed to be a transfer of this Agreement or Tenant’s interest in the Premises requiring Landlord’s consent. Further, anything in this Article 22 to the contrary notwithstanding, Landlord acknowledges that Tenant may issue voting stock to the public through listing on a “national securities exchange” as defined in the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 or through trading on the Over-the-Counter Bulletin Board, and that such issuance and subsequent transfer of such shares and the transfer of any shares of Tenant’s shareholders in a public offering or on such exchange or Bulletin Board shall be permitted without Landlord’s consent.
Each transfer to which Landlord has consented shall be in writing, in a form reasonably satisfactory to Landlord and executed by the transferor and transferee. If Tenant entity changes in connection with a transfer, the transferee shall agree, in writing, to assume, be bound by and perform the covenants and conditions of this Agreement. Tenant shall deliver to Landlord a statement within 30 days after the end of each calendar year, and within 30 days after the expiration or earlier termination of the Term, specifying each transfer in effect during the period covered by the statement, as well as: (a) the date of the transfer document’s execution and delivery; (b) the square footage of the rentable area demised and the tenant; and (c) a computation in reasonable detail showing the rental amounts, if any, paid and payable by Tenant to Landlord for the transfer pursuant to this subsection. Tenant shall not be released from liability or relieved of its obligations, unless Landlord expressly agrees otherwise in writing. Except for transfers which do not require Landlord’ s consent, if the Minimum Annual Rent, or Additional Rent or other payment to be paid to Tenant from a transfer exceeds the Rent and Additional Rent Tenant is required to pay Landlord under this Agreement, then Tenant shall pay to Landlord 50% of the excess, less Tenant’s reasonable expenses for reletting, without prior demand, which shall be deemed Additional Rent.
Neither Tenant nor any other person having an interest in the possession, use, occupancy or utilization of the Premises shall enter into any lease, sublease, license, concession, assignment or other agreement for use, occupancy or utilization for space in the Premises which provides for rental or other payment for such use, occupancy, or utilization based in whole or in part on the net income or profits derived by any person from the part leased, used, occupied or utilized (other than an amount based on a fixed percentage or percentages of receipts or sales), and that any such proposed lease, sublease, license, concession, assignment or other agreement shall be absolutely void and ineffective as conveyance of any right or interest in the possession, use, occupancy or utilization of any part of the Premises.
22.2 No Consent to Subsequent Assignment. A consent to one (1) assignment, subletting, occupation, or use by any other person shall not be deemed to be a consent to any subsequent assignment, subletting, occupation, or use by another person. Any such assignment or subletting without such consent shall be void, and shall at the option of Landlord constitute a default under this Agreement.
22.3 Conditions to Consent. As a condition to Landlord’s prior written consent as provided for in this Article 22, (i) Tenant shall pay to Landlord a nonrefundable review fee of $500.00 plus Landlord’s reasonable legal and consultant fees and costs incurred due to the request to transfer, (ii) Tenant shall provide to Landlord such background, financial and other information as Landlord may request to evaluate the proposed transfer, (iii) the transferee(s) shall agree in writing to comply with and be bound by all of the terms, covenants, conditions, provisions and agreements of this Agreement, and (iv) Tenant shall deliver to Landlord, promptly after execution, an executed copy of each transfer instrument and an agreement of said compliance by each transferee. Tenant agrees, by way of example and without limitation, that it shall not be unreasonable for Landlord to withhold its consent to a proposed assignment or subletting if (a) Landlord determines that the proposed assignee’s or subtenant’s use of the Premises conflicts with Section 1.10 or conflicts with any other provision under this Agreement; (b) Landlord determines that the proposed assignment or subletting would breach a covenant, condition or restriction in any encumbrance, financing agreement or other agreement relating to the Premises or this Agreement; or (c) an Event of Default under Article 20 has occurred and is continuing at the time of Tenant’s request for Landlord’s consent, or as of the effective date of such assignment or subletting.
22.4 No Release. Regardless of Landlord’s consent (or in circumstances where no consent may be required pursuant to Section 22.1 above), no transfer under this Article 22 by Tenant shall release or discharge Tenant from its obligations or liability under this Agreement. This Agreement shall bind any assignee, transferee or subtenant jointly with Tenant.
ARTICLE 23
BROKERS
Intentionally omitted.
 
Page 17

ARTICLE 24
HAZARDOUS SUBSTANCES
The term “Hazardous Substances,” as used in this Agreement, shall mean (a) all chemicals, materials, or substances, whether gaseous, solid or liquid, for which the storage, handling, generation, treatment, disposal, discharge, release, transportation, or clean-up of, are subject to any federal, state, or local laws, regulations, or policies in effect during the Term of this Agreement (collectively, “Hazardous Substance Laws”), and (b) all flammables, explosives, radioactive materials, asbestos and other carcinogens, chlorinated biphenyls (PCB’s), pesticides, chemicals known to cause reproductive toxicity, petroleum and petroleum by-products and derivatives, whether or not such substances are subject to regulation under Hazardous Substance Laws. The Hazardous Substance Laws include, without limitation, the Resource Conservation and Recovery Act (RCRA), Comprehensive Environmental Response, Compensation and Liability Act (CERCLA), Standard Amendments and Reauthorization Act (SARA), Emergency Planning and Community Right-To-Know Act (SARA Title III), Federal Clean Water Act, Federal Clean Air Act, Federal Occupational Safety and Health Act (Fed/OSHA), Toxic Substances Control Act (TSCA), Hazardous Substances Act (HSA), California Hazardous Waste Control Law, Hazardous Materials Release Response Plans and Inventory Law, California Underground Storage of Hazardous Substances Law, Aboveground Petroleum Storage Act, California Occupational, Safety, and Health Act (Cal/OSHA), Safe Drinking Water and Toxic Enforcement Act (Proposition 65), Carpenter-Presley-Tanner Hazardous Substance Account Act, the Porter-Cologne Water Quality Act and any rules promulgated by the Southern California Air Quality Management District (SCAQMD) or other governmental agencies controlling or regulating toxic substances in the air.
24.1 Tenant’s Restrictions. Tenant shall not cause or permit to occur:
 
 	(a)	Any violation of any Hazardous Substance Laws or any federal, state, or local law, ordinance, or regulation now or hereafter enacted, related to environmental conditions on, under, or about the Premises, or arising from Tenant’s use or occupancy of the Premises, including, but not limited to, soil and ground water conditions; or	
 
 	(b)	The use, generation, release, manufacture, refining, production, processing, handling, treating, storage, or disposal of any Hazardous Substance on, under, or about the Premises, or the transportation to or from the Premises of any Hazardous Substance. Tenant acknowledges and agrees that any disposal, release, or discharge of Hazardous Substances in, on, or under the Premises shall be in and of itself an unreasonable use of the Premises beyond the scope of any permissible use of the Premises.	
24.2 Environmental Clean-up.
 
 	(a)	Tenant shall, at Tenant’s own expense, comply with all Hazardous Substance Laws and laws and regulations now effective or hereinafter enacted regulating the use, generation, storage, notification, transportation, release, or disposal of Hazardous Substances.	
 
 	(b)	Tenant shall, at Tenant’s own expense, make all submissions to, provide all information required by, and comply with all requirements of all governmental agencies under the Hazardous Substance Laws.	
 
 	(c)	Tenant shall provide Landlord with written notification of any spill, release or other discharge of Hazardous Substances at, on or near the Premises within twenty four (24) hours of such event.	
 
 	(d)	Should any governmental agency or any third party demand that a cleanup plan be prepared and that a cleanup be undertaken because of any disposal, discharge, or release of Hazardous Substances that occurs during the term of this Agreement, at or from the Premises, or which arises at any time from Tenant’s use or occupancy of the Premises, then Tenant shall, at Tenant’s own expense, prepare and submit the required clean-up plans and all related bonds and other financial assurances; and Tenant shall carry out all such cleanup plans and clean-up until completed to the satisfaction of the applicable governmental agency; provided, that any such clean-up shall, at a minimum, return the Premises to the condition existing before the disposal, discharge, or release of the Hazardous Substances. Without limiting the foregoing, Tenant shall immediately remedy any violation of any of the Hazardous Substance Laws by Tenant or otherwise at or from the Premises during the Term at Tenant’s sole cost and expense, including repairing any damage to the Premises or other property caused by such violation. Tenant’s clean-up of any such disposal, discharge, or release, or Tenant’s remediation of any violation of the Hazardous Substance Laws, shall not preclude Landlord from, nor be in lieu of, the exercise by Landlord of any remedies available to Landlord for Tenant’s breach of this Agreement, including termination of this Agreement.	
 
 	(e)	Tenant shall promptly provide all information regarding the use, generation, release, manufacture, refining, production, processing, handling, treating, storage, disposal or transportation of Hazardous Substances that is required by Landlord. If Tenant fails to fulfill any duty imposed under this Section within a reasonable time, Landlord may, but shall not be required to, do so; and in such case, Tenant shall cooperate with Landlord in order to prepare all documents Landlord deems necessary or appropriate to determine the applicability of the Hazardous Substance Laws to the Premises and Tenant’s use thereof, and for compliance therewith, and Tenant shall execute all documents promptly upon Landlord’s request. No such action by Landlord and no attempt made by Landlord to mitigate damages under any Hazardous Substance Laws shall constitute a waiver of any of Tenant’s obligations under this Section.	
 
Page 18

 	(f)	Tenant shall provide Landlord, at Tenant’s sole cost and expense, copies of all correspondence with any governmental agency concerning Hazardous Substances promptly upon sending or receiving such correspondence. For purposes of this subsection, “correspondence” shall include any clean-up plans or other submittals made by Tenant to a governmental agency or any notice or other communication received from a governmental agency.	
 
 	(g)	Without limiting any other rights of Landlord under this Agreement to inspect or otherwise enter the Premises, Tenant shall permit Landlord and Landlord’s agents, employees, contractors, and/or consultants to enter the Premises during regular business hours for the purposes of inspecting the Premises to insure that Tenant is complying with the Hazardous Substance Laws and the terms of this Article 24. Such inspection may, but shall not be required to, include, without limitation, any sampling and/or testing of soil or of any materials or substances on the Premises deemed necessary by Landlord. Notwithstanding the foregoing, Landlord may, but shall not be required to, enter the Premises at any time to stop the disposal, discharge, or release of any Hazardous Substances in violation of the Hazardous Substance Laws. No such inspection by Landlord shall in any way whatsoever limit, restrict, or otherwise adversely affect any right or remedy Landlord may otherwise have against Tenant under this Agreement, including, without limitation, any right or remedy provided in Article 21.1 or the indemnity provided in Section 24.3 below.	
24.3 Tenant’s Indemnity. Tenant hereby indemnifies, defends, and holds harmless Landlord, the Landlord’s property manager, their respective agents and employees, and any lender or encumbrancer of all or part of the Premises and their respective officers, directors, beneficiaries, shareholders, members, partners, agents, affiliates, joint venturers, related and affiliated groups or entities, and employees from all fines, suits, procedures, claims, liabilities, and actions of every kind, and all costs associated therewith (including attorneys’ and consultants’ fees) arising out of or in any way connected with any deposit, spill, discharge, or other release of Hazardous Substances that occurs during the term, at or from the Premises, or which arises at any time from Tenant’s use or occupancy of the Premises, or from Tenant’s failure to provide all information, make all submissions, and take all steps required by all governmental agencies under the Hazardous Substance Laws and all other environmental laws; except that Tenant shall not be liable for claims resulting from the sole active negligence or sole willful misconduct of Landlord, another party indemnified hereunder, or the agents, servants, or employees of Landlord or another indemnified party.
24.4 Survival. Tenant’s obligations and liabilities (including, without limitation, indemnities under this Article 24 shall survive the expiration of this Agreement. Nothing in this Article 24 (including, without limitation, those provisions enumerating the rights of Landlord and any action, or failure to act, thereunder) shall be deemed to be an approval or acquiescence by Landlord of any action or failure to act by Tenant in violation of any Hazardous Substance Law.
24.5 Proposition 65 Disclosure. The Premises contain chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. More information on specific exposure is available at www.prop65apt.org.
ARTICLE 25
GENERAL PROVISIONS
25.1 Plats and Riders. Clauses, plats, and riders, if any, signed by the Landlord and Tenant and endorsed on or affixed to this Agreement are a part hereof.
25.2 Waiver. The waiver by Landlord of any term, covenant, or condition herein contained shall not be deemed to be a waiver of such term, covenant, or condition on any subsequent breach of the same or any other term, covenant, or condition herein contained. The subsequent acceptance of Rental hereunder by Landlord shall not be deemed to be a waiver of any preceding breach by Tenant of any term, covenant, or condition of this Agreement other than the failure of Tenant to pay the particular Rental so accepted, regardless of Landlord’s knowledge of such preceding breach at the time of the acceptance of such Rental.
25.3 Notices. Except as otherwise required by law, any notice, information, demand, request, reply, or other communication (the “Notice” for purposes of this Article only) required or permitted to be given under the provisions of this Agreement shall be given or served as set out herein. Such Notice shall be deemed sufficiently given if it is in writing and if it is (a) served in conformity with the provisions of California Code of Civil Procedure Section 1162 or any superseding statute, (b) deposited in the United States mail, certified, return receipt requested, postage prepaid or (c) sent by Express Mail, or other similar overnight service, provided proof of service is available as an ordinary business record of such overnight service. All Notices shall be addressed to the parties at the addresses set forth below their signatures on the signature page hereof. Any Notice personally served shall be effective as of the date of service. Any Notice sent by mail shall be deemed given as of the earlier of (i) actual receipt or (ii) two (2) business days following the date of deposit in the mail. Any Notice sent by Express Mail, or as otherwise provided in clause (c), shall be deemed given upon the date set forth on the proof of delivery. Either party may, by written Notice to the other in the manner specified herein, specify an address within the state where the Premises is located for Notices, for payments and reports, in lieu of the address set forth on the signature page hereof.
25.4 Obligation of Tenants and Agents. If there be more than one Tenant, the obligations hereunder imposed upon Tenants shall be joint and several, and each Tenant or Tenant’s representative signing this Agreement warrants and agrees that each Tenant is the agent of, and has authority to bind, every other Tenant. If Tenant is
 
Page 19

a business entity, each individual executing this Agreement on behalf of such entity represents he or she is duly empowered and authorized to execute this Agreement on behalf of such entity.
25.5 Marginal Headings. The marginal headings and Article titles to the Articles of this Agreement are not a part of this Agreement and shall have no effect upon the construction or interpretation of any part hereof.
25.6 Time. Time is of the essence of this Agreement and each and all of its provisions in which performance is a factor.
25.7 Successors and Assigns. The covenants and conditions herein contained, subject to the provisions as to assignment, apply to and bind the heirs, successors, executors, administrators, and assigns of the parties hereto.
25.8 Recordation. Neither Landlord nor Tenant shall record this Agreement or a short form memorandum hereof without the prior written consent of the Landlord.
25.9 Prior Agreements. This Agreement contains all of the agreements of the parties hereto with respect to any matter covered or mentioned in this Agreement, and no prior agreements or understanding pertaining to any such matters shall be effective for any purpose. No provision of this Agreement may be amended or added to except by an agreement in writing signed by the parties hereto or their respective successors in interest.
25.10 Inability to Perform. This Agreement and the obligations of Tenant hereunder shall not be affected or impaired because Landlord is unable to fulfill any of its obligations hereunder or is delayed in doing so, if such inability or delay is caused by reason of strike, labor troubles, inclement weather, acts of God, or any other cause beyond the reasonable control of Landlord.
25.11 Attorneys’ Fees. In the event that at any time after the date of execution of this Agreement, either Landlord or Tenant shall institute any action or proceeding against the other relating to the provisions of this Agreement, or to any default hereunder, the party not prevailing in the action or proceeding shall reimburse the prevailing party for the reasonable expenses of its attorneys’ fees (including charges of in-house counsel) and all costs or disbursements incurred therein by the prevailing party including, without limitation, any fees, costs, or disbursements incurred on any appeal from the action or proceeding.
25.12 Sale of Premises by Landlord. In the event of any sale of the Building, Landlord shall be and is hereby entirely freed and relieved of all liability under any and all of its covenants and obligations contained in or derived from this Agreement arising out of any act, occurrence, or omission occurring after the consummation of such sale; and the purchaser at such sale or any subsequent sale of the Premises shall be deemed, without any further agreement between the parties or their successors in interest or between the parties and any such purchaser, to have assumed and agreed to carry out any and all of the covenants and obligations of Landlord under this Agreement.
25.13 Subordination, Attornment. Tenant shall, upon Landlord’s request, subordinate this Agreement to any mortgage or deed of trust placed by Landlord upon the Premises, or the Building; provided, that such mortgage or deed of trust, by its terms or by separate written agreement with Tenant, provides that if Tenant is not then in default under this Agreement past the applicable cure period, this Agreement shall not terminate as a result of the foreclosure of such mortgage or deed of trust, and Tenant’s rights under this Agreement shall continue in full force and effect and Tenant’s possession of the Premises shall be undisturbed except in accordance with the provisions of this Agreement. Tenant will, upon request of the holder of the mortgage or deed of trust, be a party to such an agreement, if such agreement does not materially alter or modify this Agreement, and will agree that if such holder of the mortgage or deed of trust succeeds to the interest of Landlord, Tenant will attorn to such holder of the mortgage or deed of trust (or successor-in-interest of the holder of the mortgage or deed of trust) as its landlord under the terms of this Agreement. In the event that the holder of a mortgage or deed of trust notifies Tenant of a default under the mortgage or deed of trust and demands that Tenant pay its rent and all other sums due under this Agreement to such holder or its assignee, Tenant shall honor such demand without inquiry and pay its rent and all other sums due under this Agreement directly to the holder, its assignee or as otherwise required pursuant to such notice and shall not thereby incur any obligation or liability to Landlord.
25.14 Severability. Any provision of this Agreement which shall prove to be invalid, void, or illegal shall in no way affect, impair, or invalidate any other provision hereof and such other provision shall remain in full force and effect.
25.15 Cumulative Remedies. No remedy or election hereunder shall be deemed exclusive but shall, wherever possible, be cumulative with all other remedies at law or in equity.
25.16 Easements. Landlord reserves the right to grant such easements, rights, or dedications as may be necessary or convenient, and Tenant agrees that its leasehold interest shall be subordinate to any such interests granted. Tenant shall execute any documents as may be required to effectuate the purposes of this Section.
25.17 Choice of Law. This Agreement shall be governed by the laws of the State of California.
25.18 Exhibits. Exhibits A and B are attached to and incorporated into this Agreement by reference.
25.19 Execution of Agreement - No Option: The submission of this Agreement to Tenant shall be for examination purposes only, and does not and shall not constitute a reservation of or option for Tenant to lease, or otherwise
 
Page 20

create any interest by Tenant in, the Premises. Execution of this Agreement by Tenant and return to Landlord shall not be binding upon Landlord notwithstanding any time interval, until Landlord has in fact executed and delivered this Agreement to Tenant.
25.20 Waiver of Jury Trial.
TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY LAW, LANDLORD AND TENANT WAIVE THE RIGHT TO A TRIAL BY JURY IN ANY ACTION, PROCEEDING, OR COUNTERCLAIM BASED UPON, OR RELATED TO, THE SUBJECT MATTER OF CLAIMS ARISING ONLY OUT OF THE NON-PAYMENT OF RENT AND ADDITIONAL CHARGES DUE PURSUANT TO THIS AGREEMENT. THIS WAIVER IS KNOWINGLY, INTENTIONALLY, AND VOLUNTARILY MADE BY TENANT AND TENANT ACKNOWLEDGES THAT NEITHER LANDLORD NOR ANY PERSON ACTING ON BEHALF OF LANDLORD HAS MADE ANY REPRESENTATIONS OF FACT TO INDUCE THIS WAIVER OF TRIAL BY JURY OR IN ANY WAY TO MODIFY OR NULLIFY ITS EFFECT. TENANT FURTHER ACKNOWLEDGES THAT IT HAS BEEN REPRESENTED (OR HAS HAD THE OPPORTUNITY TO BE REPRESENTED) IN THE SIGNING OF THIS AGREEMENT AND IN THE MAKING OF THIS WAIVER BY INDEPENDENT LEGAL COUNSEL, SELECTED OF ITS OWN FREE WILL, AND THAT IT HAS HAD THE OPPORTUNITY TO DISCUSS THIS WAIVER WITH COUNSEL. TENANT FURTHER ACKNOWLEDGES THAT IT HAS READ AND UNDERSTANDS THE MEANING AND RAMIFICATIONS OF THIS WAIVER PROVISION.
             Landlord’s Initials              Tenant’s Initials
Any disputes arising between Landlord and Tenant shall be subject to resolution in accordance with this Section 25.20. In the event of such a dispute, the parties shall first attempt to resolve the same through good faith direct discussions. In the event that either party determines that a dispute under this Agreement cannot be resolved by good faith direct discussions, then such dispute shall be resolved by judicial reference as provided for in Part 2, Title 8, Chapter 6 of the California Code of Civil Procedure (“Reference Proceeding”). In connection therewith, the parties agree as follows: (i) should the parties not be able to agree upon a referee, either party may make application to the Orange County Superior Court for the appointment thereof; (ii) Landlord and Tenant shall, initially, share equally the cost of the Reference Proceeding, which shall include the cost of the referee and, upon either party’s election, the cost of a certified shorthand reporter; and, (iii) the referee shall have the discretion to award the aforementioned costs to the prevailing party pursuant to Section 25.11 (Attorneys’ Fees) of this Agreement. Furthermore, the referee shall not have the power to award punitive damages nor any other damages against a party that are not expressly provided for in this Agreement. It is expressly understood and agreed that the provisions set forth in this Section 25.20 (relating to a Reference Proceeding) shall not apply to an unlawful detainer action.
ARTICLE 26
RULES AND REGULATIONS
26.1 No sign, placard, picture, advertisement, name, or notice shall be inscribed, displayed, printed, or affixed on or to any part of the outside or inside of the Building without the written consent of Landlord first had and obtained and Landlord shall have the right to remove any such sign, placard, picture, advertisement, name, or notice without notice to and at the expense of Tenant.
26.2 All approved signs or lettering on doors shall be printed, painted, affixed, or inscribed at the expense of Tenant by a person approved of by Landlord.
26.3 Tenant shall not place anything or allow anything to be placed near the glass of any window, door, partition, or wall which may appear unsightly from outside the Premises; provided, however, that Landlord may furnish and install a Building standard window covering at all exterior windows. Tenant shall not in any way deface the Premises or any part thereof. Tenant shall not, without prior written consent of Landlord, cause or otherwise sunscreen any window.
26.4 The sidewalks, halls, passages, exits, entrances, elevators, and stairways shall not be obstructed by Tenant or used by for any purpose other than for ingress and egress from the Premises.
26.5 The toilet rooms, urinals, wash bowls, and other apparatus shall not be used for any purpose other than that for which they were constructed and no foreign substance of any kind whatsoever shall be thrown therein and the expense of any breakage, stoppage, or damage resulting from the violation of this rule shall be borne by the tenant who, or whose employees, or invitees shall have caused it.
26.6 Tenant shall not overload the floor of the Premises.
26.7 No furniture, freight, or equipment outside the ordinary course of business shall be brought into the Building without prior notice to Landlord and all moving of the same into or out of the Building shall be done at such time and in such manner as Landlord reasonably shall designate. Landlord shall have the right to prescribe the weight, size, and position of all safes and other heavy equipment brought into the Building and also the times and manner of moving the same in and out of the Building. Safes or other heavy objects shall, if considered necessary by Landlord, stand on supports of such thickness as is necessary to distribute the weight properly. Landlord shall not be responsible for loss of or damage to any such safe or property from any cause and all damage done to the Building by moving or maintaining any such safe or other property shall be repaired at the expense of Tenant.
 
Page 21

26.8 Tenant shall not use, keep, or permit to be used or kept any foul or noxious gas or substance in the Premises, or permit or suffer the Premises to be occupied or used in a manner offensive or objectionable to Landlord or other occupants or neighbors of the Building by reason of noise, odors, and/or vibrations, or interfere in any way with other tenants, neighbors or those having business therein, nor shall any animals or birds be brought in or kept in or about the Premises or the Building.
26.9 The Premises or adjacent common areas may not be used for washing clothes, for lodging, or for any improper, objectionable, or immoral purposes.
26.10 Tenant shall not use or keep in the Premises or the Building any kerosene, gasoline, or inflammable or combustible fluid or material, or use any method of heating or air conditioning other than that supplied by Landlord or reasonably approved by Landlord.
26.11 Landlord shall direct electricians as to where and how telephone and telegraph wires are to be introduced. No boring or cutting for wires will be allowed without the consent of Landlord. The location of telephones, call boxes, and other office equipment affixed to the Premises shall be subject to the reasonable approval of Landlord.
26.12 On Saturdays, Sundays, and legal holidays, and on other days between the hours of 6:00 p.m. and 8:00 a.m. the following day, access to the Premises or to the halls, corridors, elevators, or stairways in the Building may be refused unless the person seeking access is known to the person or employee in charge of the Premises and has a pass or is properly identified. Landlord shall in no case be liable for damages for any error with regard to the admission or exclusion from the Premises of any person or persons. In case of invasion, mob, riot, public excitement, or other commotion, Landlord reserves the right to prevent access to the Premises during the continuance of the same by closing of the doors or otherwise, for the safety of the tenants and protection of property.
26.13 Landlord reserves the right to exclude or expel from the Premises any person who in the judgment of Landlord is intoxicated or under the influence of liquor or drugs, or who shall in any manner do any act in violation of any of the rules and regulations of the Premises.
26.14 Landlord shall have the right, exercisable without notice and without liability to Tenant, to change the name and street address of the Premises.
26.15 Tenant shall not disturb, solicit, or canvass any occupant of the Premises and shall cooperate to prevent same.
26.16 Without the written consent of Landlord, Tenant shall not use the name of the Premises in connection with or in promoting or advertising the business of Tenant except as Tenant’s address.
26.17 Landlord shall have the right to control and operate the public portions of the Premises and the public facilities and heating and air conditioning, as well as facilities furnished for the common use of the tenants, in such manner as it deems best for the benefit of the tenants generally.
26.18 Without the written consent of Landlord, Tenant shall not conduct any auction, fire sale, tent sale, going-out-of-business sale, or similar activity upon the Premises.
26.19 Smoking will only be permitted in designated areas and shall not be permitted with 30 feet of the Building entrances. IN NO EVENT MAY ANY SMOKING OCCUR WITHIN THE BUILDING.
26.20 Use of portable electric heaters and toasters are prohibited.
Remainder of Page Blank – Signatures Follow
 
Page 22

IN WITNESS WHEREOF, Landlord and Tenant have duly executed this Agreement on the day and year first above written.

“Landlord”
 
Amnet Holdings, LLC,
a California limited liability company
 
By:                                                                                 
        Hezy Shaked
        Manager	 	 	 	 	 	“Tenant”
 
World of Jeans & Tops,
a California corporation
 
By:                                                                                                              
        Daniel Griesemer
        President & CEO	
 
Page 23

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Article	  	Page	 	
Article 1 BASIC AGREEMENT PROVISIONS	  	 	2	  	
 	 	
Article 2 PREMISES	  	 	3	  	
 	 	
Article 3 TERM AND POSSESSION	  	 	3	  	
 	 	
Article 4 RENTAL	  	 	3	  	
 	 	
Article 5 SECURITY DEPOSIT	  	 	4	  	
 	 	
Article 6 POSSESSION AND QUIET ENJOYMENT	  	 	5	  	
 	 	
Article 7 SERVICES, ASSESSMENTS, RESERVES AND UTILITIES	  	 	5	  	
 	 	
Article 8 USE AND COMPLIANCE WITH THE LAW	  	 	6	  	
 	 	
Article 9 HOLD HARMLESS	  	 	6	  	
 	 	
Article 10 TENANT'S INSURANCE	  	 	7	  	
 	 	
Article 11 REPAIRS AND MAINTENANCE	  	 	9	  	
 	 	
Article 12 IMPROVEMENTS, ALTERATIONS, AND ADDITIONS	  	 	10	  	
 	 	
Article 13 LIENS	  	 	11	  	
 	 	
Article 14 RECONSTRUCTION	  	 	11	  	
 	 	
Article 15 ENTRY BY LANDLORD	  	 	12	  	
 	 	
Article 16 TAXES ON TENANT'S PROPERTY	  	 	12	  	
 	 	
Article 17 EMINENT DOMAIN	  	 	13	  	
 	 	
Article 18 ESTOPPEL CERTIFICATES	  	 	13	  	
 	 	
Article 19 FINANCIAL STATEMENTS	  	 	14	  	
 	 	
Article 20 DEFAULTS BY TENANT	  	 	14	  	
 	 	
Article 21 DEFAULTS BY LANDLORD	  	 	15	  	
 	 	
Article 22 ASSIGNMENT AND SUBLETTING	  	 	16	  	
 	 	
Article 23 BROKERS	  	 	17	  	
 	 	
Article 24 HAZARDOUS SUBSTANCES	  	 	18	  	
 	 	
Article 25 GENERAL PROVISIONS	  	 	19	  	
 	 	
Article 26 RULES AND REGULATIONS	  	 	21	  	

Exhibit 23.2
CONSENT OF INDEPENDENT REGISTERED PUBLIC ACCOUNTING FIRM
We consent to the use in this Amendment No. 3 to Registration Statement No. 333-175299 on Form S-1 of our report dated March 23, 2012 relating to the financial statements of World of Jeans & Tops dba Tilly’s, appearing in the Prospectus, which is part of this Registration Statement.
We also consent to the reference to us under the headings “Summary Consolidated Financial and Other Data,” “Selected Consolidated Financial and Other Data” and “Experts” in such Prospectus.
/s/ Deloitte & Touche LLP
Costa Mesa, California
March 23, 2012

Exhibit 23.3
CONSENT OF INDEPENDENT REGISTERED PUBLIC ACCOUNTING FIRM
We consent to the use in this Amendment No. 3 to Registration Statement No. 333-175299 on Form S-1 of our report dated March 23, 2012 relating to the statement of financial position of Tilly’s, Inc. appearing in the Prospectus, which is part of this Registration Statement.
We also consent to the reference to us under the heading “Experts” in such Prospectus.
/s/ Deloitte & Touche LLP
Costa Mesa, California
March 23, 2012